2020 Audi A6 24

Owner's Manual
2020 A6
Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technology and premium quality
equipment that a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that you read your Owner's Manual thoroughly
so that you quickly become acquainted with your Audi and make use of all of its features.
In addition to explaining how the different features work, we provide many useful tips and information
concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle, and how to maintain your vehicle's value. We also
give you useful tips and information on how to drive your vehicle more efficiently and in an environ-
mentally-friendly manner.
We hope you enjoy driving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motoring.
AUDI AG
A WARNING
Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or
off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals includ-
ing engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead,
which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize expo-
sure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as
necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and
wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing
your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.
ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
4K0012721BD
Table of contents
About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking «= s ss-ec «x ences ov cusee a 2 oe 46

Garage door opener..........---00 eee 46
SUMIMALY: ; « ss6% : osen ss sean cs poe s
NOD OO
QC CCeS Skis: si esis a 6 ores os ewe Lights and Vision................. 49
Cockpit... 2... ee eee eee eee Exterior lighting...................0. 49
Indicator lights overview...........0. Interior ligQhting ss =e aves sy cows so owas §2
ViSIOM a « 3 sees 2s oman 2 mena = HOR © oe 53
Display and operation............ Windshield wipers................05- 55
Instrument cluster............... Digital compass..............--.0000- 58
Instrument cluster overview...........
Loading a personal profile............. 13) Sitting correctly and safely...... 60
Operating. ........ 20.00. cece eee eee Correct passenger seating position...... 60
Adjusting the display................. 14 FrontS@ats:: 2 ss«s < = scws ¢ » sees + = eee e 60
Coolant temperature display........... 14 Steering wheel sie < «cries + eee ss oeree 63
Tachometer............. eee eee eee 15 Head restraints..................000. 64
OdOMELEF as + 2 ams < gay & = pemE se ROR « 15 Safety DEltS': < sews + x neue 3 e eas Fe Hae 65
Outside temperature display........... 15 Memory function . « scion ss cee ve ero ee 68
Engine oil temperature indicator....... 16 Airbag system... .. 2.6... eee eee eee 69
Boost indicator’: vos + 2 xeeg es meme a 2 oes 16 Child safety seats...............-000- 73
Vehicle functions « sisi ss em ee omen ees 16
Stowing and using............... 80
Touch displays.................... 18 POWEPFSOUICES csisu ¢ ¢ avons 8 Baws 2s Re 80
General touch display operation........ 18 Gup holders'. ¢ scr 2 + wen 2 = wee 2 oe een 80
Multi Media Interface................ 20 Storage and compartments............ 81
Luggage compartment............... 81
Head-up display.................. 26 ROOf FaGK:: « = seve x ¢ saws 2 & noes 2 8 ewe es 86
DeSGriPtionis << seorve so mses w + axocune & ovorene 26
Warm and cold.................65 88
Voice recognition system........ 27 Climate control system.............0- 88
General information................. 27 Steering wheel heating............... 91
Operating... 0... cece eee eee eee 27 Fluids in the A/C system. ............. 92
External voice operation.............. 28
DEIN): «wesc 3 seen 3 @ ares 6 vo eee 6 2 es 93
Global functions................. 29 Starting the vehicle.................. 93
Additional function buttons........... 29 WHER ATIVING ius s = eres s treme x 2 ees £2 94
DFiVe SYStEM sce 5s cesses 6 2 vase oo case sw 100
Starting and driving............. 30 Start/Stop system. ...........000000- 101
Personalization.................. 30 Brakes: « 5 saa,a 2 aauaa & = aauee @ 3 mawee & & Bane 102
30 Electromechanical parking brake....... 104
Special driving situations.............. 105
32
32 Driving dynamic.................. 108
36 Audi drivesselects. « cscas + 6 conan + « cneen + we 108
Luggage compartment lid............. 38 Suspension ....... 00.00 ese eee eee eee 109
Child safety lock sae < « see8 cs vena ee oes 43 St@Gritig « cas s+ mews ve mews ve Hees ee os 110
Power windowSiin: ss sew. 4 sve eo scares a 43
Panoramic glass roof................. 45
Table of contents
All wheel drive (quattro).............. Lid, PAC COMIMBCE 's. cesses 5 6 cise 6 v eseees wo one 177
Electronic Stabilization Control......... 112 General information................- 177
Audi connect Infotainment............ 177
Tratlerstowlinigg.. «eck
6 wecns 6 o aes £45 Using a Wi-Fi hotspot................ 178
Driving with atrailer................. 115 Audi connect Infotainment services..... 178
Audi connect vehicle control services.... 179
Assist systems................... 118 S@ttiNgS sess oo canoe + sen wv ween we Ra 181
Assist systems................... 118 Troubleshooting..............--.0005 182
General information. . 118
Surrounding area detection............ 119 Emergency call................... 183
Switching the systems on and off....... 121, OVERVIEW ovens « suse » 0 uncuem » 0 comes x 6 ene 183
Emergency call...................00. 183
Driving information.............. 123 Online roadside assistance............ 184
Speed warning system................ 12:3
Camera-based traffic sign recognition... 123 Navigation........................ 185
Traffic light information.............. 125 Opening navigation.................. 185
Lapitimeron + 3 ssa oo aeenvs o 6 seaeene & 6 sense 126 myAudi navigation................... 185
Night vision assist... ............000. 127 Entering adestination................ 186
Stopping route guidance.............. 190
Driver assistance................. 130 Mapes + 5 cscs 2 6 wren oo amma © 8 awn 8 ow 191
Cruise control system............00-5 130 Personal route assistance............. 193
Efficiency assist..............2--000. 131 Alternative routes.............2--00. 193
Adaptive cruise assist................ 134 Additional functions................. 194
Distance warning ..............00000. 143 Satellite map 195
Lane departure warning............... 144 Map update.... 196
Audi presense............-.22--000 146 Traffic information w. «sess
2 2 even as sore 197
Side assist... 0... eee cece eee eee 150 Options and settings................. 198
Exit warning ...........-.02.0 ese eeee 152
Intersection assistant................ 153 RAGIG:: «cas cs seus cs pemg 2 ¢ eww +o ee 201
EMergeneysassisti. «swe & wesaos a x wore e as 154 Opening the radio...............00.. 201
Radio functions................00055 202
Parking and maneuvering....... 156 Online radio's: ss sees = + ewes sv Hewes ee 205
INtroduction « & wesc 2 2 senses oe mame 2% eee 156 Options and settings..............00e 206
Parking system plus...............04. 156 Troubleshooting.............---000ee 208
Rearview camera and peripheral cameras. 158
Rear cross-traffic assist............00. 162 PROS wesc as soaen 6 3 sonweme 3 7 meen 6 eo 209
Generalinformation................. 209
Infotainment system............ 164 SD card redder’. «2223 is seaxserenes ees 209
Tele pAONnG.: s «cian 2 mwag sy eager 164 DVDidiiVe « sisi 5 2 sere 2 6 were 2 8 worm © ee 209
IMEROMUCHION « & cseece « « cavnwen ws x oezane % « onerens 164 Bluetooth audio player............... 210
Setup... ee eeeeee ee 164 Online Medias ¢ sis ¢ = eases 4s Haw a eee 211
Using the Audi phone box............. 166 Amazon’Alexains = «esis 2 a eee 2 wane 3 os 212
Using the:telephomesss << sisi « « cvsses + © a0 168 Multimedia connections............-. 212
MessageS ... 0... 0. cece eee eee 171 Playing media...............0--00005 213
SOttiNngS swiss & cawis + # ees + peewee s Hewes 174 Options and Settingsis« ¢ ¢ woos sy wawu aa 217
Instrumenticlustetivess so sssie 6 once a i ove 175 Supported media and file formats...... 219
4K0012721BD
Troubleshooting............-..000005 176 Troubleshooting............0-seee eee 220

Table of contents
Audi smartphone interface...... Z21, Customer information........... 289

Setup... eee eee ee eee 221 Data privacy..................000. 289
TrOuUBLESHOOtING wees « & wees « 2 eos so eee 222 Image recording............seeeeeees 289
Datamemoniesy. « s sscams sv sume ov ene a 0s 289
Additional settings.............. 223 Transmitted information.............. 290
System settingS.......0seeecceeveees 223
Connected devices ...... 0.0... 000 e eee 224 Accessories and technical
Legalinformation..................5 225 CHANGES... 1... eee eee eee 293
Warranty......... 00-000. e eee eee 293
Maintenance and Care........... 227 Audi Literature Shop..............00. 293
Checking and Filling............. 227 Driving in other countries............. 293,
Fuel... 2. cece eee eee eee eee 227 Maintenance, repairs, and technical
Refuelingjecs ss sees se ane + eeee § s peme 228 MOGIFIcAatIONS vase x x mem = x saw x 2 sue 293
Emissions control system...........4. 230 Accessories and parts................ 295
Engine compartment................. 231 Reporting Safety Defects.............. 295
ERGINGOtls seus 2 x seme « ¥ neue =e oRBER Fae 234 Declaration of compliance for
Cooling:system . « sscses v < ssesens vo eevee so ave 238 telecommunications equipment and
Brake fluid... 2... eee eee eee 240 electronic systems............---0000- 296
Electrical SySteMi wis ¢ scm ae mews eg ey 240
Battery: « & cess 6 6 ceva © 5 mews « wenn ¥ © oi 241 Wechinicaldata:... . secs. s wen es ews 298
Windshield washer system...........- 243 Identification data................00. 298
Service interval display............... 244 Vehicle dataiscs: = s xews 2s eens sp oes ye 298
Wheels ........
0... eee 245 Index... 0.2... eee 300
Wheels and Tires . . 245
Tire pressure monitoring system....... 263
Care and cleaning................ 266

General information................. 266
Car washess « siscica ea suasen a i wana # w auavars a a 266
Cleaning and care information......... 267
Taking your vehicle out of service....... 271
Do It Yourself .................... 272

Emergency assistance........... 272
General information..............0.. 272
Equipment.........-...00
2. cece eee 272
Tire Mobility’ Kit « sc ss ces scans
8 ees 272
Replacing wheels................-00. 274
Space-saving spare tire............... 278
Collapsible spare tire..............02. 278
JUITIP'SESPCING « cores s « weve « ¥ eerws & 2 cores 279
TOWING senses <2 seexsie s > costeine © « serene « o samenes 281
Fuses and bulbs.................. 284

FUSCSiercs i & accaans ao cena ooo mero wom ROI & 284
Bulbs. .... 0... eee eee eee eee eee 288
About this Owner's Manual
This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of

(@) For the sake of the environment
this model. It contains important information,
tips, suggestions, and warnings for using your ve- Text with this symbol contains information on
hicle. protecting the environment.
KEEP THIS GUIDE @) Tips

Keep this manual and any other applicable docu- Text with this symbol contains additional use-
ments in your vehicle at all times. This is espe- ful information.
cially important if you loan your vehicle to others
or sell it.
This owner's manual describes the equipment

range specified for this model at the time of
printing. Individual equipment options described
may only be available at a later date or may only
be offered in certain countries.
Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the section indicates the validity, for example
“Applies to: vehicles with speed warning sys-
tem”. Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is
also identified with an asterisk “*”.
The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

Some of the details in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

“rear”, are based on the vehicle's direction of
travel.
* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

ment
» The section continues on the next page.
=> A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a

section. Ifa page number is indicated, the
WARNING is located outside of the section.
ZA WARNING
Text with this symbol contains information
about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
rious personal injury or death.
@) Note
Text with this symbol contains information
about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
hicle.
4K0012721BD
Quick access
Quick access
Cockpit
Sw a
Fig. 1 Cockpit
Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

©OOOO
Central locking switch ........... 34 —CD/DVD drive ................ 209

Memory function buttons ........ 68 — Valet Parking function ......... 46
Vent @ Front passenger's airbag ........ 69
Lever for: Ra) Kneeairbag wos s ees
ys eee ves 69
— Turn signals and high beams .... 50 @ Depending on equipment, buttons
— High beam assistant .......... 50 for:
— Lane departure warning ........ 144 —drive select ...............0.. 108
—Lane guidance ............... 138 — Electronic Stabilization Control
Multifunction steering wheel with: (0 ee ee 113
©
— Horn he —Emergency flashers ...........

= Driver's:dirbag? » wees
s 2 wees 2 sae —Defrosting ..................
— Operating buttons ............ — Rear window defogger .........
Shift paddles: « « cwwws
« « savaxe w 0 von @ MMI On/Off button .............
Instrument cluster ............. @ Depending on equipment, buttons
OO©eCOS
Head-up display ............... for:
Windshield washer system lever .. — Parking aid, s : sean sy aca 3 2 coe

— Driver assistance systems ......
Upper display’ « = sees ¢ 2 cows ye ves
@ Depending on equipment:
Lower display .................
SCup holders: «i sisces sx cues eo an
Quick access
PESOGKED oe esciee vo acres vo asteame ww awe 80 With some indicator lights, messages may ap-
— Vehicle key holder pear and warning signals may sound. The indica-
@_ Depending on equipment: tor lights and messages may be covered by other
— Starting the engine when there is displays. To show them again, select the second
a Malfunction: « ¢ cee vs nee x 2 oe 94 tab for messages with the multifunction steering
wheel & page 13.
— Audi musicinterface .......... 212
— Audi phone box ............... 166 Some indicator lights in the display can display in
SSDicand reader’ so seein «owas we 209 several colors.
@9 Electromechanical parking brake
BIUEEOM simine = x soinsis « 0 oneens © o) meson « 104 A\ Central indicator light
@ Automatic transmission selector
If the A or N indicator light turns on, check
OS ee 95
the message in the instrument cluster.
@ [START ENGINE STOP] button .... 93
@3) Steering wheel adjustment ...... 63
Cea
@4 Lever for:
— Cruise control system ......... 130 The following indicator lights may be available,
— Adaptive cruise assist .......... 134 depending on the vehicle equipment:
@3) Connection port for the On Board Red indicator lights
Diagnostic System (OBD) ........ 289
Central indicator light
@8 Buttons for:
=> page 7,
-Lights ........ ccc eee 49 Instrument cluster
—All-weather lights ............ 49 => page 12
@) Hood release ...........0...0.. 232 Safety belt
Button for: => page 67
— Luggage compartment lid ...... 38
Engine start system
@9) Exterior mirror adjustment ...... 53 => page 94
69 Buttons for: Transmission
— Power windows .............. 43 => page 99
—Child safety lock .............. 43
Drive system
@) Tips => page 101,

Electrical system
Some the equipment listed here is only instal- => page 240
led in certain models or is available as an op-
Electromechanical parking brake
tion.
=> page 104
Indicator lights overview Electromechanical parking brake

=> page 105
Brake system
=> page 103, > page 105,
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
blink or turn on. They indicate functions or mal- => page 240
functions. Some warning and indicator lights Brake system
turn on when you switch the ignition on and must => page 103, > page 105,
turn off when the drive system is switched on or => page 240
4K0012721BD
while driving. Steering

=>page 110
Quick access
Steering lock Transmission

=> page 110 => page 99
Air suspension Drive system
=>page 110 => page 101
Electrical system Cooling system
=> page 240 => page 238
Engine start system
Engine oil level (MIN)
> page 94
=> page 235
Keys
Engine oil pressure
=> page 94
=> page 235
Cooling system
=> page 105
=> page 238
Brake system
Hood
=> page 103
=> page 233
Electronic Stabilization Control
Loose wheel warning
=> page 260 (ESC)
=> page 112
Night vision assist
=> page 128
(ESC)
Night vision assist => page 112
=> page 128
Distance warning (ESC)
=> page 143 > page 113
Steering intervention request Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
= page 139 =>page 114
Safe start monitor Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
=> page 141, => page 114
Driver intervention request Steering
=> page 141 =>page 110
Lane departure warning
Steering lock
=> page 144
=>page 110
All wheel drive
=> page 144
=>page 112
Audi pre sense
Suspension control
=> page 147,
=>page 110
Intersection assist
=> page 153 Air suspension
=> page 110
Yellow indicator lights
Engine speed limitation
Central indicator light >page 15
=> page 7
Tank system
Safety systems = page 229
=> page 70
Electrical system
= page 240
Quick access
Engine oil level (MIN) Adaptive cruise assist

>page 235 => page 142
Engine oil level (MAX) Steering intervention request
=> page 235 =>page 139, > page 145
Engine oil sensor Lane departure warning
=>page 235 =>page 145
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Distance warning
=> page 231 => page 143
Engine warm-up request Audi pre sense
>page 235 => page 149
Washer fluid level Emergency assist
=> page 243 => page 154
Windshield wipers Emergency call function

=> page 58 => page 184
Parking system plus
Other indicator lights
=>page 157
Rear safety belt
Tire pressure
=> page 67
=> page 263
Start/Stop system
Tire pressure
=> page 101
=> page 263
Hill descent assist
Loose wheel warning
=> page 107
=> page 260
Low beam headlight
Bulb failure indicator
=>page 49
=> page 52
Parking light
Adaptive light
= page 49
=> page 52
Turn signals
Light/rain sensor
=> page 50, > page 51
=> page 52, > page 58
Cruise control system
Door lock
=> page 130
=> page 34
Battery in vehicle key => page 130
=> page 38
Efficiency assist
Night vision assist => page 131
=>page 129
Efficiency assist
Intersection assistant => page 131
=> page 153
Efficiency assist
Side assist => page 131
> page 151;
Efficiency assist
Exit warning
=> page 131
=> page 152
Efficiency assist
4K0012721BD
Rear cross-traffic assist

=> page 131 >
=> page 162
Quick access
Efficiency assist Air suspension

=> page 131 =>page 110
Efficiency assist High beam assistant
=> page 131 => page 50
Efficiency assist Door lock
=> page 131 => page 34
Adaptive cruise assist Child safety lock
=> page 136 => page 43
Adaptive cruise assist
=> page 136
Adaptive cruise assist Speed warning system
=> page 136 = page 123
Adaptive cruise assist Speed warning system

=> page 136 => page 123
Adaptive cruise assist Camera-based traffic sign recog-

=> page 136 nition
=>page 124
Lane guidance for adaptive cruise
assist Night vision assist
=> page 136 =>page 129
=> page 144
cuss eS
High beams Cruise control system
=> page 50 => page 130
High beam assistant Intersection assistant

=> page 50 => page 153
Rear safety belt Side assist

=> page 67 =>page 151
Rear safety belt Distance warning

=> page 67 = page 143
Transmission Rear cross-traffic assist

=> page 99 => page 162
Convenience key Adaptive cruise assist

=> page 94 => page 142,
Efficiency assist
=> page 134
=>page 105
Adaptive cruise assist
= page 139
=> page 105
Lane guidance for adaptive cruise
Hill descent assist
assist
=> page 107
= page 136
Steering
=> page 110 => page 144
10
Quick access

>page 145
Audi pre sense
=>page 149
Emergency assist
=> page 154
4K0012721BD
11
Instrument cluster
3:50™
12/5/2019
10 mi
had
fete ee =
Teen be rela)
3:50 m / “an
PAW APA WA
4500mi
eRe
Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- (8) Right additional display with speed-
ing items may appear in the instrument cluster: ometer
@ Display ©) Left additional display with:
— Engine coolant temperature ~E. . . 14 SIGOAR vans oo inane ow amonans a seen we an 95
Left dial — Audi drive select mode ......... 108
—Tachometer ...............-- 15
Tab areai so cers. « 2 wens oe ceresss a @ say 13 A NS
Ceritralar@a cous seenneceeeuses 13 Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
If there is a severe malfunction in the instru-

Status line (one or two lines)
ment cluster, the display may turn off. The A
Right dial indicator light may also turn on. Stop the ve-
— Convenience display hicle safely. See an authorized Audi dealer or
— Speedometer authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
FuellevelMd ..............00005 229
12
Instrument cluster
Requirement: the driver's door must have been

@) Tips
opened and the ignition must not be switched
— The following pages primarily show illustra- on.
tions of the Audi virtual cockpit*. The ap-
pearance or the location of the items shown > Confirm the displayed profile @, or
may differ in an analog instrument cluster. > To load another profile, select and confirm
— You can select the units used for tempera- Switch profile (2).
ture, speed, and other measurements in the > Select and confirm the desired profile. The
Infotainment system > page 223. user-specific settings will load.
> To cancel the seat, mirror, and steering column
— Speeds are displayed in mph (miles per
adjustment, select Cancel.
hour) or km/h (kilometers per hour).
— If there is a malfunction in the instrument
cluster, DEF will appear in the trip odometer G) Tips
display. Have the malfunction corrected as For more information and usage options for
soon as possible. personal profiles, see > page 30.
— Certain instrument cluster content can also
be displayed in the head-up display* Operating
=> page 26.
al3]
— Certain settings are stored automatically in ig
hea
izIN
the active personal profile. fa
— Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument

cluster: When the lights are switched off 3:50™
and the ignition is switched on, the instru-
ment illumination (needles and gauges) will PTL Plh
switch on. The illumination for the gauges
reduces automatically and eventually turns Fig. 5 Instrument cluster: driver information system
off as brightness outside increases. This
function reminds the driver to turn the low
RAH-9206|
beams on at the appropriate time.
Loading a personal
profile
Welcome
Fig. 6 Left side of multifunction steering wheel
See eI
Elie) Information is organized within various tabs@)
OK in the instrument cluster. The tab contents are
SOT ceam cel ti C=y displayed in the central area (2).
Fig. 4 Instrument cluster: loading a personal profile
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
You can manage personal profiles in the MMI Selecting a tab
= page 30. Before driving, you can select your
> Press the </ > button () repeatedly until the
personal profile in the instrument cluster and ap-
desired tab is selected. >
4K0012721BD
ply customized vehicle settings, such as the seat

position.
13
Instrument cluster
Returning to functions at higher levels Adjusting the layout

Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
> Press the 5 button @).
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various lay-
Opening and closing the menu outs may be available.
> Press the [=] button ©. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Selecting and confirming a function SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Virtual
cockpit.
Requirement: a menu or list must be displayed. > To adjust the desired layout, press ().
> To select a function, turn the left thumbwheel
Adjusting the additional display
@ to the desired function. Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit
> To confirm a selection, press the left thumb-
wheel (2). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the addi-
tional displays that can be selected may vary.
Switching the view
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
> Press the VIEW button @). SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Virtual
cockpit > (Configure).
The following tabs may be available, depending
> Select the desired additional display.
on vehicle equipment:
Reducing the display
First tab Vehicle functions > page 16
Second tab | Driver messages (this is only dis- Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can
played if at least one indicator hide the central area in the instrument cluster.
light/message is being displayed) > Applies to: analog instrument cluster: Press the
Third tab Night vision assist (this is only dis- VIEW button on the multifunction steering
played if the night vision assist wheel.
has been activated) > page 127 > Applies to: Audi virtual cockpit: Select on the
Fourth tab | Radio > page 201 instrument cluster: vehicle functions tab >
button > Reduced display.
Media > page 213
Fifth tab Telephone > page 175
Coolant temperature
Sixth tab Navigation > page 185
display
Adjusting the display The coolant temperature display @ > page 12
only functions when the ignition is switched on.
To reduce the risk of engine damage, please ob-
serve the following notes about the temperature
ranges.
Cold range
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
on, the engine has not reached operating tem-
perature yet. Avoid high engine speeds, full accel-
Fig. 7 Upper display: adjusting the display
eration, and heavy engine loads.
Switching the view
Normal range
The engine has reached its operating tempera-
> Press the VIEW button to switch between the
ture once the LEDs up to the center of the gauge
default view @) and the enhanced view (@).
turn on. If the |_| indicator light in the
14
Instrument cluster
instrument cluster display turns on, the coolant

CG) Note
temperature is too high > page 238.
The needle in the tachometer may only be in
C) Note the red area of the gauge for a short period of
time before there is a risk of damaging the
— Auxiliary headlights and other accessories in
engine. The location where the red zone be-
front of the air intake impair the cooling ef-
gins varies depending on the engine.
fect of the coolant. This increases the risk of
the engine overheating during high outside
temperatures and heavy engine load. Odometer
— The front spoiler also helps to distribute
The trip odometer and odometer are displayed in
cooling air correctly while driving. If the the status line ©) > page 12.
spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
be impaired and the risk of the engine over- The trip odometer shows the distance driven
heating will increase. See an authorized since it was last reset. It can be used to measure
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- short distances. The odometer shows the total
cility for assistance. distance that the vehicle has been driven.
Resetting the trip odometer

Tachometer
> Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
The tachometer (2) > page 12 displays the engine tions tab > EJ button > Reset mi.
speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). The be-
ginning of the red zone in the tachometer indi- (i) Tips
cates the maximum permissible engine speed for Distances are displayed in mi (miles) or km
all gears once the engine has been broken in. Be- (kilometers).
fore reaching the red zone, you should shift into
the next higher gear, select the "D" or "S" selec-
tor lever position, or remove your foot from the
Outside temperature
accelerator pedal. display
Engine speed limitation The outside temperature is displayed in the sta-
tus line©) > page 12.
If the Ba indicator light turns on, the engine will
be automatically limited to the RPM displayed in If your vehicle is stationary or if you are driving at
the instrument cluster. This will protect the en- very low speeds, the temperature displayed in
gine components, for example during a cold start the instrument cluster may be slightly higher
or from overheating. than the actual temperature outside due to heat
radiating from the engine.
The engine speed limitation will be deactivated
once the engine has reached its normal operating At temperatures below 41 °F (+5 °C), a snowflake
temperature and you have released the accelera- symbol appears in front of the temperature dis-
tor pedal. play > A.
If the engine speed limitation was activated by Z\ WARNING

an engine control malfunction, the indicator
Do not assume the roads are free of ice based
light also turns on. Make sure the engine speed
on the outside temperature display. Be aware
does not go above the speed displayed, for exam-
that there may be ice on roads even when the
ple when downshifting. Drive to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im- outside temperature is around 41 °F (+5 °C)
4K0012721BD
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents.

mediately to have the malfunction corrected.
15
Instrument cluster
Engine oil temperature — Lap statistics > page 127
indicator
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit On-board computer
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine Resetting values to zero

oil temperature %% may be indicated by a bar in Requirement: the Consumption, Short-term
the instrument cluster. memory, or Long-term memory display must be
Requirement: the vehicle functions tab must be selected.
selected. > To reset the values in one of the memories to
> Switch to the enhanced view > page 14. zero, press and hold the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel for one sec-
When engine oil temperatures are low, the dis- ond, or
play --- °F (--- °C) appears in the instrument clus- > Select on the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
ter. The engine has reached its operating temper- tions tab > =| button > Reset mi.
ature when the engine oil temperature is be-
tween 176 °F (80 °C) and 248 °F (120 °C) under Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can call
normal driving conditions. The engine oil temper- up the following displays in the on-board com-
ature may be higher if there is heavy engine load puter one at a time by turning the left thumb-
and high temperatures outside. This is not a wheel on the multifunction steering wheel:
cause for concern as long as the = =>page 235 — Time and date > page 223
or Ed => page 235 indicator lights do not turn on. — Digital speedometer
— Average consumption > page 16
Boost indicator — Short-term memory overview
Applies to: vehicles with boost indicator
— Long-term memory overview
Depending on vehicle equipment, the current en- — Energy consumers > page 17
gine load (meaning the current boost pressure) — Driver assistance
may be indicated by a bar in the instrument clus- — Traffic sign recognition and traffic light infor-
ter. mation
Requirement: the vehicle functions tab must be Short-term memory and long-term memory
selected.
The short-term memory collects driving informa-
> Switch to the enhanced view > page 14. tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving within
Vehicle functions two hours after switching the ignition off, the
new values will be included when calculating the
current trip information.
The trip computer is displayed in the first tab of Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term
the driver information system. Additional vehicle memory is not erased automatically. You can se-
functions can be accessed depending on the vehi- lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
cle equipment. tion yourself.
> Press the £] button on the multifunction steer- Average consumption

ing wheel.
The current consumption can be shown using a
— On-board computer > page 16 bar graph. The average consumption stored in
— Reduced display > page 14 the short-term memory is also displayed. If the
— Reset trip odometer > page 15 bar is green, your vehicle is saving energy (for ex-
ample, using recuperation).
— Lap times > page 126
16
Instrument cluster
Energy consumers
The Energy consumers view lists other equip-
ment that is currently affecting fuel consump-
tion. The display shows up to three equipment
items. The equipment using the most power is
listed first. If more than three items using power
are switched on, the equipment that is currently
using the most power is displayed. A gauge also
shows the current total consumption of all other
equipment.
@ Tips
The date, time of day, and time and date for-
mat can be set in the Infotainment system
=> page 223.
4K0012721BD
17
Touch displays
Touch displa Accessing options

For some items, you can access additional op-
General touch display tions that are not directly visible.
operation
>» Press and hold an item until the associated op-
tions are displayed.
Applies to: touch displays
The touch display is controlled through the

touchscreen. Operation is very similar to operat- Applies to: touch displays
ing a smartphone.
All touch displays in the vehicle can be operated

with the gestures described in the following in-
formation.
@) Tips
Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu.
Fig. 10 Touch display: pressing and pulling
al)
Moving an item
You can position some items at any location on
the screen.
> Press and hold an item, and then use your fin-
ger to pull it to the desired location.
Pinching fingers together and pulling apar

Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing
Selecting a function or button

> Press the desired function or button.
Pressing and holding

Fig. 11 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

ing them apart
Zooming in and out on an item

> To increase the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers apart.
> To decrease the size of an item, touch it with
two fingers and pull your fingers together.
Fig. 9 Touch display: pressing and holding
18
Touch displays
tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Applies to: touch displays the screen
Fig. 12 Touch display: rotating

Fig. 14 Touch display: dragging away from the edge of the
Rotating the view or perspective screen
> Rotate the item using two fingers. Opening hidden menus
The E=] symbol indicates that there is a hidden
gging menu.
>» Use your finger to drag inward from the upper
or lower edge of the screen, or
> Press the =] button.
Closing hidden menus

> Press within the menu and drag it toward the
upper or lower edge of the screen.
celal elie l Lele maaal te y- Lay

Fig. 13 Touch display: @ dragging with one finger, @
dragging with two fingers This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
Scrolling or browsing through menus/lists functions.
> To scroll through menus and lists, swipe up-
Example of a path
ward or downward with one finger.
> To browse through menus and lists, swipe to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the right or left with one finger. SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
Tilting 3D displays Following the path

> Drag upward or downward with two fingers. > First, determine in which display the path
should be entered. In this example, it is the
MMI display.
>» Applies to MMI: To open the home screen,
press ().
> If the SETTINGS button is not displayed, use
your finger to swipe to the left or right until it
appears.
> Press the SETTINGS button.
4K0012721BD
19
Touch displays
> If the General button is not displayed, swipe Wine mela mel mela
toward the left or right with one finger until it
appears. Switching the MMI on or off
>» Press the General button. > To switch the MMI off, press and hold the
> If the Date & time button is not displayed, On/Off knob > page 29, fig. 21 until the up-
swipe upward or downward with one finger un- per display and all Infotainment system func-
tilit appears. tions are switched off.
> Press the Date & time button. > To switch the MMI on, press the On/Off knob.
Restarting the MMI

@) Tips
Ifa menu or symbol is in parentheses in the >» Press and hold the On/Off knob for at least 10
path, for example, (General) or (423), then it is seconds.
an optional menu item that does not need to Switching displays on or off
be used in every system.
> To switch the upper display off, press [Jon the
lower display.
> To switch the upper display on, touch the upper
You can adjust or turn off the MMI touch display display or press [Jon the lower display.
feedback. > To switch both displays on or off, press and hold
Co] on the lower display.
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > MMI.
Introduction
Possible settings:
You can display and operate Infotainment system
— Brightness and vehicle functions using both of the Multi Me-
— Touchscreen Feedback dia Interface (MMI) touch displays.
Configuration wizard
Multi Media Interface
After starting for the first time, the configuration
Airlie lia acoder) wizard helps you to set up the vehicle, for exam-
ple to set the desired system language and con-
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain-
nect a telephone.
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary. Al- > Follow the instructions in the display.
ways be prepared to stop operating the Infotain- > Applies to: MMI: To access the configuration
ment system in the interest of your safety and wizard at a later time, select on the home
the safety of other road users. screen: HELP > Configuration wizard.
ZA\ WARNING Tool tips
Only use the Infotainment system when road, Tool tips are displayed on the upper display after
traffic, weather, and visibility conditions per- starting for the first time. They introduce various
mit and always in a way that allows you to MMI functions to you.
maintain complete control over your vehicle. > Follow the instructions in the display.
> Applies to: MMI: To access the tool tips at a lat-
@ Tips er time, select on the home screen: SETTINGS
Certain functions are not available while driv- > Help > Show tool tips.
ing. > Applies to: MMI: To receive additional tool tips,
select on the home screen: HELP > Tool tips >
Basic information or Expert information.
20
Touch displays
Menus and symbols
i
ee
Prd Ceres eee)
) crt
F rn eS cd
Telos
&
COU SETTINGS
ny
Fig. 15 Upper/lower display: home screen
Label Description
Quick access bar Return to the home screen or open a menu quickly > page 21
|O
Displays existing notifications @ > page 22, status display

Status b
©
eee a => page 22, time

Display area Select a menu, apply settings, display content > page 22
Q|@/@|O|
Function bar Activate functions or access attached content > page 23

Shortcuts Using shortcuts > page 23
Climate control settings Adjust the climate control system settings > page 88
Description of common symbols Description

You can operate the default functions using the Open additional actions
symbols that follow. The symbols may be found Open additional information for
in any menu, depending on the context. the selected menu
Description
@) Tips
Go back one level
The following pages primarily show ILlustra-
Close the menu
tions of the upper display with the largest
Search for content possible screen size. The display or location of
Open explanations for a menu the items shown may vary depending on the
Open settings for the selected vehicle equipment.
menu
Open the submenu
Adjust the settings With quick access, you can return to the home
Set as favorite screen and quickly switch between four menus
Switch functions on or off that can be individually configured.
Switch functions on or off Returning to the home screen or opening a
4K0012721BD
Switch functions on or off menu quickly

> Press ( or one of the four buttons.
21
Touch displays
Configuring quick access Description

> Press and hold a button on the home screen There is a data connection. The bar indi-
display area or in the quick access bar. cates the signal strength of the data con-
> To move a button to the quick access bar, pull it nection. Data is being transmitted now.
from the display area to the quick access bar. There is a data connection. The bar indi-
> To adjust the placement of the buttons in the cates the signal strength of the data con-
quick access bar, pull them to the desired posi- nection. No data is being transmitted now.
tion in the bar.
A mobile device is connected. The bar indi-
> Press Done to complete the configuration.
cates the signal strength of the cell phone
connection.
@) Tips
There is no data connection.
®
The position of © cannot be adjusted.
An error occurred with the mobile device
@
connection to the MMI.
Display area
The personal profiles are switched on. The
You can freely change the location of the buttons digits 1 - 6 indicate which personal profile
on the home screen display area. © is currently active. The guest profile is ac-
tive if there are no digits.
Configuring the display area
A Bluetooth device is connected.
©®e
> Press and hold a button on the home screen Bluetooth is switched on, but no Bluetooth
display area. device is connected.
> To adjust the placement of the buttons, pull
Audio playback was interrupted.
them to the desired locations.
@|©
The audio source is muted.

> Press Done to complete the configuration.
Privacy settings are enabled. The additional
Switching between menu pages symbol indicates which privacy settings are
©
Ifa menu contains multiple menu pages, febatea iS currently activated > page 290.
displayed in the display area. The white bar
shows the location of the current menu page. Notification center
> To switch between menu pages, swipe your fin-
RAX-0013
ger to the right or Left. ll
reuse
Of OB On
Sear)
[P] You will be at your destination soon. Tap here to display parking spaces at
[RAZ-0782
eesti
Of of af Fig. 17 Upper display: notification center
Notifications can be displayed in the upper dis-

CO o8 of play. After a specified time, they will be hidden
and a corresponding symbol will appear in the
Fig. 16 Upper display: common symbols in the status bar
status bar (2) > page 21, fig. 15. In the notifica-
tion center, you can view these notifications @)
The symbols in the status bar show you informa-
> fig. 17 and apply quick settings @. >
tion at a glance, such as if a mobile device is con-
nected or if there is a data connection. The most
common symbols are listed in the table.
22
Touch displays
Using the notification center Symbol Description

> To open the notification center, pull the status Press: adjust sunshade
bar downward, or Press and hold: convenience
> Press the E=] button on the status bar. opening and closing
> To apply quick settings, press the respective
Press: shows settings for the
symbol (@).
head-up display
> To obtain additional information about a notifi-
cation, press it.
Press and hold: switches the
> To delete a notification, pull it toward the right head-up display on or off
edge of the screen. Press: switches the upper display
> If there are more than four notifications in the on or off
notification center, the older notifications will Press and hold: switches both dis-
be hidden. To display the older notifications, plays on or off
drag your finger upward on the screen.
Setting displayed content Syirelada the)
You can set whether some notifications should be By creating shortcuts, you have quick access to
displayed. various items, such as radio stations, frequently
used contacts, or vehicle settings.
> To set the displayed content, press &@, or
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: Adding shortcuts
SETTINGS > Notifications.
The «++ buttons in the upper display indicate, for
> Select and confirm which notifications should
example, if a selected radio station can be added
be displayed.
to the shortcuts. Depending on the context, you
Possible quick settings may also be able to add items from a list to the
shortcuts.
Symbol Description
> Press +++ or press and hold an item ina list.
Apply sound settings
>» Press Save as a shortcut. The selected item will
Open menu settings be added to the shortcuts on the lower display
Manage connected devices and displayed as a tile.
Manage personal profiles
Using shortcuts
Set date and time
> Press the oat (4) > page 21, fig. 15 button in the
= Set displayed content in the noti-
function bar on the lower screen. The saved
fication center
shortcuts will be displayed or hidden.
> To access the stored function, press the respec-
tive tile.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can op- Moving or deleting shortcuts
erate various functions in the function bar.
> Press and hold a shortcut on the lower display.
Description > To adjust the order of the shortcuts, drag a
Switch Start/Stop system on or shortcut to the desired location.
off > To delete a shortcut, press ®.
Switch hill descent assist on or off

Opens the garage door opener
4K0012721BD
function
23
Touch displays
amma ole)
[RAZ-0711
ieee ye ell
aie
les, CA, 90012
Pei
les, Los Feliz, CA, 90027
Prot)
(eer com es (eee a l¢y 2)
Pera
Fig. 18 Upper/lower display: text input
In the input fields of various menus, you can en- out having to move your finger over after writ-
ter letters, numbers and characters, for example ing a character. When you end the entry, the
to find an address in navigation. writing is interpreted by the system.
> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard: To enter
On the lower section of the screen, you can enter
text, press the buttons on the keyboard. De-
the text with handwriting or using the on-screen
pending on the usage context, you may also be
keyboard. The current text input is displayed on
able to swipe over the letters )).
the upper section of the screen @). Depending on
> Applies to: the on-screen keyboard with an in-
the context, word suggestions may be given
put language that uses accented characters: To
based on the characters that have been entered
enter accented characters (such as 4, ¢, fi, 6),
@ and a results list may be shown @).
press and hold a character that has accented
Opening text input versions available and select the desired ac-
cented character.
> Press in the input field @.
> Applies to: handwriting input: To enter a space,
Switching input languages drag a line from left to right in the input sec-
tion ©.
Requirement: multiple input languages must be
> To select a location in the text input, press on
defined in the MMI > page 25.
the desired location in the input field. You can
> To switch between the defined input languages, control the location more accurately using the
press the button @). displayed slider ©).
> To delete individual characters, press <I @), or
Switching the input methods
> Applies to: handwriting input: Drag a line from
> To switch between handwriting input or the on- right to left in the input section ©.
screen keyboard, press the button (7). > To delete multiple characters, press and hold
Entering text
> To delete all characters in a specific location,
> Applies to: handwriting input: To enter text, press and hold <1 @) and drag up to the desired
simply write in the input area using one finger location )), When released, the highlighted
©. You can write the separate characters next characters are deleted.
to each other or one on top of the other with-
D_ In certain countries.
24
Touch displays
Accepting suggested words or selecting

entries from the results list
> To accept a suggested word (2) or select an en-
try from the results list @), press on it.
> To display more content in the results list, drag
your finger upward or downward on the screen.
Setting the input language or keyboard

layout
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard > Keyboard.
> To define additional input languages, press the
© button.
> To change the keyboard layout for an input lan-
guage, press >. For example, you can select be-
tween QWERTZ and QWERTY.
4K0012721BD
25
Head-up display
Head-up display — For information on cleaning, see > table In-

terior cleaning on page 268.
Description — Certain settings are stored automatically in
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display the active personal profile.
The head-up display projects certain warnings or
selected information from the assist systems on
the windshield. The display appears within the
driver's field of vision.
Switching on and off

The Y button is located in the function bar on
the lower display > page 21.
> To switch the head-up display on or off, press

and hold the Y button.
Settings in the Infotainment system
SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display, or
> Press the Y button.
Possible settings:
— Picture rotation
— Brightness
— Display height: you can adjust the height of the
display. Sit in the correct seating position
=> page 60 and adjust the head-up display.
— Display contents: you can set which informa-
tion should be displayed. The display of certain
information and some of the red indicator
lights cannot be hidden.
® Note
To reduce the risk of scratches on the glass
covering the head-up display, do not place any
objects in the projection opening.
@ Tips
— Sunglasses with polarization filters and un-
favorable lighting conditions can impair visi-
bility of the display.
— An optimal display depends on the seat po-
sition and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
—A special windshield is needed for the head-
up display function.
26
Voice recognition system
Voice recognition system Operating

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system
General information
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system ELE (2
Pat) 5 ce
You can operate many functions in the vehicle Where is a
easily using voice commands. Connect >
Diala
coy n
Using the voice recognition system optimally ey
Os 4
Cog
> Speak clearly and distinctly at a normal volume.
Speak louder when driving faster. Fig. 19 Upper display: voice recognition system
» Emphasize the words in the commands evenly
and do not leave long pauses. Switching the voice recognition system on or
> Close the doors, the windows, and the sunroof* off
to reduce background noise. Make sure that Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
passengers are not speaking when you are giv- switched on. A system language supported by
ing a voice command. the voice recognition system must be set. There
> Do not direct the vents toward the hands-free must be no phone calls in progress and the park-
microphone, which is in the roof headliner near ing aid must not be active.
the front interior lights.
> Only the driver should speak to the system, be- > To switch the voice recognition system on,
cause the handsfree microphone is aimed to- briefly press the «€ button on the multifunction
ward this seating position. steering wheel, or depending on the context,
press w¢ in the upper display.
ZA WARNING > To switch the voice recognition system off,
press and hold the « button on the multifunc-
— Direct your full attention to driving. As the
tion steering wheel, or say or press Cancel (a).
driver, you have complete responsibility for
safety in traffic. Only use the functions in Using the voice recognition system
such a way that you always maintain com-
In the voice recognition system menu, possible
plete control over your vehicle in all traffic
commands or help settings are displayed for the
situations.
current dialog @).
— Do not use the voice recognition system in
emergencies because your voice may change > Say the desired command after the signal tone.
in stressful situations. The system may take > To receive additional help for the current dia-
longer to dial the number or may not be log, say or press Help (2).
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency > To pause voice recognition, say or press Pause
number manually. @. To reactivate voice recognition, press @)
again or briefly press the «€ button on the mul-
G) Tips tifunction steering wheel.
There are no voice guidance* prompts when a
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
dialog is active.
Allow commands during voice output. If the
function is switched on, you can simply say a
new command during a prompt.
Activating the online recognizer

Applies to: vehicles with online recognizer
4K0012721BD
You can activate the online recognizer for addi-

tional functions and to improve the results of >
27
Voice recognition system
voice recognition. A supported menu language Switching external voice operation on or off
must be selected. When there is an active Inter- Requirement: the ignition and the MMI must be
net connection, the spoken command is evaluat-
switched on. A mobile device must be connected
ed in the vehicle and online.
to the MMI with the Handsfree profile
> When you switch on the voice recognition sys- => page 164. The mobile device being connected
tem for the first time, a menu for the online must have voice control that can be controlled
recognizer opens. Or: externally. There must be no phone calls in prog-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: ress and the parking aid must not be active.
SETTINGS > General > Speech dialog system >
> To switch on the external voice operation, press
Consent to online speech recognizer. and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
> Read the licensing agreements and accept tion steering wheel.
them. > To switch off the external voice operation, press
Activating Amazon Alexa!) and hold the «€ button longer on the multifunc-
Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration tion steering wheel or press Cancel.
You can activate Amazon Alexa to access special Using external voice operation
additional functions. A supported menu lan-
> Say the desired command after the signal tone.
guage must be selected. A reduced number of
> To reactivate voice recognition when it is
commands are available during this.
paused, press the «¢ button briefly on the mul-
Requirement: you must be logged in to your tifunction steering wheel or press Resume.
myAudi account in the vehicle. The online recog-
nizer must be activated. (i) Tips
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: AUDI AG simply provides access to control
USER > Connect to Amazon Alexa. your mobile device with voice operation and
> Follow the instructions in the display. does not assume any responsibility for the
> After connecting successfully, turn on the voice content and commands within the external
recognition system as normal > page 27, voice control.
Switching the voice recognition system on or
off, say the activation word “Alexa”, and then
say the desired command.
() Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and
be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=@) in General information on page 177.
External voice operation

Applies to: vehicles with external speech dialog system
You can access and control the voice operation on

a connected mobile device through your vehicle.
2) AUDI AG provides access to services from third party pro-

viders. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, be-
cause that depends on the third party provider.
238
Global functions
Global functions Quick access steering wheel button

Depending on vehicle equipment, the button @)
Additional function
may provide quick access to various functions.
buttons
You can program the >K button with various func-
tions.
> To bring up the function that is currently set,

press the >K button.
> To perform the function that is currently set,
press and hold the >K button, or:
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
HICLE > Settings & Service > Steering wheel
button assignment.
» Select and confirm the desired function.
Fig. 20 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel
Switching the voice recognition system on or
off
w€ button @), see > page 27.
Using the telephone functions
button @, see > page 168.
ZA WARNING
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
Fig. 21 MMI On/Off knob with joystick function signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
Adjusting the volume times.
You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a
system message (for example, from the voice
recognition system) when the sound is playing.
> To increase or decrease the volume, turn the

right thumbwheel @) © fig. 20 upward or
downward, or turn the On/Off knob @) ° fig. 21
to the right or left.
> To mute, push the right thumbwheel or the
On/Off knob.
Selecting the previous/next track or station

> Press the l<J/ DDI button @ or briefly press
the On/Off knob to the Left or right.
Fast forward/rewind
> Press and hold the </>] button @, or
press the On/Off knob to the left or right until
the desired playback position is reached.
4K0012721BD
29
Personalization
Personalization Switching personal profiles off

— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
User
USER > © > Personal profiles.
oeCC le Ky The personal profiles are switched on at the fac-
Applies to: vehicles with personal profiles
tory. If you do not wish to use the personal pro-
You can store your customized settings in a per- files, you can switch the function off.
sonal profile. Specific settings are stored auto-
matically in the personal profile that is currently G) Tips
active. — Certain Infotainment and vehicle settings
(such as mirrors) may be stored, depending
Depending on the equipment, the profile being
on vehicle equipment. You can find addi-
used is assigned to the vehicle key currently in
tional information in the MMI. Select on the
use. The profile that was last active with the key
home screen: SETTINGS > General > Legal
is loaded when the vehicle is unlocked.
notes > About Audi connect.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: —The guest profile cannot be renamed.
USER. — When changing profiles, the new profile
settings are loaded in the vehicle.
Use various profiles to link them to specific vehi-
cle settings. — You can reset all personal profiles to the
factory default settings.
— Create your customized profile. This is helpful
in some situations, for example if multiple peo-
ple share the vehicle and each person would Applies to: vehicles with myAudi login
like to use his or her individual vehicle settings.
— Guest: the guest profile can be used to adjust Requirement: you must have successfully regis-
settings in the vehicle without changing the tered at my.audi.com.
other profiles.
Logging in from the vehicle
Applies to: MMI
Active profile
— Rename: you can rename your profile so that > Select on the home screen: USER > myAudi
you can recognize by name which settings are login.
stored. > Log in to myAudi in the vehicle using your e-
mail address and password.
— Copy: you can copy your profile. Select the loca-
tion where the profile will be copied or which To transfer existing destinations from the MMI to
profile should be overwritten. The settings will your myAudi account one time, confirm the sys-
be applied. tem prompts with Yes.
— Reset: you can reset your active profile to the
factory default settings. Automatic login
— Reload*: Requirement: the vehicle must be sta- You can select if and when an automatic login to
tionary and the ignition must be switched on. myAudi in the vehicle should occur.
You can reload your profile, for example if the
— Personal profile: Requirement: the personal
seat, mirror, and steering wheel settings could
not be applied when changing profiles. profile must be turned on and you must not be
logged in with the guest profile. Log in to
Profile selection myAudi in the vehicle. Follow the system in-
If you would like to change the profile, select an- structions and save your desired personal pro-
other profile from the list. file. You will then always be logged in automat-
ically when your personal profile is active.
30
Personalization
— Bluetooth device 1/Bluetooth device 2*: Re- Audi connect vehicle control services at my.audi.
quirement: after a Bluetooth device has been com.
paired with the MMI, you must be logged in to

Removing the key user
myAudi in the vehicle. Follow the system in-
structions and save the desired Bluetooth de- If you remove the key user, all other users and
vice. You will be automatically logged in when their authorizations will be deleted. It will no
your Bluetooth device is connected to the MMI, longer be possible to use the Audi connect vehi-
and automatically logged out when the Blue- cle control services, depending on the vehicle
tooth connection to your mobile device is dis- equipment.
connected.
Requirement: a key user must be set.
@ Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:

— For some Audi connect Infotainment serv- USER > User management > (Key user) > Re-
ices, you may also have to enter your myAu- move key user.
di access information when accessing serv-
ices in the MMI. @) Tips
— Regardless of the key user and additional — Depending on the country, you may be able
users, you can only connect one myAudi ac- to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
count to your vehicle. — Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
may be able to reset specific functions to
User management the factory default settings.
Applies to: vehicles with user management — Depending on the vehicle equipment, log-
ging into myAudi in the vehicle may not be
The vehicle owner must be set up as the key user
required to use Audi connect vehicle control
for some Audi connect vehicle control services,
services.
which depend on the vehicle equipment.
— If you sell your vehicle, remove the key user
Setting the key user and reset all settings to the factory set-
tings.
Requirement: a key user must not be set yet.
— Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
> To set a key user for the vehicle, you will need a may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
myAudi account. Register at my.audi.com. code.
> Add your vehicle at my.audi.com and then veri- — Pay attention to upper- and lower-case let-
fy your myAudi account using the verification ters when entering the vehicle code.
process that is provided. — If you do not have the 10-digit vehicle code,
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
USER > User management > (Key user) > Set ized Audi Service Facility.
key user.
> Applies to: MMI: Follow the system instructions
and enter the 10-digit vehicle code > page 36.
The key user is set. You have the rights to use
the Audi connect vehicle control services
=> page 179 that depend on vehicle equipment
as well as the ability to manage other vehicle
functions and any other users.
Managing additional users

4K0012721BD
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can

grant authorization for additional users to use
31
Opening and closing
Opening and closing Power closing*

When closing a door or the luggage compart-
Central locking ment lid, you only have to let it fall lightly into
erasure) the latch. It then closes automatically > A.
Automatic locking
ZA WARNING
If you unlock the vehicle but then do not open
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
any of the doors, the luggage compartment, or
off and take the key with you. This applies
the hood within a short period time, the vehicle
particularly when children remain in the ve-
locks again automatically. This feature prevents
hicle. Otherwise, children could start the ve-
the vehicle from being accidentally left unlocked
hicle or operate electrical equipment (such
for a long period of time.
as power windows), which increases the risk
of an accident. Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
— Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm
The Auto Lock function locks all doors and the
system: When the vehicle is locked from the
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
outside, no one - especially children - should
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). The ve-
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
hicle will unlock again if the unlock function in
can no longer be opened from the inside
the central locking switch is pressed, the “P” gear
= page 35, Anti-theft alarm system.
is engaged, or the ignition is switched off.
Locked doors make it more difficult for
emergency workers to enter the vehicle, You can open the doors individually from the in-
which puts lives at risk. side by pulling the door handle one time. To open
the rear doors individually, you must pull the
door handle twice.
In the event ofa crash with airbag deployment,

All doors and the luggage compartment lid can
the doors will also automatically unlock to allow
be centrally unlocked and locked at once. You can
access to the vehicle.
select in the MMI if the entire vehicle or only the
driver's door should unlock when unlocking the Unintentionally locking yourself out
vehicle > page 33. The turn signals flash twice
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
when you unlock the vehicle and flash once when
the luggage compartment lid are closed and
you lock the vehicle. If they do not flash when
there is no key in the vehicle. This reduces the
locking, check if all doors and lids are closed. risk of locking yourself out accidentally.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
The following features help to reduce the risk of
have different options for centrally unlocking and locking your vehicle key in the vehicle:
locking your vehicle.
— If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
— Vehicle key > page 37 be locked by pressing the @ button on the re-
— Sensors in the door handles > page 37 mote control key or by touching the locking
— Lock cylinder on the driver's door > page 35 sensor* on a door.
— Central locking switch inside > page 34 — If the vehicle key that was used most recently is
Vehicle key inside the luggage compartment, the luggage
compartment lid will automatically open again
The term “vehicle key” refers to the remote con- after it closes > ©.
trol key or convenience key*. The convenience — If the vehicle key that was last used is detected
key* is a remote control key with special func- inside the vehicle, then the vehicle cannot be
tions > page 37 and > page 93. locked from the outside > ©.
32
Opening and closing
ZA\ WARNING @) Tips

Follow the safety precautions > page 32. — Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!
Z\ WARNING —The LED in the driver's door rail blinks when
Applies to: vehicles with power closing you lock the vehicle. If the LED turns on for
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure that approximately 30 seconds after locking,
the area where the door is closing is clear there is a malfunction in the central locking
during the closing process. system. Have the problem corrected by an
— The closing process can be stopped at any authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
time by pulling on the outer or inner door Service Facility.
handle.
Setting the central locking system
@) Note
You can adjust the central locking system to your
The following applies when locking the vehi- preferences. The settings depend on the vehicle
cle: equipment.
— If the vehicle key that was last used is de-
tected inside the passenger compartment, > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
then the vehicle cannot be locked from the VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Central lock-
ing.
outside using the sensor. Take the vehicle
key with you and lock the vehicle again. Oth- Door unlocking
erwise, the vehicle will not be protected
—If you select All, all doors and the luggage
against unauthorized access.
compartment lid will be unlocked when unlock-
— If you try to lock the vehicle using the but-
ing the vehicle.
ton on the vehicle key while the front pas-
— If you select Driver's door, only the driver's
senger's or rear door is open, and you acci-
dentally place the vehicle key inside the pas- door will be unlocked. To unlock all doors and
senger compartment and close the door, the luggage compartment lid, press the &@ but-
the vehicle will lock at first. But if the key- ton on the vehicle key twice. In vehicles with a
less system detects a vehicle key inside the convenience key”, only the driver's door will un-
vehicle after it locks, then the vehicle will lock when you pull the driver's door handle. If
unlock again. The turn signals will flash sev- you pull another door handle, the entire vehicle
eral times to indicate this. If you do not will be unlocked.
open the vehicle to remove the vehicle key The entire vehicle will always be locked when you
within a brief period, then the vehicle will press the & button.
lock automatically. This prevents the vehicle
from being left unlocked for long periods of Long press to open windows
time. The vehicle key will then be locked in- You can select if all windows and the panoramic
side the vehicle. glass roof* should open using the vehicle key
— If the luggage compartment lid closes and => page 44, Convenience opening and closing. If
the system detects that the last vehicle key you press and hold the fj button on the vehicle
that was used is inside the luggage com- key, all of the windows and the panoramic glass
partment, then the luggage compartment roof* will close.
lid will open again. The turn signals will
flash several times to indicate this. The Disable rear lid handle
4K0012721BD
doors will lock. Always take the vehicle key You can select if the luggage compartment lid
with you, or unauthorized persons may be can open with the handle. If you activate this
able to enter the vehicle. function, the luggage compartment lid can only >
33
Opening and closing
be opened with the As button on the vehicle key — The LED in the central locking switch turns on
or in the driver's door. In vehicles with a conven- when all doors are closed and locked.
ience key*, you can still open the luggage com- — You can open the doors individually from the in-
partment lid using the handle if an authorized side by pulling the door handle one time. To
convenience key is detected > page 38. open the rear doors individually, you must pull
the door handle twice.
Fold mirrors
— In the event of a crash with airbag deployment,
You can select if the exterior mirrors automatical- the doors unlock automatically to allow access
ly fold in when locking. to the vehicle.
Tone when locking!) Z\ WARNING

You can select if an audio signal sounds when — Follow the safety precautions > page 32.
locking the vehicle.
— The central locking button works when the
Open with convenience key ignition is switched off.
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key — The central locking switch is inoperative
when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
You can deactivate the feature for unlocking us-
ing the sensor. The function for locking via the
sensor will still be enabled > page 37. Messages
@ Tips 3} Driver's door: malfunction! Shift to P before

leaving vehicle. See owner's manual
The settings are automatically stored and as-
signed to the active personal profile. There is a malfunction in the driver's door. Secure
the vehicle before exiting by selecting the “P” se-
lector lever position. Drive immediately to an au-
(eye ale dy Renae
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
2B Central locking: malfunction! See owner's

manual
There is a central locking malfunction. If the

doors cannot lock, you can emergency lock the
doors > page 35. Drive to an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility immedi-
ately to have the malfunction corrected.
Fig. 22 Driver's door: central locking switch B Door lock: opening while driving is only pos-
sible with the emergency release. See owner's
> To lock or unlock the vehicle, press the § or B
manual
button > /\.
It is not possible to power unlock the doors at
When locking the vehicle with the central locking speeds above approximately 9 mph (15 km/h). If
switch, the following applies: you must open doors at higher speeds in cases of
— The doors and the luggage compartment lid emergency, you can manually unlock the door by
cannot be opened from the outside for security forcefully pulling the door handle beyond its no-
reasons, for example, to reduce the risk of un- ticeable resistance two times. Then press the
authorized entry while stopped at a light. door handle back into its original position, if nec-
essary.
D This function is not available in all countries.
34
Opening and closing
Mechanically unlocking and locking the > Insert the mechanical key into the slot on the
doors inside and turn it all the way to the left (when
locking the right door), or to the right (when
If the central locking fails, you must unlock or
locking the left door).
lock the doors separately.
> Install the cap in the opening and close the
door.
[RAZ-0026|
Once the doors are closed, it is no longer possible
to open them from the outside. The front doors
can be opened from the inside by pulling the
door handle one time. The rear doors can be un-
locked from the inside by pulling the door handle
one time and then opened by pulling the door
handle again. If the vehicle is without power, the
doors can be unlocked from the inside by first
pulling the door handle beyond its noticeable re-
5
a
Ss
sistance. The doors can then can be opened by
2
<= pulling the handle again. If the child safety lock
go
a in one of the rear doors is activated, you must
first pull the door handle from the inside. Then
you can open the door from the outside.
ZA\ WARNING
Follow the safety precautions > page 32.
Fig. 24 Door: mechanically locking

Vea lela)
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm system
Unlocking or locking the driver's door with
the mechanical key If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle
> Remove the mechanical key > page 36. break-in, audio and visual warning signals are
> Insert the mechanical key into the slot under triggered. The anti-theft alarm system is switch-
the door handle and pry the cap off > fig. 23. ed on or off when locking or unlocking your vehi-
> To unlock the driver's door, turn the key to the cle. If the alarm is triggered, it will shut off auto-
open position in the direction of arrow @). matically after a certain amount of time.
> Pull firmly on the door handle to open the driv-
Switching the alarm off manually
er's door. The door handle swings out slightly
farther than normal. > To switch the alarm off, press the G button on
> To lock the driver's door, select the "P" position the vehicle key or switch the ignition on.
and turn the key once to the close position Depending on the vehicle equipment, the anti-
@°A. theft alarm system may have the following fea-
tures:
Locking the front passenger's door and rear
doors using the mechanical key Break-in security feature
The mechanical lock is located on the edge of the
The alarm will sound if there is a break-in at the
doors. It is only visible when the door is open.
doors, hood, and/or luggage compartment lid. >
> Remove the mechanical key > page 36.
4K0012721BD
> Remove the cap from the opening > fig. 24.
35
Opening and closing
Interior/towing protection monitor

The alarm will be triggered if there are move-
ments detected in the vehicle interior (for exam-
ple, by animals) or if there is a change in the vehi-
RAZ-0621
cle angle (for example, when the vehicle is being
towed).
You can prevent the alarm from being triggered

by deactivating the interior/towing protection
monitor.
Deactivating the interior/towing protection

monitor
There are the following options for deactivating Fig. 25 Your vehicle key set
the interior/towing protection monitor:
@ Vehicle key
> Press the & button on the vehicle key a second
You can unlock and lock your vehicle with the ve-
time within two seconds. Or
hicle key.
» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
Touch the sensor on the door handle a second @ Mechanical key and release button for
time within two seconds. Or mechanical key
> Turn the mechanical key in the door lock to the
A mechanical key is integrated in the vehicle key.
close position a second time within 2 seconds.
To remove it, press the release button and re-
If you lock the vehicle, then the interior/towing move the mechanical key.
protection monitor will stay off until the next
Using the mechanical key, you can:
time the vehicle is unlocked.
— Lock or unlock the glove compartment.
ZX WARNING — Manually unlock and lock the doors > page 35.
No one, especially children, should stay in the — Applies to: sedan with folding backrests: Lock-
vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
ing and unlocking the backrest > page 83.
cause the windows can no longer be opened — Unlock the luggage compartment lid using the
from the inside. Locked doors make it more emergency release > page 42.
difficult for emergency workers to enter the @ Key fob with vehicle code
vehicle, which puts lives at risk. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
(i) Tips Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the vehicle
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
The interior/towing protection monitor only control services* for your vehicle with this vehicle
functions correctly when the windows and the code. For additional information, see
panorama glass roof* are closed. => page 179. If a key fob is lost, contact an au-
Facility.
@ PANIC button
In an emergency, you can press the PANIC button
to trigger the alarm for the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
will turn on if you trigger the alarm.
36
Opening and closing
—To trigger the alarm, press the [PANIC] but- dio equipment). Always check if your vehicle
ton @) > fig. 25. is locked.
—To turn the alarm off, press the red [PANIC] but- — Applies to: MMI: You can view the number
ton again. of keys programmed to the vehicle by se-
lecting on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set-
Lost key/replacing a key
tings & Service > Vehicle information.
If a vehicle key is lost, contact an authorized Audi — For an explanation on conformity with the
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have FCC regulations in the United States and the
this vehicle key deactivated. It is important to Industry Canada regulations, see
bring all keys with you. => page 296.
If a key is lost, you should report it to your insur-
ance company. Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Electronic immobilizer
[RAZ-0025)
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized use of
the vehicle.
In some cases, it may not be possible to start the

vehicle if there is a vehicle key from a different
ar
vehicle manufacturer on the key chain.
Data in the vehicle key

When driving, service and maintenance-relevant Fig. 26 Door handle: sensor for locking
data is continuously stored in your vehicle key. An
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service You can unlock and lock your vehicle using either
Facility can read out this data and tell you about the buttons on the vehicle key or using the sen-
the work your vehicle needs. sors* in the door handles. The settings in the
MMI specify which doors will unlock > page 33.
ZA WARNING
Unlocking or locking using the vehicle key
Follow the safety precautions > page 32. buttons
> To unlock the vehicle, press the f@ button
@) Note
=> page 36, fig. 25.
Protect the key against high temperatures > To lock the vehicle, press the & button once.
and direct sunlight.
Unlocking or locking using the sensors
() For the sake of the environment Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
XX Do not dispose of vehicle keys in household > To unlock a door or the luggage compartment
trash. They contain materials that can be re- lid, grasp the door handle or luggage compart-
cycled. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or ment lid handle.
authorized Audi Service Facility for more in- > To lock the vehicle, close the doors and touch
formation. the outer sensor on the door handle once
=> fig. 26. Do not grasp the door handle while
@) Tips locking the vehicle, or else the vehicle will not
— The vehicle key function can be temporarily lock. The door cannot be opened for a brief pe-
disrupted by interference from transmitters riod directly after locking it. This way you have
4K0012721BD
near the vehicle working in the same fre- the opportunity to check if the doors locked
quency range (such as a mobile device or ra- correctly.
37
Opening and closing
ZA WARNING > If you press and hold a button (convenience

opening/closing), the LED blinks several times.
Follow the safety precautions > page 32. > If the LED does not blink, the vehicle key bat-
tery is drained. Replace the battery in the vehi-
@) Tips cle key.
— Only use the vehicle key when you can see
Replacing the vehicle key battery
the vehicle.
— The vehicle can only be locked when the "P” >» Remove the mechanical key > page 36 and in-
selector lever position is engaged. sert it at an angle into the opening > fig. 27.
— Do not use the vehicle key to lock and un- > Push the mechanical key in the opening in the
lock when you are inside the vehicle. Other- direction of the arrow to operate the release
wise, you could trigger the anti-theft button on the inside @). To reduce the risk of
alarm*. If this happens, press the &@ unlock damage, do not try to pry off the cover.
button. > Remove the cover from the battery tray.
> Insert the new battery with the “+” symbol fac-
@ Tips ing up.
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key > Close the battery tray with the cover.
— When unlocking or locking the vehicle, the > Insert the mechanical key.
convenience key cannot be more than ap-
proximately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the @) For the sake of the environment
door handle or luggage compartment. Discharged batteries must be disposed of us-
— Unlocking with the convenience key (keyless ing methods that will not harm the environ-
access) can be deactivated in the MMI sys- ment. Do not dispose of them in household
tem > page 33. trash.
— To prevent the vehicle battery from dis-
charging, the energy management gradual- G) Tips
ly switches off convenience functions that Replacement batteries for the vehicle key
are not needed. You then may no longer be must meet the same specifications as the
able to unlock your vehicle with the sensors. original battery.
BTM bae elma tC Luggage compartment

lid
RAZ-0622
General information
Z\ WARNING
— Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft alarm
system: When the vehicle is locked from the
outside, no one - especially children - should
remain in the vehicle, because the windows
can no longer be opened from the inside
Fig. 27 Vehicle key: removing the battery holder
=> page 35. Locked doors make it more diffi-
LED in the vehicle key cult for emergency workers to enter the ve-
hicle, which puts lives at risk.
The LED @) indicates the vehicle key function.
— Always close and lock the luggage compart-
> If you press a button briefly, the LED blinks ment lid and the doors when the vehicle is
once. not in use. Otherwise someone such as a >
38
Opening and closing
child could enter the vehicle through the — The ability to open the luggage compart-
luggage compartment and become locked ment lid using the handle can be deactivat-
inside it. To reduce the risk of injury, do not ed or activated in the MMI > page 33.
allow children to play in or around the vehi- — Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backr-
cle. ests: The luggage compartment lid can be
—To reduce the risk of injuries by pinching, unlocked from the inside in an emergency
make sure that no one is in the operating > page 43.
area of the luggage compartment lid, in-
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and Opening and clos’ luggage
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid. compartment lid
— After closing the luggage compartment lid,
make sure that it is latched. The luggage
compartment lid could open suddenly while
driving, which would increase the risk of an
accident.
— Never drive with the luggage compartment
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
from the surrounding area can enter the ve-
hicle interior and increase the risk of asphyx-
iation.
~ If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle i 28 Driver's door: opening the luggage compartment
rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the

luggage compartment lid may not open Opening the luggage compartment lid
completely under certain circumstances or it
> When the ignition is switched off, press and
could close by itself if open due to the extra
hold the 4s button on the vehicle key twice. Or
weight. Therefore, the open luggage com-
> Engage the “P” selector lever position and pull
partment lid must be given additional sup-
the <3 button in the driver's door. Or
port or the cargo must first be removed
> Applies to: vehicles without convenience key:
from the luggage rack.
Unlock the vehicle or the luggage compartment
— Applies to: vehicles with power-operated or
lid using the @/ 4s button on the vehicle key
sensor-controlled luggage compartment lid:
and press the handle in the luggage compart-
Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
ment lid. Or
gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
>» Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
the handle in the luggage compartment lid.
spite the pinch protection.
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi-
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage
@) Note
compartment.
The luggage compartment lid can bump into
objects such as the garage ceiling when open- Closing the luggage compartment lid
ing and become damaged. > Applies to: vehicles without automatic luggage
compartment lid: Use the inside grip to pull the
@ Tips luggage compartment lid down and allow it to
— When the vehicle is locked, the luggage drop gently to close it. Or
compartment lid can be unlocked separately > Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage
by pressing the “s button twice on the vehi- compartment lid: Note > page 40.
4K0012721BD
cle key. The luggage compartment lid locks

automatically when it is closed again.
39
Opening and closing
enough distance (maximum of approximately 9

Z\ WARNING feet (3 m)) between you and the luggage com-
; Follow the safety precautions > page 38. partment lid. Or
> Press the < button in the luggage compart-
tomatic luggage compartment lid ment lid. Or
Applies to: vehicles with automatic luggage compartment lid > Applies to vehicles with convenience key: When
the ignition is switched off, press the &@* button
in the luggage compartment lid. The vehicle
key must not be more than approximately
4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compart-
ment and it must not be inside the vehicle. If
you press the f* button, then the vehicle will
lock.
Storing the luggage compartment lid

opening position
Applies to: allroad
Fig. 29 Luggage compartment lid: @ closing button*, @)
lock button* (vehicles with convenience key*) The position must be at a certain height or higher
to store.
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
closed automatically > /\ in General informa- > Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-
tion on page 38. sired open position. If you want to move the
luggage compartment lid to a lower position,
Opening the luggage compartment lid move it slowly in small increments; otherwise,
> When the ignition is switched off, press and the luggage compartment lid will close auto-
hold the As button on the vehicle key twice matically.
=> page 36, fig. 25. Or > Press and hold the < button in the luggage
> Engage the "P" selector lever position and pull compartment lid for at least four seconds to
the <3 button* in the driver's door. Or store the new open position. A visual and audio
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press signal will follow.
the handle in the luggage compartment lid. > To set a higher open position, wait at least five
The vehicle key cannot be more than approxi- seconds and then carefully press the luggage
mately 4 feet (1.5 m) away from the luggage compartment lid upward.
compartment. > Press and hold the <3 button again for at least
four seconds to store the desired opening posi-
Closing the luggage compartment lid tion.
> Press the < button in the luggage compart-
The automatic opening or closing will stop if:
ment lid. Or
> Press the handle in the luggage compartment — You press the << button or press the handle in
lid. Or the luggage compartment lid again Or
> Press the luggage compartment lid downward — If something blocks the luggage compartment
slightly. Or lid or makes it difficult for the lid to move.
> When the ignition is switched on, pull the <
If you press the <s button or press the handle in
switch in the driver's door > page 39, fig. 28
the luggage compartment lid again, the luggage
until the luggage compartment lid is closed. Or
compartment lid will open again.
> Applies to: vehicles with convenience key: Press
and hold the 4s button on the vehicle key while
Z\ WARNING
the ignition is switched off until the luggage
compartment lid closes. Make sure there is Follow the safety precautions > page 38.
40
Opening and closing
@ Tips G) Tips
The luggage compartment lid can be operat- The luggage compartment lid will only open
ed manually if the vehicle battery is low. It is or close )) if you perform the movement as
necessary to use more force when doing this. described. This prevents the luggage com-
Move the lid slowly to reduce the amount of partment lid from opening or closing due to
force needed. similar movements 1), such as when you walk
between the rear of the vehicle and your ga-
Opening and closing the luggage rage door. In some situations, the function
compartment lid with foot motion (kicking may be limited or temporarily unavailable.
movement) This may happen if:
Applies to: vehicles with sensor-controlled luggage compart- — You are standing too close to the bumper or
ment lid
too far away from it
rea — The luggage compartment lid was closed or
s
2° opened immediately beforehand
<
go
a — You park close to a hedge and the branches
move back and forth under the vehicle for a
long period of time
— You clean your vehicle, for example with a
pressure washer or in a car wash
— There is heavy rain
— The bumper is very dirty, for example after
Fig. 30 Vehicle rear: foot motion (example) driving on salt-covered roads
— There is interference to the vehicle key's ra-
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and dio signal, such as from mobile devices or
closed automatically ) > A\ in General informa- remote controls
tion on page 38.
Requirements: you must be carrying your conven-

ience key* with you. The ignition must be switch-
ed off. You must be standing at the center behind
the luggage compartment lid.
> Move your foot back and forth under the bump-
er one time > fig. 30. Do not touch the bumper.
Make sure you have firm footing. The luggage
compartment lid will open or close » once the
system detects the movement. The automatic
opening or closing will be canceled if you re-
peat one of the movements described.
Z\ WARNING
4K0012721BD
D_ The closing function applies to vehicles that also have au-

tomatic luggage compartment lid operation.
41
Opening and closing
echanically unlocki luggage > Applies to: sedan: Using the mechanical key,
compartment lid pry out the cover in the luggage compartment
lid trim panel @ ® fig. 31.
> Applies to: allroad: Using the mechanical key,
pry out the cover &s in the luggage compart-
ment lid trim panel @) ° fig. 31.
> Press the lever with the mechanical key in the
direction of the arrow to release the luggage
compartment lid.
>» Fold the backrest backward until it locks into
place.
Fixed rear seat backrest

Applies to: sedan
> Carefully pull the left side of the rear bench

seat out of its mount until you can reach the re-
lease cable > fig. 32.
> Remove the Velcro® tape @).
> Pull on the loop @) until the luggage compart-
ment lid releases.
> Tape the release cable back in place and press
the bench seat back into its retainer.
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests
Fig. 31 Inner luggage compartment lid: access for emer-
gency release @) sedan, @) allroad
— Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests:

If you have folded the backrests into the up-
right position, always check if the lock is se-
cured by pulling forward on the backrest.
— Applies to: vehicles with fixed backrest: Af-
ter the emergency release on the luggage
Applies to: vehicles with fixed backrests compartment lid is activated, make sure
Fig. 32 Rear bench seat: release cable for emergency re- that the bracket under the rear bench seat
lease in the sedan
engages securely in the lifting eye.
Depending on the equipment, the luggage com-

partment lid can be opened either from inside
the luggage compartment or from the rear bench
seat using the emergency release.
Folding rear seat backrest

> Fold the backrest on the rear bench seat for-
ward > page 83.
42
Opening and closing
ing the luggage compart so restrict the operation of the climate control
baceemiasie(-M Uma tee (Tn system in the rear, select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with fixed rear backrests SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Operation
in rear
RAZ-0146,
When the child safety lock is switched on, the
following functions are disabled:
— The rear inner door handles

— The rear power windows
—The control panel* for the climate control sys-
tem in the rear
Message in the instrument cluster display

Fig. 33 Inner luggage compartment lid: lever
@®/
> Press the lever in the direction of the arrow un-
til the luggage compartment lid opens. & Child safety lock: malfunction! Please contact
Service
® Tips
Never close the luggage compartment lid us-
There is a malfunction in the child safety lock.
Press the button again.
ing the emergency handle. If the message stays on, drive immediately to an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Child safety lock Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside and the rear ZA WARNING
power windows from being operated. — Follow the safety precautions > page 32.
—A malfunction in the child safety lock could
allow the rear doors to be opened from the
BGA-0029
inside, which increases the risk of an acci-

dent.
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
RAZ-0723,
Fig. 34 Driver's door: controls
> To activate or deactivate the child safety lock

(rear power windows and interior door handle)
for the rear doors, press the left and/or right 8
button in the driver's door > fig. 34. The indica-
tor light in the button turns on/blinks.
> Make sure the child safety lock is working by
checking the function on the rear power win- Fig. 35 Driver's door: power window switch
dow switch and door handle.
4K0012721BD
> Applies to: vehicles with controls for the cli- Power window switches:
mate control system in the rear and MMI: To al- @ Left front door
43
Opening and closing
@ Right front door Convenience opening and closing

@® Left rear door Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
@ Right rear door Convenience opening or closing the windows

or panoramic glass roof*
Opening and closing the windows
You can set in the MMI if all windows or the roof*
The driver can control all power windows. All
should open or close all at once > page 33, Set-
power window switches are equipped with a two-
ting the central locking system.
stage function:
> Press and hold the & or& button on the vehicle
> To open or close the window completely, press
key until all windows and the roof* have
the switch down or pull the switch up briefly to
reached the desired position > /A\.
the second level. The operation will stop if the
> Touch the sensor* on the door handle until all
switch is pressed or pulled again.
of the windows and the roof* are closed. Do not
> To select a position in between opened and
place your hand in the door handle when doing
closed, press or pull the switch to the first level
this.
until the desired window position is reached.
When all of the windows and the roof* are
Correcting a malfunction in the one-touch
closed, the turn signals will flash once.
up/down function
You can reactivate the one-touch up/down func- ZA WARNING
tion if it malfunctions.
— Never close the windows or panoramic glass
> Pull the power window switch up until the win- roof* carelessly or in an uncontrolled man-
dow is completely raised. ner, because this increases the risk of injury.
> Release the switch and pull it up again for at — For security reasons, the windows and the
least one second. panoramic glass roof* can only be opened
and closed with the vehicle key at a maxi-
ZA\ WARNING mum distance of approximately 6.5 feet
— Follow the safety precautions > page 32. (2 m) from the vehicle. Always pay attention
— Never close the windows or sunshades* when using the { button to close the win-
carelessly or in an uncontrolled manner, be- dows and the panoramic glass roof* so that
cause this increases the risk of injury. no one is pinched. The closing process will
stop immediately when the f button is re-
@ Tips leased.
— You can still open and close the windows for

several minutes after turning the ignition
off. The power window switch is not disa-
bled until the driver's door or front passeng-
er's door is opened.
— The power windows are equipped with pinch
protection. The automatic window may stop
closing and will open all the way again even
if no obstacle is detected. Pull the power
window switch up until the window is com-
pletely raised.
44
Opening and closing
Panoramic glass roof Operating the roof

> Tilting the roof: press the 2S switch in the
Operating the p mic glass roof
Cel m dar Le(-) headliner briefly upward to the second level @).
Applies to: vehicles with panoramic glass roof and roof sun-
> Closing the tilted roof: pull the 2 switch
shade downward briefly to the second level.
> Opening the roof: slide the A> switch back
briefly twice in a row to the second level @).
> Closing the roof: push the 2> switch forward
briefly to the second level.
> Opening or closing partially: slide the A>
switch to the first level and hold it there until
the roof reaches the desired position.
Quick opening and closing

You can also open or close the roof and front sun-
Fig. 36 Headliner: panoramic glass roof and sunshade*
shade in one movement.
buttons (shown on the allroad as an example)
> Opening the roof and sunshade: slide the 2>
The control buttons are equipped with a two- switch back briefly twice in a row to the second
stage function. level @).
When tilting or opening the roof, the roof sun- > Closing the opened roof and sunshade: push
the Ad switch forward briefly twice in a row to
shade will open partially or completely if the sun-
shade is closed. the second level.
Operating the front!) roof sunshade Roof emergency closing
The roof sunshade cannot be closed completely if If an object is detected when closing, the roof
the roof is open.
will open again automatically. In this case, you
can then close it with the power emergency clos-
> Opening and closing the sunshade: push the ing function.
SD switch in the headliner @) briefly toward
the rear or forward to the second Level. > Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the > tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
switch to the first level until the sunshade roof is closed.
reaches the desired position. Or:
ZX WARNING
Operating the rear roof sunshade*
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
Applies to: allroad
tion when closing the roof. Always switch the
> Opening and closing the sunshade: push the -&& ignition off and take the key with you when
switch in the headliner (@) forward or toward leaving the vehicle.
the rear to the second level.
> Partially opening the sunshade: press the @) Note
switch to the first level until the sunshade
Always close the roof when you leave the vehi-
reaches the desired position.
cle and when there is precipitation to reduce
the risk of damage to the interior equipment,
particularly the electronic equipment. >
4K0012721BD
1) The sedan only has a sunshade in the front, and the all-
road has sunshades in the front and rear.
4s
Opening and closing
If the valet parking function is switched on, a

@) Tips
message will appear every time the ignition is
— After switching off the ignition, the roof and switched on.
sunshades can still be operated for several
minutes as long as neither of the front G) Tips
doors are opened.
Please note that the luggage compartment
— It is not possible to open the roof when
can still be accessed from the vehicle interior
temperatures are too low.
in vehicles with fixed rear seat backrests or
ones that cannot be locked, even when the
Valet parking valet parking function is switched on.
Applies to: vehicles with valet parking function
The valet parking function can protect the lug- Garage door opener
gage compartment from unauthorized access.
The [VALET] button for valet parking is in the Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
glove compartment.
With the garage door opener, you can activate
You can switch the valet parking function on, for systems such as the garage doors, security sys-
example when someone else is parking your vehi- tems or house lights from inside your vehicle.
cle }). The vehicle can be driven, locked, and un- These functions are operated in the MMI. Multi-
locked using the vehicle key, but access to the ple receivers can be programmed, which can con-
luggage compartment is blocked. trol the functions of up to eight?) hand-held
transmitters.
> Press the [VALET] button in the glove compart-
ment. The LED in the button turns on if the
ZA\ WARNING
function is switched on. — When operating or programming the garage
> Lock the glove compartment with the mechani- door opener, make sure that no people or
cal key. objects are in the area immediately sur-
> Applies to: vehicles with lockable pass-through rounding the equipment. People can be in-
and lockable rear seat backrests: To secure the jured or property can be damaged if struck
luggage compartment from the vehicle interior, when closing.
lock the pass-through and the rear seat backr- — Do not allow yourself to be distracted from
ests using the mechanical key > page 84, traffic by the viewing and operating the dis-
> page 83. plays.
>» Give your vehicle key to the service personnel
who are parking your vehicle and keep the me- G) Tips
chanical key. — If you sell your vehicle, remove the key user
= page 31 and reset all settings to the fac-
The following buttons are deactivated when the
tory settings > page 224.
valet parking function is switched on:
— For an explanation on conformity with the
— < button in the driver's door FCC regulations in the United States and the
— <¥ or 4s button on the vehicle key Industry Canada regulations, see
— Handle in the luggage compartment lid => page 296.
D_ This function is not available in all countries.

2) The possible number of hand-held transmitters depends
on the equipment.
46
Opening and closing
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
Before you program your system to the ga-
rage door opener, first check the compatibili- You can program both fixed code and rolling code
ty: systems in the MMI using the procedure that is
— Ask an authorized Audi dealer or authorized described.
Audi Service Facility or check at www. Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
homelink.com. You can also find more infor-
mation about HomeLink there. Programming the system
Applies to: MMI
— You can display information about Home-
Link (compatibility level/status/country Requirement: the hand transmitter must be
code/HomeLink generation) in the MMI: present and the vehicle must be within range of
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Set- the system (such as the garage door) that you
tings & Service > Garage door opener > @. would like to program.
> If you are programming the garage door opener

for the first time, press the r button on the
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener
lower display. Follow the instructions in the
Requirements: the remote control transmitter MMI. Or
must be programmed > page 47, the vehicle > If you would like to program other systems, se-
must be within range of the system, and the igni- lect on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
tion must be switched on. Service > Garage door opener. Select the de-
sired button: G@). Follow the instructions in the
There are multiple options to open or close the MMI.
system (such as the garage door). > If you would like to reprogram systems that are
> If you have only programmed one remote con- already programmed, select on the home
trol transmitter, press the ro button on the screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
lower display. Or door opener. Press the 4 button and select 7
> If you have programmed multiple remote con- for the system to be reprogrammed. Select:
trol transmitters, press the r button on the Program. Follow the instructions in the MMI.
lower display and then press the respective sys- With some systems, the garage door opener will
tem button. Or be immediately available after programming.
> If you have configured the programmable With other systems, the garage door opener
steering wheel button*, press the > button must also be synchronized.
=> page 29 and then press the respective button
for the system. Or Synchronizing”
> Applies to: vehicles with location pairing: If you Requirement: the hand transmitter must already
have programmed Location pairing, press the be programmed and the vehicle must be within
button for this in the upper display (notification range of the system (such as the garage door).
center = page 22). As you approach the system,
the button is displayed on the MMI. If the system synchronization is performed di-
rectly after the programming procedure, follow
If transmission was successful, the message: the instructions on the MMI.
Send to: XXX will appear.
If you would like to sync at a later time:
4K0012721BD
) Only applies to rolling code systems
47
Opening and closing
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > To delete an individual system, press the L]
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door button for the desired system. If the checkmark
opener. Vv is set, select: Delete.
> Press the button for the system that you would > To delete all systems, select: All > Delete.
like to synchronize.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. @ Tips
GPS pairing — Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
Applies to: vehicles with GPS pairing mitter are charged before starting the pro-
gramming process.
For easier operation, you can program your sys-
— The programming process may take up to
tem's location.
30 seconds. It may be necessary for the
Requirements: the respective hand transmitter hand transmitter to be pressed again in the
must be programmed > page 47 and the vehicle meantime.
must be located in front of the system. — The garage door opener may need to be
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: synchronized with the system after pro-
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door gramming. Follow the manufacturer's in-
opener. structions for doing this.
> Press the Z button.
@) Tips
> Press the / button for the system your vehicle
is facing. In some cases, the system may need to be
>» Select: Location pairing. programmed in a different mode (“D mode”).
> Follow the instructions in the MMI. — Switch the ignition on.
Only a maximum of three systems can be dis-
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage
played in the notification center > page 22. If
door opener.
you would like to have all systems displayed,
— Press and hold the desired button @).
press aa.
— Select Yes, in D mode and follow the in-
Renaming programmed systems structions on the MMI.
You can rename the programmed systems indi-
vidually.

VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
> Press the 7 button for the system that you
would like to rename.
> Select: Rename.
> Follow the instructions in the MMI.
Deleting programmed systems

The programmed systems can be deleted individ-
ually or all at once.

VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Garage door
opener.
48
Lights and Vision
Lights and Vision Automatic headlight range control

Your vehicle is equipped with automatic head-
Exterior lighting light range control. It reduces glare for oncoming
Stare MUL Las eal traffic if the vehicle load changes. The headlight
range adjusts automatically.
Audi adaptive light

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive light
Audi adaptive light provides better visibility when

driving in the dark. The lights are adapted to the
road conditions based on speed, such as when
driving on expressways, rural roads, at intersec-
tions, and around curves. The adaptive light only
functions when the automatic headlights are ac-
Fig. 37 Instrument panel: light button module tivated.
@ Light switch Z\ WARNING

Press and hold @ until the desired light function — Follow the safety precautions and note the
is selected. The selected function is displayed limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
briefly in the instrument cluster. When switching cameras > page 118.
on the ignition, the AUTO light function is auto- — Automatic headlights are only intended to
matically selected. assist the driver. They do not relieve the
— AUTO - The automatic headlights adapt to the driver of responsibility to check the head-
surrounding brightness automatically. The day- lights and to turn them on manually based
time running lights* will automatically turn on. on the current light and visibility conditions.
In vehicles for certain markets, you can switch For example, fog cannot be detected by the
the automatic daytime running lights* on and light sensors. So always switch on the low
off in the MMI. beams ZO under these weather conditions
— 20 - Low beam headlights. As soon as the igni- and when driving in the dark.
tion is switched on, you can switch on the low
beam headlights manually. G) Tips
— 30a - Parking lights. You can switch on the park- — If the vehicle battery has been discharging
ing lights at speeds under 20 mph (32 km/h). for a while, the parking light may switch off
— USA models: OFF - You can switch off all light automatically. Avoid using the parking
functions at speeds under 6 mph (10 km/h). lights for several hours.
— Canada models: OFF - You can only switch off — Follow the regulations applicable to the
all light functions when the vehicle is parked country where you are operating the vehicle
and the ignition is switched off. when stopping the vehicle and when using
the lighting systems.
When the low beam headlights or parking lights
—Awarning tone will sound if you open the
are switched on, the respective Ba orEa indica-
door when the exterior lights are switched
tor light appears in the instrument cluster.
on.
@ All weather light 2 — Only the front headlights turn on when the
The headlights automatically adjust so that there daytime running lights are switched on*. In
will be less glare, for example when the road sur- vehicles in certain markets, the tail lights
4K0012721BD
face is wet. will also turn on.

—In cool or damp weather, the inside of the
headlights, turn signals, and tail lights can
49
Lights and Vision
fog over due to the temperature difference The =0) indicator light in the instrument cluster
between the inside and outside. They will will turn on.
clear shortly after switching them on. This
does not affect the service life of the light- ZA WARNING
ing.
High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
— When the parking lights are switched on which increases the risk of an accident. For
and the ignition is switched off, the 200: sym- this reason, only use the high beams or the
bol appears in the light switch module. headlight flasher when they will not create
glare for other drivers.
Turn signal and high beam lever
item Tue
BFV-0012
Applies to: vehicles with high beam assistant
The high beam assistant automatically turns the

high beams on or off depending on the surround-
ing conditions.
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-

tect light sources from other road users. The high
beams switch on or off automatically depending
on the position of vehicles driving ahead and on-
Fig. 38 Lever: switching on the turn signal and high beams
coming vehicles, the vehicle speed as well as oth-
The lever operates the turn signals, the high er environmental factors and traffic conditions.
beams and the headlight flasher.
Switching on the high beam assistant
Turn signals @ > Requirement: the AUTO light function must be
The turn signal activates when you move the lev- selected and the high beam assistant must be
er into a turn signal position when the ignition is switched on in the MMI > page 51.
switched on. The respective a or B indicator > To activate the high beam assistant, tap the
light flashes. lever forward @) > page 50, fig. 38. The in-
@ Right turn signal dicator light appears in the instrument cluster
display and the high beams are switched on or
@ Left turn signal off automatically. The Ed indicator light turns
The turn signal blinks three times if you tap the on if the high beams are switched on.
lever (convenience turn signal).
Switching the high beams on or off manually
If an indicator light blinks twice as fast as usual,
If the high beams did not switch on or off auto-
a turn signal bulb has failed. Carefully drive to an
matically as expected, you may switch them on or
off manually instead:
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
rected. > To switch the high beams on manually, tap the
lever forward (@) > page 50, fig. 38. The & in-
High beams 2D and headlight flasher dicator light turns on.
> Move the lever to the corresponding position: > To switch the high beams off manually, pull the
lever back@) > page 50, fig. 38. The high beam
@) High beams on (vehicles with high beam assis-
assistant is deactivated.
tant*) > page 50
@ High beams off or headlight flasher
sO
Lights and Vision
Operating the headlight flasher the vehicle and after switching off the ignition
> To operate the headlight flashers, pull the lever and opening the driver's door. The entry/exit
back @) > page 50, fig. 38. If the high beam as- lighting only works when it is dark and the light
sistant is activated, but the high beams were
switch is in the AUTO light function.
not turned off, the high beam assistant remains Daytime running lights
activated.
USA models: the daytime running lights can be
switched on and off.
Z\ WARNING
— Follow the safety precautions and note the Canada models: the daytime running lights can-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and not be switched off. The lights activate automati-
cameras > page 118. cally each time the ignition is switched on.
— High beam assistant is only intended to as-
sist the driver. The driver is still responsible @ Tips
for controlling the headlights and switching Certain settings are stored automatically in
them manually depending on light and visi- the active personal profile.
bility conditions.
— High beams can cause glare for other driv- Emergency flashers
ers, which increases the risk of an accident.
For this reason, only use the high beams or
the headlight flasher when they will not cre-
ate glare for other drivers.
G) Tips
Certain settings are stored automatically in
the active personal profile.
Adjusting the exterior lighting Fig. 39 Center console: emergency flashers
You can adjust the exterior lighting separately.

The emergency flashers help to make other driv-
The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
ers aware of your vehicle in dangerous situations.
> Press the A @ button to switch the emergency
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Exterior light-
flashers on or off.
ing.
When the emergency flashers are turned on, the
Automatic headlights a and By indicator lights will flash at the same
You can adjust the following settings in the Auto- time.
matic headlights menu:
You can indicate a lane change or a turn when the
Activation time - You can adjust if the headlights emergency flashers are switched on by using the
switch on Early, Medium, or Late based on the turn signal lever. The emergency flashers stop
sensitivity of the light sensor. temporarily.
High beam assistant > System - You can switch The emergency flashers also work when the igni-
the high beam assistant on and off. tion is turned off.
Entry/exit lighting
‘G) Tips
4K0012721BD
When it is dark, the Entry/exit lighting illumi-

You should switch the emergency flashers on
nates the area around the vehicle when unlocking
if:
51
Lights and Vision
— you are the last car in a traffic jam so that Interior lighting
all other vehicles approaching from behind
can see your vehicle Front interior lighting
— your vehicle has broken down or you are
having an emergency
— your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow-
ing another vehicle
Messages
If the 8; indicator light turns on, a bulb has

failed. The displayed message indicates the cause
and possible solutions. If one of the messages
Fig. 40 Headliner: interior lighting
does not turn off, drive immediately to an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
Interior lighting buttons
ty to have the malfunction repaired.
axs* — Interior lighting on/off
BB) Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own-
er's manual 4 - Door contact switch on/off. The interior light-
ing is controlled automatically.
Adaptive light* is not working. The headlights
still function. Drive immediately to an authorized Touch-sensitive reading lights
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to > To turn a reading light on or off, touch the sur-
have the malfunction repaired. face@ briefly.
High beam assistant: malfunction! See own- > To activate the manual dimming function,
er's manual touch the surface @ when the light is switched
off and keep touching it until the desired
You can still switch the high beams on or off
brightness is reached.
manually. Drive immediately to an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to
have the malfunction repaired. Rear interior lighting
High beam assistant: currently unavailable.

Camera view limited due to surroundings.
This message appears if the camera's visual field

is blocked. The system will switch itself off. Try
switching the systems on again later.
Automatic headlights: malfunction! See

owner's manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. The low

Fig. 41 Headliner: reading lights
beams remain switched on at all times for safety
reasons with the AUTO light function. Drive im-
Reading lights
mediately to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction > To switch the reading lamp on or off, press the
repaired. ‘ button @.
> To activate the manual dimming function*,
touch the surface when the light is switched off
“¥ @ and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
52
Lights and Vision
Interior lighting Vision

Applies to: vehicles with interior lighting
Adjusting exterior mirrors
The ambient lighting turns on when the ignition
is switched on. The ambient lighting is deactivat-
RAZ-0150
ed when the light function is OFF.
You can adjust the interior lighting individually.


VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Interior light-
ing.
© ©
You can choose among predefined color profiles,
Fig. 42 Driver's door: knob for the exterior mirrors
such as Maritime.
Additional settings and profiles: > Turn the knob in the driver's door to the desired
position:
— Brightness: you can adjust the brightness for
all of the interior lighting. 0 - All adjustment functions are deactivated.
— Individual: you can adjust the brightness and Q/ © - Selects the left or right exterior mirror.
color of the interior lighting separately, divided To adjust the mirror glass in a mirror, press the
into contour and surface lighting. knob in the desired direction.
— Drive select: the contour and surface lighting
GA - Heats* the mirror glass depending on the
color changes depending on the selected Audi
outside temperature.
drive select* mode.
=) - Folds the exterior mirrors*. To fold the mir-
@ Tips rors out, turn the knob to one of the other posi-
— Depending on vehicle equipment, when the tions. In the MMI, you can select if the mirrors
Drive select function is activated, the color fold in automatically when you lock the vehicle
of the contour and surface lighting may => page 33.
briefly change to red or blue when the inte-
Front passenger's exterior mirror tilt
rior temperature is manually increased or function*
decreased.
— Certain settings are stored automatically in Requirement: the knob must be in the position
the active personal profile. for the front passenger’s exterior mirror.
To help you see the curb when backing into a

Display brightness parking space, the surface of the mirror will tilt
slightly when reverse gear is selected.
You can adjust the instrument and display illumi-
nation separately. The settings depend on the ve- You can adjust the mirror surface by turning the
hicle equipment. knob in the desired direction.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The mirror moves from the reversing position
SETTINGS > Display & brightness. back to the original position:
— When you switch the ignition off

Possible settings in the MMI:
— Once you drive forward at speeds faster than 9
— Cockpit dimming mph (15 km/h)
4K0012721BD
— Head-up display — When the knob is no longer in the position for

—MMI the front passenger exterior mirror >
— Virtual cockpit
53
Lights and Vision
Automatic dimming rearview mirror*

ZA WARNING
> The interior and exterior mirrors dim automati-
Curved mirror surfaces (for example convex)
cally when light shines on them, for example
enlarge the field of vision. However, they
from headlights on a vehicle behind you.
make objects in the mirror appear smaller and
farther away. When using these mirrors to es-
timate your distance to vehicles behind you Z\ WARNING
when changing lanes, you could estimate in- — If the glass on an automatic dimming mir-
correctly, which increases the risk of an acci- ror* breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This
dent. liquid can irritate the skin, eyes and respira-
tory system. If there is contact with the flu-
@) Note id, flush immediately with plenty of water.
— Applies to: vehicles with power folding exte- Consult a physician if necessary.
rior mirrors: If the mirror housing was — Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
moved by outside forces (such as an impact lyte fluid can lead to irritation of the air-
when maneuvering), you must use the pow- ways, especially in people with asthma or
er folding function to fold the mirror all the other respiratory conditions. Take deep
way out. The mirrors will make a loud noise breaths immediately after leaving the vehi-
when they latch into place. The mirror hous- cle or, if this is not possible, open all of the
ing must not be moved back into place by doors and windows as wide as possible.
hand because this could impair the function — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
of the mirror mechanism. the eyes, flush them thoroughly with plenty
— Applies to: vehicles without power folding of clean water for at least 15 minutes and
exterior mirrors: If the mirror housing was then seek medical attention.
moved by outside forces (such as an impact — If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
when maneuvering), you must move it back the skin, flush the affected area with clean
in place by hand. water for at least 15 minutes, and then
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car clean with soap and water and seek medical
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in attention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. thoroughly before wearing again.
Never fold power folding exterior mirrors* — If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
by hand. Only fold them in and out using conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
the power controls. least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
unless this is recommended by medical pro-
G) Tips fessionals. Seek medical attention immedi-
ately.
— Certain settings are stored automatically in
— If the power adjusting function malfunc-
() Note
tions, the glass in both mirrors can be ad- If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror*
justed by pressing on the edge of it by hand. breaks, electrolyte can leak out. This liquid
damages plastic surfaces and paint. Clean
this liquid as quickly as possible, for example
Dimming the mirrors
with a wet sponge.
Manual dimming rearview mirror
@ Tips
> Pull the lever on the bottom of the mirror back.
—If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror*
will not function correctly.
54
Lights and Vision
— The automatic dimming mirrors* do not dim Rear window sunshade

when the interior lighting is turned on or re- > To extend or retract the sunshade, select 3 on
verse gear is selected. the lower display > page 23.
Sun visors Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on
Fig. 43 Roof headliner: sun visor
Sun visor
The sun visors for the driver and front passenger
RAZ-0253
can be released from their mounts and turned to-
ward the doors (4).
They can also be moved back and forth length-
wise in this position.
Vanity mirror
The mirror light switches on when the cover over
the vanity mirror @) opens.
Fig. 46 Lever: rear window wiper (allroad)
> Move the windshield wiper lever S7 to the cor-

Applies to: vehicles with sunshade
responding position:
© Windshield wipers off

RAZ-0279
@ Rain sensor/intermittent mode. The wind-

shield wipers switch on once the vehicle speed
exceeds approximately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is
raining. The higher the sensitivity of the rain sen-
sor that is set (switch ©) to the right), the earlier
the windshield wipers react to moisture on the
windshield. You can deactivate the rain sensor
Fig. 44 Rear door: sunshade mode, which switches the interval mode on. In
intermittent mode, you can adjust the interval
Rear door sunshade time using the switch ©.
> Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re-
VEHICLE > Light & Visibility > Rain sensor.
tainer on the upper door frame.
4K0012721BD
@®Slow wiping
@ Fast wiping
55
Lights and Vision
@ Single wipe. If you hold the lever in this posi-

@) Note
tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping
to fast wiping. — If there is frost, make sure the windshield
wiper blades are not frozen to the wind-
© Clean the windshield “9. The wipers wipe one shield. Switching on the windshield wipers
time after several seconds of driving to remove when the blades are frozen to the wind-
water droplets. You can switch this function off shield can damage the wiper blades.
by moving the lever to position G) within ten sec- — Prior to using a car wash, the windshield
onds of the afterwipe. The afterwipe function is wiper system must be switched off (lever in
reactivated the next time you switch the ignition position @). This prevents the wipers from
on. switching on unintentionally and causing
Clean the headlights*. The headlight washer sys- damage to the windshield wiper system.
tem* operates only when the low beam head-
lights are on. If you move the lever to position @) Tips
©, the headlights and the night vision assist — The windshield wipers switch off when the
camera* are cleaned at intervals. ignition is switched off. You can activate the
windshield wipers after the ignition is
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: @ -
switched on again by moving the windshield
Wiping the rear window (J. The number of wipes
wiper lever to any position. The single wipe
depends on the windshield wiper movement.
function (lever in position @) also functions
The rear wiper automatically switches on when when the ignition is switched off.
the reverse gear is selected and the front wind- — Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
shield wipers are on and running. in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor
function. Check your windshield wiper
Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper: @) -
blades regularly.
Cleaning the rear window @. The number of
— The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield
wipes depends on how long the lever is held in
washer system are heated when the ignition
position (8). This may also clean the rearview
is on if the outside temperature is low.
camera, depending on the vehicle equipment.
— When stopping temporarily, such as at a
Z\ WARNING traffic light, the speed of the windshield
wipers automatically reduces by one level.
— The rain sensor is only intended to assist the
driver. The driver may still be responsible for
manually switching the wipers on based on Cleaning/changing wiper blades
visibility conditions. oO
a
S
— The windshield must not be treated with g|
>
water-repelling windshield coating agents. J 3
Under unfavorable conditions, such as wet-
O—
ness, darkness, and when the sun is low,
these coatings can cause increased glare,
which increases the risk of an accident. They
can also cause wiper blade chatter.
— Properly functioning windshield wiper
blades are required for a clear view and safe Fig. 47 Windshield wipers: changing the wiper blades >
driving > page 56, Cleaning/changing wip-
er blades.
56
Lights and Vision
Windshield wiper service position/blade — Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi-
replacement position sion, which increases the risk of an accident.
> Switch off the ignition and hold the windshield
wiper lever in position @) > page 55, fig. 45 un- () Note
til the windshield wiper moves into the service — The windshield wipers must only be folded
Position. up when in the service position! Otherwise,
> To bring the windshield wipers back to the nor- you risk damaging the paint on the hood or
mal position, switch the ignition on and hold the windshield wiper motor.
the windshield wiper lever in position @) until — You should not move your vehicle or press
the windshield wipers go back to the original the windshield wiper lever when the wiper
position, or drive faster than 8 mph (12 km/h). arms are folded up from the windshield. The
You can also turn the service position on or off in windshield wipers would move back into
the MMI: their original position and could damage the
> Switch the windshield wipers off (position @ hood and windshield.
=> page 55, fig. 45).
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: G) Tips
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Wiper posi- — You can also use the service position, for ex-
tion. ample, if you want to protect the windshield
from icing by using a cover.
Cleaning the wiper blades
— You cannot activate the service position
Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in when the hood is open.
the service position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the Cleaning/changing the rear wiper blade
windshield. Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper
> For information on cleaning, see > table on
[RAZ-0637
page 267.
Replacing the wiper blades

Requirement: the windshield wipers must be in
the service position.
> Fold the windshield wiper arm away from the

windshield.
> Press the locking knob (@) on the wiper blade.
Hold the wiper blade firmly. Fig. 48 Rear window wiper: installing the wiper blade
> Remove the wiper blade from the windshield
wiper arm mount Q). Cleaning the wiper blades
> Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on >» Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
the wiper arm until it clicks into place. > For information on cleaning, see > table on
> Place the wiper arm back on the windshield. page 267.
> Exit the service position.
Removing the wiper blade
ZA WARNING > Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
— For safety reasons, the windshield wiper > Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
blades should be replaced once or twice
Installing the wiper blade
4K0012721BD
each year.
> Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer. >
57
Lights and Vision
> Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear > To turn the compass on or off, press the button
window. @ until the compass display in the mirror turns
on or off.
Z\ WARNING The digital compass only works when the ignition
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
blades should be replaced once or twice each breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
year. SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
(west), NW (northwest).
Messages
G) Tips
If the & indicator light turns on, then there is a
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
windshield wiper malfunction. The displayed
not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
message indicates the cause and possible solu-
ces or metallic objects near the mirror.
tions. If one of the messages does not turn off,
drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
function repaired.
gS Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's

manual
The light/rain sensor is malfunctioning. You can

still control all functions that are independent of
the rain sensor through the windshield wiper lev-
er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
malfunction repaired.
Digital compass
Switching the compass on and off
Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
BFV-0288
Fig. 49
BE
Rearview mirror: digital compass is switched on
538
Lights and Vision
B42-0405
Fig. 50 Magnetic zone map
The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for

the compass to read accurately.
To reduce the risk to yourself and other driv-
> Press and hold the button @ > page 58, fig. 49 ers, calibrate the compass in an area where
until the number of the magnetic zone appears there is no traffic.
in the interior rearview mirror.
> Press the button (4) repeatedly to select the
correct magnetic zone. The selection mode
turns off after a few seconds.
Calibrating the compass

Applies to: vehicles with digital compass
You must recalibrate the compass if it does not

display the correct direction.
> Press and hold the button @ untila C

=> page 58, fig. 49 appears in the rearview mir-
ror.
> Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) until
a direction is displayed in the rearview mirror.
4K0012721BD
s9
Sitting correctly and safely
Sitting correctly and — Never kneel on the seats.

— Never tilt your backrest too far back.
safely
— Never lean against the instrument panel.
Correct passenger — Never lie down on the rear bench seat.
seating position — Never sit only on the front section of the seat.
— Never sit sideways on the seat.
General information
— Never lean against the window.
As the driver, you are responsible for making sure — Never place your feet out of the window.
every passenger is sitting correctly in their seat — Never place your feet on the instrument panel.
and maintaining this seating position while driv- — Never place your feet on the seat cushion.
ing. Make sure that: — Never ride in the footwell.
— Never sit on the armrests.
— Every passenger in the vehicle has adjusted his
— Never drive or ride in a seat without fastening
or her seat correctly > page 60
your safety belt.
— The steering wheel is adjusted correctly
— Never ride in the luggage compartment.
=> page 63
— The mirrors are adjusted so that there is a suffi-
cient view of the area around the vehicle
ZA WARNING
=> page 53 Incorrect seating positions, failure to wear a
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her safety belt, or being too close to an airbag in-
head restraint adjusted correctly > page 64 crease the risk of serious or fatal injury to ve-
hicle occupants, especially if the airbags de-
— Every passenger in the vehicle has his or her
ploy and come into contact with occupants
safety belt fastened correctly > page 65
who are not seated correctly. Note the impor-
— The activation status of the front passenger's
tant information and warnings in the chapters
airbag is suitable for the passenger in the front
for the topics given above.
passenger's seat > page 71
— Children are secured in suitable child safety
seats that are secured to appropriate vehicle
Gi) Tips
seats > page 73. Read and observe the impor- — Save your seat profile* > page 68. This al-
tant safety information pertaining to the use of lows you to access your personal seat profile
child safety seats on the front passenger's seat quickly and easily at any time.
= A in General information on page 74. — If you or other vehicle passengers have
physical limitations that prevent sitting in a
Examples of incorrect seating positions correct position, modifications to the vehi-
Safety belts can only provide its optimal protec- cle may be necessary. For more information,
tion when they are routed correctly. Incorrect contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
seating positions significantly reduce the protec- ized Audi Service Facility, or call Audi cus-
tive functions of the safety belts and increase the tomer support at 1-800-822-2834.
risk of injury due to incorrect belt routing.
The following list includes examples of seating Front seats

positions that could be dangerous for all vehicle General information
occupants. This is not a complete list. The pur-
pose is to provide examples to increase your Make sure that:
awareness of the topic. The following points ap- — You can press the pedals down completely
ply when the vehicle is in motion:
while your legs are slightly bent
— Never stand inside the vehicle.
— Never stand on the seats.
60
— The distance between your upper body and the to use the pedals if sudden driving or brak-
steering wheel or instrument panel is at least ing maneuvers were needed, which increas-
10 inches (25 cm) es the risk of an accident.
— The distance between your knees and the in- — Make sure that the floor mats are always se-
strument panel is at least 4 inches (10 cm) curely attached.
— Your thighs are lightly supported by the front —To reduce the risk of an accident, never place
surface of the seat additional floor mats or other floor covers
— The backrest is in an upright position and your over the installed floor mats, because this
back is resting against it reduces the pedal's range of motion and can
— You have a sufficient view of the area around impair pedal operation.
the vehicle —To reduce the risk of injury, never place your
— You have a clear view of the instrument cluster, feet on the instrument panel, out of the
indicator lights, and the head-up display* window, or on the seat surfaces. This also
applies to passengers in the rear seats.
Seat settings menu: quick access
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI
@) Note
If you press on the image of the driver's or front
To reduce the risk of damage, be very careful
passenger's seat in the climate control system
when adjusting the seat to make sure the
menu © page 88, fig. 84 @, you will go directly
head restraints do not come into contact with
to the seat settings for that seat.
the headliner or the sunroof*.
Z\ WARNING G@) Tips
— If you are too close to the steering wheel or
At the same time, only move the respective
instrument panel, the airbag system cannot
seat using the controls.
provide the optimal protection, which in-
creases the risk of injury and death.
—To reduce the risk of injury in the event of Adjusting the front power seats
sudden braking maneuvers or accidents, You can adjust the basic settings using the but-
never drive with the backrest reclined very tons.
far. The airbag system and seat belts can on-
ly provide optimal protection when the back-
RAZ.0172
rest is in an upright position and the driver
is wearing the seat belt correctly. If the
backrest is angled back too far, the safety
CO. oS
belt can shift to soft areas of the body, such
as the stomach, which increases the risk of
injury.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust
the seats when the vehicle is stationary.
— Be careful when adjusting the seat. Lack of Fig. 51 Front seat: seat adjustment buttons
control or attention when adjusting can re-
sult in injuries due to pinching to vehicle oc- The settings depend on the vehicle equipment.
cupants both in the front seats and rear
Adjusting the seat position
seats.
— Never place objects in the driver's footwell. > To move the seat forward or backward, push
Objects could shift and enter the area the button @) forward or backward.
4K0012721BD
around the pedals, which could prevent you

from using them. You would then be unable
61
> To adjust the seat upward or downward, push Seat adjustment

the rear section of the button @) upward or Applies to: MMI
downward. > To select a seat setting, press (@ if necessary.

> To adjust the seat surface, press the front part > Press the respective arrow (@) until the desired
of the button @ upward or downward. position is reached.
Adjusting the backrests Massage
> To move the backrest forward or backward, See > page 62
press the button @) forward or backward.
Additional seat settings
Adjusting the lumbar support
See > page 62
> To adjust the lumbar support, press the button
@ at the applicable location.
Front seat massage function
Massage function Applies to: vehicles with massage function
Switch the massage function on oroff @). Setting Selecting the massage function
the massage type and intensity > page 62. Applies to: MMI
> To access the Massage menu, press the J but-

ZA\ WARNING ton @) > page 61, fig. 51.
The power front seats can also be adjusted Switching the massage function on or off
when the ignition is switched off. To reduce Applies to: MMI
the risk of injury, children should never be left
> To switch the massage function on or off, press
unattended in the vehicle.
the J button @ © page 61, fig. 51. Or:
> Press Start/Stop on the MMI.
Neem a Rice D
Applies to: vehicles with seat settings in the MMI Setting the massage type and intensity
Applies to: MMI
You can adjust additional settings in the MMI.
> To adjust the massage type, press the desired
Cre button on the MMI, for example Wave.

RAZ-0589)
> To adjust the intensity of the massage, press

—O @— Intensity on the MMI repeatedly until the de-
sired level is reached.
©=-c (i) Tips

The massage function switches off automati-
Fig. 52 Upper display: seat setting
cally after approximately 10 minutes.
The settings and the number of menus and but-
tons depend on the vehicle equipment. ONC eerste Meee
Operating You can adjust additional settings and switch

Applies to: MMI functions on or off in the MMI.
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
> To access the various menus (3), swipe to the VEHICLE > Seats > Additional seat settings.
left or right.
> To display the various seats, press ) or ¢ @®. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
ing options may be available.
The red color of the symbol () indicates which
seat is selected.
62
Reset seat position Steering wheel

You can adjust the position of the front passeng-
General information
er’s seat to match the driver's seat.
Make sure that:
Driver seat entry assistance/Front passenger
seat entry assistance — The distance between your upper body and the
Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or exit steering wheel is at least 10 in (25 cm)
the vehicle. — Your arms are bent slightly at the elbows
— You have a sufficient view of the area around
the vehicle and you have a clear view of the in-
Adjusting the front passenger's seat from
AK Least strument cluster and head-up display”.
Applies to: vehicles with front passenger seat adjustment — You are always holding the steering wheel with
both hands on the outer edge at the sides (9:00
You can adjust the front passenger's side with the and 3:00 position) when driving
driver's seat buttons.
Applies to: MMI: ZA WARNING

—To reduce the risk of an accident, make sure
> Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > Seats.
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly and
> To display the various seats, press ) or ¢.
cannot be moved out of position before you
> To switch on the function, press the 2) button.
start to drive.
The lower edge of the button will turn red.
— If you are too close to the steering wheel,
After you have switched on the function, you can the driver's airbag cannot provide optimal
adjust the front passenger's seat using the driv- protection, which increases the risk of injury
er's seat buttons > page 61, fig. 51. or fatality.
— Never hold the steering wheel in the 12:00
@ Tips position or in any other way, such as holding
The function switches off automatically when the center of the steering wheel. Otherwise,
you exit the menu. your arms, hands, and head could be injured
in the event that the driver's airbag deploys.
aaa lerlenl et i
Applies to: vehicles with a front center armrest Power steering wheel position adjustment
The front center armrest is located between the The steering wheel position can be adjusted elec-
front seats. trically up/down and forward/back.
Adjusting the center armrest 2

SzS
> To adjust the armrest forward or backward, a
move the armrest in the desired direction.

> To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the
starting position in stages.
> To bring the armrest back into the starting po-
sition, raise it out of the top level and fold it
back down.
ZA WARNING Fig. 53 Steering column: switch for adjusting the steering

wheel position
4K0012721BD
In certain positions, the front center armrest

can interfere with the driver’s arm movement, > To move the steering wheel upward or down-
which increases the risk of injury. ward, press the switch upward or downward. >
63
> To move the steering wheel forward or back- — Only remove the rear seat head restraints if
ward, press the switch forward or backward. it is necessary to install a child safety seat
= page 73. Stow the removed head re-
The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the
straints securely, for example in the luggage
ignition is switched off.
compartment. Reinstall the head restraints
In vehicles with memory function, the steering immediately once the child safety seat has
column settings are stored together with the been removed. Driving without head re-
seat position. straints increases the risk of serious neck in-
juries.
@) Tips
Entry assistance makes it easier to enter or Front head restraints
exit the vehicle by moving the steering wheel Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
=> page 63, Driver seat entry assistance/
Front passenger seat entry assistance.
[RAZ-0683
Head restraints
(eT re eur lela)
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
B4G-0454
Fig. 55 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Adjusting the head restraints

> To adjust the head restraint upward or forward,
slide it until it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downward or back-
ward, press the button on the side and slide the
Fig. 54 Correctly adjusted head restraints
head restraint. Release the button and slide the
Make sure that: head restraint farther until it locks into place.
— The upper edge of the head restraint is as even

Rear head restraints
as possible with the top of your head
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restraints
— The head restraint is as close as possible to the
back of the head
— The head restraints on the occupied rear seats
are positioned as high as possible.
ZA\ WARNING
— There is one head restraint for each seat. All
vehicle occupants must adjust the head re-
straint correctly before every trip. Having
head restraints that are not adjusted cor-
rectly or not installed in the vehicle increas- Fig. 56 Rear seat: adjusting or removing the head restraint >
es the risk of a neck injury during sudden or

unexpected driving or braking maneuvers or
in a collision.
64
Adjusting the head restraints the airbags can deploy correctly and provide addi-
Applies to: vehicles with manually adjustable head restraints
tional protection. Safety belts provide protection
during collisions when the airbags do not deploy
> To adjust the head restraint upward, slide it un-
or if they have already deployed.
til it locks into place.
> To adjust the head restraint downward, press
A WARNING
the button @) and slide the head restraint. Re-
lease the button and slide the head restraint The risk of serious or fatal injury increases if
farther until it locks into place. the safety belt is not fastened, if it is worn in-
correctly, or if it is damaged.
Removing the headrests — All vehicle occupants, including the driver,
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
must fasten their safety belts correctly be-
> Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests: Fold fore every trip and must always keep their
the backrest forward slightly. See > page 83. safety belts fastened during the trip, regard-
> Move the head restraint upward all the way. less of whether the seat is equipped with an
> Insert a suitable object, such as the the extend- airbag or not. This also applies to children
ed vehicle key or mechanical key, into the re- that are seated in a child safety seat that is
lease point @ on the inside or outside of the appropriate for their weight and age and
base. that is secured with a safety belt.
> Press the button ) and pull the head restraint — In the event of a collision, vehicle occupants
out of the backrest > A\ in General informa- that are not wearing safety belts could be
tion on page 64. propelled through the vehicle interior and
collide with vehicle components, such as the
Installing the headrests
steering wheel, instrument panel, wind-
Applies to: vehicles with removable head restraints
shield, or doors. In some situations, vehicle
> Fold the backrest forward slightly > page 83. occupants could also be ejected from the ve-
> Slide the posts on the head restraint down into hicle. Vehicle occupants in the rear seats
the guides until the posts click into place. who do not wear safety belts not only en-
> Press the button (2) and slide the head restraint danger themselves, but also other people in
all the way down. It should not be possible to the vehicle.
remove the head restraint from the backrest — Only one person may be fastened with a
without pressing the button. safety belt at a time. Never secure more
than one person, including children, with a
Safety belts single safety belt.
— Never allow children or infants to ride on an-
other person's lap and be belted into the
Each seat is equipped with a three-point safety safety belt with them.
belt. Safety belts that are worn correctly are the — Insert the belt buckle only in the belt latch
most effective way to reduce the risk of serious or belonging to the corresponding seat, so that
fatal injuries in a collision. Therefore, wear your the protective function is not impaired.
safety belt correctly and make sure that all vehi- —To ensure the maximum protective function
cle passengers are also wearing their safety belts of the safety belts, all vehicle passengers
correctly when the vehicle is moving. must sit in the correct seating position
=> page 60.
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an air-
— Check the condition of your vehicle’s safety
bag system, every vehicle passenger must still al-
belts regularly > page 267. If you find dam-
ways wear the appropriate safety belt. In addi-
4K0012721BD
age to the belt webbing, the belt connec-

tion to their normal protective function, safety
tions, the retractor, or the buckle, have the
belts also hold vehicle occupants in the correct
damaged safety belt replaced by an
seating position in the event of a collision so that
65
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi — The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
Service Facility. rest over the center of the shoulder.
— The safety belts must not be removed or — The safety belt must always rest flat and se-
modified in any way. Do not attempt to re- curely on the body.
pair the safety belts yourself. For pregnant women, the safety belt must rest
— Safety belts that are strained during an acci- evenly across the chest and as low and flat as
dent, and thus stretched, must be replaced possible on the lap, so that no pressure is applied
by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized to the lower abdomen. This should be done
Audi Service Facility. throughout the entire pregnancy > fig. 58.
Correct safety belt positioning Z\ WARNING

Incorrect safety belt positioning can cause se-
rious injury in the event of an accident or dur-
B4H-0751
ing sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
— Never drive with the backrest reclined ex-
tremely far. The more the backrest is tilted
back, the greater the risk of injury due to the
safety belt being routed incorrectly.
— The safety belt itself or a loose safety belt
can cause serious injuries if it shifts onto
soft areas of the body, such as the stomach.
— The shoulder portion of the safety belt must
lie over the center of the shoulder and
RAZ-0696,
chest, and never under the arm, behind the

back, or across the neck or face.
— The lap portion of the safety belt must lie
across the lap and never over the stomach.
— The safety belt must lie flat and securely on
the upper part of the body and the lap.
— The belt webbing must not be pinched or
as twisted, or rub against sharp edges.
Fig. 58 Safety belt positioning for pregnant women — If the safety belt height is set incorrectly
and/or the safety belt is routed incorrectly,
Fastened safety belts only offer optimal protec- then the safety belt's protective function
tion during an accident and reduce the risk of se- will be impaired in the event of an accident.
rious injury or death when they are positioned Make sure the safety belt is at the right
correctly. Furthermore, the correct safety belt height and is routed correctly for the pas-
position holds the vehicle occupant in place so senger using it.
that a deployed airbag can provide maximum — A safety belt that is too loose may lead to in-
protection. Therefore, always fasten the safety juries during an accident, because your body
belt and make sure it is positioned correctly will move farther forward due to kinetic en-
> fig. 57. ergy and will be stopped abruptly by the
To ensure the safety belt is positioned correctly, belt.
make sure of the following points: — Heavily bulky, loose clothing (for example, a
coat over a sports jacket) may prevent the
— The lap portion of the safety belt must be locat-
seat and safety belts from functioning cor-
ed across the lap.
rectly.
66
— Do not position the safety belt over hard or Unfastening the safety belt
breakable objects (such as glasses, pens, > Press the red button on the belt latch > fig. 60.
GiKe)), The belt buckle will pop out.
— The lap belt portion of the safety belt must > Guide the belt back by hand so that the safety
sit as low as possible on the lap of pregnant belt can roll up more easily.
women and lie flat under the belly.
SEA leet RS etna
@) Note
Make sure that there are no hook-and-loop B- If the indicator light turns on or flashes, a
fasteners or sharp objects such as zippers or safety belt is not fastened or it has been unfas-
rivets on clothing in the area where the safety tened while the vehicle is in motion. Above cer-
belt is worn. Otherwise, the safety belt could
tain speeds, additional warning tones will sound.
be damaged. Depending on the equipment, the safety belts in
the rear may also be monitored using the follow-
Fastening and unfastening safety belts ing indicator lights:
aI - If this indicator light turns on, the safety

B4H-0462
belt for the corresponding rear seat is not fas-

tened.
Ba - If this indicator light turns on, the safety

|
belt for the rear seat has been fastened.

aS
g- If this indicator light turns on with a white

,
light, the safety belt for the rear seat has been
fastened. If the indicator light flashes or turns
gray, a safety belt in the rear is not fastened or
has been unfastened while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.
B4H-0270
Adjusting the height of the safety belt

\
B4G-0004
Fig. 60 Releasing the belt buckle from the belt latch
Fastening the safety belt

Fig. 61 Belt height adjustment for the front seats - safety
> Pull the safety belt by the belt buckle evenly belt relay
across your chest and lap.
> Insert the belt buckle in the belt latch belong- > To move the belt higher, slide the safety belt re-
ing to the seat until it audibly engages lay @ upward.
> fig. 59. > To move the belt lower, press the release but-
4K0012721BD
> Pull on the belt to make sure that the belt is se- ton @ and slide the safety belt relay @) down-
curely locked in the latch. ward. >
67
> To check if the safety belt relay is securely loosen. This reduces forward movement by the
locked in place, pull firmly on the belt. vehicle passengers.
@ Tips ZA\ WARNING

You can also adjust the height of the front The pyrotechnic system can only provide pro-
seats to change the position of the safety tection during one collision. If the pyrotechnic
belts. belt tensioners deploy, the pretensioning sys-
tem must be replaced by an authorized Audi
PXe ert eam imately dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
Belt retractor lock G) Tips

The safety belts on the rear seats and on the Smoke may be released when pyrotechnic belt
front passenger seat are equipped with a belt re- tensioners deploy. This is not a sign of a vehi-
tractor lock. cle fire.
> If you secure a child safety seat with a safety

belt, the belt retractor lock on the safety belt Memory function
may need to be activated. Follow the instruc-
General information
tions from the child safety seat manufacturer.
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
» When a vehicle passenger has fastened a safety
belt, the belt retractor lock should not be acti- With the memory function, you can save and call
vated. If the belt retractor lock has been acti- up seat profiles using the memory buttons in the
vated unexpectedly, deactivate it. door trim panel.
Deactivating or activating the belt retractor lock Depending on the equipment, it may be possible
=> page 76. to store the following settings:
Safety belt retractor — Driver's seat: seat, steering wheel*, exterior

mirrors
The safety belts are equipped with an automatic
— Front passenger's seat: seat
belt retractor. This automatic retractor allows the
safety belt to be pulled all the way out when the
belt is pulled slowly. However, the automatic re- Storing and recalling a seat profile
Applies to: vehicles with memory function
tractor locks during sudden braking maneuvers.
It also locks the belts when accelerating, driving The memory function buttons are located in the
uphill, and driving around curves. door trim panel.
Belt force limiter Storing a seat profile
Safety belts with belt force limiters reduce the > Press the [SET] button. If the LED in the button
force placed on the body by the safety belts dur- turns on, a seat profile can be stored.
ing a collision. > Push one of the numbered memory buttons. A
tone confirms that the settings were stored.
Safety belt pretensioners
Safety belts may be tightened with reversible Accessing a seat profile
belt tensioners when you start driving and in cer- > While the driver’s or front passenger's door is
tain driving situations. If the safety belt is too open and the ignition is switched off, press the
loose, it will be tightened so that the belt will memory button once briefly. The seat will be
rest closer to the body. fully adjusted to the settings in the seat profile.
In some collisions, pyrotechnic belt tensioners > If the driver's/front passenger's door is closed
may secure the safety belts so that they cannot or the ignition is switched on, press and hold >
68
the memory button until the seat profile is airbag systems, especially on the steering
completely set. wheel, on the instrument panel, on the
doors, on the windows, or in the footwell.
Z\ WARNING — Never put stickers on the airbag system cov-
— To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat ers or cover them with any objects.
setting can only be recalled when the vehicle — Only lightweight clothing should be hung
is stationary. from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
— In an emergency, the recall process can be not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
canceled by pressing the seat adjustment The pockets of the clothing must not con-
button on that seat. tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged
objects. This could impair the effectiveness
@) Tips of the side curtain airbags.
— You must not use seat or protective covers
that are not specifically approved for use on
Audi seats with side airbags. Since the side
airbags deploy from the seat backrest, such
Airbag system covers could impair the protective function
General information of the side airbags.
— Damage to the original seat covers in the
ZA WARNING side airbag deployment area must always be
repaired by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— If you have not fastened your safety belt,
thorized Audi Service Facility.
you are in an incorrect seating position, or
— Airbag system components are installed at
you are too close to the airbag system, the
various locations in your vehicle. Incorrect
airbag system will not be able to protect
work or repairs on the vehicle could damage
you. This increases the risk of serious or fa-
the airbag system components or impair
tal injuries. Make sure that every vehicle
their functionality. This may prevent the air-
passenger has their safety belt correctly fas-
bags from deploying or cause them to de-
tened and is sitting in a correct seating posi-
ploy incorrectly in the event of an accident,
tion = page 60. This is necessary regardless
which increases the risk of serious or fatal
of whether the seat is equipped with an air-
injuries. Only have an authorized Audi dealer
bag or not.
or authorized Audi Service Facility make re-
— Never place your feet on the instrument
pairs or modifications to a vehicle.
panel, out of the window, or on the seat sur-
— The airbag system can only provide protec-
faces. To help ensure that the airbag system
tion during one collision. If there is another
can deploy correctly, never bend forward or
collision, the airbag system will not deploy
lean on the door or the side window. Other-
again. If the airbag system has deployed,
wise, serious and possibly fatal injuries can
have it replaced immediately by an author-
occur if the airbags deploy.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
— People, animals, or objects between the
Facility.
passengers and the airbag system can inter-
— Fine dust may appear if the airbags deploy.
fere with the correct deployment of the air-
This is completely normal and does not indi-
bag or can be thrown through the vehicle in-
cate a fire in the vehicle. The fine dust can ir-
terior, increasing the risk of serious or fatal
ritate the skin and mucous membranes in
injuries. Make sure that nothing is located
the eyes and can cause difficulty breathing,
between the vehicle occupants and the air-
4K0012721BD
particularly for individuals who have or have

bag system. Do not secure or transport any
objects within the deployment zone of the
69
had asthma or other health issues that af- If the ka indicator light does not turn on when
fect breathing. Exit the vehicle or open the the ignition is switched on, does not turn off af-
windows or doors to get access to fresh air. ter several seconds, or turns on or flashes while
driving, there may be a malfunction in one of the
Gi) Tips safety systems. Drive to an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately
If you are transporting children in the vehicle,
to have the malfunction corrected.
read the information and follow the safety
precautions > page 73.
ZA\ WARNING
Have the malfunction in the safety systems in-
Safety systems monitoring
spected immediately. Otherwise, there is a
The ka indicator light in the instrument cluster risk that the systems may not activate during
monitors the safety systems such as the airbags an accident, which increases the risk of seri-
(including the control modules, sensors, and wir- ous or fatal injury.
ing) and the belt tensioners. It turns on when you
switch the ignition on and turns off after several
seconds.
Description
RAZ-0239
Fig. 62 Airbag overview image (enlarged section: deployed airbags)
The locations of the airbags are labeled with @ Front passenger's airbag
“AIRBAG”. The following airbags are installed in @® Front and rear side airbags, if applicable
your vehicle: @ Head curtain airbag with ejection mitigation
@ Driver's airbag © Knee airbags
70
Airbags offer the best possible protection in your tion, modifications to the vehicle may be neces-
vehicle during an accident when they are used to- sary. For more information, contact an author-
gether with safety belts that are fastened cor- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
rectly, and when passengers are sitting in the cor- ty, or call Audi customer support at
rect seating position. Airbags are a supplementa- 1-800-822-2834.
ry restraint system and do not replace safety
belts. G) Tips
Airbags may deploy during front-impact, side-im- The side curtain airbags in your vehicle have
pact, or rollover accidents. ejection mitigation functions. This reduces
the risk of being ejected from the vehicle inte-
The deployment area for the airbag system can- rior during an accident, especially in the event
not be defined for every situation, since the cir- of a vehicle rollover.
cumstances surrounding accidents can vary wide-
ly. Factors that play an important role include the
Advanced airbag system
condition of the object that the vehicle hits (hard
or soft), the angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc.
The deciding factor for the deployment of the air-
bag system is the deceleration that occurs during
an accident. Sensors in the vehicle are designed
to detect the severity of an accident in conjunc-
tion with the control module, and to provide a
targeted and timely deployment of the restraint
cS Fa an \ +
system. If the vehicle deceleration that is meas-
ured during an accident is below the specified |
reference values in the control module, then the Fig. 63 Headliner: indicator light to display the status of
airbags will not deploy, even though the vehicle the front passenger's airbag
may be severely damaged from the accident. In
these cases, the vehicle occupants will be pro- The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has
tected by the safety belts if they are fastened and been certified to comply with the requirements
worn correctly. of the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor
The deployment of the front passenger's airbag
Vehicle Safety Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applica-
will depend on the occupancy of the seat
ble at the time your vehicle was manufactured.
> page 71.
According to these requirements, the front Ad-
Each deployed airbag is filled with gas. When this vanced Airbag System on the passenger’s side
occurs, the airbag covers open and the airbags has been certified for “suppression” for infants
unfold with great force into the deployment zone approximately 12 months old and younger, and
within milliseconds. Inflated airbags reduce the for “low risk deployment” for children aged 3 to
movement of passengers wearing safety belts in 6 years old (as defined in the standard).
the direction of the impact and thus help to re-
The advanced airbag system will activate or deac-
duce the risk of injury. They can help to protect
tivate the front passenger's airbag based on the
the head, upper body, and lap, for example. How-
occupancy of the seat. If a front airbag deploys
ever, there is the possibility that airbag deploy-
during an accident, the deployment force will
ment can cause injuries.
adapt to the passenger.
The airbag system only works when the ignition
Components
is turned on.
4K0012721BD
The advanced airbag system consists of the fol-

If you or other vehicle passengers have physical
lowing components: >
limitations that prevent sitting in a correct posi-
71
— Front airbags in the steering wheel and in the will turn on. If the front passenger's airbag is de-
instrument panel on the front passenger's side: activated, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;
these can protect the front passengers during indicator light will turn on.
an accident
The deployment force of the front airbags adapts
— Passenger occupant detection sensor in the
based on whether or not the safety belt is used
front passenger's seat: this detects if the front
and the distance between the seat and the steer-
passenger's seat is occupied (for example, by a
ing wheel/instrument panel. For example, ifa
person or a small child in a child safety seat)
person is too close to the front airbag, the front
— Seat position sensors on the front seats: these
airbag will deploy with less force to help reduce
determine the distance between the seat and the risk of injury.
the steering wheel or instrument panel
— Sensors in the front seat belt latch: these de- Meaning of PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3¥; ON
tect if the safety belts are fastened ® indicator light
— Indicator light When the ignition is switched on, the system de-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; ON @ in the tects whether the front passenger's seat is occu-
headliner: this indicates if the front passenger's pied. PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #;, ON @
airbag is activated or deactivated will turn on for several seconds during this proc-
- indicator light in the instrument cluster: ess. Then it will indicate whether the front pas-
this monitors the function of the Advanced Air- senger's airbag is activated or deactivated.
bag System components to ensure they are
— PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #%%;: the front
functioning correctly
passenger's airbag is deactivated and will not
How the components function together deploy in the event of an accident.
— PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ®: the front pas-
The passenger occupant detection sensor in the
senger's airbag is activated and could deploy in
front passenger's seat detects if the front pas-
the event of an accident.
senger's seat is occupied. The passenger occu-
pant detection sensor measures the electrical ca- If a change to the occupancy status of the front
pacity on the front passenger’s seat. The pas- passenger's seat is detected
senger's airbag is activated or deactivated de- PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #, ON @ will
pending on the electrical capacity that is meas- flash for several seconds and will then display the
ured. status of the front passenger's airbag.
The passenger's airbag is activated if: Always make sure the indicator light corresponds
to the occupancy of the front passenger's seat.
— The electrical capacity is higher than the
threshold stored in the control module — An adult or individual of similar size in the
— The electrical capacity is the same as or greater front passenger's seat: the front passenger's
than the electrical capacity of a typical adult airbag must be activated, so
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON ® must remain
The passenger's airbag is deactivated if:
on.
— The electrical capacity is lower than the thresh- — An individual of smaller size (for example, an
old stored in the control module adolescent or small adult) in the front pas-
— The electrical capacity is the same as or less senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
than the electrical capacity of a typical one- must be activated, so
year-old child in a child safety seat that has PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ must remain
been used for certification in accordance with on.
FMVSS 208 — Child in a child safety seat on the front pas-
If the front passenger's airbag is activated, the senger's seat: the front passenger's airbag
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ indicator light must be deactivated, so
72
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #; must remain — Fluids, electronic devices, or mechanical
on. damage on the front passenger's seat may
— Front passenger's seat not occupied: the front cause the front passenger seat occupant de-
passenger's airbag must be deactivated, so tection to malfunction. The system may
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; must remain then incorrectly detect if the front passeng-
on. er's seat is occupied. As a result, it could de-
ploy the front passenger’s airbag incorrectly
ZA WARNING or fail to deploy it, which increases the risk
— An adult or a person with a small stature of serious or fatal injury. Make sure that no
(such as a young person or small adult) seat- wet objects (such as a wet hand towel) and
ed on the front passenger's seat will not be no fluids come into contact with the front
protected by the passenger's airbag in the passenger's seat cushion. If the front pas-
event of a collision if the passenger's airbag senger's seat becomes wet, dry it immedi-
is deactivated. This increases the risk of in- ately. Make sure no electronic devices (such
jury and death. Always make sure that as a laptop or a retrofitted seat heater) are
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ remains on on the front passenger's seat. Do not trans-
while driving. If port any objects on or under the front pas-
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ does not senger's seat.
turn on, make sure the front passenger is — Seat covers or protective covers may prevent
sitting correctly in the seat > page 60 and the advanced airbag system from correctly
that there are no objects covering the front detecting child safety seats or passengers in
passenger's seat (such as blankets or pil- the front passenger's seat. You must not use
lows). If PASSENGER AIR BAG ON @ seat covers or protective covers on the front
still does not turn on, the front passenger's passenger's seat that are not specifically ap-
seat must not be used. Drive to an author- proved for use on Audi seats with an ad-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service vanced airbag system.
Facility and have the airbag system inspect-
ed. Child safety seats
—Achild ina child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat - especially in a rear-facing General information
child safety seat - can receive a severe im-
When installing and using child safety seats, fol-
pact if the front passenger's airbag deploys,
low the information in this Owner's Manual, the
which increases the risk of serious or fatal
applicable state and federal regulations, and the
injury. Always secure child safety seats on
manufacturer instructions for the child safety
the rear seats. If special circumstances re-
seat.
quire the use of a child safety seat on the
front passenger's seat, always make sure You can also obtain useful and current informa-
that PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 3%; re- tion from the following sources:
mains on while driving. If
U.S. National Highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF #¥; does not
tration
turn on, remove the child safety seat and in-
http://www.nhtsa.gov
stall it again according to the child safety
http://www. safercar.gov
seat manufacturer instructions. If
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF &%; still does National SAFE KIDS Campaign
not turn on, the front passenger's seat must http://www. safekids.org
not be used. Drive to an authorized Audi
4K0012721BD
SafetyBeltSafe U.S.A.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility http://www.carseat.org
and have the airbag system inspected.
73
Transport Canada Information Centre ry, adjust the angle and position of the seat
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety in front of the child safety seat.
Audi Customer Experience Center — The rear side of a forward-facing child safety
https://www.audiusa.com/help/contact-us seat should be positioned as close as possi-
https://www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/models/layer/ ble to the backrest on the vehicle seat. If the
contact.html head restraints make it difficult to install a
child safety seat, adjust or remove them if
ZA WARNING necessary > page 64. Reinstall the head re-
straints immediately once the child safety
To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries,
seat has been removed.
children must always be secured in the vehicle
— Always make sure that the backrest on the
with a child safety seat that is appropriate for
seat where the child safety seat is installed
their body size, weight, and age.
is securely locked in place and cannot move
— Children ages 12 and under must be trans-
forward. Otherwise, the backrest where the
ported using the appropriate child safety
child safety seat is secured could move for-
seat. Note differences in regulations be-
ward in the event of an accident or other
tween states and countries.
emergency situation.
— Child safety seats secured incorrectly in the
— NEVER use a rear-facing child safety seat on
vehicle may cause serious or fatal injuries in
a seat with an ACTIVATED FRONT AIRBAG;
the event of an accident. Always secure the
this could cause DEATH or SERIOUS INJU-
child safety seat according to the manufac-
RIES to a CHILD.
turer instructions.
— Children or babies must not under any cir- — Always secure child safety seats on the
cumstances be held on the lap of the driver rear seats. If exceptional circumstances re-
or other passengers while driving. quire the child safety seat to be placed on
the front passenger's seat, then the front
— Do not secure more than one child in a child
passenger's airbag must be deactivated.
safety seat.
Always make sure that
— Never allow a child to sit in a child safety
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; remains
seat unsupervised.
on while driving. If
— Never allow children to ride unsecured in the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF %; does not
vehicle or to stand or kneel on the seats
turn on, remove the child safety seat and
while driving. In the event of an accident, a
install it again according to the child safe-
child could be propelled through the vehicle.
ty seat manufacturer instructions. If
This can cause serious or fatal injuries for
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 2; still
the child and passengers.
does not turn on, the front passenger's
— If children use an incorrect seating position
seat must not be used. Drive to an author-
while driving, they have a higher risk of in-
jury during a sudden braking maneuver or
Facility and have the airbag system in-
accident. This especially applies to children
spected.
in the front passenger's seat or children who
— If you must use a forward-facing child safety
have their head near the side airbag deploy-
seat on the front passenger's seat, move the
ment area, if the airbag system is deployed
seat as far back as possible so that it is as
during an accident. This incorrect seating
far as possible from the front passenger's
position can cause severe or even fatal inju-
airbag. While doing this, make sure the seat
ries.
can be adjusted all the way. A child in a child
— Make sure there is enough space in front of
safety seat on the front passenger's seat can
the child in the child safety seat. If necessa-
74
receive a severe impact if the front passeng- Only switch to a larger child safety seat when
er's airbag deploys, which increases the risk absolutely necessary
of serious or fatal injury. Switch to a larger child safety seat only when ab-
— Replace the child safety seat after an acci- solutely necessary. Secure your child using a safe-
dent because there could be damage that is ty belt without a child safety seat only if all of the
not visible. following statements are true:
— Even if a child is not sitting in the child safe-
—The child is large enough to sit upright in the
ty seat, the child safety seat must be se-
seat
cured. An unsecured child safety seat may
—The child is able to sit with his or her back rest-
be thrown through the vehicle interior dur-
ing completely on the seat backrest
ing sudden braking maneuvers or an acci-
— The child is able to sit with his or her knees
dent.
bent over the edge of the seat surface
—The child is able to sit with both of his or her
Correct positioning for children feet completely touching the floor in the foot-
well
Always secure children in a child safety seat de-
— The lap portion of the safety belt lies flat and
signed for the body size, weight, and age of the
securely over the hip area and never over the
child.
stomach
You can secure child safety seats in your vehicle —The shoulder portion of the safety belt lies flat
using the lower LATCH anchors or the safety and securely over the center of the shoulder
belts. You can also secure child safety seats to and the chest, and never under the arm, behind
the top tether anchor. Depending on the child the back, or over the neck or face.
safety seat, it may also be necessary to secure it —The child is able to maintain this seating posi-
to the top tether anchor. In Canada, securing for- tion throughout the entire trip
ward-facing child safety seats to the top tether
anchors is required by law. Read and follow the important information and
warnings regarding the correct use of safety belts
Always transport children in the rear seats => page 65.
Accident statistics show that children that are se-
G) Tips
cured correctly in the rear seats are safer than in
front seats. Always transport children in suitable — Child safety seats can also be secured to
child safety seats secured on the rear seats. seats with side airbags. In the event of an
accident, children can also be protected by
In exceptional circumstances: transporting the side airbags if the child is correctly se-
children in the front passenger's seat
cured in a suitable child safety seat that is
If exceptional circumstances require the child attached correctly.
safety seat to be placed on the front passenger's —The lower LATCH anchors as well as the
seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be safety belt may be required to correctly in-
deactivated. Please note the important informa- stall some child safety seats. Using both at
tion for this > page 71, Advanced airbag system. the same time is permitted, provided that
If you must secure a forward-facing child safety the fastening systems or safety belts do not
seat, move the front passenger's seat as far back impair those in an adjacent seating position.
as possible so that it is as far as possible from the —All child safety seats are constructed so that
front passenger's airbag. While doing this, make they can be secured using the lap safety belt
sure the seat can be adjusted all the way. in the vehicle.
4K0012721BD
— Child safety seats with a support base can

only be secured to the outer rear seats and
to the front passenger's seat.
75
Secu OR CRT aa
LATCH anchors
Te eR amg ZA WARNING
The LATCH anchors in the vehicle are only de-
signed for child safety seats with the LATCH
system. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal
injury, never secure other child restraint sys-
tems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
@® Tips
The LATCH anchors are designed for a total
weight (child and child safety seat combined)
up to 65 lbs (29 kg). If the total weight is
Fig. 64 Rear bench seat: lower LATCH anchors greater than this, the child safety seat must
be secured with the vehicle safety belt.
In the United States and Canada, child safety Secu OMe aa RT La

seats can be secured without safety belts using Prat
the LATCH system. LATCH stands for Lower An-
Follow the safety precautions > page 73. The
chors and Tethers for Children. In Canada, similar
front passenger’s seat is a dangerous location for
systems are called UCRA, LUAS, or UAS.
a child, even with an advanced airbag system. If
The lower LATCH anchors in your vehicle are lo- exceptional circumstances require the child safe-
cated on the outer seats of the rear bench seat ty seat to be placed on the front passenger's
between the seat surface and the backrest. These seat, then the front passenger's airbag must be
seating locations each have two lower LATCH an- deactivated. Please note the important informa-
chors that can be used to secure a LATCH child tion for this > page 75, Correct positioning for
safety seat. Marking points with a > fig. 64 sym- children and > page 71, Advanced airbag sys-
bol are located on the covers for the lower LATCH tem.
anchors. You can locate the LATCH anchors using
the marking points. Securing child safety seats
> Activate the child safety lock > page 43. > Activate the child safety lock > page 43.
> Remove the cover from both lower LATCH an- > If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat,
chors. secure any unused safety belts that are within
> If you secure a child safety seat to the rear seat, reach of the child > /\, > page 78.
secure any unused safety belts that are within > If you secure a child safety seat to the front
reach of the child > A\ in Securing child safety passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
seats with a safety belt on page 77. seat to the highest position.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the > Secure the child safety seat according to the
child safety seat manufacturer instructions. child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> If necessary, activate the belt retractor lock
> Pull on the child safety seat to check if both
sides are engaged correctly in the LATCH an- => page 77, Activating the belt retractor lock.
chors. > If the child safety seat is secured on the front
> If possible, also secure the child safety seat to passenger's seat, adjust the front passenger's
the respective top tether anchor on the seat seat backrest until it rests flat against the child
=> page 78. safety seat. Also make sure that the upper safe-
ty belt fixture is behind the child safety seat.
> If you secure a child safety seat on the rear
seat, also secure it to the correct top tether an-
chor if possible > page 78.
76
Activating the belt retractor lock safety seat manufacturer for routing the
If you secure a child safety seat using the vehicle safety belt correctly. Incorrectly fastened
safety belt, you must activate the belt retractor safety belts can cause injuries, even during
lock. Follow the child safety seat manufacturer minor accidents.
instructions.
The belt retractor lock prevents the safety belt

from becoming loose while driving, which could
result in the child safety seat no longer being ad-
equately secured.
> Secure the child safety seat according to the

child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
While doing so, pull out the safety belt. Insert
the safety belt into the belt latch that belongs
to that seat until it audibly locks.
> Pull the upper belt out completely and then al-
low it to retract. You will hear a clicking sound
while the belt is retracting. It will not be possi-
ble to pull the safety belt out any farther.
» Push the child safety seat into the seat and al-
low the belt to retract more.
> Make sure that the child safety seat cannot
move more than 1 inch (2.5 cm).
Deactivating the belt retractor lock

> Unbuckle the safety belt from the belt latch.
> Remove the child safety seat according to the
manufacturer instructions.
> Allow the safety belt to retract completely. The
belt retractor lock is deactivated.
ZA\ WARNING
— A safety belt that is not locked by the belt
retractor lock or a Locking device cannot se-
cure a child safety seat while driving or in
the event of an accident, which increases the
risk of fatal injury. Always make sure the
belt retractor lock on the safety belt is acti-
vated if the child safety seat manufacturer
instructions require it.
— Due to the risk of fatal injury, never place a
rear-facing child safety seat on the front
passenger's seat when the front passenger's
airbag is switched on.
— For the child safety seat to offer the maxi-
4K0012721BD
mum protection, it is especially important

to route the vehicle safety belt correctly. Al-
ways follow the instructions from the child
77
Add nally securing a child safety seat to There is a top tether anchor behind every seat in
the top tethe the rear bench seat to additionally secure a child
safety seat with an upper belt.
RAZ-0325)
> Move the head restraint behind the child safety
seat upward.
> Applies to: version 1: Fold the cover for the top
tether anchor upward.
>» Secure the child safety seat according to the
child safety seat manufacturer instructions.
> Guide the upper belt on the child safety seat
under the head restraint or along both sides of
it and toward the rear (depending on the child
safety seat model).
> Fasten the belt to the top tether anchor
=> fig. 66. While doing this, make sure the belt
is not twisted and is not running over any sharp
edges.
> Pull the belt tightly so that the child safety seat
rests at the top of the seat backrest.
> If necessary, move the head restraint behind
the child safety seat downward.
Fig. 65 Version @) rear shelf/ Version @) rear backrest: top
tether anchors for securing a child safety seat with an up-
per strap
The top tether anchors in the vehicle are only
designed for child safety seats equipped with
RAZ-0093
an upper strap. To reduce the risk of serious or

fatal injury, never secure other child restraint
systems, belts, or objects to the anchors.
Yateem tei Liam oly

TT eth 4
Fig. 67 Rear bench seat: securing unused safety belts
Fig. 66 Version (@) rear shelf/ Version @) rear backrest: se- If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench
curing the upper strap on the top tether anchor seat, the child must not be able to reach any
safety belts that are not being used. Secure safe-
Follow the safety precautions > page 73. ty belts that are within reach of the child. >
78
> If you secure a child safety seat to the LATCH

anchors, fasten the safety belt on the seat
where the child safety seat is installed using
the seat's safety belt latch.
> If you secure a child safety seat to one of the
outer seats, fasten the safety belt for the cen-
ter seat in its latch.
> Activate the belt retractor lock on the fastened
safety belts. To do this, pull the upper belt out
completely and then allow it to retract. You will
hear a clicking sound while the belt is retract-
ing. It will not be possible to pull the safety
belt out any farther.
> Make sure the fastened safety belt does not
block access to the LATCH anchors. Otherwise,
it may not be possible to secure the child safety
seat to the LATCH anchors correctly.
Z\ WARNING
A child in a child safety seat could play with
the unused safety belts and then become en-
tangled in them, which increases the risk of
fatal injury. Always secure unused safety belts
so that they are not within reach of children in
child safety seats.
4K0012721BD
79
Stowing and using
Stowing and using Cup holders

Applies to: vehicles with cup holders
Power sources
[RAz-0745
When the ignition is switched on, you may be
able to use multiple power sources for external
devices, depending on the vehicle equipment.
12 volt sockets
You can connect electrical accessories to the 12
volt sockets. The power usage must not exceed
120 watts.
The 12 volt sockets are labeled with the 12V

symbol. They are located in the front center con-
sole, in the rear* and on the side trim panel in the
luggage compartment*.
USB ports
Applies to: vehicles with USB input
You can charge mobile devices using the USB

ports. The USB ports are labeled with the «> or
(4 symbol or CHARGE ONLY.
ZA\ WARNING Fig. 69 Rear center armrest*: cup holders
—To reduce the risk of fatal injury, store all Front center console cup holders
connected devices securely when driving so
> The cup holder @ may be under a cover. To
that they do not move around inside the ve-
open the cup holder, tap on the strip on the
hicle when braking or in the event of an acci-
cover.
dent.
— Incorrect usage can lead to serious injuries Rear center armrest* cup holders
or burns. To reduce the risk of injuries, never
> Fold the center armrest* downward.
leave children unattended in the vehicle
> To open the cup holders @), tap on the strip on
with the vehicle key.
the cover.
> To close the cup holders, slide them back and
@) Note
push the top of the cover down.
— Read the operating manuals for the con-
nected devices. Z\ WARNING
—To reduce the risk of damage to the vehicle
— Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
electrical system, never attempt to charge
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
the vehicle battery by connecting accesso-
erages could spill, which increases the risk
ries that provide power to the power sour-
of injury.
ces.
— Do not use any breakable beverage contain-
— Do not connect any device whose network
ers (for example, made out of glass or por-
class (voltage) does not match the network
celain). You could be injured by them in the
class designed for the socket.
event of an accident.
— Disconnect the connectors from the power
sources carefully to reduce the risk of dam-
aging them.
80
Stowing and using
— Storage compartments in the door trim panel

@) Note
— Net in the front passenger's footwell
Beverage containers in the cup holders should — Key compartment in the front center console
always have a lid. Otherwise, the liquid inside
— Storage compartment under the front center
could spill and cause damage to vehicle
armrest
equipment.
— Nets on the back of the front seats
— Garment hooks in the rear
Storage and — Storage compartment in the rear center arm-
compartments rest
— Bag hooks in the luggage compartment
Storage area behind the rear head
eel ey — Net in luggage compartment
Applies to: vehicles with storage area behind the rear head re-
straints ZA\ WARNING
The storage area can be used to carry light pieces —To reduce the risk of injury, make sure all
of clothing. storage compartments are always closed
while driving.
Z\ WARNING — Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
The storage compartment must not be used
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
to transport heavy objects, hard objects, or
an accident. Store objects securely while
animals. Such objects endanger vehicle occu-
driving.
pants and increase the risk of injury during
— Only use the storage compartments in the
sudden driving or braking maneuvers or in an
door trim panels to store small objects that
accident.
will not stick out of the compartment and
impair the function of the side airbags.
@) Note
— Only lightweight clothing should be hung
Make sure that the heating grid strips for the from the garment hooks in the vehicle. Do
rear window defogger are not damaged by not use clothes hangers to hang clothing.
abrasive objects. The pockets of the clothing must not con-
tain any heavy, breakable, or sharp-edged
@ Tips
objects. This could impair the effectiveness
To ensure the ventilation functions correctly, of the side curtain airbags.
the ventilation slots between the rear window — Make sure your view toward the rear is not
and the storage area must not be covered. blocked, for example by hanging clothing or
objects in the vehicle.
Additional storage
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there may

Luggage compartment
be a variety of storage areas, compartments, and General information
retainers at various locations in the vehicle.
All pieces of luggage or objects must be securely
— Glove compartment: the glove compartment
fastened in the luggage compartment. Note the
can be locked using the mechanical key
following to maintain good vehicle handling:
=> page 36.
— Holders for a notepad and a pen in the glove > Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
compartment partment.
4K0012721BD
— Storage compartment in the cockpit on the > Stow heavy luggage as far forward in the lug-
driver's side gage compartment as possible. >
81
Stowing and using
> Use non-elastic cords attached to the tie-downs — Never transport passengers in the luggage
to secure objects. compartment. Every passenger must be cor-
rectly secured with the safety belts in the
ZA WARNING vehicle > page 65.
— Applies to: vehicles with luggage compart- — Be careful when releasing the backrest and
ment cover: The luggage compartment cov- folding it forward. To reduce the risk of be-
er is not a surface for storing objects. Ob- ing pinched, pay attention and check when
jects placed on the cover increase the risk of folding backrests forward.
injury to all vehicle occupants during sudden — The backrest must be securely latched so
driving or braking maneuvers or in the event objects cannot slide forward out of the lug-
of an accident. gage compartment during sudden braking.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- — The backrest must be latched securely to en-
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- sure that the safety belt is protecting the
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of center seating position.
an accident. Always stow objects securely in — Always pull forward on the backrest to make
the luggage compartment and secure them sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
at the tie-downs. Use straps suitable for place.
heavy objects.
— If pieces of luggage or objects are secured @) Note
to the tie-downs with unsuitable or dam- —To reduce the risk of damage, move the rear
aged straps, this can increase the risk of in- head restraints down > page 64 before fold-
jury during braking maneuvers or accidents. ing the rear backrests forward.
— When transporting heavy objects, the vehi- — When folding the backrest forward, make
cle characteristics will change due to the sure the outer safety belts are in the belt
shift in the center of gravity, which increases guide recess so that they do not get pinched
the risk of an accident. You may need to in the backrest lock and damaged. Other ob-
adapt your driving style and speed to the jects should be removed from the rear
current conditions. bench seat to protect the backrest from
— The cargo net is only strong enough to se- damage.
cure light objects. Heavy objects are not ade- — If you move the front seat back when the
quately secured. Attempting to secure heavy rear seat backrest is folded forward, you
objects increases the risk of injury. could damage the head restraints on the
— Never exceed the permitted axle and load rear seat.
and vehicle weight > page 299. — Make sure that the heating grid strips for
— Never secure a child safety seat to the tie- the rear window defogger are not damaged
downs. by abrasive objects.
— Never leave your vehicle unattended, espe- — Let the luggage compartment cover roll up
cially if the luggage compartment lid is slowly to reduce the risk of damage.
open. Children could enter the luggage com- — Let the partition net roll up slowly to pre-
partment and close the luggage compart- vent damage.
ment lid from the inside. This creates the
risk of fatal injury, since the children would @ Tips
be locked in and may not be able to escape
— The tire pressure must be adapted to the
by themselves.
load > page 255.
— Do not allow children to play in or on the ve-
— You can purchase straps at specialty stores.
hicle. Close and lock the luggage compart-
ment lid as well as all other doors when you
leave the vehicle.
82
Stowing and using
Power luggage compartment cover Increasing the size of the luggage

Applies to: vehicles with power luggage compartment cover compartment
Applies to: vehicles with folding backrests
Fig. 72 Backrest: release lever, latching indicator with red

marking and lock*
Fig. 71 Luggage compartment: removing the luggage

compartment cover
Applies to: allroad:

Follow the safety precautions > page 81. Fig. 73 Luggage compartment: release lever*
If you open the luggage compartment lid, the

The rear seat backrests can be folded forward ei-
power luggage compartment cover will move in-
ther separately or together.
to position @ or @). You do not need to remove
the cover to load and unload the luggage com- Follow the safety precautions > page 81.
partment. > Pull the release lever (@) or @) in the direction
> To attach the luggage compartment cover, pull of the arrow to fold the backrest forward.
the cover out. Guide the cover past position @ > After the transport, fold the backrest up again
and install it at position (2). until it latches and the red marking @) is no
> To remove the luggage compartment cover, de- longer visible.
tach the cover and allow it to roll up. When secured, the backrest can be locked using
> Pull the lever () firmly in the direction of the the mechanical key in the lock @). This prevents
arrow and remove the cover upward. access to luggage compartment.
> To install the luggage compartment cover,
place the cover in the side trim panel mount on
the left side.
> Push the cover downward until it clicks into
place.
4K0012721BD
83
Stowing and using
The partition net prevents objects from sliding

into the passenger compartment.
> To set up the partition net, pull it upward. At-

tach the crossbrace to the mounting eyelets (@)
above the backrest.
> To remove the partition net, fold the backrest
forward > page 83 and remove the luggage
compartment cover > page 83.
> Press the left or right button @) on the parti-
tion net and lift the net upward to remove it.
Fig. 74 Center backrest: release lever > To install the partition net, slide it into the
mounts on the left and right.
Follow the safety precautions > page 81. > Press the partition net down diagonally at the
> To fold the center backrest forward, pull the left and right until it locks into place and the
lever @ behind the trim panel. red markings on the buttons are no longer visi-
> After the transport, fold the center backrest up ble.
until it locks into place.
Lr) on net (backrests folded forward)
Applies to: sedan: To lock the pass-through, turn
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
the lock behind the center backrest. This pre-
vents access to luggage compartment.
Applies to: vehicles with partition net
Fig. 77 Folded backrest: installing the partition net
> To install the partition net, fold the backrest

forward .> page 83
> Place the partition net on the recesses in the re-
taining rails @ and slide it all the way to the
left @.
> Pull out the net upward and attach it to the
mounting eyelets above the front seats.
> To remove the partition net, first slide it to the
right and then lift it out of the retaining rails.
You must remove the partition net before

Fig. 76 Luggage compartment: removing the partition net
folding the backrest back into the upright po-
sition.
84
Stowing and using
Tie-downs and cargo net > Attach the hooks for the cargo net to the tie-
downs.
Fixture set
Applies to: vehicles with a fixture set
Fig. 78 Luggage compartment: movable tie-downs*
Fig. 80 Luggage compartment: securing attachments
The telescoping rod @ and the securing strap (2)

help to prevent objects from sliding around in the
luggage compartment.
The fixture set is located in the openings under

stretched out
the cargo floor.
Follow the safety precautions > page 81. > Insert the movable tie-downs > page 85.
> Press the button @) on the retainers and place
Tie-downs
them on the tie-downs. Make sure the brackets
There are tie-downs in the luggage compartment are locked into place.
to secure pieces of luggage and objects. > Slide the tie-downs into the desired position.
> Press the button to tighten the securing strap.
> Use the tie-downs to secure the cargo.
Movable tie-downs
Applies to: vehicles with movable tie-downs
Store the movable tie-downs and the fixture
> To install the tie-downs, press both buttons at set in the openings under the cargo floor, if
the sides @, insert the tie-down in the rail, and necessary.
lock it in place.
> To slide the tie-downs, press both of the side
buttons and slide the tie-downs to the desired
position. The tie-downs must lock in place.
> To remove the tie-downs, press both buttons at
the sides and remove the tie-down from the
rail.
Cargo net
Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment net
Use the cargo net (2) to secure lighter objects in

4K0012721BD
the luggage compartment
> Fold the clip for the tie-downs upward.
8s
Stowing and using
ble cargo floor Roof rack

Applies to: vehicles with double cargo floor
General information
Applies to: vehicles with roof rack mount
Fig. 81 Luggage compartment: cargo floor set up
You can store dirty or wet objects under the cargo Applies to: sedan
Fig. 82 Roof: mounting points
floor.
> To set up the cargo floor, lift it by the handle @

and insert the edge of the cargo floor into the
openings @).
> To remove the cargo floor, pull the entire cargo
floor out of the guides toward the rear of the
vehicle.
> To install the cargo floor, first insert it into the
guides and then slide it all the way in toward Applies to: allroad
the backrest. Fig. 83 Roof rail: mounting points
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,

you must observe the following:
Objects only up to a maximum of about 16.5
lbs (7.5 kg) may be transported under the car- — These roof racks are the basis for a complete
go floor. To reduce the risk of injury, they roof rack system. Only roof racks that are suita-
must only be as tall as two-thirds of the ble for your vehicle may be used. Roof racks and
height of the cargo floor when it is set up. Ob- attachments from the Audi Genuine Accesso-
jects must be secured adequately. ries program are recommended.
— Make sure the roof rack is mounted on the vehi-
cle only at the specified locations @ or @).
— Note the permitted axle load, permitted total
weight, and permitted roof load of your vehicle
=> page 299. The roof load is the total of the
weight of the roof rack, the attachments and
the cargo you are carrying. However, you must
also note the permitted load of the carrier sys-
tem being used.
— Follow the installation instructions provided

with the roof rack system. If you do not
86
Stowing and using
secure the roof rack system and objects on

the roof correctly, they could come loose
from the vehicle and cause an accident.
— The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
driving characteristics by shifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface
area exposed to wind. You may need to
adapt your driving style and speed to the
current conditions. We recommend that you
do not drive faster than 80 mph (130
km/h).
() Note
Make sure that the luggage compartment lid
and the panoramic glass roof* do not come in-
to contact with objects on the roof when they
are open.
@ For the sake of the environment

Energy usage will increase because of the in-
creased wind resistance. Remove the roof rack
when you are no longer using it.
4K0012721BD
87
Warm and cold
Warm and cold These systems are available again as soon as

the energy supply has been restored.
Climate control system — Certain settings are stored automatically in
One of the following options may be available,

depending on vehicle equipment:
— A deluxe automatic climate control system with

3 zones where the temperature, air distribu-
tion, and air supply can be set separately on the
left front side, the right front side, and in the
AUTO AUTO
rear
Von co (laa
— A deluxe automatic climate control system with
4 zones to individually adjust the temperature,
air distribution, and amount of ventilation at all
Fig. 84 Lower display and switch panel
of the seats
The climate control system warms, cools, dehu- Settings are adjusted using both displays, the
midifies, and filters the air in the vehicle interior. switch panel in the center console, and the con-
It is the most effective when the windows and trol panel in the rear. For information on how to
panoramic glass roof* are closed. If there is a operate the touch displays, see > page 18, Touch
build-up of heat inside the vehicle, ventilation displays.
can help to speed up the cooling process.
You can adjust all climate control system settings
The climate control system automatically main- in the front; only certain functions are available
tains a temperature once it has been set. In all in the rear.
heating mode functions except defrost, the blow-
Lower display
er only switches to a higher speed once the en-
gine coolant has reached a certain temperature. The lower display has two sections with controls:
You can regulate the blower and the air distribu-

tion automatically using AUTO in area (@). You can
Energy can be saved by switching off the A/C also apply individual settings here.
mode.
In area ®, you can switch individual climate con-
@ Tips trol system functions on and off.
—To prevent interference with the heating or Switch panel in the center console
cooling output and to prevent the windows
Both §& and & buttons to defog windows as
from fogging over, the air intake in front of
quickly as possible are located in area @).
the windshield must be free of ice, snow,
and leaves. Upper display
— Condensation from the cooling system can
In the upper display, you can switch additional
drip and form a puddle of water under the
functions on and off, display them, and adjust
vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
settings.
there is a leak.
— The energy management system may tem- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
porarily switch off certain functions, such as VEHICLE > Climate control, or
the seat heating” or rear window defogger. > Select «++ on the Lower display.
838
Warm and cold
Control panel in rear OFF Switching off

You can operate certain climate control functions The climate control system is switched off. Air
in the rear using the control panel. supply from the outside is blocked. If you press
OFF in the front, the front and rear climate con-
Customizing
trol system will switch off. If you press OFF in the
A climate control function from the upper display rear, the rear climate control system will switch
can be assigned to each button to the left and off. To switch the climate control system back on,
right of +++ in area @). press on any button in the respective display.
> Press and hold the symbol for the desired func- A/C / ME Cooling mode
tion on the upper display for at least three sec-
The cooling mode only functions with the blower
onds. A menu that consists of two sections ap-
turned on. The air is not cooled and humidity is
pears.
not removed when cooling mode is switched off.
> If you pull the symbol toward the left section,
This can cause fog on the windows. The cooling
the button to the left of «++ will be assigned.
mode switches off automatically at low outside
> If you pull the symbol toward the right section,
temperatures.
the button to the right of -*- will be assigned.
If you activate the A/C, the cooling mode will be
automatically regulated.
Press the buttons to turn the functions on or off.

If you activate 4/, the cooling mode will run with
maximum cooling output and maximum blower
One bar in the button or the LED in the button
speed. To reduce unnecessary energy usage, only
will light up when the function is switched on.
use this function briefly.
Some buttons can have several functions as-
signed to them. The various functions can be ac- + /- Temperature
tivated by pressing the button multiple times.
Temperatures between 60 °F (+16 °C) and 84 °F
AUTO Automatic mode (+28 °C) can be set. If outside of this range,
LOW / LO or HIGH / HI will appear in the display.
The automatic mode regulates the amount of air
In both settings, the climate control runs con-
and air distribution automatically, so that the set
stantly at the maximum cooling or heating level.
temperature is reached is quickly as possible.
The temperature is not regulated.
REAR Rear climate control system
Applies to: vehicles with rear climate control system
&8 Blower
To enable operation of the climate control sys- With \“ / A, you can manually adjust the vol-
tem from the rear of the vehicle, press REAR. ume of air generated by the blower to your pref-
erences. The blower should always run at a low
To exit this mode again, press REAR or setting to prevent the windows from fogging and
REAR MODE EXIT. to ensure a continuous exchange of air inside the
SYNC Synchronization vehicle. To have the blower regulated automati-
cally, press AUTO.
When synchronization is switched on, the tem-
perature, air distribution, and blower strength on i Air distribution
the driver's side is applied to all seat positions. With °@ /<>/%, you can select the vents where
You can also control the synchronization directly the air will flow from. To have the air distribution
using a gesture. Pull two fingers together on the controlled automatically, press the AUTO button
lower display > page 18. or deactivate all three arrows. With “, the air
4K0012721BD
will be directed toward the windshield.
89
Warm and cold
Applies to: vehicles with 4-zone automatic cli- ®) Seat ventilation

mate control: In the rear control panel, you can Applies to: vehicles with seat ventilation
press J multiple times to adjust the air distribu- The seat ventilation intensity can be set to multi-
tion based on the direction of the arrow. ple levels. Press 2) once to switch on the highest
level. Press 2) again to decrease the intensity one
® Defrosting
level at a time. The seat ventilation is switched
The windshield and side windows are defrosted off if the button is not illuminated.
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible.
Align the outer air vents with the side windows. & Child safety lock*
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from If8 turns on in the control panel in the rear*, the
the vents below the windshield. The windshield child safety lock is active and operation is blocked
defogger* is also switched on at low outside tem- => page 43.
peratures. The {% button will flash. Recirculation
mode switches off. The temperature should be Ionizer
Applies to: vehicles with ionizer
set at +72°F (22°C) or higher. Depending on the
outside temperature, the A/C cooling mode may Hazardous particles and germs in the air may be
automatically switch on. reduced through ionization. This helps to im-
prove the air quality for individuals in the passen-
& Rear window defogger
ger compartment.
The rear window defogger only operates when
the engine is running. It switches off automati- &" Fragrance
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
cally after 10 to 20 minutes, depending on the
outside temperature. The fragrance function will dispense a scent in
the vehicle interior. It is dispensed through the
To prevent the rear window defogger from
front outer vents. This will produce a pleasant
switching off automatically, press and hold the
scent. The fragrance is time-delayed, especially
& button for more than three seconds. This is
at low or high temperatures. You can adjust the
stored until the ignition is switched off.
fragrance function > page 91.
AUTO
<>/&S Recirculation mode
Residual heat
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is
The residual heat from the coolant is used to
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil-
heat the vehicle interior. To use this function,
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the
press and hold the button for more than two
vehicle interior > A\.
seconds while the ignition is switched off. The
Pressing the <> button switches recirculation function switches off automatically after about
mode on or off manually. 15 minutes.
AUTOX
When switched on, automatic recirculation <s
controls the recirculation mode automatically.
Z\ WARNING
You must press the ¥ button if fog forms on the — You should not use the recirculation mode
windows. for an extended period of time, because no
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can
«) Seat heating fog when cooling mode is switched off. This
Applies to: vehicles with heated seats increases the risk of an accident.
The seat heating temperature can be set at mul- — Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
tiple levels. Press «/ once to switch on the highest or temperature could develop burns when
level. Press w) again to decrease the temperature using the seat heating* function. To reduce
one level at a time. The seat heating is switched the risk of injury, these individuals should
off if the button is not illuminated. not use seat heating*.
90
Warm and cold

@) Note
VEHICLE > Climate control > Air quality.
To reduce the risk of damage to the seat heat-
ing* elements, do not kneel on the seats or Pollutant filter
place heavy pressure on one area of the seat. A pollutant filter cleans the air in the vehicle inte-
rior when the blower is switched on.
@ Tips
A schematic display represents the effectiveness
— If the front passenger's seat heating” is
of the filter. The display visualizes the amount of
turned on, it will not turn on again automat-
pollutant particles in the vehicle interior in com-
ically if more than 10 minutes have passed
parison to the surroundings.
between switching the ignition off and on
again.
G) Tips
— Only use the fragrance function* in modera-
For optimal air quality in the vehicle interior,
tion and take any other passengers and ani-
close all windows and doors and activate A/C
mals into consideration when using the
function. An overlap of different scents or cooling mode, the AUTO function, and recircu-
lation mode.
odors could cause discomfort. If there is
discomfort, reduce the intensity or switch
the fragrance function* off. Only use fra- Steering wheel heating
grances that are approved by Audi.
Syieee Rela
Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
Adjusting the vents
> Press @ to switch steering wheel heating on or
You can open and close the vents using the off.
thumbwheels. The levers adjust the direction of
You can also operate the steering wheel heating
the airflow from the vents.
using the multifunction steering wheel
> page 29.
Additional settings
You can adjust additional settings. @® Tips

The steering wheel heating setting will be au-
tomatically stored in the active personal pro-
VEHICLE > Climate control > ©.
file.
Fragrance
Applies to: vehicles with fragrance function
Messages
Using Fragrance selection, you can select the fra- Applies to: vehicles with steering wheel heating
grance and see the fill level of the fragrance.

@ Steering wheel heating: on/Steering wheel
You can select the strength of the scent with Fra- heating: off
grance level.
This message appears if you have switched the
Footwell temperature* steering wheel heating on or off.
You can adjust the footwell temperature for the Steering wheel heating: malfunction! See own-
driver and front passenger. er's manual
If this message appears, there is a malfunction.

Air quality display Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
4K0012721BD
Applies to: vehicles with air quality display or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
You can display information about the air quality. malfunction repaired.
91
Warm and cold
Fluids in the A/C system as such, so that they comply with the SAE
standard J2842 HFO-1234yf and R744.
Refrigerant in the A/C system
The sticker in the engine compartment provides
information about the type and amount of refrig-
erant used in the vehicle’s A/C system. The stick-
er is located in the front section of the engine
compartment or at the front or back of the hood.
Symbol | Meaning
Warning: the A/C system must only
A be serviced by qualified technicians.
Refrigerant type
alt Lubricant type
Refer to the service information

(only available for authorized Audi
dealers or authorized Audi Service
i
Facilities)
The A/C system must only be serv-
|Be
iced by qualified technicians.
Flammable refrigerant
Se
Make sure all components are dis-

posed of correctly and never install
y components in the vehicle that have
been removed from old vehicles or
taken from recycling.
Lubricant in the A/C system

The exact specification and amount of lubricant
in the A/C system can be obtained from an au-
Facility or at https://erwin.audiusa.com/erwin.
ZA\ WARNING
To ensure secure and safe operation, the A/C
system must only be serviced by qualified
technicians.
@) Tips
— Never repair the A/C system evaporator with
components from old vehicles or from recy-
cling.
— New replacement evaporators for portable
A/C systems must be certified and labeled
92
Driving
Driving Switching on and off

If you would like to switch the ignition on or off
Starting the vehicle without starting the engine, follow these steps:
Dye
Tod f ola (ela) > Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button without
pressing the brake pedal.
Switching the ignition off automatically

To prevent the vehicle battery from draining, the
ignition and possibly the exterior lighting may
switch off automatically.
Requirements:
— The Start/Stop system must have stopped the
engine.
Fig. 85 Center console: starting the engine — You must have left the vehicle for longer than
30 seconds.
Requirement: the key must be in the vehicle.
— The ignition must be switched on.
Starting the engine Among other indicators, the system detects that
> Press and hold the brake pedal. you have left the vehicle based on the following
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The factors:
engine will start. — The driver's door has been opened.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is switch- — The driver's safety belt has been unbuckled.
ed off temporarily when you start the engine. If — The brake pedal is not being pressed.
the engine does not start immediately, the start-
The ignition will also be switched off after 30 mi-
ing procedure stops automatically after a short
nutes or if you lock the vehicle from the outside.
time. If this is the case, repeat the starting pro-
cedure after approximately 30 seconds. ZA WARNING
Stopping the engine —To reduce the risk of asphyxiation, never al-
low the engine to run in confined spaces.
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button. The — Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
engine will switch off. has come to a complete stop. Switching it
off before the vehicle has stopped may im-
Applies to: vehicles with steering lock: The steer- pair the function of the brake booster and
ing is locked when you turn off the engine with power steering. You would then need to use
the selector lever in the P position and open the more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
driver's door. The steering lock helps prevent ve- The fact that you cannot steer and brake as
hicle theft. usual may increase the risk of accidents and
serious injuries.
Stopping the engine in an emergency
— Always select the “P” selector lever position
If necessary in an emergency, the engine can also when parking the vehicle; otherwise, the ve-
be stopped while driving using the emergency off hicle could roll away.
function*.
> Press the [START ENGINE STOP] button twice in o Note

a row or press and hold it one time.
4K0012721BD
— Avoid high engine speed, full throttle, and

heavy engine load if the engine has not
93
Driving
reached operating temperature yet. You Remote control key: hold back of key
could damage the engine. against the designated area. See owner's man-
— If the engine has been under heavy load for ual
an extended period of time, heat builds up
The battery in the vehicle key may be drained or
in the engine compartment after the engine
there may be a malfunction. To start the vehicle,
is switched off and there is a risk of damag-
you must also hold the vehicle key against the lo-
ing the engine. For this reason, let the en-
cation shown ?) > page 93, fig. 85.
gine run at idle for approximately two mi-
nutes before shutting it off. If the malfunction remains, drive immediately to
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
@ Tips Service Facility to have the malfunction correct-
— Brief noises are normal when starting and ed.
stopping the vehicle and are no cause for
concern. When driving
— For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en-
Starting to drive, stopping, and parking
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again au-
tomatically or it may continue to run, even if Starting from a stop
the ignition is switched off.
> Press and hold the brake pedal.
— It may not be possible to start the vehicle in > Start the engine.
extremely low temperatures.
> Select a gear.
— Power will be fully available once the engine >» Release the parking brake.
is at operating temperature. > Release the brake pedal. The vehicle may roll.
> Press the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
Messages
Stopping and parking
|| Engine start system: malfunction! Please
> Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press and
contact Service
hold the brake pedal.
Do not switch the ignition off because you may > Set the parking brake.
not be able to switch it on again. Drive to an au- > Select the “P” selector lever position to secure
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service the vehicle from rolling away.
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- > Turn the steering wheel when parking on in-
rected. clines so that the wheels will roll into the curb
if the vehicle starts moving.
|—c} Engine start system: malfunction! Please
>» Switch off the ignition before leaving the vehi-
contact Service
cle.
There is a malfunction in the engine start system.
On hills, activate the parking brake first and then
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
shift into the "P" selector lever position. This pre-
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
vents too much stress from being placed on the
locking mechanism.
E Remote control key: key not detected. Is the
key still in the vehicle? ZA WARNING
The vehicle key was removed from the vehicle — Always set the parking brake when leaving
while the engine is running. If the vehicle key is your vehicle, even if for a short period of
no longer in the vehicle, you cannot switch the ig- time. If the parking brake is not set, the ve-
nition on or start the engine once you stop it. You hicle could roll away, increasing the risk of
also cannot lock the vehicle from the outside. an accident. >
94
Driving
— Do not leave your vehicle unattended while ZA WARNING

the engine is running, because this increases
— If you do not begin driving immediately af-
the risk of an accident.
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
— The hill hold assist cannot hold the vehicle
do not inadvertently press the accelerator
on inclines in every scenario (for example,
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
on slippery or icy ground).
hicle is stopped.
— If you leave the vehicle, switch the ignition
off and take the key with you. This is espe- Gears and driving programs
cially important when leaving persons or an-
[RAZ-0410,
imals in the vehicle. Otherwise, the vehicle R oO
could start unintentionally, the parking
brake could release, or electronic equipment
(2—*
could activate, which increases the risk of an
N
accident.
— No persons or animals should be left in a
locked vehicle. Locked doors make it more t.
D/S
difficult for emergency workers to enter the
SI
~~
vehicle, which puts lives at risk.
Fig. 86 Center console: selector lever
— If you do not begin driving immediately af-
ter releasing the brake pedal, your vehicle
The automatic transmission shifts automatically
may begin to roll backward. Press the brake
depending on the selected gear and the current
pedal or set the parking brake immediately.
driving style. When driving with a moderate driv-
ing style, upshifting early and downshifting late
@) Note will help to improve fuel economy. When driving
If you have to stop on an incline, always press with a sporty driving style, the transmission per-
the brake pedal to hold the vehicle in place to mits higher RPMs.
reduce the risk of the vehicle rolling back-
The gears are displayed next to the selector lever.
ward. Do not try to hold the vehicle in place
by pressing and holding the accelerator pedal. — P (Park)
The transmission can overheat, which increas- — R (Reverse)
es the risk of damage. —N (Neutral)
—D (Drive)
Hill hold assist
Selecting a gear
If you take your foot off of the brake pedal when Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
driving on hills, the braking force will be held for
several seconds. At that time, you can start driv- — Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the
ing without the vehicle rolling backward. brake pedal.
— Press the release button @ on the selector lev-
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed, er.
the engine must be on, and the vehicle must be —To select the nearest gear, move the selector
traveling uphill. lever forward or back until you feel the first
pressure point.
4K0012721BD
> To activate hill hold assist, press and hold the

brake pedal for several seconds while the vehi-
cle is stationary.
95
Driving
—To skip a gear (for example, move from “D” to The selected driving program is displayed in the
“R”), move the selector lever past the pressure instrument cluster.
point in the desired direction.
—D (Drive): normal driving mode
— The label next to the selector lever for the se-
—S (Sport): sporty driving mode
lected gear will light up.
If you select the Dynamic mode in Audi drive se-
“N” (Neutral) gear lect*, the “S” driving program will be activated.
In the “N” gear, power is not transmitted to the When the ignition is switched off, the driving pro-
driving wheels. Use the “N” gear in a car wash gram may be reset to “D”.
(with conveyor belts), for example.
To switch between the current driving program
If you unintentionally select “N” while driving and “S”, push the selector lever toward the rear.
(faster than 1 mph (2 km/h)), you can also shift
back to “D” without pressing the brake pedal. ZA\ WARNING
— Before starting to drive, check if the desired
For safety reasons, the vehicle cannot be locked
when the transmission is in the "N” gear. gear is displayed next to the selector lever.
— Always secure your vehicle from rolling
“Pp” (Park) gear away. Press the brake pedal or shift to “P”.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. When leaving the vehicle, also set the park-
ing brake.
The vehicle is secured from rolling away by the — Power is still transmitted to the wheels
parking lock when in the “P” gear. when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
— Bring the vehicle to a full stop and press the vent the vehicle from “creeping”, you must
brake pedal. keep your foot on the brake in all selector
— Press the “P” button (2) on the selector lever. lever positions (except "P" and "N") when
—The “P” next to the selector lever will light up. the engine is running.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
“P” engages automatically if you switch the en- press the accelerator pedal when changing
gine off while the “D” or “R” gear is selected. If
gears if the vehicle is stationary and the en-
you switch the engine off in “N”, “P” will engage gine is running.
automatically after approximately 30 minutes.
— Never select the “R" or "P” gears while driv-
Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission: If ing. Doing so could cause an accident.
you want to shift from “P” to “D” or “R”, the en- — The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
gine must be running. switched off.
Applies to: vehicles with tiptronic transmission:

If you want to switch to another gear from “P”,
G@) Tips
the engine must be running. If you shift between “D” and “R” within one
second, you do not need to press the brake
If you cannot shift out of “P”, for example be-
pedal. This makes it possible to “rock” if it is
cause the vehicle has no power, you may need to
stuck, for example.
use the emergency release for the parking lock
=> page 98.
Selecting the driving program

Various driving programs can be selected when in
the “D” gear. The programs influence when the
transmission shifts and how the accelerator ped-
al responds.
96
Driving
Manual shi mum acceleration, press and hold the © shift

paddle.
> To switch back to automatic mode, press and
RAZ-0411
hold the (4) shift paddle or push the selector
lever toward the rear.
If you stop using the shift paddles temporarily,

the transmission will switch back to automatic
mode. To keep shifting manually, tilt the selector
lever toward the front passenger's side.
Fig. 87 Center console: shifting manually with the selector G) Tips

lever —The transmission only allows manual shift-
ing when the engine speed is within the per-
RAZ-0003
mitted range.
— The transmission automatically shifts up or
down before critical engine speed is
reached.
Accelerator pedal
You can accelerate the vehicle using the accelera-

——
tor pedal.
Fig. 88 Steering wheel: shift paddles*
Depending on the equipment, you may be able to
You can shift the gears manually when in “D” adjust the haptic feedback for the accelerator
mode. The transmission must be in tiptronic pedal in the MMI.
mode.
— Select on the home screen: VEHICLE > (Charg-
Shifting with the selector lever ing & Efficiency) > Efficiency assist > (Interac-
You can shift into manual shifting mode while the tive accelerator).
vehicle is stationary or while driving. Accelerator pedal feedback / predictive
> To switch to manual shifting mode, tilt the se- messages
lector lever toward the front passenger's side Haptic feedback in the accelerator pedal indi-
> fig. 87. “M” will be displayed in the instru- cates when you should take your foot off the ac-
ment cluster. celerator pedal to drive more efficiently.
> Upshifting: push the selector lever forward @).
Maximum acceleration
> Downshifting: push the selector lever toward
the rear ©). If you press the accelerator pedal all the way
> To switch back to automatic mode, tilt the se- down, the motor’s full power will be used and
lector lever toward the driver's side. you will reach maximum acceleration, also called
“kick-down”.
Shifting with the shift paddles
Applies to: vehicles with shift paddles
ZA WARNING
> Upshifting: press the @) shift paddle > fig. 88.
The driving wheels could spin and the vehicle
> Downshifting: press the ©) shift paddle.
could swerve on slick or slippery road surfaces
> Applies to: vehicles with tiptronic transmission:
4K0012721BD
when using kick-down, which increases the

To engage the lowest possible gear for maxi-
risk of an accident.
97
Driving
ET Mela ace) | nutes to reduce the risk of damage. After a

Applies to: vehicles with S tronic transmission and Launch cool-down period, Launch Control will be
Control available again.
Launch Control provides the best possible accel-
eration when starting from a stop. rking lock emergency release
Requirements
RAZ-0310)
— The engine must be at operating temperature.
— The steering wheel must not be turned.
— Start/Stop system* must be deactivated
=> page 101.
— ESC must be limited > page 112.
— Driving program “S” > page 96 or the Dynamic
Audi drive select* mode must be selected
=> page 108.
Fig. 89 Center console: releasing the parking lock using
the emergency release
Using Launch Control
— Press the brake pedal with your left foot and The emergency release is located in the front cup
hold it all the way down for at least one second. holder under a cover. Read and follow the impor-
— With the brake pedal pressed, press the accel- tant instructions about towing > page 281.
erator pedal all the way down with your right
foot at the same time. Releasing the parking lock using the
emergency release
— Once the engine reaches a constant speed, re-
move your foot from the brake pedal. > Set the parking brake to secure your vehicle
from rolling away. If this is not possible, secure
Once the vehicle has started moving, reactivate
your vehicle from rolling using another meth-
the ESC so that it is fully functional.
od.
Z\ WARNING » Remove the rubber mat.

> Pry the cover off the opening using the screw-
Only use Launch Control when road and traffic driver from the vehicle tool kit.
conditions allow it and other road users will > Insert the socket wrench from the vehicle tool
not be endangered or impacted by your driv- kit in the opening so that the handle points to-
ing and the vehicle's acceleration. The driving ward the front passenger's side.
wheels could spin and the vehicle could > Turn the socket wrench clockwise @ until it
swerve, especially on slick or slippery road stops and press it downward (2) until it locks in-
surfaces, which increases the risk of an acci- to place.
dent. > Leave the socket wrench inserted.
@ Note Resetting the parking lock
When accelerating using Launch Control, all > Grasp the socket wrench with both hands, care-
vehicle components are subject to heavy fully pull it all the way up, and then turn it
loads. This can result in increased wear. back.
> Now remove the socket wrench.
@ Tips > Reinsert the cover and rubber mat.
After accelerating using the Launch Control,
the temperature of some vehicle components
may increase greatly. If that happens, the
function will not be available for a few mi-
98
Driving
ZA\ WARNING [&] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-

ue driving with limited function. Please contact
— The parking lock must be released using the Service
emergency release before towing the
vehicle. There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
— The parking lock may only be released using sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
the emergency release if the parking brake mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
is set. If it is not working, secure the vehicle may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
from rolling using the brake pedal or other Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
suitable means, such as blocking a front and Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
a rear wheel. An unsecured vehicle may roll malfunction corrected.
away, which increases the risk of an acci- [&] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
dent. ue driving with limited function. No reverse
— Only activate the emergency release while gear
on a level surface or a slight slope.
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you must
sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
not drive when the emergency release is ac-
mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
tivated.
may no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
You cannot engage the reverse gear. Drive to an
Messages authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
& Transmission: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
rected.
cle
[&] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicle as soon
ue driving in D until engine is off
as possible in a safe location and secure it so it
does not roll. See an authorized Audi dealer or There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. sion. The transmission is switching to emergency
mode. If you turn the engine off, you will not be
[i Transmission: too hot. Please stop vehicle
able to select any other gears after restarting the
Do not continue driving. Select "P" and contact an engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
Facility for assistance. the malfunction corrected.
[&] Transmission: too hot. Please adapt driving 1} Selector lever: malfunction! You can contin-
style ue driving. Please contact Service
The transmission temperature has increased sig- There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
nificantly. Drive very cautiously or take a break er. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi deal-
from driving until the temperature returns to the er or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
normal range and the indicator light turns off. malfunction repaired.
[&] Transmission: malfunction! You can contin- fs} Selector lever: malfunction! Gear change on-
ue driving. See owner's manual ly possible if using both shift paddles.
There is a system malfunction in the transmis- There is a system malfunction in the selector lev-
sion. You may continue driving. Drive to an au- er. You can continue driving with restricted func-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service tion. The selector lever is not working. Gears can
Facility soon to have the malfunction corrected. only be selected by tapping both shift paddles at
4K0012721BD
the same time when the vehicle is stationary. The

“P” gear is automatically engaged when you turn >
99
Driving
off the engine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer Vehicles with a mild hybrid drive system have ad-
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to ditional battery technology.
have the malfunction corrected.
i P button: malfunction! Auto P when engine Sait ele didn aat nel a ede eA
off. Please contact Service
driving
There is a malfunction in the "P" button on the Your driving style greatly influences the amount
selector lever. The “P” gear is automatically en- of fuel and energy consumed, the environmental
gaged when you turn off the engine. Drive to an impact, and the wear on the engine, brakes, and
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service tires. Note the following information for efficient
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor- and environmentally-conscious driving:
rected. — Turn off electrical equipment that is not need-
fl Danger of rolling away! P not possible. ed, for example seat heating*.
Please apply parking brake — Anticipate upcoming traffic situations while
driving to avoid unnecessary acceleration and
The parking lock was released using the emer-
braking.
gency release > page 98 or can no longer be en-
— Avoid driving at high speeds.
gaged. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
— Avoid adding extra weight to the vehicle if pos-
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
sible, for example by not leaving roof racks or
the malfunction corrected.
bike racks installed when they are not needed.
Move selector lever to automatic position — Make sure the tire pressure is correct.
— Have maintenance performed regularly on the
The transmission has switched out of tiptronic
mode. Switch back to automatic mode with the vehicle.
selector lever > page 97. — Do not drive with winter tires during the summ-
er.
— Do not let the engine run while the vehicle
Drive system
parked.
— Use the Start/Stop system.
— Utilize the engine braking effect.
A new vehicle must be broken in within the first
— Avoid driving short distances when possible.
1,000 miles (1,500 km) so that all moving parts
work smoothly together, which helps to increase
the service life of the engine and other drive com-
@ Tips
ponents.
The amount of noise produced by the vehicle
can increase significantly when driving with a
Do not drive higher than two-thirds of the maxi- sporty style. Show respect to others around
mum permitted engine RPM during the first 600 you and the environment with the way you op-
miles (1,000 km) and do not use full accelera- erate your vehicle, especially at night.
tion. The engine can be increased RPM gradually
during the next 300 miles (500 km).
Energy management
Conventional and mild hybrid drive system Your vehicle is equipped with an intelligent ener-
Applies to: vehicles with a conventional drive system or a mild gy management system for distributing electrici-
hybrid drive system ty. This significantly improves the starting ability
and increases the vehicle battery life.
Vehicles with a conventional or mild hybrid drive
system are powered by a combustion engine. It
uses fuel to recover energy.
(Gi) Tips
— If you drive short distances frequently, the
vehicle battery may not charge enough
100
Driving
while driving. As a result, convenience func- Switching the Start/Stop system off and on
tions for electrical equipment may be tem- The & button is located above the selector lever
porarily unavailable. in the center console. The LED in the button turns
— The vehicle battery will gradually drain if on when the function is switched off.
the vehicle is not driven for long periods of
time, or if electrical equipment is used > Press §& to switch on or off.
when the engine is not running. To ensure If you switch the system off during a Stop phase,
that the vehicle can still be started, the the engine will start again automatically.
electrical equipment will be limited or
switched off. Basic requirements
— The driver's door and hood must be closed.
Messages —"P","N", or "D" must be engaged.
— The steering wheel must not be turned far in ei-
B Drive system: malfunction! Safely stop vehi-
ther direction.
cle
— The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
There is a malfunction in the drive system. The (3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
brake booster and the power steering may stop — The vehicle is not in trailer mode.
working. Stop the vehicle immediately or as soon
as possible and do not continue driving. Have the @) Note
problem corrected by an authorized Audi dealer Always switch the Start/Stop system off when
or authorized Audi Service Facility. driving through water > page 101.
B Drive system: malfunction! Please contact
Service G) Tips
— Depending on the driving situation, the en-
There is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive
gine may already stop when coasting before
slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
the vehicle has come to a complete stop )).
Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction cor-
— If you select the "D" position after shifting
rected.
into reverse, the vehicle must be driven fast-
er than 6 mph (10 km/h) in order for the
Start/Stop system Start/Stop system to become active again.
This makes it possible to maneuver without
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system stopping the engine.
The Start/Stop system can help increase fuel

Stopping and starting the engine
economy and reduce CO2 emissions.
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
In Start/Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto-
> Press and hold the brake pedal until the vehicle
matically when stopped, for example at a traffic
has stopped. The @) indicator light appears in
light. The ignition and important assist systems
the instrument cluster once the engine stops
such as power steering and the brake booster will
automatically.
remain available during the Stop phase. The en-
> The engine starts again when you remove your
gine will restart automatically when needed.
foot from the brake pedal. The indicator light
The Start/Stop system is automatically activated turns off. >
once the ignition is switched on.
4K0012721BD
D In certain countries.
101
Driving
engine must be started with the

@ Tips
START ENGINE STOP] button.
— Press the brake pedal during a Stop phase
to keep the vehicle from rolling. Vehicle starting system: malfunction! Please
— The ignition will turn off if you press the contact Service
START ENGINE STOP} button during a Stop There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system.
phase. Drive the vehicle to an authorized Audi dealer or
— If you leave the vehicle briefly during a Stop authorized Service Facility as soon as possible to
phase, the driver's door must be closed and have the malfunction corrected.
the safety belt buckled for the engine to be
able to restart. Brakes
— You can control if the engine will stop or not
by reducing or increasing the amount of General information
force you use to press the brake pedal. For
You can apply the vehicle's brakes using the brake
example, if you only lightly press on the
pedal.
brake pedal in stop-and-go traffic or when
turning, the engine will not switch off when Operating noise
the vehicle is stationary. If you press the
Noises may occur when braking depending on the
brake pedal harder, the engine will switch
speed, braking force, and outside conditions such
off.
as temperature and humidity.
Starting and stopping the engine automat- Braking effect

ically The response time from the brakes depends on
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
the weather and environmental conditions. To
The system checks if certain conditions are met ensure the optimal braking effect, the brake sys-
before and during the Stop phase, and deter- tem is cleaned at regular intervals. This is done
mines if the engine stops and how long it re- by applying the brake pads to the brake rotors for
mains stopped. For example, if power usage is a short period of time when driving at high
high, the engine will not be stopped. Along with speeds when the windshield wipers are switched
other conditions, the following factors influence on.
the automatic engine start or stop: If the brake system becomes damp, for example
— Environmental conditions (slopes, inclines, ele- after driving in heavy rain, the braking effect may
vation, temperature) be delayed. Other factors that could temporarily
— Battery (charge status, temperature, power us- increase the response time of the brakes include:
age) — Wet conditions
— Engine temperature — Low temperatures, ice, and snow
— Assist systems — Roads covered in salt
— Driving behavior — Dirty brake pads
Corrosion
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system Corrosion may form on the brake rotors if there is
no heavy braking, if the vehicle is not driven for
Drive system: please start the vehicle manually
long periods of time, or if the vehicle is not driv-
This message appears when specific conditions en frequently or for long distances. In this case,
are not met during a Stop phase. The Start/Stop braking heavily several times while driving at
system will not be able to restart the engine. The high speeds can clean the brake rotors > A\.
102
Driving
Brake pads
CG) Note
New brake pads do not achieve their full braking
— Never let the brakes “rub” by pressing the
effect during the first 250 miles (400 km). They
pedal lightly when braking is not actually
must be “broken in” first. However, you can com-
necessary. This can cause the brakes to over-
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
heat and increases braking distance and
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy
causes wear.
braking during the break-in period.
— Observe the important information for driv-
Brake pad wear depends largely on the way the ing downhill > page 105. This especially ap-
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions. plies when towing a trailer.
Brake pad wear increases when driving frequently
in the city or short distances or when using a very @) Tips
sporty driving style. — If you retrofit your vehicle with a front spoil-
er, wheel covers or similar items, make sure
Ceramic brakes
Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brakes
that the air flow to the brakes is not ob-
structed. Otherwise the brake system can
Ceramic brakes provide excellent deceleration overheat.
rates.
— Also refer to the information about brake
The break-in period for new ceramic brakes may fluid > page 240.
be significantly longer than for standard brake
rotors. Due to the properties of the material,
they may cause noises at lower speeds. Ceramic
brakes also absorb more moisture in wet condi- EG i @ Brakes: malfunction! Safely stop ve-
tions. Therefore, there will temporarily be less hicle
braking force than when the brakes are dry. You There is a malfunction in the brake system. If
can compensate for this by pressing the brake BS/ Bana B also turn on, there is a malfunc-
pedal harder. tion in the ABS, ESC, and braking distribution.
ZA WARNING Do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi

dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
— Only apply the brakes for the purpose of
sistance. Read and follow the other safety pre-
cleaning the brake system when road and
cautions > A\.
traffic conditions permit. You must not en-
danger other road users and increase the Ga / @ Brake pads: wear limit reached. You
risk of an accident. can continue driving. Please contact Service
— Due to the risk of injury, only have an au-
The brake pads are worn. Drive to an authorized
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as
Service Facility work on the brake system.
soon as possible to have the malfunction correct-
Incorrect repairs could impair the function.
ed.
— Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
stopped because this increases the risk of an Brake booster: limited functionality.You can
accident. continue driving. Please contact Service
— During automatic braking maneuvers, the There is a brake booster malfunction. The brake
brake pedal may move downward automati- booster is available, but its effectiveness is re-
cally. To reduce the risk of injury, do not duced. The braking performance may be different
place your foot under the brake pedal. compared to the usual performance. Drive to an
4K0012721BD

rected.
103
Driving
Brake booster: deactivated. See owner's manual > Releasing: when the ignition is switched on,
press and hold the brake pedal and press the ©)
The brake booster remains active for a brief peri-
button.
od of time after switching off the ignition. Secure
the vehicle from rolling by setting the parking If the red indicator light flashes, the braking
brake and select the “P” gear. force has not built up enough or it has decreased.
You can also secure the vehicle by selecting the
Other indicator lights
“P” gear or pressing the brake pedal. Make sure
When you switch the ignition on, the indicator the indicator light is off before you start driving.
light EG Zz @ turns on briefly to check the
Automatically releasing the parking brake
function. If the indicator light does not turn on,
when starting to drive
there is a system malfunction.
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
If Bile / B® stays on, there is a malfunction in
and the driver’s safety belt must be fastened.
the brake system.
> Press the accelerator pedal to start to drive.
If is displayed when there is a malfunction,
the brakes were under heavy load. Follow the in-
structions in the message to utilize the engine
ZA\ WARNING
braking effect and to relieve the brakes. —To reduce the risk of an accident, always
make sure the vehicle is situated safely
ZA\ WARNING while stationary.
If a malfunction occurs in the ABS, ESC, and
— If the parking brake is set, it can release au-
braking distribution, interventions that stabi- tomatically when the accelerator pedal is
lize the vehicle will no longer be available. pressed. To reduce the risk of an accident,
This could cause the vehicle to swerve, which
do not inadvertently press the accelerator
increases the risk that the vehicle will slide.
pedal and always shift into “P” when the ve-
Do not continue driving. See an authorized hicle is stopped.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility — If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
for assistance. parking brake once it is released, or release
it if it is set. In this case, park the vehicle on
level ground and secure it by engaging the
Electromechanical "P” gear. Contact an authorized Audi dealer
parking brake or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance.
Operating the parking brake
The electromechanical parking brake is used to G) Tips

secure the vehicle from rolling away unintention- — On steep inclines, especially when in trailer
ally. mode, the vehicle may roll backwards unin-
The ©) switch is located under the selector lever tentionally when starting to drive. To re-
in the center console. It turns on when the park- duces the risk of this happening, pull and
ing brake is set. You can release the parking brake hold the ©) switch while pressing the accel-
manually or automatically when you start to erator pedal. If enough drive power has
drive. built up at the wheels and the vehicle does
not roll backwards, then release the switch
Setting and releasing the parking brake to start to drive.
> Setting: pull the ©) switch. — If you leave the vehicle when “D” or “R” are
> 1¢ a / o appears, the parking brake is hold- engaged, the parking brake will be set auto-
ing the vehicle. You can remove your foot from matically.
the brake pedal.
104
Driving
— Noises when the parking brake is set and re- parking brake is released and can be reset. If this
leased are normal and are not a cause for is the case, switch the ignition off and back on.
concern.
If the message continues to appear, if the park-
— The parking brake goes through a self-test
ing brake cannot be released, or if the message
cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is
appears while driving, then stop the vehicle on
stopped. Any noises associated with this are
level ground and shift to “P”. Do not continue
normal.
driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Emergency braking function
ww Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
Emergency braking should only be used in an Service
emergency, if the standard brake pedal is mal-
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. Drive
functioning or obstructed. When the emergency
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
braking function is activated, the braking effect is
Service Facility immediately to have the malfunc-
similar to a heavy braking maneuver.
tion corrected. Do not park the vehicle on inclines
> Pull and hold the © switch while driving. and shift to “P”.
> An audio warning signal will sound and emer-
a / {Q) Parking brake: warning! Vehicle parked
gency braking will begin.
too steep
> If you press the accelerator pedal, emergency
braking will be canceled. The braking force may not be enough to secure
the vehicle from rolling away. Park the vehicle in
Z\ WARNING a place with less of an incline.
Heavy braking while driving through curves or & / Parking brake: applied
in poor road or weather conditions can cause
The parking brake is set. Press and hold the brake
the vehicle to slide or the rear of the vehicle to
pedal to release the parking brake.
swerve, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
Special driving situations
Messages Driving uphill and downhill
Gg / ©) Parking brake: malfunction! Safely When driving uphill, downhill, or at high alti-
stop vehicle. See owner's manual tudes, note the following information:
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. If the — Drive slowly and carefully.
message appears while stationary, check if the — Do not try to turn around if you cannot safely
parking brake is released and can be reset. If this drive on an incline or hill. Instead, drive in re-
is the case, switch the ignition off and back on. verse.
— When driving down hills, you can activate the
If the message continues to appear, if the park-
hill descent control if you press the brake pedal
ing brake cannot be released, or if the message
while driving in “D” gear. The automatic trans-
appears while driving, then stop the vehicle on
mission will select a gear suitable for driving
level ground and shift to “P”. Do not continue
down the hill and will attempt to maintain the
driving. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
speed at which the vehicle was traveling at the
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
time the brake pedal was pressed. Press the
GRING / () Parking brake: malfunction! Please brake pedal if necessary. The hill descent con-
release parking brake trol will switch off once the hill levels out or
4K0012721BD
There is a malfunction in the parking brake. If the you press the accelerator pedal.
message appears while stationary, check if the
105
Driving
— Utilize the engine braking effect when driving — Applies to: vehicles with an inclinometer: Do
downhill by selecting the “S” driving program not rely only on the inclinometer when as-
=> page 96. This especially applies when towing sessing the driving situation.
a trailer. This reduces the load on the brakes.
— Brake in intervals and do not press the brake
Cola Tcer-\ Rs Lal)
pedal continuously.
Applies to: allroad
— Use the hill descent assist if necessary
=> page 107 Your vehicle is not an offroad vehicle. Note the
following points when driving offroad:
Inclinometer
Applies to: vehicles with a tilt angle display — Drive slowly and carefully.
—To reduce the risk of underbody damage, pay
You can display the vehicle's sideways angle and
attention to the vehicle's ground clearance and
lengthwise angle in relation to the horizon.
drive across raised areas of the ground with the
— Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: wheels on one side of the vehicle, instead of al-
VEHICLE > Vehicle data. lowing the center of the vehicle to pass over the
— You may need to scroll down to the Inclinome- raised areas.
ter display. —To reduce the risk of becoming stuck, drive
The sideways angle of your vehicle should not ex- through sandy or swampy areas at a steady
ceed the yellow range in the gauge. If it reaches speed and without stopping, if possible.
the red range, there is a risk that the vehicle If necessary, use the following functions:
might tip.
— Audi drive select* Offroad mode > page 108
The steering wheel angle, the elevation, the com- — Hill descent assist* > page 107
pass direction, and the geo-coordinates of the —Inclinometer* > page 106
current vehicle position are displayed in addition — Raising the vehicle > page 109
to the current vehicle angle. You will also receive — Limit ESC > page 113
information about the maximum sideways and
lengthwise angle that was reached in the current Z\ WARNING
driving cycle. These values are reset when the ig-
Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the ve-
nition is switched off.
hicle and your driving ability.
Note that the accuracy of the display depends on
the driving situation. @) For the sake of the environment
Avoid actions that are damaging to the envi-
ZA WARNING ronment. Show respect for the natural envi-
— Only drive on inclines that your vehicle is de- ronment and remain on marked routes.
signed to handle. Do not exceed the hill
climbing ability of your vehicle. Your vehicle G@) Tips
could tip or slide.
Clean your vehicle after driving offroad. Dirt
— Do not drive at an angle on steep inclines and stones falling off your vehicle can affect
and hills. If your vehicle is about to tip, you other road users.
must immediately start steering in the di-
rection of the downward slope to reduce the
Driving through water
risk of an accident.
— Always be ready to brake when using the hill If you must drive through water, follow these in-
descent control function. structions:
— Check the stability of the ground, the current,

and the water depth. If the ground is unstable, >
106
Driving
there is a strong current, or there are waves, Active regulation

the water must only reach up to the lower edge Regulation begins shortly after you start driving
of the body at the most. and is possible at speeds up to approximately 19
— Deactivate the Start/Stop system. mph (30 km/h) and on hills that have an approxi-
— Drive carefully and no faster than at walking mately 6-60% grade. If these conditions are met,
speeds to prevent the front of the vehicle from regulation will be activated and the Ba indicator
creating waves, because they could splash light will turn on.
above the lower edge of the body. Oncoming
vehicles could also create waves. Ready mode
— Do not stop the vehicle while in the water. If one of the requirements for active regulation is
— Drive in reverse. not met, the system will be in ready mode. The
— Do not turn the engine off. indicator light will turn on. Once the require-
ments are met again, the system will be able to
ZA WARNING provide active regulation again.
After driving through water, press the brake
pedal carefully to dry the brakes so that the ZA WARNING
full braking effect will be restored. — Be ready to apply the brakes at all times
when using the hill hold assist.
@) Note — Always adjust the speed to the visibility,
Vehicle components such as the engine, drive weather, road, and traffic conditions. The
system, suspension, or electrical system, can system cannot replace the driver's atten-
be severely damaged by driving through wa- tion.
Lele — The system cannot maintain a constant vehi-
cle speed in all situations, for example when
G) Tips on smooth or slippery ground. This can in-
If possible, avoid driving through salt water crease the risk of an accident.
because it increases the risk of corrosion. Use
fresh water to clean any vehicle components
@) Tips
that come into contact with salt water. If you select the Audi drive select* offroad
mode, hill descent assist will switch on.
Hill descent assist
Applies to: vehicles with hill hold assist
The “& button is located in the function bar on

the lower display. It lights up when the system is
turned on.
Hill descent assist can assist you when driving

down hills by maintaining a constant vehicle
speed by automatically braking all four wheels.
You can adjust the speed using the accelerator
and brake pedals. The regulation depends on the
hill and the vehicle speed.
> Switching on: press “2.

> Switching off: press “2 again.
4K0012721BD
107
Driving dynamic
Driving dynamic allroad - Provides balanced vehicle handling. The

vehicle will be raised to the second-highest level
Audi drive select using the air suspension*.
Introduction comfort - Provides a comfort-oriented vehicle

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select setup and is suited for long drives on highways.
Drive select makes it possible to experience dif auto - Provides an overall comfortable yet dy-
ferent types of vehicle characteristics in one vehi- namic driving feel and is suited for everyday use.
cle. With different driving modes, the driver can
dynamic - Gives the driver a sporty driving feel
switch the setting, for example from sporty to
and is suited to a sporty driving style. The “S”
comfortable. This allows you to adjust the set-
driving program is selected.
tings to your personal preferences. This makes it
possible to combine settings such as a sporty individual - Provides the option for personalized
drivetrain setting with comfortable steering. vehicle settings. Press to configure the mode
=> page 108, Individual settings.
Selecting an Audi drive select mode
@ Tips
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
When the ignition is being switched on, indi-
vidual systems, such as the drive system, will
be reset to a balanced setting. Select the cur-
rent mode again to attain its full configura-
tion.
In lsettings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The equipment in your vehicle will determine

Fig. 90 Center console: Audi drive select button which settings you can adjust.
> Press the left or right arrow key > fig. 90 until Drive
the desired mode appears in the MMI. Or: The drive system will react to accelerator pedal
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: moves more quickly or in a more balanced man-
VEHICLE > Audi drive select. ner. The shift points are placed in higher or lower
speed ranges.
You can change the driving mode when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving. If traffic per- Depending on the setting, the drive power at the
mits, briefly remove your foot from the accelera- rear axle will be distributed with the sport differ-
tor pedal after changing modes so that the mode ential* to be more sporty or moderate
you have selected will be activated for the drive => page 112.
system.
Steering
The following modes are available depending on
The power steering will adapt. Light steering is
the equipment:
suitable for long trips on highways or smooth
offroad - Provides assistance when driving off- driving around curves, for example.
road. The vehicle will be raised to the second-
Suspension
highest level using the air suspension®. The ESC
will be restricted and the hill descent assist* will The suspension adjusts to be tighter or more
be activated. The vehicle will exit this mode after comfort-oriented when it comes to compensat-
the ignition is switched off. ing for uneven spots on the road.
108
Driving dynamic
The vehicle ground clearance is adjusted by the The Audi drive select* mode will be changed if
air suspension* based on the setting. necessary when the vehicle is raised.
Engine sound The vehicle will lower when at speeds of approxi-

mately 22 mph (35 km/h) and lower. This func-
The engine sound adapts and can be subtle to
tion may only be used temporarily when in-
sporty.
creased ground clearance is necessary. It is not
intended for long drives.
Suspension
Adaptive dampers C) Note
Applies to: vehicles with suspension control — Also refer to the information about ground
clearance > page 109.
The adaptive dampers are an electronically-con-
— When transporting the vehicle on a road
trolled damping system. The firmness of the sus-
carrier, rail carrier, ship carrier, or other car-
pension will adapt to the driving conditions and
rier, it may only be secured at the running
the driving situation. The settings depend on the
surfaces of the tires (circumference). Secur-
selected Audi drive select* mode.
ing the vehicle at the axle components, sus-
pension struts, or towing eyes is not permit-
Air suspension
ted because the pressure in the air suspen-
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
sion struts can change during transport. The
The air suspension is an electronically-controlled vehicle might not be secured sufficiently if
suspension and leveling system. The firmness of this happens.
the suspension will adapt to the driving condi-
tions and the driving situation. The system balan- Ground clearance
ces out changes in load. The vehicle level will also
adapt gradually to the vehicle speed in order to The vehicle height and clearance can be influ-
reduce the wind resistance at high speeds and in- enced by the following factors:
crease the ground clearance at low speeds. The — Change in temperature
settings depend on the selected Audi drive se- — Change in load
lect* mode. — Change to the Audi drive select* mode
Displaying the vehicle level — Lifting and lowering via the air suspension*
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: ZA\ WARNING
VEHICLE > Audi drive select.
To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no one
The filled-in boxes represent the current vehicle gets pinched when the vehicle level is chang-
level. The more boxes that are filled in, the high- ing, for example when cleaning the under-
er the ground clearance. The box that corre- body or the wheel housings.
sponds with the current vehicle level will flash
while the vehicle is lifting or lowering. The target @) Note
level is indicated by a red outline.
Always make sure there is enough clearance
Raising the vehicle above and below the vehicle. This is especially
important for entrances with height restric-
tions, for example, before driving into under-
VEHICLE > Audi drive select.
ground garages. You could also scrape the
> Press Raise to reach the highest vehicle level
ground when driving over the edges of curbs
and thus the maximum ground clearance.
4K0012721BD
or on steep ramps, which could damage your

> Press Lower to lower the vehicle down again.
vehicle.
109
Driving dynamic
Messages Steering
B Air suspension: malfunction! You may con-
tinue driving slowly at max. XX mph (km/h)
Electromechanical steering supports the driver's
There is a malfunction. Driving stability may be steering movements by electronically adapting
limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au- the power steering depending on the vehicle
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately. Do not speed. The settings depend on the selected Audi
drive faster than the speed given in the message. drive select* mode.
B Air suspension: malfunction! Safely stop ve- Progressive steering
hicle. Steering and ground clearance limited Applies to: vehicles with progressive steering
There is a malfunction. Do not continue driving. The driving dynamic and driving stability are in-
Stop the vehicle safely. Avoid turning the steer- creased by the steering ratio based on the steer-
ing wheel, because the vehicle ground clearance ing wheel angle. The steering is very direct when
may be so low that turning the steering wheel the steering wheel angle is sharp, and indirect
could result in damage to the wheels and wheel when the angle is low. This enables comfortable
housings. maneuvering and a precise steering response at
| 8 | Suspension: malfunction! You can continue higher driving speeds.
driving Dynamic all-wheel steering
Applies to: vehicles with dynamic all-wheel steering
There is a malfunction. See an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as- Active corrective steering at the front and rear
sistance. axles increases the driving dynamic and driving
stability. At low speeds, the rear wheels are
|<] Air suspension: vehicle too low. Limited
steered in the opposite direction from the front
ground clearance
wheels to reduce the steering effort needed by
The vehicle ground clearance is very low. Wait un- the driver and to reduce the turning radius. Vehi-
til the air suspension system has restored normal cle handling improves. At high speeds, steering
ground clearance. Have an authorized Audi dealer the rear wheels in the same direction as the front
or authorized Audi Service Facility repair the mal- wheels improves the vehicle response and driving
function immediately if the indicator light does stability. The vehicle reacts quickly and precisely
not turn off after a significant period of time. to the driver's steering movements.
B Air suspension: malfunction! Please contact
Service Messages
There is a malfunction. The driving stability may a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
be limited and the ground clearance may be low.
The power steering may have failed. Adapt your
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
driving style immediately to compensate for the
Service Facility for assistance.
fact that it may be more difficult to turn the
Audi drive select: automatic suspension low- steering wheel, and stop your vehicle in a safe lo-
ering. See owner's manual cation as soon as possible. Do not continue driv-
ing. See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored
Audi Service Facility for assistance.
for the active personal profile > page 30.
a Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle.
Audi drive select: automatic suspension lift.
Pay attention to distance at side
See owner's manual
The rear axle steering may have failed. More
The vehicle level is adjusted to the setting stored
space on the road may be needed at the side of >
for the active personal profile > page 30.
110
Driving dynamic
the vehicle, and the turning radius may be much The display turns off if the initialization was suc-
larger. Slow down immediately, and stop your ve- cessful.
hicle as soon as possible in a safe location with
enough space at the sides of the vehicle. Do not ZA\ WARNING
continue driving. See an authorized Audi dealer Do not tow your vehicle if there is a malfunc-
or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance. tion in the electronic steering lock because
2 —<| Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle this increases the risk of an accident.
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering @) Tips

lock. You cannot turn the ignition on. Do not tow
—If there is a malfunction, the steering wheel
your vehicle because it cannot be steered. See an
may be crooked when driving straight.
Facility for assistance. —Ifthe a or a indicator light only stays on
for a short time, you may continue driving.
El steering: malfunction! You can continue
driving
All wheel drive (quattro)
There is a malfunction in the steering system.
Steering may be more difficult or more sensitive.
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel drive
Adapt your driving style. Have the steering sys-
tem checked immediately by an authorized Audi The all-wheel drive system distributes the driving
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility. Please power variably to the front and rear axle to im-
note that the red indicator light may turn on af- prove the driving characteristics. It works togeth-
ter restarting the engine. Do not continue driving er with selective wheel torque control, which can
if it does. activate when driving through curves
=> page 113.
& Steering: malfunction! Adapt driving style.
Larger turning radius Applies to: vehicles with quattro ultra: If the driv-
ing situation does not require all wheel drive,
The rear axle steering may have failed. The vehi-
then the rear section of the drivetrain will decou-
cle will have a larger turning radius, and the sta-
ple to save fuel. The system constantly deter-
bility when driving around curves will be compa-
mines and anticipates if all wheel drive is needed.
rable to a vehicle without rear axle steering. Drive
This allows the rear drivetrain to recouple shortly
carefully to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
before it is needed.
ized Audi Service Facility to have the malfunction
corrected. The all-wheel drive system is designed for high
engine power. Your vehicle is exceptionally pow-
|e —o| Steering lock: malfunction! Please contact
erful and has excellent driving characteristics
Service
both under normal driving conditions and on
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering snow and ice. Always read and follow safety pre-
lock. Drive immediately to an authorized Audi cautions > A\.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility to have
the malfunction repaired. ZA\ WARNING
Dynamic steering: correcting steering wheel — Even in vehicles with all wheel drive, you
position should adapt your driving style to the cur-
rent road and traffic conditions to reduce
The steering is reinitializing. The steering wheel
the risk of an accident.
will move easily after starting the vehicle. Reiniti-
— The braking ability of your vehicle is limited
4K0012721BD
alization might be necessary if the steering wheel

to the traction of the wheels. In this way, it
was moved while the engine was switched off.
is not different from a two wheel drive >
111
Driving dynamic
vehicle. Do not drive too fast because this turns to the normal range and the indicator light
increases the risk of an accident. switches of.
— Note that on wet streets, the front wheels
can “hydroplane” if driving at speeds that ZA\ WARNING
are too high. Unlike front wheel drive Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
vehicles, the engine RPM does not increase ized Audi Service Facility if the sport differen-
suddenly when the vehicle begins hydro- tial is faulty or malfunctioning. The repair
planing. Adapt your speed to the road condi- must be performed by trained personnel us-
tions to reduce the risk of an accident. ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety.
Sport differential Electronic Stabilization

Applies to: vehicles with sport differential Control
The sport differential distributes the drive power
to the rear axle based on the situation. The goal
is a high level of agility and ability to accelerate Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC) supports
on curves. The vehicle is very responsive to steer- driver safety. It reduces the risk of slipping and
ing. The settings depend on the selected Audi improves driving stability. ESC detects critical sit-
drive select* mode. uations, such as if the vehicle is oversteering or
understeering, or if the wheels are spinning. The
Messages brakes are applied or the engine torque is re-
duced in order to stabilize the vehicle.
t-3| All-wheel drive: malfunction! You may con-
If the BA indicator light blinks while driving, the
tinue driving. Please contact Service
ESC is actively regulating.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer
If the B indicator light turns on, the system has
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the
switched the ESC off. In this case, you can switch
the ignition off and then on to switch the ESC on
F3| Sport differential: malfunction! Please con- again. The indicator light turns off when the sys-
tact Service tem is fully functional.
Drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer If the B indicator light turns on, ESC was limit-
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the ed or switched off manually > page 113.
The following systems are integrated in the ESC:
3] All-wheel drive: too hot. Please adapt driv-
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
ing style. See owner's manual
ABS prevents the wheels from locking when brak-
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
ing. The vehicle can still be steered even during
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive
hard braking. Apply steady pressure to the brake
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re-
pedal. Do not pump the pedal.
turns to the normal range and the indicator light
switches of. A pulsing in the brake pedal indicates that the
system is acting to stabilize the vehicle.
it-3| Sport differential: temperature too high.
Please adapt driving style Brake assist
The transmission temperature has increased sig- The brake assist system can decrease braking dis-
nificantly due to the sporty driving manner. Drive tance. It increases braking power when the driver
in a less sporty manner until the temperature re- presses the brake pedal quickly in emergency sit-
uations. You must press and hold the brake pedal >
112
Driving dynamic
until the dangerous situation is over. Depending

on the activated driver assistance systems, the
ZA WARNING
brake assist system may react with increased sen- — The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
sitivity. overcome the limits imposed by natural
physical laws. This is especially important on
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR) slippery or wet roads. If the systems begin
ASR reduces drive power when the wheels begin acting to stabilize your vehicle, you should
spinning and adapts the power to the road condi- immediately alter your speed to match the
tions. This will increase the driving stability. road and traffic conditions. Do not let the in-
creased safety provided tempt you into tak-
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL) ing risks. This could increase your risk ofa
The EDL applies the brakes to wheels that are collision.
slipping and transfers the drive power to the oth- — Please note the risk ofa collision increases
er wheels. This function is not available at higher when driving fast, especially through curves
speeds. and on slippery or wet roads, and when driv-
ing too close to objects ahead. There is still
In extreme cases, EDL automatically switches off
a risk of accidents because the ESC and its
to keep the brake on the braked wheel from over- integrated systems cannot always prevent
heating. The vehicle is still functioning correctly. collisions.
EDL will switch on again automatically when con-
— Accelerate carefully when driving on
ditions have returned to normal.
smooth, slippery surfaces such as ice and
Power steering snow. The drive wheels can spin even when
these control systems are installed and this
The ESC can also support vehicle stability
can affect driving stability and increase the
through steering.
risk of a collision.
Selective wheel torque control
Selective wheel torque control is used when driv-
(i) Tips
ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the — The ABS and ASR only function correctly
wheels on the inside of the curve as needed. This when all four wheels have a similar wear
allows more precise driving in curves. condition. Different tire sizes can lead toa
reduction in engine power.
Automatic post-collision braking system — You may hear noises when the systems de-
The automatic post-collision braking system can scribed are working.
help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addition-
al collisions after an accident. If the airbag con-
trol module detects a collision, the vehicle is
braked by the ESC. The So button for controlling the ESC is located
in the center console, in front of the selector lev-
The vehicle does not brake automatically if one of er.
the following occurs:
The ESC is automatically switched on when the
— The driver presses the accelerator pedal, or ignition is switched on. It may make sense in
— The braking force generated by the pressed some situations to limit the ESC so that the
brake pedal is greater than the braking force wheels can spin:
that would be initiated by the system
— Rocking the vehicle to free it when it is stuck
— The ESC, the brake system, or the vehicle elec-
— Driving in deep snow, on unpaved ground, or
trical system is not functioning
4K0012721BD
with snow chains
113
Driving dynamic
— Applies to: allroad: driving downhill while brak-

ing on loose ground
— Applies to: allroad: Driving with axle articula- B fs / B © Stabilization control (ESC/
tion ABS): malfunction! See owner's manual
There is a malfunction in the ABS or EDL. This al-

Limiting ESC (Sport/Offroad mode)
so causes the ESC to malfunction. The brakes still
—To limit the ESC, press the So button briefly. function with their normal power, but ABS is not
The B indicator light turns on. active.
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
function, press the button again. The indicator
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
light turns off.
malfunction corrected.
When ESC is limited, allroad models switch to
Offroad mode. All other model versions switch to
Sport mode. Sport mode is particularly suited for
driving on an even road surface. Offroad mode is
designed for uneven terrain or loose ground.
Switching off ESC

—To switch off the ESC, press and hold the or
button for more than three seconds. The B
and IESC OFF| indicator lights turn on.
— To completely reactivate the ESC stabilization
function, press the button again. The indicator
lights turn off.
Z\ WARNING
— When the ESC is switched off or limited,
there will be no vehicle stabilization or it will
be limited. The driving wheels could spin
and the vehicle could swerve, especially on
slick or slippery road surfaces, which in-
creases the risk of an accident.
— Because of the increased risk of an accident,
only drive with the ESC switched off or Limit-
ed when it is necessary. Reactivate the ESC
as soon as possible.
@ Tips
— If the ESC is limited, switched off, or mal-
functioning, systems with an automatic
braking intervention function may not be
fully available.
— If malfunctions occur in other systems or
certain driver assist systems are active, the
ESC must be switched on by the system. The
ESC may switch on automatically and can-
not be operated with the button.
114
Trailer towing
Trailer towing CG) Note

Driving with a trailer Longer inclines cannot be driven without a
suitable cooling system, especially if the out-
General information side temperatures are high. Otherwise, this
Your vehicle is primarily intended for transport- increases the risk of engine damage.
ing people and luggage. However, if you drive
with a trailer, follow the technical requirements, Operating instructions
the operation and driving tips, and the legal reg-
Towing capacity
ulations.
Your vehicle can only be operated with class 1 or
Driving with a trailer affects the vehicle's energy
class 2 trailers.
usage, performance, and wear. It also requires
higher concentration from the driver. Load distribution
Poor cargo load and distribution can negatively
Z\ WARNING impact vehicle handling. Load the trailer based
Do not transport any people in a trailer due to on the following criteria as much as possible:
the risk of fatal injury.
— Store objects in the vehicle luggage compart-
ment, if possible. The vehicle should always
Technical requirements carry the heaviest possible load and the trailer
Trailer hitch should have the lightest possible load.
— Distribute the load in the trailer so that the
Only use a trailer hitch with a removable ball heavy objects are as close to the axle as possi-
hitch mount and ball hitch. The trailer hitch must
ble.
be permitted for the vehicle, the trailer and the
— Secure objects so that they do not slide.
permitted total weight of the trailer being
— Utilize the maximum permitted tongue weight
pulled. Above all, it must be securely and safely
if possible.
attached to the vehicle trailer.
Tires
Never mount a trailer hitch on the bumper. The
trailer hitch must be mounted in a way that does Set the tire pressure on your vehicle for a “full
not impair the function of the bumper. Do not load”; see the tire pressure sticker > page 255. If
make any changes to the exhaust system and the necessary, also adjust the tire pressure on the
brake system. trailer according to the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
Check regularly if the trailer hitch is securely
mounted. Always follow the instructions given by The trailer and the vehicle should be equipped
the trailer hitch manufacturer. with winter tires when driving in winter tempera-
tures.
Trailer brakes
Outside mirrors
If the trailer has its own brake system, then fol-
low the manufacturer specifications. However, If you cannot see the traffic behind the trailer
the brake system on the trailer must never be with the standard exterior mirrors, then you
connected to the vehicle brake system. must attach additional exterior mirrors. Adjust
them so you have a sufficient visibility behind
Engine cooling system
you.
Driving with a trailer means a higher load on the
4K0012721BD
Exterior lighting
engine and the cooling system. The cooling sys-
tem must be designed for additional load and Follow the legal regulations for lighting on your
contain enough coolant > @. trailer that are applicable in the country where >
115
Trailer towing
you are operating the vehicle. Contact an author- Vehicle levels below the values set in the Com-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- fort level will no longer be available, even if you
ty for more information. are lowering the vehicle manually.
Before you start driving, check all lighting equip-

ment on the trailer while it is hitched to the vehi-
Z\ WARNING
cle. — Never turn off trailer mode while driving
when a trailer is hitched, because then the
The headlight range control automatically ad- restrictions for controlling the vehicle level
justs the light range of the headlights. will be turned off.
Safety chains — Driving with a trailer on unpaved roads when
the vehicle is raised may change the vehicle
Make sure the safety chains are correctly applied handling. Adapt your speed.
when pulling a trailer. The chains should hang
— Note that the vehicle will lower automatical-
enough so that the trailer can drive around
ly at certain speeds if you have lifted the ve-
curves. However, they must not touch the
hicle manually.
ground.
Air suspension @) Note

Applies to: vehicles with air suspension — Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Se-
The Audi drive select* comfort mode > page 108 lect the Audi drive select* comfort mode.
must be selected before you adjust the tongue Otherwise, the tongue load specified for
weight on the trailer and hitch the trailer >@, your vehicle will no longer be applicable.
=> page 109. — Attachments retrofitted on the vehicle may
cause damage, especially on the trailer
Likewise, the vehicle cannot be raised manually
hitch ball head. In cases of damage, have
using the Raise function > page 109.
the function checked by an authorized Audi
For vehicles with a retrofitted trailer hitch, you dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
must switch on the air suspension trailer mode
manually. @) Tips
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- — Block the wheels with chocks when parking
HICLE > Settings & Service > Air suspension: on inclines if the trailer is loaded.
trailer. — Having the vehicle inspected between the
inspection intervals is recommended if you
Switch it off again when you are no longer towing tow a trailer frequently.
a trailer. — Avoid driving with a trailer during the vehi-
When using carrier systems that are mounted di- cle break-in period.
rectly on the trailer hitch ball head, you can also
switch trailer mode off manually. Driving with a trailer
If you must drive on roads that are in poor condi- Driving with a trailer requires extra caution.
tion, you can raise the vehicle again after hitching
the trailer or after adjusting the tongue weight Speed
=> page 109. Adhere to the legal speed limits. Follow the legal
Applies to: allroad: You can also increase ground regulations that are applicable in the country
clearance by selecting the Audi drive select* off- where you are operating the vehicle.
road or allroad modes > page 108. As the speed increases, the driving stability of
the trailer decreases. Therefore you should not
exceed the maximum legal speed limit when >
116
Trailer towing
there are unfavorable road, weather, and/or wind

conditions. This especially applies when driving
downhill.
Hill
When you start driving uphill or downhill, trailers
may tilt or sway sooner than when driving ona
level surface. If small swaying movements have
already occurred, you can stabilize the trailer by
firmly braking immediately. Never attempt to
“straighten out” the trailer by accelerating.
Downshift before driving on hills to utilize the en-

gine braking effect > A\.
Brakes
When using a trailer with overrun brakes, first
brake gently then quickly. This reduces the risk of
jerking while braking if the trailer wheels lock up.
Engine coolant temperature

Pay attention specifically to the coolant tempera-
ture display when there are high outside temper-
atures, and when driving on long inclines
=> page 14. Shift to a higher gear in a timely man-
ner.
ZX WARNING
Constant braking causes the brakes to over-
heat and can substantially reduce braking per-
formance, increase braking distance, or cause
complete failure of the brake system.
4K0012721BD
117
Assist systems
Assist systems System limitations
General information ZA\ WARNING

Safety precautions — The use of an assist system cannot over-
come the natural laws of physics. A collision
ZA WARNING cannot be prevented in certain circumstan-
— As the driver, you are always completely re- ces.

sponsible for all driving tasks. The assist — Warnings, messages, or indicator lights may
systems cannot replace the driver's atten- not be displayed or initiated on time or cor-
tion. Give your full attention to driving the rectly, for example, if vehicles are approach-
vehicle, and be ready to intervene in the ing very fast.
traffic situation at all times. — Corrective interventions by the assist sys-
— Activate the assist systems only if the sur- tems, such as steering or braking interven-
rounding conditions permit it. Always adapt tions, may not be sufficient or they may not
your driving style to the current visual, occur. Always be ready to intervene.
weather, road, and traffic conditions.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve- G) Tips
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak- — Due to the system limitations when detect-
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of ing the surrounding area, the systems may
an accident. Store objects securely while warn or intervene unexpectedly or too late
driving. in certain situations. The assist systems may
— For the assist systems to be able to react also interpret a driving maneuver incorrectly
correctly, the function of the sensors and and then warn the driver unexpectedly.
cameras must not be restricted. Note the in- — The systems may not function as expected
formation on sensors and cameras in unusual driving situations, such as driving
=>page 119. offroad, on unpaved roads, on loose ground,
on inclines, or on grooves in the road.
@ Tips — The systems may not function correctly in
— Pay attention to applicable local regulations unclear traffic situations, such as turning
relating to driving tasks, leaving space for lanes, exit ramps, construction zones, rises
emergency vehicles, vehicle distance, speed, or dips that obstruct visibility, intersections,
parking location, wheel placement, etc. The toll stations, or city traffic.
driver is always responsible for following — The detection of the surrounding area can
the laws that are applicable in the location be limited, for example by vehicles driving
where the vehicle is being operated. ahead or by rain, snow, heavy spray, or light
— You can cancel a steering or braking inter- shining into the camera.
vention by the system, by braking or accel- — If accessories have been mounted on the
erating noticeably, steering, or deactivating steering wheel, the ability for the steering
the respective assist system. systems to react may be limited.
— Always check the assist systems settings be-
fore driving. The settings could have been
changed, for example, by other drivers or if
another personal profile was used.
118
Assist systems
Surrounding area Radar sensors

detection Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
surrounding the entire vehicle may be detected
fig. 91.
The wheel sensors on the rear corners of the vehi-
RAZ-0612
cle are positioned so that the adjacent lanes to
the left and right are detected on roads with a
normal lane width.
Ultrasonic sensors
Depending on vehicle equipment, various areas

may be displayed in the MMI using the ultrasonic
sensors > fig. 91.
The range of the displays depends on the location

of the ultrasonic sensors:
@ Approximately 4 ft (1.20 m)
@® Approximately 3 ft (0.90 m)
@® Approximately 5.2 ft (1.60 m)
© Approximately 3 ft (0.90 m)
Cameras
Use the camera image on the display to assist you
only if it shows a good, clear picture. Keep in
mind that the image in the display is enlarged
B8V-0687
and distorted. Under certain circumstances, ob-

jects may appear different and unclear on the dis-
play.
The rearview camera can only detect the area

marked in red > fig. 92. Only this area is dis-
played on the upper display > A\.
|A WARNING
Fig. 92 Diagram: coverage area of the rearview camera Sensors and cameras have spots in which the
surrounding area cannot be detected. Objects,

The assist systems analyze the data from various
animals, and people may only be detected
sensors and cameras installed in the vehicle. Do
with limitations may not be detected at all.
not use any assist systems if there is damage to
Always monitor the traffic and the vehicle's
the vehicle in an area where sensors and cameras
surroundings directly and do not become dis-
are located or on the vehicle underbody, or if the
tracted.
vehicle was involved in a collision. The functional-
ity of the sensors and cameras could be impaired, @) Note
or they could malfunction. Have an authorized :
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility ~ Obstacles may disappear from the measure-
check their function. ment range when approaching them, even if
4K0012721BD
they were already detected. >
119
Assist systems
—Insome situations, the ability of the sen- Industry Canada regulations, see
sors and cameras to detect and display => page 296.
certain objects may be limited.
— Objects located above the coverage area, Locations of the sensors and cameras
such as bumpers on parked cars, garage
doors that are partially open, or objects
that are hanging
— Low obstacles
— Narrow objects, such as barrier chains, fo-
liage, poles, or fences
— Projecting objects, such as trailer draw
bars
— Objects with certain surfaces and struc-
tures, such as fabric
Fig. 93 Front area: sensors and cameras
G) Tips
— The sensors and cameras and the areas
around them must not be obstructed be-
cause this can impair the function of the
systems that depend on them. Make sure
that the sensors and cameras are free of
snow, ice, and other deposits. Do not use
any accessories, stickers, or other objects
that extend into the range of the sensors
and cameras. Fig. 94 Rear area: sensors and cameras
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-

cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- Front area
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
with ones that are the same size and made ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
of the same material. Do not install any Li- — Laser scanner in the front in the radiator grille
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles oA
that do not have factory-installed brackets. — Camera behind the windshield
Otherwise, the function of the system could — Peripheral cameras on the exterior mirrors
be impaired.
— Front peripheral camera in the radiator grille
— The function of the sensors and cameras
— Night vision camera in the radiator grille
may be limited when light and visibility con-
— Front ultrasonic sensors
ditions are poor, for example when driving
— Radar sensors at the front corners of the vehi-
into a tunnel, when there is glare, or when
cle
there are reflective objects.
— Radar sensor in the front in the radiator grille
— External ultrasonic sensors, such as those in
other vehicles, can interfere with the sen- Rear area
sors.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow-
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 91
ing sensors and cameras may be installed:
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
— Rearview camera in the luggage compartment
to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
lid
— Radar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle
FCC regulations in the United States and the
— Rear ultrasonic sensors
120
Assist systems
ZA WARNING Switching the systems

Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner on and off
— The surface of the laser scanner can become
hot during operation, which increases the
risk of burns.
— The laser scanner contains a class 1 laser in
accordance with IEC 60825-1:2014. When
used according to regulations, the laser is
not dangerous. Opening the laser module
and removing covers is not permitted. Doing
so could cause permanent injuries to the
eyes.
Fig. 95 Center console: driver assistance systems button
— Any repair work on the laser module must
be performed by an authorized Audi dealer Description
or authorized Audi Service Facility; other-
You can switch some assist systems on and off in
wise the vehicle's operating license may be
the MMI. Depending on the equipment, it may be
voided. Incorrect repairs may cause limited
in the standard display or the profile selection.
functionality and eye damage.
> Press the & button, or
@) Tips > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner VEHICLE > Driver assistance.
— The possible emissions are below the Standard display
threshold for class 1 lasers. Applies to: vehicles with standard display
— Complies with 21 CFR 1040.10 and
> To switch a system on or off, press CD for the
1040.11 except for deviations pursuant to
desired system.
Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.
> To show the brief description of a system, press
@ Tips
© for the desired system.
— The locations of the sensors may differ Profile selection

slightly depending on vehicle equipment. Applies to: vehicles with profile selection
— Some sensors are installed under vehicle > To select a profile, press the profile name on
components and cannot be seen from the the upper display or press the © button repeat-
outside. edly until the profile is active.
— For an explanation on conformity with the > To list systems included in a profile, select EJ
FCC regulations in the United States and the on the upper display.
Industry Canada regulations, see > To show the brief description of a system, se-
=> page 296. lect @ for the desired system.
> To switch individual systems on and off in the
Individual profile, select ¥ and @ for the de-
sired systems.
The following profiles can be selected:
— Maximum - All available systems are switched

on in this profile.
4K0012721BD
— Individual- You can switch the systems on and

off individually in this profile. >
121
Assist systems
— Basic or All off- Only the basic systems are

switched on in this profile. If no basic system is
available, the profile is All off.
Follow the safety precautions and note the

limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 118.

122
Driving information
Driving information Camera-based traffic

Speed warning system sign recognition
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
The speed warning system helps the driver to

stay below a specified maximum speed. A warn-
ing threshold can be set in the MMI for this pur-
pose.
Once the speed slightly exceeds the stored

threshold, the speed warning system will alert
the driver with an indicator in the instrument
cluster and a warning tone. Once the speed drops
below the stored maximum speed, the indicator Fig. 96 Instrument cluster: traffic sign recognition
will turn off.
The traffic sign recognition shows the traffic
Setting a threshold is recommended if you would
signs detected by the front camera in the instru-
like to be reminded when you reach a certain
ment cluster display and in the head-up display”.
maximum speed. Situations where you may want
Data from the navigation system is also included
to do so include driving in a country with a gener-
in the display. Up to three traffic signs can be dis-
al speed limit or if there is a specified maximum
played in the instrument cluster at once. The
speed for winter tires.
speed limit that is currently applicable is dis-
@) Tips played in the status line. If necessary, it will be
hidden if the system detects that turning right is
Regardless of the speed warning system, you
prohibited at a red light. The display in the head-
should always monitor your speed using the
up display* can be switched off > page 26.
speedometer and make sure you are following
the legal speed limit. Within the limits of the system and depending
on the market, speed limit restrictions @ in
school zones, highways, construction zones, or at
Setting the warning threshold
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system
night may be displayed.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Limitations

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Speed The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
warning. system limitations and may be unavailable or on-
ly partially available in the following situations:
@ Tips
— When visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
Certain settings are stored automatically in fog, or heavy spray
the active personal profile. —When there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun
— At high speeds
Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system — If the camera's visual field > page 119 is cov-
ered, for example by dirt or stickers. Cleaning
ey Manually set XX speed limit warning
information > page 266
threshold exceeded
4K0012721BD
— If the traffic signs are completely or partially

The stored speed was exceeded. covered, for example by trees, snow, dirt, or
other vehicles
123
Driving information
— If traffic signs do not conform to the standard

G) Tips
format
— If traffic signs are damaged or bent Certain settings are stored automatically in
— If traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
with electronic signs
— If the traffic signs or the roadways have Messages
changed, and the navigation data is no longer Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
up-to-date Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila-

ble. Camera view limited due to environmental
Z\ WARNING conditions
— Follow the safety precautions and respect
The camera’s visual field is covered. Clean the
the limits of the assist systems, sensors,
windshield.
and cameras > page 118.
— Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec- Traffic sign recognition: currently limited.
ognition may not detect traffic signs correct- See owner's manual
ly or detect them at all. As a result, the sys-
This message appears if navigation system data
tem may not display the correct speed limit
is not available, for example on newly-construct-
or any speed limit.
ed roads. The speed limit display will be tempo-
rarily limited, which increases the risk of an incor-
@) Tips
rect display. If this message continues to appear,
— Traffic sign recognition does not adapt your drive immediately to an authorized Audi dealer or
vehicle's speed to match the speed Limit. authorized Audi Service Facility to have the mal-
— The display in the instrument cluster is function repaired.
based on the units of measurement used for
No traffic sign information available
speed in the country where the vehicle is be-
ing operated. As a result, a display of 50 in Depending on the area, there is no valid naviga-
the instrument cluster can mean either mph tion data and no speed limits were detected. This
or km/h, depending on the country. may also appear if there is a recommended
speed, but no speed limit (for example when
driving on and off the expressway).
Applies to: vehicles with camera-based traffic sign recognition
Malfunction! See owner's manual
Accessing traffic sign recognition The system may not function correctly so it has
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func- been switched off. See an authorized Audi dealer
tions tab > Traffic signs. or authorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Setting a traffic sign based speed warning Function currently unavailable. See owner's
manual
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (3) > Speed If this message appears on vehicles without cam-
warning. era-based traffic sign recognition, then the traffic
light information function is currently unavaila-
You can select a warning threshold. If it is ex-
ble. See > page 126.
ceeded, then the current detected speed limit
will be shown in the display with an exclamation
point for the duration that it is exceeded and it
will blink for a short time.
124
Driving information
Traffic light information — If data transmission is deactivated in the priva-

cy settings
— If the subscription has expired
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
If this is the case, the menu item will be grayed-
out or it will not be possible to select it.
ZA\ WARNING
— When traffic light information is shown, al-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
tion, the distance to other vehicles, and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traffic situa-
tion.
Fig. 97 Instrument cluster: traffic light information dis-
— Always adapt your speed to the current
play
weather, road and traffic conditions. The dis-
played information must never cause you to
The traffic light information gives you a speed
recommendation in order to reach the next traffic ignore legal traffic regulations and pose a
light when it is green @, or it informs you of the safety risk.
wait time at the next red light 2). Once traffic — Regardless of the traffic light information,
light data is received, the traffic light information you should always monitor your speed using
will be displayed in the instrument cluster and in the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
the head-up display*. If the vehicle is in an area hering to the legal speed limit.
with traffic light information but cannot receive a — The traffic light information does not adjust
traffic light signal, then a gray traffic light sym- your vehicle's speed to the speed recom-
bol will be displayed @). mendation shown in the display.
— Follow the safety precautions and note the
General information limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
The traffic light information is subject to system cameras > page 118.
limitations and may be unavailable or only parti-
ally available in the following situations: (i) Tips
—If the permitted speed limit is exceeded — Traffic light information was only available
— If driving below a certain speed limit in select cities at the time this manual was
printed.
— If the next traffic light is less than approxi-
— Traffic light information is not available na-
mately 100 feet (30 m) away
tionwide.
— If the estimated wait time at a red light is less
than four seconds
— The functions depend on the navigation da-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica-
— If there is no traffic light data available
tion by the traffic sign recognition*.
— If emergency response vehicles or public transit
— Incorrect values from the camera-based
systems are active
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
— If traffic lights are in construction zones or be-
tion system* map data can result in missing
ing serviced
or incorrect display images.
— If there are warnings from the camera-based
— Certain traffic lights can automatically ad-
traffic sign recognition*
just to the current traffic situation. If this
— If the camera-based traffic sign recognition* is
occurs, the display of traffic light informa-
4K0012721BD
malfunctioning or not available

tion can change suddenly.
—If the data connection has been interrupted
125
Driving information
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- — There is no valid license
ority over the display. The driver is always — Traffic light information is not available in that
responsible for adhering to the regulations area
applicable in the country where the vehicle
is being operated. Lap timer
— Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
set in the MMI system settings > page 223.
You can record and evaluate lap times with the
lap timer. You can operate the lap timer using the
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information multifunction steering wheel > page 13.
Switching traffic light information on and Opening the lap timer
off
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
The system can be switched on and off in the tions tab > [=] button > Lap times.
MMI page 121.
An additional indicator appears in the head-up
Accessing traffic light information display”.
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-
tions tab > Traffic signs. ZA\ WARNING
Your focus should always be on driving your
@) Tips vehicle safely. As the driver, you have com-
If another tab or another function is selected plete responsibility for safety in traffic. To re-
in the instrument cluster, the traffic light induce the risk of an accident, only use the lap
formation will appear in the status bar on the timer functions in such a way that you always
instrument cluster. maintain complete control over your vehicle in
all traffic situations.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with traffic light information
Gi) Tips
You can retrieve information from the trip
Malfunction! See owner's manual
computer while the lap timer stopwatch is
The system could not be configured, for example running.
due to a network malfunction. Switch the igni-
tion off and shut down the vehicle to restart the ey R em ale)
system. Wait several minutes until the vehicle Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
has shut down completely and then switch the
Requirement: the lap timer must be open
ignition back on.
> page 126.
Function currently unavailable. See owner's
manual Timing laps
There is a temporary system malfunction. Check > To start timing manually, select Start lap 1 in
if one or more of the following situations applies the menu.
and correct the issue if necessary: > To start timing automatically as soon as you be-
gin to drive, select Start lap 1 by driving off or
— Traffic light information is switched off Start by driving off in the menu.
— Data transmission is deactivated > To start timing a new lap after driving a lap, se-
— The vehicle is not equipped with traffic sign rec- lect New lap in the menu. This starts timing
ognition. the next lap at the same time.
126
Driving information
After completing a lap, the difference between Resetting lap statistics

the last lap and the previous best lap time will be Requirement: the lap statistics menu must be
indicated witha “~” or “+”.
displayed.
Pausing timing and displaying a split time > To reset the lap statistics, press and hold the
> To insert a pause @ select Pause in the menu. left thumbwheel until the message No lap
> To resume timing, select Resume in the menu. times have been recorded yet. appears.
> To display a split time, select Split time in the
menu. The split time appears for approxi- @) Tips
mately ten seconds in the instrument cluster. The lap statistics list the lap times for the last
The current lap timing will continue running. 30 laps. The fastest and slowest lap times out
of up to 99 measured laps are also displayed.
Canceling lap timing
The timing of the current lap will stop. The lap
Night vision assist
time will be erased and will not be included in the
statistics.
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
> Select Cancel lap in the menu.
Night vision assist helps you when it is dark by
Resetting the time
using an infrared camera to monitor the area in
> Select Reset lap times in the menu. front of your vehicle, within the limits of the sys-
tem. It can display objects up to a distance of ap-
@ Tips proximately 1000 feet (300 m).
—A maximum of 99 lap times can be meas- Pedestrian and wild animals are detected by
ured. measuring the temperature difference between
- If timing is paused, you can continue it later the object and the background. Pedestrians and
even if you switch the ignition off. wild animals will not be detected if the tempera-
— Saved lap times cannot be individually de- ture difference is too small. The pedestrian and
leted from the total results. wild animal marking feature is deactivated at
— The saved lap timer values will remain after temperatures above approximately 77 °F (25 °C)
switching the ignition off. and when it is light outside.
The thermal image detected by the camera is dis-

Lap stati played in the instrument cluster. Warm areas
Applies to: vehicles with lap timer
generally appear lighter and cold areas appear
Displaying lap statistics darker.
You can display the number of laps driven ES The camera for the night vision assist is located
the fastest lap “+”, the slowest lap “~”, and the in the vehicle's radiator grille > page 120. Make
average time “®” in the instrument cluster. sure the night vision camera is not covered by
stickers, deposits, or any other obstructions be-
> Select in the instrument cluster: Vehicle func-
cause this can impair the night vision assist func-
tions tab > [=] button > Lap statistics.
tion. Follow the information about cleaning
> Turn the thumbwheel down or up to display the
=> page 266.
individual lap times.
> To return to the lap timing that was started, se- ZX WARNING
lect the [J button > Lap times.
4K0012721BD

cameras > page 118. >
127
Driving information
— Night vision assist can only detect pedes-

trians and wild animals located within the Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
range of the infrared camera.

— Night vision assist cannot detect pedes-
trians or wild animals and mark them if:
— They are not in an upright position, for ex-
ample if they are sitting or lying down
and/or
—The silhouette in the display appears in-
complete or interrupted, for example be-
cause the pedestrian is partially behind a
vehicle or an animal is partially covered by Fig. 98 Instrument cluster: pedestrian marking and warn-
tall grass. ing
— Never attempt to swerve around animals if
doing so would endanger you or other road Highlighting detected pedestrians and wild
users. animals
Within the limits of the system, the night vision
G@) Tips assist can detect pedestrians and wild animals
— Even though the system evaluates the that are between approximately 32 feet (10 m)
shape and heat given off by all detected ob- and 295 feet (90 m) in front of the vehicle and
jects, there are limits to the system. There within the detection zone. Animal recognition is
may be false warnings. not active within highly developed areas. The sys-
— For technical reasons, the image pauses in tem only detects large wild animals such as deer.
split second intervals. When it is dark outside and the low beams are
switched on, detected objects are marked in yel-
low @), within the limits of the system.
Switching on and off
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist Pedestrian and wild animal warning
The system can be switched on and off in the This system limits are based on the vehicle speed
MMI > page 121. and steering angle. Pedestrian and wild animal
warning encourages you to pay more attention.
> The AUTO light function must be selected for
the night vision assist to automatically activate If there are pedestrians or wild animals in front
when it is dark. of your vehicle that could pose a danger, the sys-
> Switch on the low beams manually to activate tem will direct your attention to this.
night vision assist immediately. To do so,
— Pedestrians or wild animals are highlighted in
press @ on the light switch module and select
red in the instrument cluster(2) and the MM or
BA symbol turns on @.
Ww
When activated, the %1 tab appears in the instru- — When the head-up display* is switched on, the
ment cluster. additional indicator [AM or EM appears.
> Select in the instrument cluster: tab % —Achime will sound if something is detected.
—If the night vision assist thermal image is re-
@) Tips placed by another display (such as the on-board
When the night vision assist tab is selected in computer), the red A or A indicator light will
the instrument cluster and the low beams are appear if there is a pedestrian or wild animal
switched off, the thermal image display dis- warning.
appears only after you have exited the tab.
128
Driving information
The Sl symbol will appear when pedestrian and

wild animal detection is not available.
Marking light*
To direct the driver's attention to a pedestrian,
the headlights can flash on the pedestrian when
there is a pedestrian warning.
This occurs at speeds above approximately

35 mph (60 km/h) if you are outside of illuminat-
ed areas and no detected vehicles are shown. The
marking light is not used for wild animals. The
high beam assistant* controls the marking
light*> page 50.
Adjusting the contrast

Requirement: the night vision assist must be

switched on and the 1 tab must be displayed.

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (23) > Night vi-
sion assist.
> To set the desired contrast, move the slider.
G) Tips
Night vision assist: currently unavailable.

See owner's manual
The system is not functioning correctly so it has

been switched off. If this malfunction persists,
function repaired.
4K0012721BD
129
Driver assistance
Driver assistance Switching the system on

Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
BFV-0220
The cruise control system assists the driver in

maintaining a constant speed above approxi-
mately 15 mph (20 km/h). The system maintains
the desired speed by braking and accelerating.
ZA WARNING
Fig. 99 Lever: switching on the cruise control system
— Always pay attention to the traffic around
your vehicle when the cruise control system
is in operation. As the driver, you are always
responsible for controlling your vehicle > To switch the system on, pull the lever toward
speed and the distance between your vehicle you to position @).
and other vehicles.
The Ga or 8) indicator light and the corre-
— For safety reasons, cruise control should not sponding message will appear in the instrument
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on cluster.
winding roads, and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain,
A WARNING
and conditions that could lead to hydroplan-
ing), because this increases the risk of an ac- If the brakes are malfunctioning (for example,
cident. overheating) while the cruise control system
— Switch the cruise control off temporarily is switched on, the regulating functions may
shut off automatically.
when driving in turning lanes, highway exits,
or in construction zones.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, you should etal Rom lad lille Rag etna)
only resume the stored speed if it is suitable speed
for the current traffic conditions. Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
When the vehicle is stationary, you can preselect

C) Note the cruise control speed or activate the speed
Before driving downhill a long distance ona while driving.
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
Requirement: the system must be switched on.
lower gear. This makes use of the engine brak-
ing effect and reduces the load placed on the > To preselect a cruise control speed when the ve-
brakes. hicle is stationary, tap the lever toward @)/G)
=> page 130, fig. 99.
G) Tips > To activate the cruise control speed, pull the
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are lever toward position @ while driving.
applied automatically. > To set the current driving speed as the cruise
control speed, press the button @) on the lever.
The active cruise control speed is indicated with

the ICRUISE| or El indicator light in the instrument
cluster.
130
Driver assistance
An additional indicator appears in the head-up

display*.
ZX WARNING
Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
could override the cruise control. This will pre-
Changing the cruise control speed
vent braking interventions by the system.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed

Seem Lela
in small increments, tap the lever up to the Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
first level toward @)/G) > page 130, fig. 99.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed When you switch the system off completely, the
in larger increments, tap the lever up to the cruise control speed will be deleted.
second level toward )/C). Requirement: the system must be switched on.
> To increase or decrease the cruise control speed
continuously, tap and hold the lever at the first > To switch the system off, press the lever toward
or second level toward @)/C). @ (locked into place) > page 130, fig. 99, or:
> Switch the ignition off.
Overriding or deactivating the cruise

control speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
You can override or deactivate the cruise control Gs / §) Speed control system: currently un-
system. When you deactivate the system, your available. See owner's manual
cruise control speed will be stored and you can If the indicator light turns on and this message
resume that speed.
appears, the cruise control system has been deac-
Requirement: the system must be switched on tivated. There is a temporary malfunction, for ex-
and activated. ample the brakes are overheating. Switch the
cruise control system on again later.
Overriding
> To temporarily override the cruise control Efficiency assist
speed, press the accelerator pedal.
> Once you release the accelerator pedal, the sys-
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
tem will adjust back to the stored cruise control
speed. Efficiency assist can assist the driver with predic-
If you override the cruise control system for a tive information in order to reduce fuel consump-
long period of time, the cruise control system tion. Depending on vehicle equipment, the sys-
will be deactivated. The Gg or [9] indicator tem may access data from the navigation system,
light will be displayed and the cruise control the camera behind the windshield, and the radar
speed will be saved. sensors.
Deactivating Adjusting the efficiency assist
> To deactivate the cruise control speed, press You can adjust efficiency assist functions individ-
the lever toward (2) (not locked into place) ually. The settings depend on the vehicle equip-
=> page 130, fig. 99, or ment.
> Press the brake pedal. — Predictive messages > page 132.
— Predictive control > page 133.
4K0012721BD
— Accelerator pedal feedback > page 97.
131
Driver assistance
Situation symbols — The display in the instrument cluster is

Depending on vehicle equipment, the following based on the units of measurement used for
symbols may be shown. The symbols indicate the speed in the country where the vehicle is be-
situation to which the efficiency assist is responding operated. As a result, a display of 50 in
ing. the instrument cluster can mean either
km/h or mph, depending on the country.
Some symbols only appear if Predictive messag- — Except for the road network, which is re-
es are switched on, and some symbols only ap- corded in the navigation system’s map infor-
pear if Predictive control is switched on and mation, certain functions may not be availa-
adaptive cruise assist* is active. ble.
Description — Certain settings are stored automatically in

Slow down
(predictive messages only)
Predictive messages
Adjustment to curves along route Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist
(predictive control only) Additional
symbols are shown in the Driver as- The symbol BS appears in the instrument cluster
sistance display. display if efficiency assist recommends removing
your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Speed limit
(example) Additional symbols that indicate the situation to
Speed limit which the efficiency assist is reacting are shown
in the Driver assistance display > page 132.
Speed limit
Requirements
Exit ahead
— The cruise control system* or the adaptive
cruise assist* controls must not be active.
Intersection ahead — The vehicle speed must be at least 20 mph
(30 km/h).
Traffic circle ahead —The remaining distance until the situation is
reached must be large enough to allow the sys-
(predictive control only) If the indica- tem to react to the situation.
tor light turns on in green and red, it
is indicating that there is a difference Switching Predictive messages on or off
between the speed limit and the set Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
speed. HICLE > Charging & Efficiency > Efficiency assist
> Predictive messages.
ZA\ WARNING
Follow the safety precautions and note the Z\ WARNING
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and — Follow the safety precautions and note the
cameras > page 118. limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
cameras > page 118.
@) Tips — Pay attention to traffic and the area around
— The functions depend on the navigation da- your vehicle when efficiency assist is switch-
ta* being up-to-date and correct identifica- ed on. The driver is always responsible for
tion by the traffic sign recognition*. assessing the traffic situation. >
— The system only detects traffic signs that
specify a speed Limit.
132
Driver assistance
Requirements
@) Tips
— The adaptive cruise assist must be actively reg-
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri-
ulating > page 137.
ority over the display. The driver is always
responsible for adhering to the regulations — The system can only react to speed limits that
are 20 mph (30 km/h) or higher.
applicable in the country where the vehicle
is being operated. Display in the speedometer
— When a route is planned using the naviga-
The display in the speedometer is not available in
tion system*, then system displays messag-
all layouts*.
es based on an assumed route. Without
route guidance, the system displays mes- @ The marking shows the set speed (regulated
sages based on an assumed route. speed that was set by the driver or by predic-
— The wording of the message may vary de- tive control).
pending on the selected Audi drive select* @ Audi virtual cockpit: The red band shows the
mode and the selected gear. No messages difference between the speed limit and the
are displayed when in the "S" driving pro- set speed.
gram. @® Audi virtual cockpit: the gray band shows if
— Certain settings are stored automatically in the vehicle speed is planned to drop below
the active personal profile. the set speed due to the road layout.
Overriding control
Predictive control
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and efficiency The driver can override the predictive control at
assist
any time by pressing the accelerator or brake
pedal. If the system changes the vehicle speed to
RAZ-0206
x
adapt to speed limits, you can change the speed
using the lever > page 137, fig. 106.
Setting predictive control

You can switch off predictive control functions or
adjust them individually. The settings depend on
the vehicle equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Fig. 100 Instrument cluster: speedometer: predictive con- Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-
trol display HICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Adaptive
cruise assist > Predictive control.
During predictive control), the adaptive cruise
assist uses data from the efficiency assist. The Possible settings:
system adapts the speed set in the adaptive Set speed limit - Adjusts to speed limits. You can
cruise assist to the speed limits that are detected also set With tolerance if desired. In this scenar-
and the layout of the road. After that, the system io, you may fall below or exceed the set speed in
accelerates up to the speed that was set. favor of increased efficiency.
After switching on the ignition, the availability of Adjustment to curves along route - Can be
predictive control is indicated by a message when switched Off or be set individually from Slow to
the adaptive cruise assist is first activated. Fast. The setting influences vehicle handling with
The displays depend on the vehicle equipment. predictive control, for example the speed for
driving through curves.
4K0012721BD
D_ This is not available in some countries.
133
Driver assistance
Messages responsible for adhering to the regulations

If and a message with Adaptive cruise assist: applicable in the country where the vehicle
Predictive control is displayed when there is a is being operated.
malfunction, the efficiency assist functions are — Ifa speed limit is detected, the marking @
unavailable or limited. of the set speed limit will be adjusted even
if the adaptive cruise assist is not actively
A message that indicates the cause and possible regulating.
solution may appear with some displays. The — Control by the system depends on which
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor adaptive cruise assist driving program is set
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the or on the selected Audi drive select* mode.
sensors > page 120 and try to turn on the sys- — After switching on the ignition and first
tems again later. driving onto a freeway or similar road with-
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- out a speed limit, the system will regulate
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- the speed to 80 mph (130 km/h). Then
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct- the system adjusts to the last speed set by
ed. the driver.
— There is no adaptation to speed limits when
ZA\ WARNING driving through highway interchanges and
— Follow the safety precautions and note the when driving on or off the expressway.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and — The system can fail to provide control or the
cameras > page 118. control may be faulty if the values from the
— Pay attention to traffic and the area around camera-based traffic sign recognition* are
your vehicle when predictive control is incorrect or the navigation system map data
switched on. The driver is always responsible is outdated.
for assessing the traffic situation. — When route guidance is switched on, the
— The system does not consider “right of way” system adapts to the route provided by the
rules and does not respond to traffic lights, navigation system. Driving without route
so lack of driver attention in these situations guidance or leaving a route can result in
can increase the risk of an accident. faulty control.
— The speed when driving through curves may — Certain settings are stored automatically in
be different from what you as a driver would the active personal profile.
do or may not be suitable for the weather
and road conditions. If necessary, apply the Adaptive cruise assist
brakes and reduce the selected speed to be
General information
maintained in the Adjustment to curves
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
along route setting to reduce the risk of an
accident. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the adap-
tive cruise assist may consist of the following
G) Tips functions:
— Predictive control can exceed or drop below Within the limits of the system, the adaptive
the maximum permitted speed. The driver speed assist assists the driver in controlling the
is responsible for adhering to the permitted speed and the set distance to the vehicle driving
speed limit. ahead. If the system detects a vehicle driving
— The traffic signs on the road always take pri- ahead, the adaptive speed assist can brake and
ority over the display. The driver is always accelerate your vehicle within the limits of the >
YD In certain countries
134
Driver assistance
system. On open roads with no traffic, it func-

tions like a cruise control system. The stored
speed is maintained. When approaching a vehicle
driving ahead, the adaptive speed assist auto-
matically brakes to match that vehicle's speed
and then maintains the set distance as much as
possible. Once the system does not detect a vehi-
cle driving ahead, adaptive speed assist will ac-
celerate up to the set speed.
Fig. 102 Example: driving into a curve
The additional lane guidance assists the driver
with corrective steering in order to stay in the
In some situations, the adaptive cruise assist
lane. You can adjust if the adaptive cruise assist
function is limited and you must assume control
will provide support with lane guidance
of the vehicle when necessary, for example by ap-
= page 138, Switching lane guidance on and off.
plying the brakes.
In stop-and-go traffic and in traffic jams, the ve-
— Ifa vehicle that was already detected @ turns
hicle may brake to a full stop and then may also
or changes lanes, the adaptive cruise assist will
start driving again automatically under certain
react to the vehicle ahead of it @).
conditions.
— When driving into a curve > fig. 102 and out of
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist: Predic- a curve, the adaptive cruise assist may react to
tive control can adjust the speed based on traffic a vehicle in the adjacent lane and apply the
and road conditions > page 133, Predictive con- brakes. You can override the system by pressing
trol. the accelerator pedal briefly.
— The adaptive cruise assist works with the vari-
ous sensors and cameras in the vehicle.
Follow the safety precautions and note the Vehicles can only be detected once they are
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and within the area and range covered by the sen-
cameras > page 118. sors > page 119, fig. 91.
— When driving around tight curves, a vehicle
driving ahead that was previously detected may
For an explanation on conformity with the no longer be detected, and the adaptive cruise
FCC regulations in the United States and the assist may accelerate unexpectedly.
Industry Canada regulations, see > page 296. — The adaptive cruise assist does not react toa
stationary vehicle in the same lane if the sys-
tem expects that you can easily drive around
the stationary vehicle by turning the steering
wheel.
— The adaptive cruise assist may not react to sta-
B8V-0630
tionary obstacles, such as the end of a traffic

jam, especially at high speeds.
— The adaptive cruise assist has a limited ability
to detect vehicles that are a short distance
ahead, off to the side of your vehicle, or moving
into your lane.
— Objects that are difficult to detect, such as mo-
4K0012721BD
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance,

Fig. 101 Example: vehicle changing lanes and stationary or vehicles with an overhanging load, may be
vehicle detected late or not detected at all.
135
Driver assistance
— The adaptive cruise assist does not respond to Image in the Driver assistance display
people, animals, or objects that are crossing or The display only appears when the Driver assis-
approaching from the opposite direction. tance display is open in the on-board computer
=> page 16.
Z\ WARNING Messages and settings
Detected vehicle driving ahead
CC®
Set target distance
cameras > page 118.
The set distance is not met. The distance bars
will be colored red from the bottom upward.
Display overview
Your vehicle
©®
Availability of lane departure warning and
3]S|
me
lane guidance for adaptive cruise assist
NyIz
G3 Availability of lane guidance for adaptive
©
cruise assist
Indicator lights
A - The speed/distance control is active. No
vehicles were detected ahead. The stored speed
is maintained.
Ba - The speed/distance control is active. A vehi-

cle was detected ahead. The adaptive cruise as-
sist controls the speed and distance from the ve-
hicle driving ahead, and accelerates and brakes
automatically.
A - The speed/distance control is active but the

vehicle is not ready to drive. A vehicle was de-
tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
Fig. 104 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
not start driving automatically.
Indicator lights and messages in the speedome- BS - The speed/distance control is active but the
ter @ -@) inform you about the driving situation vehicle is not ready to drive. No vehicles were de-
and the settings. In the Driver assistance display tected ahead. Your vehicle is stationary and will
@ - @, you can find more detailed information not start driving automatically.
about the system. The displays depend on the
country and equipment. aA - The automatic braking is not enough to
maintain a sufficient distance to a vehicle driving
Display in the speedometer ahead. You must intervene > page 141, Driver in-
tervention request.
The display in the speedometer is not available in
all layouts*. & - The indicator light turns on if the system
@ Marking for the set speed does not detect enough steering activity by the
@ Current vehicle speed driver. Always keep your hands on the steering
@® Available speed range for adaptive cruise as- wheel so you can be ready to steer at any time.
sist (example) The indicator light will also turn off, for example
if the steering power from the system is not suf-
ficient and adaptive cruise assist is canceled
=> page 139, Steering intervention request.
136
Driver assistance
Pausing cruise control

ZA\ WARNING
The control can be stopped at any time:
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and > While driving or when the vehicle is stationary:
cameras > page 118. press the lever away from you in the direction
of the arrow. Or
Using adaptive cruise assist > While driving: press the brake pedal.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist The A indicator light turns off.
Resuming regulation
RAZ-0096
The previously set speed can be resumed at any
time after a pause.
> To resume cruise control while driving, pull the

lever toward you in the direction of the arrow.
> To resume cruise control when stationary, pull
the lever toward you in the direction of the ar-
row while pressing the brake pedal.
Changing the speed

B4M-0232
> To increase or decrease the set speed in smaller

increments, briefly tap the lever toward @) or
© to the first level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed in larger
increments, briefly tap the lever toward @) or
© to the second level.
> To increase or decrease the set speed quickly,
hold the lever toward () or ©) until the mark-
ing in the speedometer (@) 9 page 136, fig. 103
Fig. 106 Operating lever: changing the speed
has reached the desired speed.
Switching on Preselecting a speed
> To switch on the adaptive cruise assist, pull the You can also preselect the speed when adaptive
lever up to position @ until it engages. cruise assist is not active by moving the lever in
Storing the speed and activating regulation the desired direction @/(©). Activate the previ-
ously selected speed by pulling the lever toward
If you have switched the system on, you can set you in the direction of the arrow.
the current speed as the “regulated speed” and
activate regulation: Switching off
> Press the [SET] button @). The set speed is indi- If you do not want to use the adaptive cruise as-
cated with a marking in the speedometer (@) sist for a longer period of time, you can switch it
=> page 136, fig. 103 and shown in the instru- off.
ment cluster > A\. > To switch off the adaptive cruise assist, push
> To store the speed when stationary, the brake the lever away from you to position © until it
pedal must also be pressed. engages.
You can set any speed between 20 mph
4K0012721BD
The indicator light and the set speed will turn off. >
(30 km/h) and the maximum possible speed
range @) page 136, fig. 103.
137
Driver assistance
ZA WARNING Switching lane guidance on and off

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist and lane guid-
— Follow the safety precautions and note the ance
cameras > page 118.
B8V-0692
— The activated adaptive cruise assist is only
an assist system, and the driver is still re-
sponsible for controlling the vehicle. The
driver is especially responsible for braking,
steering, starting to drive, and controlling
the speed and the distance from other
vehicles.
— Turn on the adaptive cruise assist only if the
Fig. 107 Turn signal lever: button for lane guidance and
surrounding conditions permit it. Always
lane departure warning (example)
adapt your driving style to the current visu-
al, weather, road, and traffic conditions. Within the limits of the system, lane guidance
— Switch the adaptive cruise assist off tempo- provides corrective steering to assist the driver
rarily when driving in turning lanes or high- with keeping the vehicle in the center of the lane
way exits. This prevents the vehicle from ac- as much as possible. This feature can be deacti-
celerating to the stored speed when in these vated.
situations.
— If you press the [SET|) button when driving Switching lane guidance on and off
at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), then 20 Requirement: lane guidance must be preselected
mph (30 km/h) will be set because that is in the MMI > page 142.
the minimum speed that can be set. If no
>» Press the button on the turn signal lever
vehicle is detected ahead of you, the vehicle
will accelerate up to that speed.
> fig. 107.
When adaptive cruise assist is actively regulating
G) Tips and lane guidance is switched on, the system will
— Always keep your hands on the steering assist the driver with corrective steering.
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
Overview of displays and lane guidance
time. The driver is always responsible for limitations
adhering to the regulations applicable in
In the Driver assistance display, the Be indi-
the country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated. cator light informs you if lane guidance is availa-
ble 9 > page 136, fig. 104.
— If you switch the ignition or the adaptive
cruise assist off, the stored speed is erased If the or indicator light on at least one
for safety reasons. side turns while (applies to vehicles with Audi Vir-
— When the adaptive cruise assist is switched tual Cockpit) or the indicator light in the Driv-
on, the ESC and the ASR are switched on au- er assistance display turns white, lane guidance
tomatically. is not active. This may be due to the following
— The system cannot be switched off or it may reasons:
be interrupted if the road exceeds the maxi- — The necessary lane marker lines have not been
mum possible grade for safe operation. detected (for example, in a construction zone
or because the lines are obstructed by snow,
dirt, water, or lighting)
— The lane is too narrow or too wide
— The curve is too narrow
138
Driver assistance
— The driver's hands are not on the steering Setting the distance
wheel Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
— Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
B4M-0234
Steering intervention request
If no steering activity is detected or the steering
power from the system is not sufficient, the driv-
er steering intervention request will alert the
driver using audio and visual signals. Take over
the steering and keep your hands on the steering
wheel so that you will be ready to steer at any
time. The system will become inactive after a
Fig. 108 Operating lever: setting the distance
short time and will only be active again later.
If the driver does not take over steering, adaptive If you adjust the speed, you must also change the
cruise assist will be canceled. If the vehicle is time gap to the vehicle driving ahead. The higher
equipped with emergency assist and it is ready to the speed, the greater the distance that is need-
function, it will be activated if possible ed.
=> page 154.
> Tap the rocker switch to display the distance
ZA\ WARNING that is currently set.
> To increase or decrease the distance in incre-
ments, tap the switch again toward G) or ().
cameras > page 118. The newly-set distance will be shown briefly, for
example with the indicator light. In the Driv-
G) Tips er assistance display, a graphic display is shown
instead of the indicator lights > page 136,
— Always keep your hands on the steering
fig. 104. The display matches the functions of
wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
the indicator lights.
time. The driver is always responsible for
adhering to the regulations applicable in When approaching a vehicle driving ahead, the
the country where the vehicle is being oper- adaptive cruise assist brakes to the set speed and
ated. then maintains the set distance. If the vehicle
— It is recommended to only switch on lane driving ahead accelerates, then the adaptive
guidance on well-constructed roads. cruise assist will also accelerate up to the speed
— Certain settings are stored automatically in that you have set.
The following distances can be set:
—The & fig. 107 button switches lane guid-
ance availability and the lane departure
warning on or off simultaneously, if lane
guidance is preset in the adaptive cruise as-
sist settings.
4K0012721BD
139
Driver assistance
Meaning tance may be more or less than these target

distances.
The time between is approximately 1
second. This setting corresponds to a Overriding control
distance of approximately 92 feet (28 Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
m) when traveling at 62 mph (100
[RAZ-0096|
km/h).
The time between is approximately 1.3
seconds. This setting corresponds toa
distance of approximately 118 feet (36
My
m) when traveling at 62 mph (100

km/h).
seconds. This setting meets the general
recommendation of “half the speed Fig. 109 Lever: overriding the control
shown on the speedometer”. This cor-
responds to a distance of approximate- Requirement: the adaptive cruise assist must be
ly 164 feet (SO m) when traveling at switched on.
62 mph (100 km/h).
Overriding control
seconds. This setting corresponds to a You can completely override the control, for ex-
distance of approximately 219 feet ample when passing or if you would like to accel-
erate more quickly.
iN)
(67 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100

km/h). > To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward
The time between is approximately 3.6 you in the direction of the arrow and hold it
seconds. This setting corresponds to a there, or press the accelerator pedal.
distance of approximately 328 feet > To resume the usual cruise control, release the
(100 m) when traveling at 62 mph (100 lever or remove your foot from the accelerator
D
km/h). pedal.
When you are in the Driver assistance display,

ZA\ WARNING the message Overridden will appear.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and ZA\ WARNING
cameras > page 118.
G) Tips
cameras > page 118.
— When setting the distance, the driver is re- — Resting your foot on the accelerator pedal
sponsible for adhering to any applicable le- could override the cruise control. Braking in-
gal regulations. terventions and corrective actions by the
— Depending on the selected driving program system may not occur.
and distance, driving behavior when acceler-
ating may vary from moderate to sporty
= page 142, Adjusting the adaptive cruise
assist.
— The distances provided are specified values.
Depending on the driving situation and how
the vehicle ahead is driving, the actual dis-
140
Driver assistance
D g in stop-and-go traffic > Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist down.
Z\ WARNING
RAZ-0398,
cameras > page 118.
— If the message ready to drive!) appears,
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve-
Fig. 110 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor hicle ahead. To reduce the risk of an acci-
dent, always make sure there are no obsta-
Stopping with adaptive cruise assist
cles between your vehicle and the vehicle
The adaptive cruise assist also assists you in stop- driving ahead.
and-go traffic. Within the limits of the system,
your vehicle may brake and remain at a stop ifa G) Tips
vehicle driving ahead stops. For safety reasons, adaptive cruise assist is
Starting to drive with adaptive cruise assist!) only active if:
— The driver's safety belt is fastened
As long as the message ready to drive and aA is
— All doors and the hood are closed
displayed, your vehicle will begin driving when
— Your vehicle is not stopped for a long period
the vehicle ahead starts to move > /\.
of time
If you are stopped for several seconds, your vehi-
cle will no longer drive autonomously for safety er interv n request
reasons, and the message will turn off. Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
> To extend ready to drive for several seconds or

reactivate, pull the lever briefly towards you in
the direction of the arrow > page 140, fig. 109.
> To resume manual control of the vehicle, tap
the accelerator pedal.
Safe start monitor

The vehicle can still start to drive even if certain
obstacles are detected when starting to drive Fig. 111 Instrument cluster: request for driver interven-
tion
=> /\. For example, if an obstacle is detected by
the camera behind the windshield, the a indica-
The request for driver intervention instructs you
tor light will warn you of the danger.
to resume manual control of the vehicle if the
If you are in the Driver assistance display, the adaptive cruise assist braking function is not able
display @) © fig. 110 and the message Warning! to maintain a sufficient distance to the vehicle
will also appear. An audio signal will also sound. ahead. The system will warn you of the hazard
Your vehicle will drive more slowly when starting. with the A indicator light and the message Dis-
This may also occur in some situations when tance!. An audio signal will also sound. >
there is no apparent obstacle.
4K0012721BD
141
Driver assistance
The display @ only appears when the Driver as- Messages

sistance display is open in the on-board Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist
computer > page 16.
a | or is displayed when there is a malfunc-
ZA WARNING tion, the adaptive cruise assist functions may be
unavailable or limited.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and A message that indicates the cause and possible
cameras > page 118. solution may appear with some displays. The
weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
Adjusting the adaptive cruise assist
sensors > page 120 and try to turn on the sys-
tems again later.
You can adjust the adaptive cruise assist to your
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
own preferences. The settings depend on the ve-
hicle equipment.
ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: ed.
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Adaptive
Applies to: vehicles with narrowed road assist
cruise assist.
Narrow area
Possible settings:
Depending on vehicle equipment, this message
Lane guidance - If lane guidance is also active appears in the Driver assistance display if the
when adaptive cruise assist control is active, you adaptive cruise assist is adjusting the speed ina
can switch it on or off. narrow area, for example a construction zone.
Driving program - Depending on the driving pro-

Adaptive cruise assist: Please take over!
gram and the distance that are set, the vehicle
handling will be adjusted from Sport to Moder- This message appears if the vehicle rolls back
ate and the lane guidance haptic feedback will be when starting on a slight incline, even though the
adjusted. systems are active. Press the brake pedal to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling or starting to move.
Store last distance - The last distance that was
set will be stored after the ignition is switched Applies to: vehicles with laser scanner
off. If the distance is not stored, distance Adaptive cruise assist: limited availability.
(time distance of approximately 1.8 seconds) is See owner's manual
automatically preset every time the ignition is
This message appears when the sensor view is
switched on.
limited, for example, when weather conditions
Applies to: vehicles with efficiency assist are too poor or a sensor is covered. You can
Predictive control - When predictive control is switch on the adaptive cruise assist, but certain
switched on, the system reacts automatically to functions such as assistance in narrow areas will
situations > page 133. not be available. Under certain circumstances,
some objects may be detected late or may not be
G) Tips detected at all. Be especially careful. However,
Certain settings are stored automatically in cleaning the area in front of the sensors
the active personal profile. = page 120 may correct the malfunction.
142
Driver assistance
Distance warning Adjusting the distance warning

The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI > page 121.
Applies to: vehicles with distance warning
S|| You can adjust the distance warning threshold to

S| your preferences. The settings depend on the ve-
||
hicle equipment.
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Distance
warning.
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist rg or 3!-| is displayed when there is a malfunc-
Fig. 112 Instrument cluster: display of the current dis-
tion, the distance warning functions may be un-
tance
available or may be limited.
RAZ-0400 A message that indicates the cause and possible
solution may appear with some displays. The
tems again later.

Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise assist:
Fig. 113 Instrument cluster: distance warning ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
General information ed.
At speeds above approximately 40 mph (65

km/h), this function measures the distance to the
ZA WARNING
vehicle ahead as time. If the distance falls below Follow the safety precautions and note the
the warning threshold, the system warns you of limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
the hazard with the | indicator light. cameras > page 118.
Image in the Driver assistance display G) Tips

— The driver is always responsible for adhering
The display only appears if the Driver assistance to the regulations applicable in the country
display is selected on the on-board computer where the vehicle is being operated.
=> page 16 and the adaptive cruise assist is not — You may fall below the warning threshold
actively controlling the vehicle. briefly when passing or when quickly ap-
@) Detected vehicle driving ahead proaching a vehicle driving ahead. There is
@ Use the markings to help you estimate the no warning in this scenario. A warning is giv-
distance to an obstacle. Each marking repre- en only if you fall below the warning thresh-
sents approximately one second. old for an extended period of time.
@) Set warning threshold. Depending on the set-
tings, the display will be colored in from the
bottom to the top.
4K0012721BD
@ The actual distance is smaller than the set

distance and you will be informed about the
danger.
143
Driver assistance
Lane departure warning Switching the lane departure warning on and

off
(erreur laced)
The lane departure warning switches on auto-
Applies to: vehicles with lane departure warning
matically once the ignition is switched on )).
The lane departure warning can detect lane
> To switch the system on or off, press the button
marker lines within the limits of the system. If
=> fig. 114. The respective indicator light in the
you are approaching a detected lane marker and
instrument cluster will turn off or on.
it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the
system can warn you with corrective steering and Display and warning
a steering wheel vibration, if necessary.
The availability and readiness to provide warn-
The system functions in the speed range of ap- ings will be indicated with the / | Hi indicator
proximately 40 mph - 155 mph (65 km/h - lights.
250 km/h).
Corrective steering will be indicated with the vl
indicator light. If the lane departure warning
ZA\ WARNING must intervene for a long period of time, a mes-
Follow the safety precautions and note the sage will request the driver to drive in the center
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and of the lane.
cameras > page 118.
You can also open the Driver assistance display in
the on-board computer > page 16. The display
matches the functions of the indicator lights.
Display or in- |Meaning on the corresponding
B8V-0692
dicator light | side

@ White The lane departure warning is
lines switched on but not ready to pro-
vide warnings.
@ Green Lane departure warning is
line switched on and ready to provide
warnings on that side.
@ Red The lane departure warning will
Fig. 114 Turn signal lever: switching the lane departure line warn you with corrective steering
warning on and off before exiting the lane.
The steering wheel can also vi-
RAZ-0107
brate to warn you if lane bounda-

ries are detected during a pass-
ing maneuver.
The lane departure warning is ready to provide

warnings if an object is detected on at least one
side of the individual lane.
Fig. 115 Instrument cluster: driver assistance display
YD In certain countries
144
Driver assistance
If the indicator light turns on, the lane depar-

ture warning is not ready to provide warnings.
ZA WARNING
This may be due to the following reasons: — Follow the safety precautions and note the
— The necessary lane marker lines have not been
cameras > page 118.
detected (for example, in a construction zone
or because the lines are obstructed by snow, — The system warns the driver that the vehicle
is leaving the lane using corrective steering.
dirt, water, or lighting)
The driver is always responsible for keeping
— The speed is below the activation speed
the vehicle within the lane.
— The lane is too narrow or too wide
— Corrective steering may not occur at all in
— The curve is too narrow
certain situations, such as during heavy
— The driver's hands are not on the steering
braking. Always be ready to intervene.
wheel
— Visibility is obstructed by a rise or dip.
(i) Tips
Steering intervention request — Always keep your hands on the steering
If no steering activity is detected or the steering wheel so you can be ready to steer at any
power from the system is not sufficient, the driv- time. The driver is always responsible for
er steering intervention request will alert the adhering to the regulations applicable in
driver using audio and visual signals. Take over the country where the vehicle is being oper-
the steering and keep your hands on the steering ated.
wheel so that you will be ready to steer at any — The system does not provide any corrective
time. The system will become inactive after a steering or steering wheel vibrations if it de-
short time and will only be active again later. tects that you are passing another vehicle.
If the driver does not take over steering, the lane

ONC mam Ks) Clea}
departure warning will no longer be ready to pro-
vide warnings. If the vehicle is equipped with
emergency assist and it is ready to function, it You can switch the optional steering wheel vibra-
will be activated > page 154. tion warning for the lane departure warning on
and off. The settings depend on the vehicle
Behavior when a turn signal is active
equipment.
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: Even if the
system is ready to provide warnings, it will not
VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<3) > Lane de-
warn you if you activate a turn signal before
parture warning > Vibration warning.
crossing the lane marker line. In this case, it as-
sumes that you are changing lanes intentionally.
G) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: If the turn Certain settings are stored automatically in
signal is activated, the lane departure warning is the active personal profile.
ready, and a lane change has been classified as
critical by the lane departure warning due to
tLe [4
vehicles traveling beside you or due to approach-
ing vehicles, then a noticeable corrective steering
movement will occur shortly before exiting the ray or {is displayed when there is a malfunc-
lane. This will attempt to keep your vehicle in the tion, the lane departure warning and lane guid-
lane. ance functions of the adaptive cruise functions
may be unavailable or limited.
4K0012721BD
A message that indicates the cause and possible

solution may appear with some displays. The >
145
Driver assistance
weather conditions may be too poor or the cam- Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures
era may be covered. Clean the area in front of the Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
camera > page 120 and try to turn on the sys-
Depending on the vehicle speed and the vehicle
tems again later.
equipment, the following functions may be initi-
If the malfunction remains, drive to an author- ated in certain situations:
— Visual and audio warnings
ed. — Activation of the emergency flashers)
— Reversible tensioning of safety belts
— Closing the windows and panoramic glass roof
Audi pre sense
— Adjusting the seats
— Other preemptive safety measures by individual
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense systems
Within the limits of the system, the Audi pre

sense functions can initiate measures in certain
ZA\ WARNING
driving situations to protect the vehicle occu- Follow the safety precautions and note the
pants and other road users. Depending on the ve- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
hicle equipment, various Audi pre sense systems cameras > page 118.
may be installed:
(i) Tips
— Audi pre sense basic can react during emergen-
— Depending on the risk situation that is de-
cy and dangerous braking maneuvers and un-
tected and the selected Audi drive select*
stable driving situations (such as oversteering
mode, not all preemptive safety measures
or understeering).
may be initiated under certain circumstan-
— Audi pre sense front) can detect an impending
ces. Certain functions can be adjusted or
frontal impact and react with warnings, braking
skipped if necessary.
interventions, and preemptive safety measures
— Audi pre sense may be restricted or unavail-
for the vehicle occupants.
able under certain circumstances, for exam-
— Audi pre sense rear monitors the rear traffic
ple if:
behind your vehicle and can react to an impend-
ing rear impact. — There are passengers with unfastened
— Audi pre sense side can detect an impending safety belts
side impact from cross-traffic and vehicles com- — It has only been several seconds since the
ing from the side, and can initiate preemptive ignition was switched on The ndicator
safety measures. light turns on.
— The swerve assist can assist during an evasive — When driving in reverse
maneuver recognized as critical with steering — There is an airbag control module mal-
movement and by braking individual wheels in- function
dividually. — System functions may not be available if
— The turn assist can detect vehicles in the oppo- the ESC is limited or switched off, or if
site lane and react with braking maneuvers. there is a malfunction.
146
Driver assistance
Audi pre sense basic also be warned by an indicator in the instrument

Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense basic cluster display. When this warning occurs, it may
only be possible to avoid a collision by swerving
Audi pre sense basic is automatically active at
or braking strongly.
speeds of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) and
higher. Audi pre sense basic can trigger the Audi Automatic deceleration
pre sense preemptive safety measures during If you do not react to the acute warning, Audi pre
emergency braking and dangerous braking ma-
sense front can brake the vehicle to a full stop
neuvers as well as in unstable driving situations,
within the limits of the system )). This reduces
such as oversteering or understeering.
the vehicle speed in the event of a collision.
Z\ WARNING Automatic braking force increase

Follow the safety precautions and note the If Audi pre sense determines that you are not
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and braking strongly enough when a collision is immi-
cameras > page 118. nent, it can increase the braking force based on
the situation.
Audi pre sense front
Take-over
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense front
If the message Bo Please take over! appears, the
The Audi pre sense front uses the data from the vehicle has been braked to a stop by Audi pre
camera and calculates the probability ofa rear- sense and you must resume control of the vehi-
end collision. Within the limits of the system, an cle.
impending frontal impact with vehicles, pedes-
trians), or cyclists!) may be detected in both ur- ZX WARNING
ban and rural speed ranges.
Audi pre sense front is active at speeds of approx- limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) and higher. It can react cameras > page 118.
to pedestrians”) or cyclists!) at speeds up to ap- — Audi pre sense front cannot overcome natu-
proximately 50 mph (85 km/h), and can react to ral physical laws. It is a system designed to
vehicles at speeds up to approximately 155 mph assist and it cannot prevent a collision in ev-
(250 km/h). ery circumstance. The driver must always in-
tervene. The driver is always responsible for
Early warning/acute warning
braking at the correct time. Do not let the
The system can recognize various dangerous sit- increased safety provided tempt you into
uations. The early warning occurs if: taking risks. This could increase your risk of
— A vehicle driving ahead brakes suddenly a collision.
— Your own vehicle approaches a vehicle in front — Audi pre sense front does not react to cer-
of you that is traveling at a significantly slower tain objects, such as animals, crossing or on-
speed or that is stationary coming vehicles, bars, railings, or railcars.
—A pedestrian or cyclist!) is standing in the lane — Audi pre sense front may be limited or un-
or is moving into the lane available when driving in curves.
— Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
The message Audi pre sense [J and a warning
hicle interior during sudden driving or brak-
tone will warn you about the danger.
ing maneuvers, which increases the risk of
The brakes may also be applied as an acute warn- an accident. Store objects securely while
ing when there is an impending collision. You will driving.
4K0012721BD
147
Driver assistance
Audi pre sense rear — Audi pre sense side does not react to pedes-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense rear trians, animals, and objects not detected as
vehicles.
Within the limits of the system, Audi pre sense
rear uses data from radar sensors in the rear area
G) Tips
of the vehicle and calculates the probability of a
rear-end collision with the vehicle behind you. The Audi pre sense side functions may also
switch off if there is a malfunction in the in-
Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures can
tersection assistant*.
be initiated if the risk ofa collision with the vehi-
cle behind you is detected.
Saree cid
ZA\ WARNING Applies to: vehicles with swerve assist
— Follow the safety precautions and note the The swerve assist can help you to steer the vehi-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and cle around an obstacle detected in a critical area.
cameras > page 118. If you avoid an obstacle after the acute warning,
— Audi pre sense rear does not react to pedes- then swerve assist assists you by specifically
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob- braking individual wheels and applying slight
jects not detected as vehicles. steering adjustment to correct the steering
wheel angle as long as you are actively steering.
@) Tips The swerve assist is available at speeds between
approximately 20 mph and 90 mph (30 km/h -
Audi pre sense rear functions may also switch
150 km/h) Y.
off if there is a malfunction in the side assist
system.
ZA WARNING
Audi pre sense side
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense side
cameras > page 118.
Audi pre sense side uses data from the extra ra- — Swerve assist does not react to pedestrians,
dar sensors installed in the front and rear areas animals, crossing objects, and objects not
of the vehicle, and other sensors can react to side detected as vehicles.
impacts from cross-traffic and vehicles coming
from the side. G) Tips
Audi pre sense side is active at speeds up to ap- — System functions may not be available if the
proximately 35 mph (60 km/h). The Audi pre ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
sense preemptive safety measures can be trig- malfunction.
gered when a collision risk is detected. —An indicator in the instrument cluster will
inform you when there is an intervention.
Z\ WARNING
— Follow the safety precautions and note the a eg
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Applies to: vehicles with turn assist
cameras > page 118.
When your vehicle is turning
The turn assist can assist you with a braking in-
tervention when starting to drive or when driving >
) In preparation at the time of printing. The speed range

may be within approximately 30 mph - 90 mph (50 km/h -
150 km/h) depending on the vehicle production date.
148
Driver assistance
slowly, to reduce the risk of your vehicle colliding dium. The Late warning time should only be set
with an oncoming vehicle when you are making a in special circumstances.
left turn. The braking intervention causes your
vehicle to stay in its lane. The function is only G) Tips
available when the turn signal is turned on and at — Switch Audi pre sense off when you are not
speeds up to maximum of 6 mph (10 km/h). using public streets, when loading the vehi-
cle onto a vehicle carrier, train, ship, or oth-
Z\ WARNING er type of transportation, or when towing
— Follow the safety precautions and note the the vehicle. This can help to prevent an un-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and desired intervention from the Audi pre
cameras > page 118. sense system.
— The turn assist does not react to pedes- —If the system is switched off, it switches on
trians, animals, crossing objects, and ob- again automatically once the ignition is
jects not detected as vehicles. switched on again).
@) Tips the active personal profile.
— System functions may not be available if the
ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a Messages
malfunction. Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will

re or s displayed when there is a malfunc-
tion, the Audi pre sense functions may be un-
Adjusting Audi pre sense
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
The system can be switched on and off in the weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
MMI & page 121. may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
You can adjust the Audi pre sense functions to sensors > page 120 and try to turn on the sys-
your preferences. The settings depend on the ve- tems again later.
hicle equipment. If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
HICLE > Driver assistance > (23) > Audi pre ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
sense. ed.
Possible settings:
— Turn assist
— Swerve assist
Prewarning”) - The prewarning can be switched

off or the Audi pre sense warning time can be set
(Early/Medium/Late).
Set the warning time for the early warning to
Early at first. If you feel that the prewarnings ap-
pear too early, then set the warning time to Me-
4K0012721BD
D_ In certain countries
149
Driver assistance
Side assist @ Vehicles traveling in the same direction: the

display will turn on if vehicles traveling in the
Description same direction as your vehicle are classified
Applies to: vehicles with side assist as critical. The side assist warns you of all de-
al3 tected vehicles when they are in the “blind
3
qe| spot” or before they reach that point.
@® Vehicles you are passing: the display only
turns on if you slowly pass a detected vehicle
(difference in speed between the two vehicles
is less than 9 mph (15 km/h)). There is no
display if you pass a vehicle more quickly.
Information stage
At the information level, the side assist informs
you of detected objects that are classified as criti-
cal. This is even possible when your vehicle is sta-
tionary and the turn signal is turned on, so that
the system can also assist you when turning.
From speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
and higher, the system will warn you of detected
objects that are classified as critical, even if the
turn signal is not turned on.
The display remains dim in the information stage

Fig. 116 Diagram: driving situations and displays in the ex-
so that you are not distracted while looking for-
terior mirror (example)
ward.
General information Warning stage
Side assist monitors the blind spot and traffic in If you activate a turn signal and the display flash-
the adjacent lanes behind the vehicle. Within sys- es brightly, side assist is warning about objects
tem limits, side assist can detect traffic that is that have been classified as critical.
approaching from behind and provide a warning
when you are changing lanes and turning. The Depending on the vehicle equipment and other
system uses the data from the radar sensors at driver assistance systems, the display may also
the rear corners of the vehicle. flash if you have not activated a turn signal. If
you are approaching a detected lane marker line
The side assist is active at walking speeds and and it appears you will be leaving the lane, the
higher. If an object that is classified as critical is display will warn you about detected vehicles
approaching, the display in the exterior mirror @) that are classified as critical. You can also be
on the corresponding side of the vehicle will light warned with corrective steering > page 144,
up. Lane departure warning.
Driving situations Detection range
The system can provide warnings about the fol- The radar sensors are designed to detect the left
lowing risks: and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are
@ Approaching vehicles: a vehicle may be clas- the normal width. In some situations, the display
sified as critical in some cases, even if it is may turn on even though there is no vehicle lo-
farther away. The faster a vehicle ap- cated in the area that is critical for a lane change.
proaches, the sooner the display will turn on. For example:
150
Driver assistance
— If the lanes are narrow or if you are driving on changed, or it will only become visible when the
the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the ambient light changes. Adjust the brightness to a
system may have detected a vehicle in another level where the display in the information stage
lane that is not adjacent to your current lane. will not disrupt your view ahead. If you change
— If you are driving through a curve. Side assist the brightness, the display will briefly show the
may react to a vehicle that is in the same lane brightness level in the information stage.
or one lane over from the adjacent lane.
—If side assist reacts to other objects (such as
roadside structures like guard rails). Applies to: vehicles with side assist
ZA WARNING iff or Eg is displayed when there is a malfunc-

tion, the side assist and exit warning system
functions may be unavailable or may be limited.
cameras > page 118. A message that indicates the cause and possible
— The display may not appear on time when solution may appear with some displays. The
vehicles are approaching or being passed weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
very quickly. may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve-
hicle rear and try to turn the systems on again
G) Tips later.
— If the window glass in the driver's door or If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
front passenger's door has been tinted, the ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
display in the exterior mirror may be incor- ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
fects ed.
FCC regulations in the United States and the
Industry Canada regulations, see
=> page 296.
Adjusting side assist

Applies to: vehicles with side assist

MMI = page 121. If the system is activated, the
displays will turn on briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
Adjusting the brightness

You can adjust the brightness of the display in
the exterior mirror. The settings depend on the
vehicle equipment.

VEHICLE > Driver assistance > (<23) > Side as-
sist > Brightness.
The display brightness is automatically adapted

to the ambient light. If the automatic adaptation
4K0012721BD
has already reached the upper or lower limit, no

change will be apparent when the setting is
151
Driver assistance
Exit warning Switching the exit warning on and off

— The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI & page 121.
Applies to: vehicles with exit warning system
ZX WARNING
B4M-0065
cameras > page 118.
— Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
system does not replace the attention of the
vehicle occupants. The vehicle occupants are
always responsible for opening the doors
and exiting the vehicle.
— The exit warning system does not respond
to people and cannot warn you about every
type of approaching objects, such as cyclists.
Always monitor the traffic as well as the ve-
hicle's surroundings with direct eye contact.
— The display may not appear in time when
vehicles are approaching very quickly.
— The exit warning system does not react to
stationary objects or pedestrians.
Fig. 118 Front door: warning strip (diagram) — The exit warning system will not provide
alerts if your vehicle is pulled too far into
General information the parking space so that it is hidden by ad-
jacent vehicles.
Within system limits, the exit warning system
can detect traffic approaching from behind such GY tn.
@ Tips
as vehicles, and provide assistance based on this
information when you are exiting the vehicle — The exit warning system can be available for
=> fig. 117. The system uses the data from the ra- up to approximately three minutes after un-
dar sensors at the rear corners of the vehicle. locking the vehicle and opening the door as
well as after switching off the ignition. Then
Displays and warnings the displays flash briefly and the system
If you pull a door handle while the vehicle is sta- switches off.
tionary and an object classified as critical is ap- — For an explanation on conformity with the
proaching, the warning strip @ and the display FCC regulations in the United States and the
on the exterior mirror (2) will light up on the cor- Industry Canada regulations, see
responding side of the vehicle. The opening of => page 296.
the door will also be slowed briefly.
If the door is opened, the displays on that side

will flash. If another road user that is classified
as critical is approaching while a door is already
open, the displays on that door will turn on.
The same messages apply for the exit warning

system and side assist > page 151.
152
Driver assistance
Intersection assistant Displays, warnings, and braking

— Display: the red arrow (@) can indicate the direc-
tion from which the cross traffic is approaching.
Applies to: vehicles with intersection assistant
The indicator in the upper display only appears
o
D
oS when the parking aid is activated. For vehicles
&
>
& with peripheral cameras only in the Front and
ao
Front corner camera views. The display only ap-
pears in the instrument cluster > fig. 120 when
the Driver assistance display is open in the on-
board computer > page 16.
— Warnings: the message Cross traffic! © can
warn you of critical cross traffic when driving
forward. There may also be an audible signal.
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap-
proaching object when driving forward at
speeds up to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
Switching the intersection assistant on and

off
— The system can be switched on and off in the
MMI & page 121.
Fig. 120 Instrument cluster: directional display from the Messages

intersection assistant
If Ey, or > is displayed when there is a mal-
General information function, the intersection assistant functions
may be unavailable or may be limited.
The intersection assistant can warn the driver of
approaching cross traffic in complex intersections A message that indicates the cause and possible
> fig. 119. solution may appear with some displays. The
The system monitors intersections and exit
ramps using the sensors installed in the vehicle
that detect the front and side areas around the
tems again later.
vehicle. Moving objects that are approaching
from behind, such as cars, are detected within If the malfunction remains, drive to an author-
the limits of the system > A\. The system can al- ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
so warn the driver of a potential collision with de- ty immediately to have the malfunction correct-
tected approaching cross traffic in intersections ed.
and exit ramps with poor visibility.
Z\ WARNING
Requirements for using the intersection
assistant:
— The speed must not be higher than approxi- cameras > page 118.
mately 18 mph (30 km/h). — The intersection assistant will not provide
— The “D” gear is selected. alerts about people and cannot warn you
4K0012721BD
about every type of approaching objects,

such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic >
153
Driver assistance
as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di- If the driver remains inactive despite the warn-
rect eye contact. ings, the emergency assist controls the vehicle
— The system may not react if vehicles are ap- within the limits of the system:
Proaching very fast. — The Audi pre sense preemptive safety measures
are triggered > page 146.
@ Tips — The vehicle will stay in the lane and will be
braked to a stop.
For an explanation on conformity with the
FCC regulations in the United States and the — As soon as the vehicle comes to a full stop, the
Industry Canada regulations, see > page 296. emergency flashers are activated and the vehi-
cle prepares for the vehicle passengers to be
rescued. The parking brake is set, “P” gear is
Emergency assist
engaged, the doors are unlocked, and the inte-
rior lighting is activated. If there is no move-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency assist ment for several seconds, the emergency call ))
will be made if necessary.
General information
Within the limits of the system, the emergency Overriding the emergency assist
assist detects if the driver is inactive. In these in- You can override the emergency assist > A\:
stances, the system warns the driver, assumes
— Move the steering wheel. Or
control of the vehicle if necessary, and brings the
— Press the brake pedal. Or
vehicle automatically to a stop in the lane.
— Press the accelerator pedal distinctly.
Regardless of the speed, the emergency assist is
When stationary, you can end the emergency as-
automatically available when the adaptive cruise
sist by leaving the "P" position or releasing the
assist* is activated. When the adaptive cruise as-
parking brake > page 104.
sist® is deactivated, the system is only active at
speeds higher than approximately 40 mph Switching the emergency assist on and off
(65 km/h).
Emergency assist functions MMI & page 121.
Within the limits of the system, the emergency Messages
assist monitors the driver’s steering, accelerator,
1f E or EB is displayed when there is a malfunc-
and brake pedal activity. Depending on the se-
tion, the emergency assist functions may be un-
verity of the situation, it may initiate visual, au-
dio, and haptic warnings in stages:
— Reduces the speed A message that indicates the cause and possible
— Messages solution may appear with some displays. The
— Lowers the volume of the Infotainment system weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor
— Audible warning may be covered. Clean the area in front of the
— Tightening of the safety belt sensors > page 120 and try to turn on the sys-
—A brief application of the brakes tems again later.

ed.
D_ This function is not available in every market and on all ve-

hicle equipment levels.
154
Driver assistance

cameras > page 118.
— The emergency assist is an assist system
that should only be used in cases of emer-
gency to take over control of the vehicle and
bring it to a stop.
— Depending on the severity of the detected

situation, not all safety measures will be ini-
tiated. Certain functions can be adjusted or
skipped if necessary.
— If the emergency assist was triggered, it will
only be available again after a brief period.
— An indicator in the instrument cluster will
4K0012721BD
155
Parking and maneuvering
Parking and Parking system plus

maneuvering Activating/deactivating
Introduction Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus
Depending on the vehicle equipment, various

parking aids will help you when parking and ma-
neuvering.
Parking system
The parking system plus assists you while park-
ing by audibly and visually warning you of objects
detected in front of and behind the vehicle
=> page 156.
Fig. 121 Center console: parking aid button
The rearview camera shows the area behind the
vehicle in the MMI display. The lines in the rear- General information
view camera image help you to park and maneu-
The parking system assists when parking and ma-
ver > page 158.
neuvering by providing warnings about obstacles.
The peripheral cameras are an addition to the If the ultrasonic sensors on the vehicle
rearview camera and help you to see various => page 119, fig. 91 detect an obstacle, the sys-
areas around the vehicle while parking and ma- tem will provide audio and visual warnings.
neuvering > page 158.
Activating/deactivating
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn you of ap-
Requirement: the vehicle speed must be under
proaching cross traffic when driving in reverse or
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
exiting a parking space > page 162.
> Press the Pa or & button in the center console.
Settings options When activating, a brief tone will sound and
You can adjust parking system functions individu- the LED in the button will turn on.
ally. The adjustment options depend on the vehi-
Automatic activation
cle equipment.
— Activating automatically > page 156 > The system activates automatically when re-
— Front and rear volume > page 157 verse gear is engaged while the engine is run-
— Entertainment fader > page 157 ning. A brief tone will sound.
— Clean rearview camera > page 159 > If Automatic activation is switched on in the
MMI and if the vehicle approaches an obstacle
— View > page 161
at speeds below approximately 6 mph (10
— Rear cross-traffic assist > page 163
km/h), the parking aid will switch on automati-
_ WARNING cally. Audible signals will sound once the obsta-
cle is within the sensor detection area.
> Applies to: MMI: To switch Automatic activa-
tion on or off, select on the home screen: VEHI-
cameras > page 118.
CLE > Parking aid > Automatic activation.
G) Tips Automatic deactivation

Practicing parking in a traffic-free location or The distance indicator for the parking system
parking lot to become familiar with the sys- plus will deactivate automatically when driving
tems is recommended. Practice parking in forward faster than 6 mph (10 km/h).
good light and weather conditions.
156
ZA\ WARNING detected obstacle that is outside of the vehicle's

path. The closer your vehicle comes to the obsta-
Follow the safety precautions and note the cle, the closer the segments will move to the ve-
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and hicle. The collision area has been reached when
cameras > page 118. the next to last segment is displayed. Obstacles
in the collision area, including those outside of
@) Note the vehicle's path, are shown in red. Do not con-
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid tinue driving farther.
damage to the rims.
Audio signals
@) Tips The closer your vehicle gets to a detected obsta-
— Certain settings are stored automatically in cle, the shorter the time between the audible sig-
the active personal profile. nals. A continuous tone sounds when an obstacle
— If the parking aid is deactivated, it can only is less than approximately 1 foot (0.30 m) away
be reactivated automatically when one of from the front or rear of the vehicle. Do not con-
the following conditions is met: tinue driving forward or in reverse >(@).
— The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph > To deactivate audio signals while parking, press
(10 km/h) «Jin the upper display. The audio signals will be
— The ignition is switched off and back on automatically activated again the next time the
again parking system is activated.
— The parking brake is set and then released
Adjusting the volume
—The “P” gear is engaged and released
again You can adjust the volume to your preferences.

Applies to: vehicles with parking system plus VEHICLE > Parking aid. Or
> Press |- -| in the upper display when the parking
system is active.
Possible settings:
Front volume - Volume for the front area.
Rear volume - Volume for the rear area.
Entertainment fader - The volume of the audio/

Fig. 122 Upper display: distance indicator video source is lowered when the parking aid is
activated.
If the sensors detect an obstacle, audible and vis-
The new level is demonstrated briefly* when the
ual signals will warn you.
volume is adjusted.
Visual warnings
Error messages
The visual warnings in the upper display help you
If P4 appears, the sensor in the respective area
to detect the critical vehicle area and to estimate
or the speaker is faulty. Drive immediately to an
the distance to an obstacle.
Red segments (4) show detected obstacles that Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
are in your vehicle's path. The red lines (2) mark
4K0012721BD
If Avis displayed in the MMI, the ultrasonic sen-

the expected direction of travel based on the
sor indicated is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front
steering angle. A white segment (3) indicates a
of the sensors > page 120. >
157
iffy or fa is displayed when there is a malfunc- Rearview camera and

tion, the parking system functions may be un-
peripheral cameras

weather conditions may be too poor or a sensor 2x
S
may be covered. Clean the area in front of the g3
%
a
tems again later.

ed.
ZA WARNING Fig. 123 Orientation line display when parking
— Follow the safety precautions and note the Depending on the vehicle equipment, a rearview
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and camera or multiple peripheral cameras may be
cameras > page 118.
available.
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the surrounding area cannot be detected. The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
Objects, animals, and people may only be ver using the orientation lines.
detected with limitations may not be detect- The peripheral cameras expand the vehicle over-
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the view to include various views around the vehicle
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not that can be selected.
become distracted.
Z\ WARNING
Q Note
Keep enough distance from the curb to avoid limits of the assist systems, sensors, and
damage to the rims. cameras > page 118.
@) Tips
ONSET
PAs La)
— Certain settings are stored automatically in Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
— If the distance to an obstacle remains con-
stant, the volume of the distance warning
gradually lowers after a few seconds until it
is muted (this does not apply to the continu-
ous tone). If the obstacle comes closer than
it was before the sound was muted, the
tone will sound again. If the obstacle be-
comes farther away than it was before the
sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay
attention to the vehicle's surroundings Fig. 124 Center console: parking aid button
when you start to drive.
158
Activating/deactivating
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras
> Press the @ button in the center console. When
activating, a brief tone will sound and the LED
in the button will turn on. Or
> Press bin the upper display if the visual dis-
tance indicator is shown > page 157, fig. 122.
The system can be activated at low speeds, such

when maneuvering.
Automatic activation
Fig. 125 Upper display: aiming at a parking space
The system activates automatically when reverse
gear is engaged while the engine is running. A When parking with the rearview camera or pe-
brief tone will sound. ripheral camera, the parking system plus audio
Automatic deactivation and visual warnings* will also assist you
=> page 157.
The system will deactivate automatically once
the vehicle exceeds a certain speed while driving Visual orientation lines
forward. @ The orange orientation lines show the vehi-
cle's direction of travel >. Turn the steer-
A WARNING ing wheel until the orange orientation lines
Follow the safety precautions and note the align with the parking space.
limits of the assist systems, sensors, and @ Use the blue markings to help you estimate
cameras > page 118. the distance to an obstacle. Each marking
represents approximately 3 feet (1 meter).
(era Wa) The blue area represents an extension of the
Applies to: vehicles with rearview camera/peripheral cameras vehicle's outline by approximately 16 feet (5
meters) to the rear.
You can manually start the cleaning of the rear- @® You can recognize the rear bumper in the
view camera. The settings depend on the vehicle lower display.
equipment.
@® You should stop driving in reverse when the
> Select |- -| > Clean rearview camera in the upper red orientation line touches the edge of an
display when the parking aid is active. Or object, at the latest.
> Applies to: vehicles with rear window wiper:
Symbols
Move the wiper lever S7 into the position for
cleaning the rear window © & page 55. If 2/&9/< is displayed and the display area
represented by that symbol is not available, then
/\ WARNING the camera on the that side is not available. The
power exterior mirrors may have been folded in
or a door or the luggage compartment lid may
have been opened.
cameras > page 118.
If# is displayed, there is a system malfunction
and the display area represented by that symbol
is not available. The camera is not working in this
area. >
4K0012721BD
159
If Avis displayed, the respective ultrasonic sensor ing, based on the steering wheel angle. The
is icy or dirty. Clean the area in front of the front of the vehicle swings out more than
sensors > page 120. the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
If one of the symbols continues to be displayed,
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
obstacles.
— Keep enough distance from the curb to
function repaired.
avoid damage to the rims.
ZA WARNING — Only use the images provided by the camera
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
sure any objects you may have mounted on
cameras © page 118.
the luggage compartment lid do not block
— Sensors and cameras have spots in which
the rearview camera.
the surrounding area cannot be detected.
Objects, animals, and people may only be @) Tips
detected with limitations may not be detect-
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: The
ed at all. Always monitor the traffic and the
accuracy of the orientation lines and blue sur-
vehicle's surroundings directly and do not
faces on the camera display decreases when
become distracted.
the vehicle is raised or lowered with the air
©) Note suspension.
—The orange orientation lines @ show the di-

rection the rear of the vehicle will be travel-
Operating the peripheral cameras

Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
RAZ.0131
Fig. 126 Upper display: left side: surrounding area. Right side: 3D surroundings.
On vehicles with peripheral cameras, you can se- Selecting the views
lect among different views. > To display the entire selection bar, tap the cur-
The camera views can be controlled with the rent view (2) or swipe at the edge of the selec-
touch display. In certain views, you can zoom in tion bar from left to right.
or out on the displayed area, and move, tilt, or
rotate the 3D surroundings.
160
> To select a view, press (2) - ®) in the upper dis- > To re-center the 3D surroundings, tap the cam-
play or tap in an area to show the vehicle in the era image twice.
side view ).
Tilting or rotating the views
> To select a 3D surroundings view, press the »G2)
Applies to: 3D surroundings view
symbol (). Then select the desired 3D sur-
roundings view () - @. > To tilt or rotate the 3D surroundings, use your
finger to drag it in any direction > fig. 126, on
Switching the views quickly the right side.
To switch the views quickly (for example, from > To re-center the 3D surroundings behind the
Front corner to Front): vehicle, tap the camera image twice.
> Tap the camera image twice. Or Selecting a view in the side area
> Pull two fingers apart or together in a sideways
The vehicle surroundings are shown in the side
motion on the camera image.
area of the display. You can switch between a vis-
Zooming in and out on the views ual display (Graphic) and the vehicle surround-
Applies to: surroundings and 3D surroundings views ings (Camera).
> To zoom in or out on an area, place two fingers > Select |- ] > View in the upper display when the
on that area and push them apart or pull them parking system is active.
together > fig. 126, left side.
Moving the view

Applies to: surroundings and 3D surroundings views
> To move the view, press and pull it in any direc-

tion using one finger.
Symbol/Descrip-
Kian Description
p(s Switch between 3D surroundings and Surroundings

© |e
Front corner This view makes it easier to drive out of tight parking spaces or areas and
or display the selec- intersections with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view
tion bar in front of the vehicle.
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering in front of the
o& |e®/}
Front
vehicle.
This view helps you to maneuver and position the vehicle more precisely.
Surroundings The area around the vehicle is shown using the camera images. The vehi-
cle image is shown by the system > A\.
};@}
This view assists you in using the full area for maneuvering behind the ve-
Rear
hicle. This is the rearview camera image.
This view can assist you when driving out of tight parking spaces or areas
Rear corner with poor visibility. It shows an almost 180° panorama view behind the
Ge; ®
vehicle.
This view helps you to see the distance between the front tires and the
Front tires
curb and the steering wheel angle when parking.
4K0012721BD
D Requirement: The vehicle surroundings (Camera) must be

selected in the View in the side area.
161
Symbol/Descrip-
Description
tion P
This view helps you to detect the distance between the rear wheels and
Rear tires
the curb when parking.
In these views, you can see the areas surrounding the vehicle in 3D when
® 3D surroundings | parking. The vehicle surrounding views are created from the camera im-
ages and sensor data. The vehicle image is shown by the system > A\.
ZX WARNING Rear cross-traffic assist

limits of the assist systems, sensors, and Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traffic assist
cameras > page 118.
— The Surroundings and 3D surroundings are
created from the individual camera images.
The vehicle image is shown by the system.
Objects and obstacles above the camera are
not displayed.
@) Note
Only use the images provided by the camera
on the rear of the vehicle when the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
sure any objects you may have mounted on
the luggage compartment lid do not block the
rearview camera.
@) Tips
— Depending on the selected gear, it will auto-
matically switch between the Front and
Rear views. If you switch the view manually, Fig. 128 Upper display: rear cross-traffic assist display
the automatic front/rear camera change will
be temporarily deactivated. General information
— When first activated while a forward gear is The rear cross-traffic assist monitors the area be-
engaged, the Front corner is displayed. hind and next to the vehicle using radar sensors
at the rear corners of the vehicle. The system can
detect moving objects that are approaching, such
as vehicles > fig. 127. A display in the MMI and
various warnings provide assistance when exiting
a parking space.
Requirements for using the rear cross-traffic

assist:
— Reverse gear must be engaged and the speed
while driving in reverse must not be higher than
6 mph (10 km/h).
162
Displays, warnings, and braking about every type of approaching objects,

— Display: the indicator @ in the upper display such as cyclists. Always monitor the traffic
only appears when the parking aid is activated. as well as the vehicle's surroundings with di-
In vehicles with peripheral cameras, the display rect eye contact.
only appears in the Rear and Rear corner cam- — The system may not react if objects are ap-
era views. Arrows show the direction from proaching very quickly.
which the cross traffic is approaching. —The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide
— Audible warnings: an audio signal may sound alerts if your vehicle is parallel parked or if
as an additional warning when driving in re- your vehicle is pulled too far into the park-
verse. ing space so that it is hidden by adjacent
— Automatic brake activation: if you do not react vehicles.
to a warning, a brief braking by the system can
warn you of a potential collision with an ap- (i) Tips
proaching object. — Certain settings are stored automatically in
The audible warning signal and the automatic the active personal profile.
brake activation occur only when driving in re- — Once an automatic brake activation occurs,
verse. the system cannot initiate another activa-
tion for several seconds.
Switch rear cross-traffic assist on and off — System functions may not be available if the
— Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: VE- ESC is limited or switched off, or if there is a
HICLE > Parking aid > Rear cross-traffic assist. malfunction.
Or — If there is an acoustic warning signal from
— Select |- -| > Rear cross-traffic assist in the upper the rear cross-traffic assist, then the park-
display when the parking aid is active. ing system may not warn you of detected
obstacles under certain circumstances.
Messages — For an explanation on conformity with the
if or » is displayed when there is a mal- FCC regulations in the United States and the
function, the rear cross traffic assist functions Industry Canada regulations, see
may be unavailable or may be limited. => page 296.
— The coverage areas of the sensors > fig. 127
are diagrams and do not represent a true-
to-scale image of the sensor ranges.
may be covered. Clean the sensor area in the ve-
hicle rear and try to turn the systems on again
later.

ed.
ZA\ WARNING
cameras > page 118.
4K0012721BD
— The rear cross-traffic assist will not provide

alerts about people and cannot warn you
163
Telephone
Telephone @) Note
Introduction Read the information about Audi connect, and

Applies to: vehicles with telephone be sure to note the connectivity costs section
=> page 177.
You can operate various telephone functions easi-
ly through the MMI in your vehicle. @) Tips
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- — The Bluetooth connection range is limited
ment, the following options may be available: to inside the vehicle.
— Connecting a cell phone with Bluetooth —Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices
— Using two telephones can be found in the database for tested mo-
— Using the Audi phone box bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth.
ZA\ WARNING Setup

— Medical experts warn that mobile devices
Connecting a cell phone via Bluetooth
can interfere with the function of pacemak-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ers. Always maintain a minimum distance of
about 7.9 inches (20 cm) between the mo- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
bile device antennas and the pacemaker. the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
— Do not carry the mobile device in a pocket settings must be open on your mobile device dur-
directly over the pacemaker when the ing the connection setup. The mobile device to be
phone is switched on. connected must not be actively connected to any
— Switch the mobile device off immediately other Bluetooth device. The MMI must only be
if you suspect it may be interfering with connected to one mobile device.
the pacemaker. > Enable the Bluetooth function and visibility on
— Do not use the voice recognition system* the MMI => page 224 and the cell phone.
=> page 27 in emergencies because your > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
voice may change in stressful situations. The PHONE.
system may take longer to dial the number > Follow the system instructions. The available
or may not be able to dial it at all. Dial the Bluetooth devices will be displayed after sever-
emergency number manually. al seconds.
— Switch your mobile device off in areas where > Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
there is a risk of an explosion. These loca- displayed Bluetooth devices.
tions are not always clearly marked. This > To update the list, press OQ.
may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo- A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
cations where fuel vapors (such as propane generated.
or gasoline vapor in vehicles or buildings), > Confirm the PIN on your mobile device, or
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti- > Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
phone. The time allowed for entering the PIN is
be present in the air. This also applies to all limited to approximately 30 seconds.
other locations where you would normally > Follow the system instructions.
> Pay attention to any other system prompts on
turn your vehicle engine off.
the MMI and on your cell phone.
— The demands of traffic require your full at-
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20,
Traffic safety information.
164
Telephone
After connecting successfully the mobile device, you may also need to
Information about the connected profiles will ap- download contacts and confirm access to
pear. You can also change the profiles later
your messages separately.
=> page 225. — When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the mobile device will auto-
The cell phone contacts are automatically loaded matically disconnect. Depending on your
in the MMI. This process can take several mi- mobile device, phone calls in progress may
nutes, depending on the number of contacts. be automatically redirected from the MMI
Depending on your cell phone and the connection to your mobile device so that you can con-
type, you can use the following functions: tinue the call on your phone.
— When the car phone or data module func-
Handsfree tion* is switched on, Audi connect Infotain-
Requirement: your cell phone must be connected ment* is available through the embedded
to the MMI via a Bluetooth Hands Free Profile SIM card})2).
(Bluetooth HFP).
Using two telephones
You can use the hands-free system. You can make
Applies to: vehicles with telephone, and Audi phone box
calls using the antenna on your mobile device.
You can connect two mobile devices to the MMI,
Sending and receiving messages
for example your business and your personal mo-
See > page 171. bile device. You can use both mobile devices to
make calls in the vehicle.
() Note
Connecting another mobile device
be sure to note the connectivity costs section Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
=> page 177. to the MMI.

@) Tips PHONE > [?. Follow the system instructions, or
— You can apply additional settings to con- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
nected mobile devices under Connected de- SETTINGS > Connected devices > Telephone 1
vices > page 224. or Telephone 2 > New connection.
— You can also search for the MMI on your mo-
See > page 164, Connecting a cell phone via
bile device using the Bluetooth device
Bluetooth.
search.
— You only have to pair your device one time. Switching between two mobile devices
Bluetooth devices that are already paired
Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
automatically connect to the MMI when the
nected to the MMI.
Bluetooth function is switched on, when
they are within range, and when the ignition > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
is switched on. The last connected mobile PHONE > J.
device is given first priority.
— Pay attention to any system prompts dis-
played on your mobile device or the MMI,
for example if the system should connect
automatically in the future. Depending on
4K0012721BD
D_ SIM card installed in the vehicle at the factory.

2) Not available in all countries.
165
Telephone
Disconnecting a mobile device You can also charge a mobile device using the
Applies to: vehicles with telephone USB adapter: connect your mobile device to the
Audi music interface using a USB adapter cable
The mobile device will be disconnected from the
©. You can charge your mobile device using spe-
MMI and removed from the list of paired devices.
cific USB adapters > page 212, fig. 147.
> To disconnect a connected device, use the con-
Reminder signal
nection manager > page 225.
When the device reminder signal is switched on,
Using the Audi phone you will be notified that your mobile device is still
in the Audi phone box when you leave the vehicle.
box
Applies to: vehicles with Audi phone box Requirement
—A Qi-capable?) mobile device must be in the
Audi phone box, or
— Your mobile device must be connected to the
Audi music interface by a USB adapter, and the
Audi smartphone interface must be active, or
— Your iPhone® must be connected to the MMI
via Bluetooth® > page 164 and must be charg-
ing through the Audi music interface using a
USB adapter.
Fig. 129 Storage compartment under the center armrest: Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: SET-
Audi phone box with connections TINGS > General > Reminder signal and mobile
device wireless charging.
You can charge your mobile device battery wire-
lessly using the Audi phone box. You can make The following settings are available:
calls through the exterior antenna” on the vehi- — Signal tone
cle. Using the external antenna* helps when — Spoken cue”: this setting is switched on at the
there is a low signal and also provides better re- factory.
ception quality. — Off
— Mobile device charging notification*: when
— Position the mobile device in the Audi phone
this function is switched on, the charge status
box centered on the @ symbol @ with the dis-
of your mobile device is displayed. You will also
play facing up.
be reminded not to forget your mobile device
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may when leaving the vehicle.
then be able to use the following functions: — Mobile device wireless charging: when this
— Connect to the exterior vehicle antenna!) function is switched on, you can charge your Qi-
— Wirelessly charge the mobile device. Require- capable mobile device wirelessly in the Audi
ment: the ignition must be switched on. The phone box.
charging function must be switched on in the
MMI. You must have a Qi-capable2) mobile de- ZA WARNING
vice. — Loose objects can be thrown around the ve-
hicle interior during sudden driving or
D_ Not available in all countries. These are additional car

phone functions only in conjunction with Audi connect In-
fotainment*.
2) The Qi standard makes it possible to charge your mobile
device wirelessly.
166
Telephone
braking maneuvers, which increases the risk — WARNING: E911 location information may
of an accident. Store objects securely while not be provided or may be inaccurate for
driving. calls served by using this device.
— The mobile device may become hot during
wireless charging. Pay attention to the tem- @) Note
perature of your mobile device and be care- Applicable to Canada
ful when removing it from the Audi phone In Canada, operation of a Zone Enhancer,
box. such as an Audi Phone Box, is subject to the
— An alternating magnetic field is used for following requirements of the Innovation,
wireless charging. Maintain a minimum dis- Science and Economic Development Canada
tance of approximately 2.4 in (6 cm) to the (ISED):
Audi phone box charging plate. The thresh- — This is a CONSUMER device.
olds for prolonged exposure at this distance — BEFORE USE, you MUST meet all require-
comply with ICNIRP1998. Therefore, inter- ments set out in CPC-2-1-05.
actions such as irritation of sensory organs, — You MUST operate this device with approved
malfunctions of active implants (such as antennas and cables as specified by the
pacemakers, infusion pumps, or neurosti- manufacturer. Antennas MUST NOT be in-
mulators) or effects on passive implants stalled within 20 cm of any person.
(such as prosthetic limbs) is highly unlikely. — You MUST cease operating this device im-
If you have an implant, consult a medical mediately if requested by ISED or a licensed
specialist if you have any questions. You can wireless service provider.
also switch the function for wireless charg- — WARNING: £911 location information may
ing in the Audi phone box on and off. You not be provided or may be inaccurate for
can continue to charge your mobile device calls served by using this device.
using a cable connection.
Gi) Tips
@) Note — Only one mobile device at a time can be
Applicable to U.S.A. charged wirelessly in the Audi phone box.
Operation of the Audi phone box is subject to — Strong transmission quality* cannot be
the following requirements of the Federal guaranteed if more than one mobile device
Communications Commission: is in the box.
— This is a CONSUMER device. —To reduce the risk of malfunctions, make
— BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS DE- sure the mobile device is positioned correct-
VICE with your wireless provider and have ly in the Audi phone box.
your provider’s consent. Most wireless pro- — Make sure there are no objects between the
viders consent to the use of signal boosters. Audi phone box and the mobile device.
Some providers may not consent to the use — Placing the mobile device in a bag or protec-
of this device on their network. If you are tive sleeve inside the Audi phone box can in-
unsure, contact your service provider. terfere with the connection to the external
— You MUST operate this device with approved antenna”*.
antennas and cables as specified by the — Metallic objects in the Audi phone box block
manufacturer. Antennas MUST be installed the wireless charging of your mobile device
at least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. and calls made using the exterior antenna”*.
— You MUST cease operating this device im- —The maximum charging output is 5 W.
mediately if requested by the FCC or a li- —The charging time and temperature will vary
4K0012721BD
censed wireless service provider. depending on the mobile device being used. >
167
Telephone
— You can purchase a USB adapter from an au- Coy y rem ae] Ue
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Service Facility, or at specialty stores.
— Audi recommends using Audi Genuine Ac- Call list @-- ec3
cessories. Audi has verified their reliability, Se ea “@ Pate}
(0)
Peace ean eeeS Be)
safety, and suitability. Albert, Simon (3) POLa te}
Pe ee aed ErEn (0)
Albinson, Mary (2) Petes}
Using the telephone PEC
PAU
ueRPE Ly
eta)
PL)
Pate}(5)
@
Mobile 001712345678 1:50PM

Accessing the telephone functions
Fig. 131 Upper display: call list
Requirement: the call list must contain a phone
6: | iN a
NS ad
3)
number.

PHONE > Call list.
ic (inant
a) | ac) Possible call list symbols:
Missed calls
Fig. 130 Upper display: selection menu
©OOOCOLO
Dialed numbers
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected Received calls
to the MMI > page 164. Edit call list
Displaying a business card ....... 169
PHONE. Number of interactions with a con-
tact
The following phone functions will be available:
If more than one interaction with a contact has
@ Search
already taken place, the last one is always dis-
@ Calllist 0.00.0... eee 168 played in the form of an arrow (), 2) or ).
GY Presets civic 2 x ssesocs a oxsce vw astm ¥ 169
Press and hold a contact or a phone number in
B®; COMtACtS cams za ene x » eeu ee ep 169
the list until the Options menu appears. Depend-
® Voicemail ..................00. 170 ing on your mobile device, the following options
© Dialnumber ...............000 170 may be available:
@ Switching between two mobile de- — Save as a shortcut > page 23, Shortcuts.
VIGES sesvaus x % soasces oa exeaene v % anstine Wn 174 — Edit telephone number: edit a phone number
Selected phone functions are also available in the before dialing it. Press Dial and start the call.
instrument cluster > page 175. — Show history*: Requirement: you must have al-
ready had more than one interaction with a
contact. All interactions with a contact or a
number are displayed.
— Store as favorite > page 169.
— Send text message > page 171.
— Send e-mail > page 173.
@) Tips
The call list can only be edited via the MMI.
168
Telephone
Managing favorites > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Applies to: vehicles with telephone PHONE > Contacts.
You can store the desired number for a contact as The contacts will be displayed. You can change
a shortcut in the favorites list. the sort order > page 175, Sort order.
Accessing favorites Displaying a business card

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The business card shows you details about a con-
PHONE > Favorites. tact. To open a business card, press on a contact
in the directory.
Storing favorites
Possible options in the business card:
> Press YY in the business card @) > page 169,
fig. 132, or
@ Store/delete as a favorite ........ 169
> Press Store as favorite in the options @ Options
=> page 168. © Call
@ Send text message ............. 171
Deleting favorites
© Start navigation
> Press W in the business card @ = page 169,
© Sende-mail ................00. 173
fig. 132, or
> Select: Favorites > Z > one or multiple favor- Business card options
ites or Select all > Delete > Done. Press +++).
— Send contact*: you can select Text message or
@) Tips E-mail > page 171.
If there are multiple mobile devices, you can — Add destination: you can add a business or pri-
create separate favorites in the MMI for each vate address > page 194, Contacts as naviga-
mobile device. tion destinations.
— Read out name!): the MMI automatically cre-
Opening contacts ates a name tag that can be read aloud for each
Applies to: vehicles with telephone entry > page 27.
— Save as a shortcut > page 23, Shortcuts.
<2
ee eclaadiiiie)
Contact options
Tei}
ROS
o
crane} Press and hold a contact in the list until the Op-
olen
T CARPE ely
tions menu appears.
Peal epee
Eeeeamecr — Send contact: you can select Text message or
Poeun
Or Te Rei} E-mail > page 171.
Fig. 132 Upper display: business card — Send text message > page 171.
— Send e-mail © page 173.
You can connect multiple mobile devices to the — Store as favorite > page 169.
MMI and manage up to four private phone books — Save as a shortcut > page 23, Shortcuts.
in the MMI.
Deleting contacts
Requirement: a mobile device must be connected
— Deleting all contacts: select: Contacts > Z >
to the MMI 5 page 164. You must have at least
Delete all. All contacts are deleted only in the
one contact stored in your mobile device.
MMI. >
4K0012721BD
) Not available in all languages.
169
Telephone
— Deleting imported contacts: requirement: you

G) Tips
must have imported at least one contact. Se-
lect: Contacts > Z > one or more contacts, or This service must be set up and activated in
Select all > Delete imported contacts > Done. advance by the cell phone service provider.
The imported contacts are deleted.
Dialing a phone number
Gi) Tips Applies to: vehicles with telephone
— Pay attention to any synchronization Depending on the vehicle equipment, you may
prompts on your mobile device when down- have the following options for dialing a phone
loading contacts. number:
— Only the contacts of the mobile device being
actively used are displayed. — Using text input in the MMI > page 24.
— Using voice operation > page 27.
— The contacts from the mobile device may
not be transferred in alphabetical order. If
there are too many entries, contacts with Making an emergency call
different first letters may be missing in the Applies to: vehicles with telephone
MMI.
— If contacts are loaded from the mobile de- to the MMI via Bluetooth.
vice into the MMI, the contacts on the SIM
card will no longer be displayed in the MMI. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
— The contacts in the local MMI memory are PHONE > Dial number > the emergency call
always visible and can be accessed by other number specific to the country (for example,
users. 911) > Dial.
— After switching off the ignition and exiting
the vehicle, the mobile device directory will ZA\ WARNING
be loaded when the MMI is started again if — Because your phone works with radio sig-
the mobile device is within range and the nals, a connection cannot be guaranteed un-
Bluetooth function is switched on in the moder all circumstances. Do not rely on only
bile device and the MMI. your phone when it comes to essential com-
— Only the contacts in the local MMI memory munication (such as during a medical emer-
can be deleted. gency).
— Always follow the instructions given by the
Listening to voicemail emergency personnel during an emergency
Applies to: vehicles with telephone call and only end the call when they instruct
you to do so.
PHONE > Voicemail.
Answering/ending a call
Requirement: there must be no voicemail num- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ber stored.
> Entering the voicemail number: enter the de- > To accept or end a call, press the @ button on
sired number. Press OK. the multifunction steering wheel. Operating
=> page 13.
Requirement: a voicemail number must be stor-
ed. You can use the following options on the MMI
> Dialing the voicemail number: press Voice- when there is an incoming call:
mail. The call begins immediately. > Answering an incoming call: press Answer.
> Declining a call: press Decline.
170
Telephone
> Declining a call with a text message*: Require- a call on hold, you can either Replace the cur-
ment: the function must be enabled in the rent call with the incoming call, or use Answer
settings. Press Decline with text message. to put the current call on hold. The incoming
> Silencing the ringtone: press Mute. call will be answered.
Press More.
G) Tips
— Transferring a call*: press Transfer call to mo-
The radio or media playback is muted during a bile device to transfer the existing call from the
phone call. MMI to your mobile device or Bluetooth® head-
set*.
During a phone call — Switch to hands-free mode*: Requirement: you
Applies to: vehicles with telephone must have a phone call in progress on your cell
phone. Press Switch to hands-free to transfer
The following options may be possible during a
the call from your cell phone back to the MMI.
call depending on the mobile device being used
— Add call: Select: Call list/Contacts/Favorites >
and the type of connection:
select an entry from the list or press Dial
— End call: ends the current phone call. phone number and enter a phone number.
— Mute: the other person on the call will no lon- Then the active call will be on hold.
ger be able to hear you. You will still be able to — Remove conf. member*: Requirement: you
hear the other person. To switch the micro- must have started a conference call. You can re-
phone back on, press Unmute. move conference call members individually
— Hold/Resume: place your current phone call on when a conference call is active. Press on the
hold and answer another. contact you would like to remove.
— Send tone sequence: press Numbers. You can — Microphone input level: you can adjust the mi-
enter tone sequences (DTMF) and send them to crophone input level during a phone call using
the other party on the call. the slider.
— Accepting an incoming call: ifa phone call
comes in during another call, you can either Re- @ Tips
place the current call with the incoming call, or —To be notified of an incoming call during a
use Answer to put the current call on hold. The phone call, the call waiting function in your
incoming call will be answered. mobile device must be switched on when
— Declining an incoming call: press Decline to using the Handsfree profile.
decline an incoming call. — When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
— Muting the incoming call: press Mute. connection to the mobile device will auto-
— Other call options: press More. matically disconnect. Depending on your
Requirement: two phone calls must be in prog- mobile device, phone calls in progress may
ress. be automatically redirected from the MMI
to your mobile device so that you can con-
— Conference call*: add a call on hold and up to
tinue the call on your phone.
five active parties (depending on the cell phone
service provider) to the conference call.
— Swap call: alternate between two phone calls Messages
while one of the calls is on hold. Press on the Text messages
respective call. Selecting End call will end the Applies to: vehicles with telephone
active phone call. A call that was placed on hold
stays on hold and can be taken off hold with Re- Depending on the mobile device being used and
the mobile network contract, you may be able to
4K0012721BD
sume.
— Accepting an incoming call: if a phone call receive and send text messages using the MMI. >
comes in during another call and when there is
171
Telephone
Requirement: your mobile device must be con- — Extract numbers: Requirement: the message
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access must contain a number. You can extract a num-
Profile (Bluetooth MAP) > page 164. ber from a text message.
— Send again: Requirement: the text message
must be in the Outbox. The selected text mes-
MESSAGES > (©) > Text message (SIM card)*/
sage can be resent.
text message (phone 1)/text message (phone
2)", Press and hold an entry in the Inbox until the Op-
tions menu appears.
Inboxes
— Reply: a reply can be sent to the selected mes-
— New text message: press on a template in the sage in the Inbox.
list or dictate a text message. Press Add and — Forward: the selected text message can be for-
select one or more recipients from your con- warded to other recipients. Text can also be
tacts. To remove a recipient, press Delete. Press added before sending.
Send.
— Inbox: displays all received text messages. Settings
— Sent: displays all sent text messages. Press ©}.
— Outbox": displays all text messages to be sent. — Automatically forward text message to mobile
— Drafts*: text messages that have not been sent device*2): when this function is switched on,
yet by the mobile device are displayed on the text messages will also be automatically stored
MMI. on your mobile device.
— Deleted*: deleted text messages are displayed. — New text message notification: when this
— User-defined*: folders defined by the user are function is switched on, you will be notified
transferred from your mobile device. when new text messages are received. New text
messages are indicated with an envelope Min
Message options
the MMI status bar.
The following options are available when you se- — Text message center*: the number for the text
lect a text message: message center of your cell phone service pro-
— Read out* the text message). vider is displayed. If no number has been stor-
— Reply: a reply can be sent to the selected mes- ed yet, you can enter the text message center
sage in the Inbox. number.
— To switch to the previous or the next message, — Delete text messages from SIM card”: if the
press < or >. memory capacity on the SIM card is full, an en-
— More: options velope with a line through it is displayed in the
MMI status bar. You can continue to send text
When you press More, the following options are
messages, but you cannot receive new text
available:
messages. To delete all sent text messages
— Call: Requirement: a number must be stored.
from the SIM card, select All sent messages. To
You can call the contact. delete all read text messages from the SIM
— Forward: the selected text message can be for- card, select All read messages.
warded to other recipients. Text can also be
added before sending. Delete text message
— Navigate: Requirement: the contact must have Select: a mailbox > Z > one or more text mes-
a navigation address stored with it in the direc- sages > Delete > Done.
tory. You can start route guidance.
D_ Not available in all languages.

2) Function is not supported on all mobile devices.
172
Telephone
— Reply: a reply can be sent to the selected e-mail

@) Tips
in the Inbox.
— Please note that you may have to activate — To switch to the previous or the next message,
the receiving and sending of text messages press “or >.
depending on the SIM card being used (for — More: options
example, when using a multi-SIM).
— Messages that are deleted in the MMI are When you press More, the following options may
also deleted in the mobile device automati- be displayed depending on your mobile device
cally. and the applicable mail folder:
— Only new received messages may be dis- — Call: Requirement: a number must be stored.
played depending on your mobile device. You can call the contact.
— Forward: the selected e-mail can be forwarded
to other recipients. Text can also be added be-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone fore sending.
— Extract e-mail add.: you can extract the e-mail
Depending on the type of mobile device being address from an e-mail.
used, you may be able to receive and send e- — Navigate: Requirement: the contact must have
mails through the MMI. a navigation address stored with it in the direc-
Requirement: your mobile device must be con- tory. You can start route guidance.
nected to the MMI via Bluetooth Message Access — Extract numbers: Requirement: the text in the
Profile (Bluetooth MAP) > page 164. e-mail must contain a number. You can extract
a number from an e-mail.
— Show all recipients*: you can display the recipi-
MESSAGES > (:@) > e-mail (phone 1)/e-mail
ents of an e-mail.
(phone 2)*.
— Show attachmts.*: you can display a list of at-
Inboxes tachments to an e-mail.
— Send again: the selected e-mail in the Outbox
— New e-mail: press on a template in the list.
and Sent mailboxes can be sent again.
Press Add and select one or more recipients
from your contacts. To remove one or all recipi- Press and hold an entry in the Inbox until the Op-
ents, press Delete. Press Send. tions menu appears.
— Inbox: displays all received e-mails. To update — Reply: a reply can be sent to the selected e-
the list, press OQ. mail.
— Sent: displays all sent e-mails. — Reply all: a reply can be sent for the selected e-
— Outbox: displays all e-mails to be sent. mail and it will be sent to all of the entered re-
— Drafts: e-mails that have not been sent yet are cipients.
displayed. — Forward: the selected e-mail can be forwarded
— Deleted*: deleted e-mails are displayed. to different recipients.
— User-defined*: folders defined by the user are
Settings
transferred from your mobile device.
Press ©.
Message options
— New e-mail notification: when this function is
The following options are available when you se- switched on, you will be notified when new e-
lect an e-mail: mails are received. New e-mails are indicated
— Read out* the e-mail). with an envelope & in the MMI status bar. >
4K0012721BD
) Not available in all languages.
173
Telephone
Deleting e-mails tion. You can determine which setting is active

Select: a mailbox > Z > one or more e-mails >
with Status.
Delete > (Done). Ringtone and volume settings
@) Note — Ringtone and message volume: you can adjust

the volume of the selected ringtone and the no-
tification volume when a message is received by
moving the position of the slider.
=> page 177.
— Ringtone”: available ringtones are played using
the Ringtone function. Press on an entry in the
Settings list.
Phone settings — Microphone input level: you can adjust the mi-
Applies to: vehicles with telephone crophone input level using the slider.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Turn on car phone or data module
PHONE > ©}. Applies to: vehicles with car phone/data module
When this function is switched on, you can use

Switching between two mobile devices
the car phone or data module.
Requirement: phone 1 and phone 2 must be con-
As long as the car phone was not turned off sepa-
nected to the MMI.
rately the last time it was used, it will turn on au-
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail- tomatically when the ignition is switched on.
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch
the phone by pressing the button. Edit voicemail number
You can change your voicemail number.
Declining a call with a text message*
When this function is switched on, you can de- Enable VoLTE
cline an incoming call with a text message. When this function is switched on, Voice over
LTE* will be supported.
Call options*
The following options may be available depend- Network settings
ing on the mobile device: — Login to mobile phone network: select to log
— Call forwarding: you can switch the forwarding into your cell phone service provider network
of incoming calls to your voicemail or to anoth- automatically or manually.
er phone number on and off. You can check if — Network selection: Requirement: the data
the function is activated or deactivated with module must be switched on and Login to mo-
Status. bile phone network must be set to Manual. Se-
— Call waiting: you will be alerted to an incoming lect a network manually from the list of availa-
call during a phone call when the function is ble networks at the present location.
switched on. You can check if the function is ac-
Car phone serial number (IMEI):
tivated or deactivated with Status.
Applies to: vehicles with car phone
— Send own number: sending your phone num-
ber with an outgoing call can be switched on The serial number (IMEI) of your car phone is dis-
and off. With the Net.-depen. setting, the set- played.
ting listed in the contract with the cell phone
service provider is used. The settings only apply
G) Tips
to the PHONE menu in the MMI. Please note — Several mobile devices can be paired with
that the settings on your mobile device will ap- the MMI, but only two* mobile devices can
ply after disconnecting the Bluetooth connec- be actively connected.
174
Telephone
—To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the be connected to the Audi music interface
Bluetooth function can be reset to the fac- => page 212.
tory default settings > page 224.
Contacts in vCard format (.vcf) can be imported
or exported from the MMI.
Directory settings — Applies to: MMI: Importing contacts from a
storage medium: Select: Import contacts >
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Search for import data > SD card 1 or USB de-
PHONE > Contacts > ©}. vice 1/USB device 2 > desired contacts or Se-
lect all contacts > Start import.
Switching between two mobile devices — Applies to: MMI: Exporting contacts to a stor-
Requirement: telephone 1 and telephone 2 must age device: Requirement: Only previously im-
be connected. ported contacts can be exported. Select: Export
contacts > Find source for exporting > SD card
Switch telephones: the device name of the avail-
1 or USB device 1/USB device 2 > desired con-
able mobile device is displayed. You can switch
tacts or Select all contacts > Start export.
the phone by pressing the button.
The directory for the selected phone will be dis- @ Tips

played. — For more information about the myAudi ac-
count, visit my.audi.com.
Hide grayed-out contacts
— The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
When this function is switched on, contacts that cal MMI memory.
have no phone numbers stored for them will be — Contacts that were downloaded from a mo-
hidden.
bile device cannot be exported.
Sort order — There should be no other files or folders on
the storage medium containing the contacts
You can sort the contacts by Last name or First
to be imported.
name.
— Apple devices and MTP devices (such as
Download contacts smartphones) are not recognized as USB
storage devices.
to the MMI.
Mobile phone network settings
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man- Applies to: vehicles with telephone
ually download your mobile device contacts. De-
pending on the mobile device, you may need to > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
disconnect and reconnect the Bluetooth connec- SETTINGS > Connection settings > Mobile
tion to update the contacts. phone network.
Memory capacity Switching the car phone or data module on

Applies to: vehicles with car phone/data module
You can manage up to 23,000 contacts. You can
See > page 174.
also download up to 5,000 contacts from maxi-
mum four mobile devices. You can also import up
to 3,000 contacts from a storage medium. Instrument cluster
Importing and exporting contacts Telephone

Applies to: vehicles with multifunction steering wheel and
Requirement: an SD card must be in the SD card telephone
4K0012721BD
reader* > page 209 or a USB storage device must

In the instrument cluster display, you can control
the MMI functions with the multifunction >
175
Telephone
steering wheel. Operating > page 13 and — Favorites: Requirement: favorites must be stor-
=> page 29, Additional function buttons. ed in the MMI.
— Switch telephones: Requirement: two cell
Requirement: the Telephone tab must be select-
phones must be connected to the MMI.
ed in the instrument cluster.
— Back to call: Requirement: there must be a call
> Press the [=] button. in progress.
Possible options:
(i) Tips
— Call list: Requirement: the call list must con- Depending on the selected function, it may be
tain a phone number. necessary to use the MMI.
Troubleshooting
The information that follows lists some trouble-

shooting options. They depend on the equip-
ment.
Problem Solution
Pairing the mobile device to the Make sure the requirements for connecting a mobile phone have
MMI failed. been met > page 164, or
make sure you did not accidentally decline the PIN for establishing
a connection on your mobile phone. If necessary, repeat the pair-
ing process > page 164.
After pairing, not all contacts or Avoid using special characters in names.
no contacts have been loaded in- Avoid using contact groups on your mobile phone.
to the MMI. Check for prompts on your mobile device when connecting via
Bluetooth.
Certain telephone functions are The telephone functions depend on the mobile device service pro-
grayed out or not available. vider and the mobile device you are using.
Some telephone functions may Check if the Bluetooth settings on your cell phone are limited or
be switched off or not available, individual Bluetooth settings are deactivated. This may be the
even though the mobile device is case with business cell phones.
supported.
Wireless cell phone charging is Check if wireless charging with the Audi phone box is switched on.
not working or is interrupted. Check if your mobile device is Qi-capable.
Check if your mobile device is positioned correctly in the Audi
phone box > page 166 and no other objects are between them.
The MESSAGES menu is not avail- Check if the Show messages option is on your mobile device and it
able. is enabled.
176
Audi connect
Audi connect of your Wi-Fi device and operating system.

This could result in fees depending on your
General information cell phone service provider, especially if you
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect are using this feature while abroad. A flat
rate data plan is strongly recommended. For
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
more information, contact your cell phone
ment, the following functions may be available:
service provider or refer to the owner's man-
— Audi connect Infotainment ual for your Wi-Fi device.
— Audi connect vehicle control — You are responsible for all precautions taken
You can also find more information on Audi con- for data protection, anti-virus protection,
nect online at www.audi.com. and protection against loss of data on mo-
bile devices that are used, for example, to
ZA WARNING access the Internet through the Wi-Fi hot-
spot.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, only use
— In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot
the coverage range of the respective cell
only if the traffic situation permits it. Read
phone service provider, some functions
and follow the guidelines provided in
and/or services may not be available, it may
= page 20, Traffic safety information.
not be possible to send or receive data, or
— It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
functionality may be limited.
devices and other similar devices when the
vehicle is stationary because, like all loose
G) Tips
objects, they could be thrown around the in-
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri- — The availability of services depends on the
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se- subscription.
curely while driving. Also read the warnings — AUDI AG provides access to services from
in the chapter > page 69, General informa- third party providers. Permanent availability
tion. cannot be guaranteed, because that de-
pends on the third party provider.
@) Note — Use of the most up-to-date mobile network
standard is not available in every country.
— Applies to: embedded SIM card usage: The
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
connection costs for Audi connect Infotain-
thorized Audi Service Facility or your cell
ment services are included in the price of
phone service provider for additional infor-
Audi connect Infotainment during the sub-
mation.
scription period with some exceptions.
— Availability, scope, providers, screen display,
Please note that there may be additional
and costs of services may vary depending on
charges when using some services. For ex-
the country, model, model year, end device
ample, this applies to online radio/
and rates.
podcasts, additional online data, or for In-
ternet connections and services that use the
Wi-Fi hotspot, such as online media sour- Audi connect
ces. Depending on the country, data plans Infotainment
may need to be purchased for these services
= page 182. For additional information, see
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
my.audi.com.
— In certain situations, the Wi-Fi hotspot data With Audi connect Infotainment services, online
4K0012721BD
connection may be established as a replace- information is transmitted directly to the vehicle. >
ment for the SIM card on your Wi-Fi device.
This feature depends on the configuration
177
Audi connect
An Internet connection is required to use Audi > Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de-
connect Infotainment. Depending on the country vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
and the vehicle equipment, the following options using the authentication data that is shown.
may be available: > Follow any additional system prompts on your
Wi-Fi device if necessary.
— Embedded SIM card
Your device is successfully connected with the
Z\ WARNING MMI's Wi-Fi hotspot.
Always follow the information found in > A\
in General information on page 177. ZA WARNING
@) Note in General information on page 177.
Always follow the information found in >@ in
General information on page 177. @) Note
Embedded SIM card General information on page 177.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and an
embedded SIM card (i) Tips
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain- For an explanation on conformity with the
ment services is made through an embedded SIM FCC regulations in the United States and the
card (eSIM card) that is installed in the vehicle. Industry Canada regulations, see > page 296.
You can use the Audi connect Infotainment serv-
ices immediately. Audi connect
Infotainment services
@) Note
Always follow the information found in >@ in Configuration
General information on page 177.
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
Using a Wi-Fi hotspot be configured through your personal myAudi ac-
Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot count at my.audi.com before using them for the
first time.
You can connect up to eight Wi-Fi devices (such
as smartphones) with the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot. If
@) Tips
the MMI is connected to the Internet
= page 177, the connected Wi-Fi devices can also — For some Audi connect Infotainment serv-
use the MMI’s Internet connection. ices, you may also have to enter your myAu-
di access information when accessing serv-
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on. ices in the MMI.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: — Some Audi connect Infotainment services
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi must be activated at my.audi.com.
Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot. — Regardless of the key user and additional
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: users, you can only connect one myAudi ac-
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi > Wi- count to your vehicle.
Fi hotspot settings. The access data for the Wi- — Depending on the country, you may be able
Fi hotspot is displayed. Switch on the visibility to use the myAudi app or my.audi.com.
of the Wi-Fi hotspot if necessary. — For detailed information on configuration,
visit my.audi.com.
178
Audi connect
calendar must be enabled on your mobile device.

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment You must be logged into the myAudi app with
your myAudi login data and you must have select-
ed your vehicle. The Wi-Fi function on your mo-
ment, the following services may be available:
bile device and the MMI must be enabled and
Weather information your mobile device must be paired to the MMI
Applies to: MMI Wi-Fi hotspot > page 178.
> Press WEATHER on the home screen. You can display the your mobile device calendar
on the MMI.
Editing settings: Select: WEATHER > Ga.
Adding a location: select: In a new city > enter
CALENDAR.
the desired location.
> To permanently set weather for a location,
press on a location.
Z\ WARNING
> To always show the weather based on the vehi- Always follow the information found in > A\
cle position, press on the crosshairs. in General information on page 177.
Requirement: route guidance must be active.

@) Note
> To show the weather at the destination, press
on B&. Always follow the information found in >@ in
Removing a location: select: Z > one or more lo-
cations or Select all > Delete.
Audi connect vehicle
Online news control services
NEws. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
If you logged in to myAudi in your vehicle

With Audi connect vehicle control services )), you
= page 30, personalized newsfeeds can be dis-
can utilize various services using the myAudi app
played.
or online at my.audi.com.
Access to Twitter
ZA WARNING
Requirement: you must have connected your ve-
hicle with myAudi > page 30. You must have con-
in General information on page 177.
nected your myAudi account with Twitter.
You can only connect one Twitter account with @) Tips

your myAudi account. Not all settings can be ad-
— Accessing specific data or controlling func-
justed in the MMI. Some can only be adjusted
tions remotely depends on the charge level
through the Twitter website.
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: functions only have limited availability after
NEWS > G5. Press ona Twitter entry in the list. switching off the ignition.
— An eSIM card establishes the Internet con-
Access to the calendar
nection for Audi connect vehicle control
Requirement: the myAudi app must be installed services. The costs for this are included in
and open on your mobile device. Access to your the price of Audi connect vehicle control >
4K0012721BD
D Depends on the country and equipment. These services

are available for a limited time.
179
Audi connect
services. The cell phone network, for exam- Online Audi service request
ple, must be available to use these services. Requirement: the service must be activated on-
line at my.audi.com and an authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi service facility must be se-
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control lected.
> Register at my.audi.com. This service transmits service-relevant data to
> Set the key user > page 31. your selected authorized Audi dealer or author-
> Install the myAudi app on your mobile device ized Audi service facility. They will contact you
and log in with your access information. before your next service appointment.
Stolen Vehicle Locator

@ Tips
It may also be necessary to enter your 4-digit This service assists you in locating your vehicle if
PIN set at my.audi.com when accessing some it is stolen.
Audi connect vehicle control services. — Contact the police. You receive a Case ID.
— Call the service hotline and give your Case ID.
Yate)
The service hotline will forward the established
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
data to the police. You receive the Audi Service
Depending on the country and the vehicle equip- hotline number when you purchase your vehicle.
ment, the following services may be available:
Alert services
Locking and unlocking the vehicle by remote Requirement: a key user must be set in the vehi-
control
cle > page 180.
Requirement: the vehicle must be parked and the
You can adjust the following services in the
ignition must be switched off.
myAudi app. You will be notified by a push notifi-
This service allows you to unlock or lock your ve- cation and/or e-mail if an alarm is triggered for
hicle. your vehicle.
Vehicle status report — Geofencing Alert: a permitted/prohibited zone

was entered.
This service transfers driver information system
— Speed Alert: a set speed was exceeded.
data to a server. Depending on the vehicle equip-
— Valet Alert: a set speed was exceeded or a per-
ment, certain data may be accessed, such as the
mitted/prohibited zone was entered.
remaining range or mileage. The values may dif-
fer from the values displayed in the vehicle.
ZA\ WARNING
Car Finder Do not ignore messages and warning or indi-
This service transmits the parking location to a cator lights that turn on in the vehicle be-
server when the ignition is switched off. The vehi- cause of the information in the vehicle status
cle location, your location, or the route to your report. This could lead to break downs in on
vehicle can be displayed. The new parking loca- the road, accidents and serious injuries.
tion cannot be determined with this service if the
vehicle is moved after shutting the vehicle off @) Tips
and without switching the ignition on and off For some services, you can select if you would
again, for example if the vehicle is towed or sto- like to be notified with a push notification
len. and/or an e-mail.
180
Audi connect
Settings Data usage counter

Your current data usage is displayed.
Ce) atelal-mariancela4
— Reset counter: you can reset your usage statis-
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
tics to zero.
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Mobile
— Warning limit: you can set a warning limit for
phone network.
your data usage (GB/MB).
Depending on the country, vehicle equipment,
and connection type, the following functions may Z\ WARNING
be available: Always follow the information found in > A\
Data connection settings
Using the Data connection settings menu, you @) Note
can set when the system should connect to the Always follow the information found in S@ in
Internet. The Internet connection disconnects General information on page 177.
automatically once the requested Audi connect
Infotainment service no longer requires any data.
@) Tips
— Data roaming: data roaming is switched off at For more information on roaming charges,
the factory. To use a data connection outside of contact your cell phone service provider.
the country, data roaming must be switched
on. The setting is stored for the current SIM Wi-Fi settings
card or the mobile device that is currently con- Applies to: vehicles with Wi-Fi hotspot
nected.
— Allow MMI online services: when this function Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
is switched on, a data connection is automati- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
cally established in order to use Audi connect SETTINGS > Connection settings > Wi-Fi
Infotainment services.
— Allow Wi-Fi devices: when the function is Depending on the country and the vehicle equip-
switched on, mobile devices can use the Inter- ment, the following functions may be available:
net connection through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
Wi-Fi
Access point When the function is switched on, the MMI's Wi-
The connection is configured automatically based Fi hotspot is active and Wi-Fi devices can be con-
on the SIM card being used. The following values nected to the hotspot.
can be changed. You can obtain more information Wi-Fi hotspot settings
from your cell phone service provider.
The Wi-Fi connection between the MMI and your
— Access Point Name (APN): the access point de- Wi-Fi device is encrypted. You can change the fol-
pends on the cell phone service provider and is lowing information if needed.
assigned automatically.
— User name: your cell phone service provider as- — Access point (SSID): name of the Wi-Fi hot-
signs the user name for your online profile. spot.
— Password: your cell phone service provider as- — Password: a random password was set at the
signs the password for your online profile. factory in the MMI. The password can be
changed. The encryption method requires a
— Apply settings: saves the changed settings.
password to be at least eight characters long.
— Reset configuration: resets the connection set-
4K0012721BD
Choose a secure password.

tings.
— Visible to others: you can switch the visibility
of the Wi-Fi hotspot on or off. >
181
Audi connect
You can purchase data plans at my.audi.com.
Always follow the information found in > AV

Always follow the information found in > AA

Elem) eT
Applies to: vehicles with data plans
Requirement: you must have created a myAudi Depending on the country, applicable data
account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be plans may need to be purchased when driving
registered in your myAudi account. in other countries.
Troubleshooting

ment.
Audi connect Infotainment serv- Some Audi connect Infotainment services must be activated or
ices: individual Audi connect Info- configured through your personal myAudi account before using
tainment services are grayed out or them for the first time. You can find detailed information online
not available. at my.audi.com.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to Check if Wi-Fi is activated in the MMI > page 181.
connect through Wi-Fi. Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobile device and
restart it.
D_ Not available in every market.
182
Emergency call
Emergency call
Overview — The emergency call function cannot be deac-
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function tivated in the Infotainment system settings.
—The availability of the TPS emergency call is
An emergency call is a combination of data trans-
limited to certain times.
mission and a phone call. The data transmission
—The costs for call and data connections for
from your vehicle forwards important informa-
TPS emergency calls is included in the price
tion, such as the vehicle and position data, to the
of the services.
emergency call center.

ment, the following functions may be available: Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
With the emergency call, you can call for help in A TPS emergency call can be made manually or
dangerous situations as quickly as possible. Use automatically > page 183.
this function when emergency help is needed
=> page 183.
Making an emergency call
— Audi connect emergency call (TPS emergency Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
call). This eCall system uses emergency call
centers operated by third party providers.
With online roadside assistance, you can request

assistance if there is a breakdown or a minor acci-
dent > page 184.
ZA\ WARNING
In areas with poor GPS reception or outside
the coverage range of the respective cell
phone service provider, some functions and/or Fig. 133 Front headliner: cover for the emergency call but-
services may not be available, it may not be ton
possible to send or receive data, or functional-
ity may be limited. Manual emergency call
@) Tips
> Tap the cover (4) to open it.
You can find what data will be transferred at
>» Press and hold the emergency call button until
www.audi.com.
the LED (2) blinks. The emergency call will be
made.
Emergency call > If the emergency call button is pressed by mis-
take, then press it again immediately and hold
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
it until the LED stays on. The emergency call
will be canceled.
The services are provided through a SIM card in-
stalled in the vehicle. Services are provided as- Automatic emergency call
suming that the cell phone network required for The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto-
the installed SIM card is functioning and availa- matic emergency call under certain circumstan-
ble for use. The available services set by Audi AG ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LED in
4K0012721BD
are only available within the cell phone network the emergency call button @) will blink. The
coverage area for the cell phone service provider emergency call will be made. It cannot be can-
selected by Audi AG. celed.
183
Emergency call
LED status Online roadside

— Green - The emergency call function is availa- assistance
ble.
— Red - There is a malfunction in the emergency
Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
call function. Contact an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility. Note the An online roadside assistance call )) is a combina-
messages about the availability of the emer- tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
gency function > page 184. data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
— Off - The emergency call function is not availa- portant information to the Audi service center,
ble, perhaps because no network is available. such as the vehicle and position data.
Warnings
Calling online roadside assistance
If there is a critical system failure in the emer- Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
gency call systems, the vehicle occupants will re-
ceive the following warning: see > page 184, LED
[RAzZ-0443)
status and > page 184, Messages.
G) Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due to a
+O
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.
Fig. 134 Front headliner: online roadside assistance but-

Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
ton
BS Emergency call function: malfunction! Lim-

Calling online roadside assistance
ited availability. Please contact Service
> Press the button @). The LED in the button
If this indicator light turns on and this message
turns red. The online roadside assistance call
appears, the emergency call function is restrict-
will be made.
ed. For example, you cannot call the emergency
» If you press the button @) by mistake, then
call center, but data may still be transmitted un-
press it again. Or
der certain circumstances. Drive to an authorized
> Applies to: MMI: Press Cancel or End call.
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately to have the malfunction corrected. Audi incident assistance
& Emergency call function: malfunction! Func- A minor accident may be detected by the vehicle
tion unavailable. Please contact Service electrical system. You are able to select between
online roadside assistance and an emergency call
If this indicator light turns on and this message
in the MMI.
appears, you cannot make an emergency call.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the G) Tips
malfunction corrected. If the roadside assistance call is canceled due
to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again.
) The availability of the services offered depends on the

country and may change in the future.
184
Navigation
Navigation the traffic regulations that are applicable in

the country where you are operating the ve-
Opening navigation hicle. In the event that the driving directions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
contradict traffic regulations, always follow
The navigation system directs you to your desti- the traffic regulations applicable in the
nation, around traffic incidents, and on alterna- country where you are operating the vehicle
tive routes, if desired. to reduce the risk of an accident.
@) Note
=> in General information on page 177.
iG) Tips
Fig. 135 Upper display: standard map: route guidance is — Snow and obstructions on the GPS antenna
not started or trees and large buildings can impair sat-
ellite reception and affect the system's abil-
Opening navigation
ity to determine the vehicle position. Sever-
> Applies to: MMI: Press NAVIGATION on the al deactivated or malfunctioning satellites
home screen. can also interrupt GPS reception and affect
the system's ability to determine the vehicle
After accessing the navigation for the first time,
position.
the map is displayed.
— Because street names sometimes change,
Opening navigation using the multifunction the names stored in the MMI may in rare
steering wheel cases differ from the actual street name.
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select — Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
the Navigation tab in the instrument cluster. Depending on the selected function, opera-
> To display navigation when route guidance has tion using the upper display may be re-
started, select in the instrument cluster: the quired.
button > Map. — Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Info-
tainment: Depending on the country and ve-
The following functions are available in the MMI: hicle equipment, additional services may be
@ Open the Select destination menu available.
=> page 186, fig. 136. — An additional indicator will appear in the
@ Open intelligent search directly > page 186. head-up display.
@ Switch between the map and the menu:
press A repeatedly until the desired function myAudi navigation
is displayed. Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
You can find additional information about the MMI navigation works seamlessly with the myAu-
map update at > page 192, Map operation. di app.
ZX WARNING Your destinations (favorites, last destinations)

are synchronized through your myAudi account.
— The demands of traffic require your full at- All important destinations can be displayed in
tention. Always read the chapter > page 20, the vehicle and in the myAudi app.
4K0012721BD
Traffic safety information.

— The route calculated by the navigation sys- To download the destinations automatically into
tem is a driving recommendation. Follow the vehicle, we recommend linking the access >
185
Navigation
data from your myAudi account to your personal © Contacts ..................00. 189
profile > page 30. @ Received destinations & routes .. 189
myAudi navigation functions:

Intelligent search for navigation
— You can send destinations and routes from the Cary
myAudi app to the vehicle > page 189. Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
— Active route guidance in the myAudi app can be Using the intelligent search, you can enter the
continued in the MMI. data for a navigation destination in any order all
— Depending on the situation, it may be possible at once (for example, 5th Avenue New York). You
to continue active route guidance from the MMI can search for points of interest, contacts, previ-
in the myAudi app to continue navigating to the ous destinations, received destinations, and
destination after leaving the vehicle. routes or favorites to navigate to the desired
destination.
@) Note
Opening a menu
be sure to note the connectivity costs section > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
=@ in General information on page 177. NAVIGATION > &.
Intelligent search
Entering a destination
> Enter one or more search terms into the input
Select destination field. See > page 24, Text input.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > Press on the desired destination in the results
list. The Details menu will be displayed.
Select destination
> Press Start. Route guidance will be activated
e and the map will be displayed > page 191,
| fig. 138.
Si Cees
If the MMI is connected to the Internet
3 &routes = page 177, Audi connect, the Intelligent search
automatically includes results from the Internet.
Fig. 136 Upper display: Select destination menu See >©.
Opening a menu Change search area
Applies to: MMI
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen.
> If the map is displayed, press aa @) > page 185,
fig. 135. NAVIGATION > &.
> To change the search area, press %9 /(@)/
The following functions are available > fig. 136: Ris table on page 188 repeatedly until the de-
@ Intelligent search .............. 186 sired search area is selected.
@ Entering anaddress ............ 187 Online search
@ Last destinations .............. 187 Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online search
@ Presets ...................004. 188 You can use the results from a search engine pro-
® POs 2... eee eee 188 vider to find a navigation destination.
)) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
186
Navigation
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the Enter a destination using an address
Internet > page 177, Audi connect.
> Press on the respective input field and enter an
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: address.
NAVIGATION > © > G. > Press Apply. The Details menu will be dis-
> Enter one or more search terms into the input played.
field. > Press Start.
> The search engine provider shows suggestions Route guidance will be activated and the map will
to narrow down the search.
be displayed > page 191, fig. 138.
> Press on suggestions until the desired destina-
tion appears in the results list. If necessary, use Destination entry for a street intersection
one finger to swipe upward or downward until > Select: Intersection > enter a street > Start.
the suggestions © or destinations appear.
> Press on the desired destination 9. The Details
Loading previous destinations
menu will be displayed.
> Press Start.
Your last destinations and routes can be loaded
Route guidance will be activated and the map will
directly as a navigation destination.
be displayed. > page 191, fig. 138
As soon as you start route guidance, the destina-
() Note tion is automatically saved in the last destina-
Read the information about Audi connect, and tions. Your previous destinations are marked with
be sure to note the connectivity costs section the © symbol.
=>@ in General information on page 177. If you use myAudi navigation, your previous des-
tinations will be synchronized with your myAudi
@) Tips account > page 185.
— The MMI input suggestions depend on the
Accessing previous destinations
last navigated destinations.
— The navigation system always searches for > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the fastest route. You can have alternative NAVIGATION > (8) > Last destinations > select
routes displayed if necessary > page 193. a desired destination > Start.
— If the destination cannot be found, it may > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
not be stored in the navigation database. in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
Check the spelling of the term that was button > Last destinations > desired destina-
searched or check the search area tion.
> page 186.
Changing and loading a previous destination
Entering an address
NAVIGATION > (Ge) > Last destinations > Z >
Z > change the address > Use address > Start.
As an alternative to the intelligent search, you
can also enter an address in stages. Restore last tour
Opening a menu Requirement: a route with at least two stopovers

must have already been canceled.
NAVIGATION > (G5) > Enter address. Your last route is labeled with the © symbol. >
4K0012721BD
187
Navigation
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: > Searching for a point of interest in a specific
NAVIGATION > (&5) > Last destinations > Re- category: Select: a category (for example, res-
store last tour. Route guidance will start taurants) > a point of interest.
immediately. > Changing the search area: Requirement: route
guidance must be active. Press (4)/2:.9/B repeat-
Deleting previous destinations
edly until the desired search area > table on
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: page 188 is selected.
NAVIGATION > (88) > Last destinations > Z >
Sorting points of interest
select one or more entries or Select all > Delete
> (Done). Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 177, Audi connect. You must
@) Tips have a category selected.
> Press on the respective symbol for sorting until
The last route will be automatically deleted
the desired sorting order is selected.
from the list if you start a new route guidance
after canceling the route. Search areas in detail
Symbol Description
Setting a favorite as the destination
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system @ Search nearby
You can access frequent destinations in the fa- £9 Search along the route
vorites. You can quickly and easily start route a Search at destination/Search at
guidance using the home address or business ad- stopover
dress function.
Nearby: the points of interest will be listed start-
Requirement: a favorite must be stored ing from the immediate vicinity around the vehi-
=> page 194. cle position.
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Search along the route: points of interest along
NAVIGATION > (G8) > Favorites > select a de- the route can only be selected during active route
sired destination > Start. Or guidance. The points of interest are located di-
> Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select rectly along or in the immediate vicinity of the
in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab > calculated route. You can select points of interest
button > Favorites > desired destination. from various categories. For example, you can
search for a hotel or parking lot along route.
POIs (Online Points of Interest) Search at destination/Search at stopover: points

Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- of interest near a destination or a stopover can
nect Infotainment
only be selected during active route guidance.
Search for points of interest such as restaurants. You can select points of interest from various cat-
If the MMI is connected to the Internet, points of egories. For example, you can search for a hotel
interest will be automatically included in the or parking lot at the destination.
search.
() Note
NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Points of interest.
The system always searches in the search area =>@ in General information on page 177.
that is currently selected > table on page 188.
> Searching for points of interest: enter the @ Tips
name of a POI. Distances to points of interest are displayed
as a straight-line distance from your current >
188
Navigation
location. The actual distance from your cur- > Make sure you are logged into the vehicle and
rent location to the point of interest is updat- the myAudi app with the same myAudi account.
ed automatically. The list of points of interest The received destination and routes will be
that were found is not resorted when this loaded automatically.
happens. > Navigating to a destination: press on a desti-
nation.
Selecting contacts as destinations > Deleting destinations: select: Z > one or more
Applies to: vehicles with MMI and navigation system entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
You can navigate directly to contacts.

@) Note
Requirement: an address with navigation data or Read the information about Audi connect, and
a navigation destination must already be as- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
signed to a contact > page 194. =@ in General information on page 177.
NAVIGATION > (5) > Contacts > a contact.
(i) Tips
> Press on an address. To avoid having your enter your myAudi access
> Check the address and change it, if necessary. information in the vehicle again, you can use
Start navigation > page 187, Entering an ad- the automatic login > page 30.
dress.
pee chy
a
Additional functions for contacts in navigation
is
can be found under > page 194.
2.99 98
G@) Tips
— Addresses that have been imported from
your mobile device into the MMI can also be Details | Parking [| calt los rr
used as a destination. Fig. 137 Upper display: details
— If a contact is grayed out in the directory,
this contact has neither a destination nor an After you have selected a destination, the details
address assigned to it. will be displayed. Route guidance is will not be
active yet.
oleate Meee Ree a Me ee
The functions depend on the vehicle equipment
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
nect Infotainment and the selected destination.
@ Map preview: to zoom in on the map pre-
You can search for destinations or routes in the
view, press on the map.
myAudi app and send to the vehicle.
Route criteria: see > page 199.
®©®&
Requirement: the MMI and the mobile device More: see > page 198, Options.
must be connected to the Internet > page 177, Weather: Requirement: the MMI must be
Audi connect. You must have the myAudi app in- connected to the Internet > page 177, Audi
stalled on your mobile device. connect. Also see > page 179.
> Send a destination or route in the myAudi app Applies to: MMI and telephone
©
to the vehicle.
4K0012721BD
Call: Requirement: a mobile device must be

> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: connected to the MMI > page 164. You will >
NAVIGATION > (&5) > Receiv. destns. & routes.
189
Navigation
make a direct call to the phone number that Selecting the destination
is stored for the destination. > Select: @ > page 191, fig. 139. Or:
© Start: starts navigation to the displayed des- > To display destination details, press on @)
tination directly. The map will be displayed => page 191, fig. 139 > Start.
= page 192, Map operation.
@) Parking: press Parking to search for a park-
ing space at the destination. You can use the
parking space as the destination or stopover.
Stopovers and route plan
Details: Requirement: the MMI must be con-
nected to the Internet > page 177, Audi con-
nect. You can enter additional destinations during ac-
@) Weather at the destination: Requirement: tive route guidance.
the MMI must be connected to the Internet
Entering a stopover
=> page 177, Audi connect.
@® Display of distance/driving time to the des- Requirement: route guidance must be active.
tination > Enter a destination > page 186.
@) Note Displaying stopovers or the route plan

Read the information about Audi connect, and All destinations are listed in the route plan.
> Press on (7) > page 191, fig. 138 on the map.
=@ in General information on page 177.
Editing stopovers
Selecting a destination from the map > Press on) > page 191, fig. 138 on the map.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system > Adding a stopover: Select: Add destination >
A point on the map can be used as the destina- select a destination > Add.
tion. > Moving a stopover: press Z. Touch the $ sym-
bol and move the entry to the desired position.
Opening the map Press Done.
Applies to: MMI
> Deleting a stopover: Select: Z > one or more
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
> If necessary, press A to display the map.
Adjusting the scale

Stopping route guidance
> Select: / > selecta scale.
Requirement: route guidance must be active and
Marking the destination the map must be displayed.
> Press and hold a point on the map until a mark- > Applies to: MMI: Press ® @) > page 191,
ing appears @2) > page 191, fig. 139. Or: the fig. 138. Or:
address of the selected destination is displayed > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
@ > page 191, fig. 139. in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
button > Cancel route guidance.
Selecting map content (such as POIs) as the
destination
Requirement: map content must be displayed
=> page 198.
> Press on map content on the map (for example,

@) > page 191, fig. 139).
190
Navigation
Map Altitude
@) Displays the maximum permitted speed):
Map functions within city limits, on expressways, and on
highways.
Current vehicle position
®O®8
Route information > page 199
Name of the street on which you are current-
ly driving
Start route guidance for the marked destina-
®
tion @2) > page 190, Selecting a destination
from the map
Display details for the destination
©
=> page 189
POI search within the vicinity of a marking
O8©
Adjust the map orientation. Also see
=> page 198
©®® Navigation settings > page 198
Adjust the scale. Set scale. Or: Press the
Fig. 139 Upper display: marked map item magnifying glass to switch automatic zoom
=> page 198 on or off directly on the map. The
Opening the map ® symbol appears when this function is
Applies to: MMI switched on.
> Press NAVIGATION on the home screen. Marked destination. See > page 190, Select-
©
> If necessary, press A to display the map. ing a destination from the map
Map contents (points of interest, favorites).
®
The following list gives an overview of the infor-

When there are multiple map contents in the
mation displayed on the map. Press on any func-
immediate vicinity, the symbols are shown
tion (for example, alternative routes) to show ad-
stacked on the map. To display a list of indi-
ditional options.
vidual symbols, press @@ © fig. 139. Press on
Destination input > page 186 a POL in the list.
QOOSOOLOHO
Intelligent search > page 186 @3) Center the map to the current vehicle posi-
Cancel route guidance > page 190 tion
Current route Additional possible symbols on the map

Request spoken prompt
Alternative routes > page 193 on
Display active destinations, stopovers, or @ Home address > page 194, Favor-
ites
route plan. The distance to the destination
including the calculated arrival time is dis- Business address > page 194, Fa-
played > page 190. vorites
For vehicles with trailer mode, the symbol in- * Presets > page 194
©
dicates that the function is switched on. fa Previous destinations display

=>page 199
© Traffic information > page 197
4K0012721BD
D_ Only applies to vehicles without camera-based speed limit

display.
191
Navigation
Traffic information display on the map or Rotating the map

map preview
> Rotate the map using two fingers.
Color-coded markings along the route indicate
the traffic flow: Tilting the map
Green: traffic is flowing freely. > Drag upward or downward with two fingers.
Orange: stop-and-go traffic Gi) Tips

Red: traffic jam or traffic obstructions. Certain gestures may not be available on all
touch displays or in every menu.
Shaded markings indicate the length of the area
with congestion.
e guidance
Traffic information
— Colored warning symbols: traffic incidents Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and Audi virtual
ahead that are on your route. cockpit
— Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incidents

that are not on your route.
— All traffic incidents will display in color when
route guidance is inactive.
— Warning symbols with arrow: traffic incident
that you have been routed around, for example
@.
You can adjust the display of colored markings
for traffic information on the maps > page 198.
Fig. 140 Instrument cluster: default view: turning maneu-
ver when route guidance has started
Map operation
Requirement: route guidance must be on
You can operate the map > page 191, fig. 138 => page 186.
with the movements described in the following The following information will be displayed in the
information. driver information system, if available:
Moving the map @ Current vehicle position

> Drag your finger across the map in the desired @A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
direction. ing turn. The fewer the bars that are shown, the
shorter the distance is until the turn. If there is
Moving the map quickly
no upcoming turn immediately ahead, the dis-
> Swipe your finger across the map in the desired tance to the destination or stopover, the calculat-
direction and lift your finger off the map. ed arrival time, and a direction arrow for the up-
coming maneuver will be displayed in the right
Zooming in on the map
speedometer. If there is no upcoming maneuver,
> Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin- the distance to the next maneuver will be dis-
gers apart. Or: double tap on the map with one played.
finger.
@® Lane recommendation
Zooming out on the map
>» Place two fingers on the map and pull your fin-
gers together. Or: double tap on the map with
two fingers.
192
Navigation
Personal route Alternative routes

assistance Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and personal

route assistance
Your MMI can learn the routes that you drive fre-
quently (such as your daily commute to work and
back) and suggest route guidance based on the
ya
current vehicle position.
When the function is switched on, the MMI re-

Fig. 141 Upper display: display of alternative routes in the
cords the routes driven regardless of whether or
overview map
not you are using navigation.
Without starting route guidance, your MMI can Opening alternative routes
check the traffic conditions and shows possible Requirement: route guidance must be started
traffic incidents for the possible routes to be driv- = page 186 and the map must be displayed
en. => page 192.
Opening personal routes > Press ©) > page 191, fig. 138.
Requirement: personal route assistance must be @ Move route
switched on > page 199. Route guidance must
You can move the route up to the next destina-
not be active. A notification is displayed.
tion or stopover.
> The MMI displays up to three suggestions.
> Press “. The “} symbol will be displayed on the
Press on a suggestion. Route guidance will
map.
start.
> Press and hold <j, and use your finger to pull
Better routes the route to the desired position. Repeat this
step until the desired route appears.
If there are major traffic incidents, the MMI will
> Press V.
display a notification regardless of the selected
> To cancel, press on the current route (3). Or:
menu. If the MMI has calculated a better route,
press ~J.
you can select it as the route.
> Press on the notification. @ Block route

You can block the current route for a certain dis-
As soon as you switch off personal route assis-
tance, your personal routes will no longer be re- tance starting from the vehicle position, for ex-
ample to drive around upcoming streets or tun-
corded. Routes that were already stored remain
stored. nel closures. The navigation system automatical-
ly calculates an alternative route and the length
Deleting personal routes of the blocked route. The route to be avoided that
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: you have entered applies only to the current
NAVIGATION > <2} > Personal route assistance route and must be set again, if needed. The areas
> Delete recordings from the last 24 hours or you have selected to avoid will appear with red
Delete all personal routes and destinations.
and white shading on the map.
> Block route: press 2) > fig. 141.

@® Tips > Cancel route block: press Q.
If personal route assistance is switched off
4K0012721BD
and you press F%, the personal route assis-

tance settings will be displayed > page 199.
193
Navigation
@ Current route > Press Home address or Business address until

The distance to the destination and the calculat- the Options menu is displayed.
ed arrival time will be displayed for the current > Select: Change address > enter a destination >
route.
(Set as destination) or (Add to address) > OK.
@ Alternative route Editing a favorite
As long as traffic information is available, the

Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
congestion along the route including the time de- played. At least one favorite must be stored.
lay will be displayed. The distance to the destina- >» Setting a favorite as a destination: press ona
tion and the calculated arrival time will be dis- favorite.
played for the alternative route. > Rename favorite: press ona favorite until the
Options menu is displayed. Select: Change
Select route
name > select ad name > OK.
> Press on the information window for the appli- > Deleting a favorite: press W in the Details
cable alternative route (for example @) menu > page 1839, fig. 137. Or: select: 2 > one
> fig. 141). or more entries or Select all > Delete > (Done).
> Moving a favorite: press Z. Touch the $ sym-
Additional functions bol and move the entry to the desired position.
Press Done.
Neola asy
Gi) Tips
You can access frequent destinations in the fa-
— After deleting the home address or business
vorites. You can quickly and easily start route
address, only the address is deleted and the
guidance using the home address or business ad-
entry will still be displayed in the favorites.
dress function.
— Please note when moving favorites that
Accessing favorites items 1 and 2 are reserved for the home ad-
dress and business address.
NAVIGATION > (8) > Favorites.
(eye Meer lat me(idl ately
If you use myAudi navigation, your favorites will Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
be synchronized with your myAudi account
Two addresses (private/business) can be added
=> page 185.
as destinations for each contact. Addresses for
Storing favorites contacts on your mobile device are displayed as a
mailing address.
> Press yy in the Details menu > page 189,
fig. 137. Or: press Store as favorite in the op- Accessing contacts
tions > page 198.
Storing a home address or business address NAVIGATION > (Ga) > Contacts.
> Press Home address or Business address. Adding a destination to a contact
When accessed for the first time, you will be
prompted to set the address.
to the MMI > page 164. Or: you must have im-
> Select: Create now > enter a destination > OK.
ported contacts > page 175, Importing and ex-
Editing a home address or business address porting contacts. The Hide grayed-out contacts
option must be switched off > page 195. There
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
must be no business address or private address
played. Your home address or business address
stored for the desired contact.
must be stored.
194
Navigation
> Select: a contact >|---| > Add destination. Color Description

> Follow the system instructions. Green | High probability
Settings Orange |Medium probability
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: Red Low probability
NAVIGATION > (88) > Contacts > ©.
@) Note
Hide grayed-out contacts
When the function is switched on, contacts that be sure to note the connectivity costs section
have no address or navigation destination stored =@ in General information on page 177.
will be hidden in navigation. You can find infor-
mation for additional settings under > page 175, Satellite map
Directory settings. Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and satellite map
You can display the navigation map with satel-

G) Tips
lite images.
If you add a navigation destination to a con-
tact, the destination will only be stored in the Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
MMI. The MMI does not change any contacts Internet > page 177, Audi connect.
on your phone. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > <} > Map settings > Satellite
oy eric] eile) map).
Applies to: navigation system and on-street parking
The map view is based on data packets received
In supported areas, you can display parking from the Internet in the form of satellite images,
along the route.
which are then combined with the roadways from
Requirement: the Parking notification must be the > page 191, fig. 138 standard map view.
switched on > page 22, Notification center. The
® Note
MMI must be connected to the Internet
=> page 177, Audi connect. Route guidance must Read the information about Audi connect, and
be active, you must be close to your destination, be sure to note the connectivity costs section
and a notification must be displayed. Or: a point =@ in General information on page 177.
is marked on the map.
@) Tips
> Press on the notification. Or: press on 6] on the
map. —The satellite map) is updated regularly
whenever the function is opened. The proc-
> To navigate to a parking: space, press on a col-
ored marking on the map. ess may take several seconds.
> Select: F# > Start. — When the satellite map display is switched
on ) with the 3D position map type, the dis-
Depending on availability, colored markings on play automatically switches to the 2D map
the map indicate the probability of open parking type when driving through tunnels.
spaces. — Depending on the Internet connection, the
standard map may also be displayed when
the satellite map is switched on )).
4K0012721BD
) Audi provides access to services from third party provid-

ers. Permanent availability cannot be guaranteed, because
that depends on the third party provider.
195
Navigation
Map update When the update has ended, a notification will

be displayed.
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system () Note

You can update the map data in the MMI with a Read the information about Audi connect, and
map update. The functions depend on the coun- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
try and vehicle equipment: =@ in General information on page 177.
— Map updates through online map update @ Tips

=> page 196.
Because of the high volume of data, Audi rec-
— Import map updates from the SD card or USB
ommends performing the map update using
connection to your MMI & page 196.
the USB connection = page 196.
— Map update at an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility. This can result in
additional costs. Map update using an SD card or USB
(oad (od)
Applies to: vehicles with MMI, navigation system, and Audi
Online map update connect Infotainment
Applies to: vehicles with MMI, navigation system, and Audi
connect Infotainment With the map update, you can update the map
material in your navigation system.
Using map update online, you can update the
map material in your navigation system directly Requirement: you must have created a myAudi
from your vehicle. account at my.audi.com. Your vehicle must be
registered in your myAudi account.
Using your vehicle position, the MMI identifies
regions which you are frequently in. Based on Prepare map update
this, update data for these regions are available
> Download the map update at my.audi.com and
for your MMI.
store it on an SD card or on a USB flash drive.
Start map update For additional information, visit my.audi.com.
Applies to: MMI
Start map update
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
> Insert the SD card in your vehicle's SD card
reader > page 209. Or: connect the USB flash
> A notification for a map update will appear in drive to the Audi music interface > page 212.A
the upper display. notification for a map update will appear in the
> If the option Automatic online map update upper display.
=> page 197 is switched on, the MMI will start > Press on the notification. Or: access the notifi-
the map update. Or: cation in the notification center on > page 22
> Press on the notification. Or: access the notifi- and press on the notification. The update pack-
cation in the notification center on > page 22 age is shown.
and press on the notification. > Press Next. The installation status is shown in
> If the Automatic online map update option the upper display.
=> page 197 is switched off, press on Allow >» When the update has ended, a notification will
once or Always allow. be displayed.
The MMI will start the map update. The progress

of the download and installation will be shown in
the upper display.
196
Navigation
Map updates settings @® The traffic messages are only shown when
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con- route guidance is active. Press on a line to
nect Infotainment display details about it.
@) Note
SETTINGS > System maintenance.
Automatic online map update: when the func- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
tion is switched on, map updates will be auto- = in General information on page 177.
matically downloaded and installed.
G) Tips
@) Note — Particularly critical traffic information, such
Read the information about Audi connect, and as warnings about wrong-way drivers, is au-
be sure to note the connectivity costs section tomatically displayed as a notification.
=@ in General information on page 177. — Traffic information is not available in some
countries.
Traffic information
Introduction Better route
By receiving traffic, your MMI calculates a better

a mal route if available and the possible time saved
a Delay along the route: 30 Min compared to the current route. You can decide
i eet aca
which route you would like to use.
A notification will appear for several seconds if

your MMI calculates a better route for the cur-
rent route guidance.
Fig. 142 Upper display: traffic information overview
A message will also appear in the traffic informa-
Open traffic information tion overview @) > page 197, fig. 142.
Requirement: the map must be displayed Accept better route
=> page 192.
Requirement: a notification about a better route
> Press Q) > page 191, fig. 138. must be displayed.
Display traffic report details > Press F&. The better route is used for route
guidance and the route is recalculated. Or:
> Press on the traffic report @) > fig. 142.
press the notification in the central area. The
> To display the previous or next traffic report,
better route with the calculated arrival time is
press < or.
displayed > page 193, Alternative routes. Press
The following information can be displayed on a better route (for example @) > page 193,
> fig. 142: fig. 141).
@ Amessage will appear if the MMI calculates a

better route for the current route guidance.
More information can be found under
=> page 197.
@ Atraffic message is displayed. The distance
4K0012721BD
to the hazardous area is calculated from the

current vehicle position.
197
Navigation
Online traffic information Storing a favorite

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and online traffic See > page 194.
information
The MMI can receive real-time online traffic in- Edit address
formation about congestion, accidents, road You can edit an address for the next destination
construction, and other incidents. entry and navigate to the destination. Select: Ed-
it address > enter a street > Use address > Start.
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
If the address is permanently stored (for exam-
Internet > page 177, Audi connect. Traffic infor-
ple, in the favorites), the stored entry will not be
mation must be switched on in the MMI
changed.
=> page 198.
Change address
Traffic information will be displayed on the
standard map > page 191, fig. 138. See > page 194, Favorites.
Online traffic information is also displayed on the Entering an address

standard map > page 195. See > page 194, Contacts as navigation destina-
tions.
() Note
Read the information about Audi connect, and Change name
be sure to note the connectivity costs section See > page 194, Favorites.
=@ in General information on page 177.
Weather
@) Tips See > page 179, Services.
— Having the online traffic information func-
Save as a shortcut
tion switched on provides the most accurate
reports of traffic situations and traffic fore- See > page 23, Shortcuts.
casting. Your vehicle transmits and process-
es its anonymous, encrypted position infor-
mation at regular intervals to the traffic da- Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
ta provider. You can switch off data transfer
You can adjust the navigation system settings in
at any time > page 290.
the instrument cluster and in the MMI display
— The online traffic information network is
separately. The settings depend on the country
not available in all countries, and the cover-
and vehicle equipment.
age is not nationwide.
Accessing settings
Options and settings > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
NAVIGATION > ©}.
Accessing settings using the multifunction
Context-specific functions and settings may be steering wheel
available depending on the vehicle equipment. > Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: Select
> Press More, or in the instrument cluster: Navigation tab >
> Open a list with navigation destinations (such button.
as recent destinations) and press and hold an Please note that a setting applied to the multi-
item until the Options menu is displayed. function steering wheel is only valid for the in-
strument cluster map.
198
Navigation
Map settings only give prompts if there are traffic incidents on

your route.
Satellite map: see > page 195.
Traffic: you can display current traffic informa- Voice guidance during phone call
tion on the map. See > page 192, Traffic infor- Entertainment fader during navigation: the au-
mation display on the map or map preview dio playback volume is temporarily lowered when
— Free flow of traffic navigation prompts are active.
— Traffic obstructions
Route criteria
— Traffic information
You can adjust which route criteria should be al-
Map colors
lowed or avoided for the route calculation.
— Automatic: the map display adapts to the light-
ing conditions (for example, by changing from HOV/carpool lanes
day to night when driving through a tunnel). Highways
— Day or Night
Toll roads
Map orientation
Ferries
— 2D map or 2D north: the current vehicle posi-
tion is displayed. The map is oriented in the di- Route information
rection of travel or to the north.
When this function is switched on and route
— 3D map: the current vehicle position is shown
guidance is active, route information ®
on a three-dimensional map and is oriented in
=> page 191, fig. 138 is displayed. The next ma-
the direction of travel.
neuver will be displayed at the bottom. POIs and
— Overview: the entire route from the vehicle po-
traffic information will also be displayed. Press
sition to the destination or the next stopover is
route information to display a preview of the next
displayed on the map. The map is oriented to maneuver on the map. You can switch the follow-
the north. ing information on or off in route information.
Automatic zoom — POIs along the route
— On: the map scale is adapted automatically de- — Traffic information
pending on the type of road being traveled (ex-
Personal route assistance
pressway, highway, other roads) so that you al-
ways have an optimal overview of the road Personal route assistance is switched off at the
ahead. When route guidance is active, the scale factory.
is adjusted automatically for a better detailed
Your trips are recorded and destinations are sug-
view when there are upcoming maneuvers.
gested by the MMI when this function is switched
— Intersection: when route guidance is active, the
on > page 193.
scale is adjusted automatically for a better de-
tailed view when there are upcoming maneu- Trailer mode
vers.
Trailer mode is switched off at the factory.
— Off
When the function is switched on, the maximum
MMI map contents/Map content: you can switch permitted speed for vehicles with trailers is in-
the display of additional information (such as cluded during route guidance and the calculated
POIs) on the map in the upper display on or off. arrival time is adjusted accordingly. When the
Note the following for the 3D city model > ©. function is switched on, the symbol @)
Voice guidance => page 191, fig. 138 is displayed on the map. >
4K0012721BD
Voice guidance: you can adjust the navigation

prompts. With the Traffic setting, the MMI will
199
Navigation
Presentation mode
In presentation mode, the system simulates driv-
ing along the planned route without the vehicle
actually moving. You can use Specify starting
point when you would like to calculate a route
starting from a location other than the current
vehicle position, for example. Simulating route
guidance: start route guidance and press Presen-
tation mode.

=>@ in General information on page 177.
You can adjust the volume of navigation

prompts during voice guidance using the
On/Off knob > page 20. Also see > page 223.
200
Radio
Radio the additional stations will be muted since

they can no longer be received.
Opening the radio © Radio ID
Your radio ID and contact data for your satel-
Cec’ Sita lite radio provider are displayed.
SPP HD1
© Channel number
ACPA
een)
:) HD2 @ Smart Favorite
a ae DE) See > page 204.
Sean
Adjusting the radio using the MMI
> Applies to: MMI: To set a frequency band, select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source a fre-
RAZ-0324
Ce Cie
quency band.
0}
(olelo um 7-\)(o)10)
(ole) Me ac aT]
> Applies to: MMI: To set a station, select on the
home screen: RADIO > Source > select a sta-
eV
The Rock Band - Numero uno tion list > select a station.
(ole It > To select a frequency, follow the instructions
Set
CORT y under > page 203, Free text search.
Fig. 144 Upper display: SiriusXM channel list
Adjusting the radio using the multifunction
steering wheel
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the radio
may support the FM, AM, and SiriusXM (satellite Requirement: radio mode must be on.
radio) frequency bands. Using the HD Radio re-
» Select the Radio/Media tab using the multi-
ceiver also allows you to receive radio stations on
function steering wheel.
the FM and AM bands in digital format.
> To switch between radio and media, select the
Depending on the station list, the following in- button > Switch to radio/Switch to media.
formation may be displayed: > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the station
@ Station list list.
> To switch to a different source, press the
Shows the station that is currently playing.
The station list updates automatically. button.
> To select a station or a source, turn and press
@ Stations
the left thumbwheel.
Depending on availability, the station name
as well as program information, for example,
may be displayed.
G) Tips
— Contact the SiriusXM* provider if you would
@ HD Radio technology
like to receive satellite programming.
FM/AM stations that can be received by digi-
— Buildings, tunnels, bridges, open areas, oth-
tal radio are marked with the HD Radio tech-
er vehicles or objects on the vehicle roof can
nology symbol H).
affect reception.
If reception quality declines, the radio auto-
— Satellite radio is not available in Alaska and
matically switches to the analog FM/AM sta-
Hawaii.
tion depending on availability.
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel:
@® Additional stations Depending on the selected function, opera-
Digital HD Radio stations may contain multi- tion through the MMI may be required.
ple additional stations. If you lose reception,
4K0012721BD
201
Radio
Radio functions
RAX-0097
soy oO
Cary
ett tn) Last stations fee
4 las
i SiriusxM alerts
firs red
| 20 | |
®
Fig. 145 Upper display: left side: playback view of radio functions, right side: sources
Operating The following functions may be available depend-

> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @, ing on the selected radio station and the vehicle
select on the home screen: RADIO > select a ra- equipment:
dio station.
> Applies to: MMI: To open the sources (2), select
on the home screen: RADIO > Source.
Symbol/Description Description
Source button Displays sources in the Radio menu.
© ©
e/e;,
Shows the current station frequency band. If a symbol with the

Frequency band WEB label is displayed, then the station is being streamed from
online. Always follow the information found in >@.
w/e See 9 page 203.
& Settings > page 207.
Switching between picture views: press the station logo. Use
one finger to swipe to the right or left to switch between the
Station logo and Cover art.
Station logo Station logo: the station logo is displayed, depending on availa-
9
bility.
Cover art: the album cover is displayed if available. Always fol-
low the information found in > ©.
a Go back one level.
© Search See © page 203.
Last stations Displays the last played stations > page 203.
@ Presets See 9 page 203.
® SiriusXM station list | Displays stations from the SiriusXM frequency band.
® Online See > page 205.
@ AM Displays stations from the AM frequency band.
202
Radio
© |®
|@O|@O|@|\©) FM Displays stations from the FM frequency band.
Overview of songs, artists, or teams from the stored SiriusXM
SiriusXM alerts
alerts being currently received > page 204.
More Access options for the current station > page 206.
KY/PI Select the previous/next station.
WK Unmutes or mutes playback.
List The station list is displayed > page 201.
Depending on availability, the station name as well as program
Info section information, for example, may be displayed. Also see
®
= page 207, Online additional data.
@) Note Last stations

Applies to: vehicles with last stations
be sure to note the connectivity costs section You can listen to the last stations that were
=@ in General information on page 177. played in all frequency bands.
Accessing last stations

@) Tips
Not all functions are available in every source > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > Source > Last stations.
and on every touch display.
Listening to last stations
etme data]
» Press on a station.
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
Deleting last stations

Using the free text search, you can select the or-
der that the search terms are entered in the input > Select: Z > select one or more stations or Se-
field. Search in all frequency bands for a station lect all > Delete > (Done).
name, channel number, or program type, such as
News. You can also select the frequency. Wel
gh at)
Applies to: vehicles with favorites
Opening free text search
You can store your favorite stations from every
frequency band in the presets list.
RADIO > Source > Search.
Selecting presets using the MMI
Setting the frequency
> Enter a frequency.
RADIO > Source > Presets > a preset.
> Press on a frequency in the results list.
Storing presets
The following information may be available:
> Press on Y¥ G) in the playback view > page 202,
Symbol | Description fig. 145.
Od Results from the list: Last stations
Requirement: a list with radio stations must be
wy Results from the list: Presets
displayed > page 201, fig. 143.
“| Results from a Station list > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
4K0012721BD
For ex- | Station frequency band tions menu appears.

ample, > Press Store as favorite.
(em)
203
Radio
Editing a preset If a radio text entry is displayed with a color, a

> Deleting presets: Press on We in the playback phone number or a navigation destination for the
view, or
station is available as radio text plus information.
> In the presets list, select: Z > one or more sta-
G) Tips
tions or Select all > Delete > (Done).
The availability of radio text and RadioText
Requirement: the presets list must be displayed.
Plus depends on the radio station.
> Moving a preset: press A.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
desired position.
Sie (a ey
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
> Press Done.
You can see an overview of your favorite artists,
Smart favorites
favorite songs, or teams that are currently being
Applies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
broadcast on a SiriusXM channel.
SiriusXM channels are stored in the presets as
smart favorites with the s% symbol. After switch- Accessing SiriusXM alerts
ing the ignition and the MMI on, the smart favor- > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
ites store radio programs at a specific time. RADIO > Source > SiriusXM alerts.
> Press on a smart favorite. You have the follow- After you have saved a SiriusXM alert, you can see
ing options: an overview in the SiriusXM alerts menu of the
> Pause/Start: press I/D. songs, artists, or teams being currently received
> Selecting the previous or next track: press I< and can play them directly from there.
or >i.
> Going to the beginning of a recording or live Storing a SiriusXM music alert
program: press and hold !I< or >i. Requirement: an artist or song must be playing
> Setting the playback point: you can adjust the ona SiriusXM channel.
playback position using the knob.
> Going to a live program: press Lv. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > Source > SiriusXM > select a channel
> More > Artist as SXM alert/Title as SXM
Radio text
alert.
Program information (for example, general text
Storing a SiriusXM game alert
messages, artist, composer, song) is displayed in
the radio text. > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
RADIO > ©} > Manage SiriusXM alerts > Store
Requirement: the selected radio station must
SiriusXM game alerts > select an entry from
support the radio text function.
the list.
Opening radio text Playing a song/artist/team from a SiriusXM
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: alert (option 1)
RADIO > select a frequency band (such as FM) Requirement: a SiriusXM music/game alert must
> select a station > More > Radio text. be stored and must be currently broadcast ona
SiriusXM channel.
Displaying previous radio text entries: drag your
finger downward. The last radio text entries are > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
displayed if they are available. RADIO > Source > SiriusXM alerts > select an
entry from the list.
Browsing through radio text entries: drag your
finger upward or downward on the screen.
204
Radio
Playing a song/artist/team from a SiriusXM Top stations

alert (option 2)
Select a station from the list of popular online ra-
Requirement: a SiriusXM music/game alert must dio stations.
have been received.
Filter list
> Press on the notification, or
> Select: © > (a category) > a station name.
> Open the notification in the notification center
on > page 22 and press on the notification. The following categories are available:
Managing SiriusXM alerts — Countries
Requirement: a SiriusXM alert must be stored. — Genres
— Languages
RADIO > <3 > Manage SiriusXM alerts > Select-
CG) Note
ed SiriusXM music alerts/Selected SiriusKM
game alerts. Read the information about Audi connect, and
When the function is switched on M, a SiriusXM =@ in General information on page 177.
alert will be received.
Deleting SiriusXM alerts @ Tips

— Depending on the Internet connection and
> Select: Selected SiriusXM music alerts/Select-
network traffic, the connection may be lost
ed SiriusXM game alerts > > select one or
when online radio is playing.
more alerts or Select all > Delete > (Done).
— Online radio reception may not be possible
if Internet service is throttled.
Online radio
— The use of online radio depends on the serv-
General information ice availability of the third party provider.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on- — The range and screen display of online me-
line radio dia services from third party providers in the
You can listen to various radio stations or pod-

vehicle can vary.
casts on the Internet using online radio. — AUDI AG only provides access to online radio
and does not assume any responsibility for
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the the content of these services.
Opening online radio using the MMI

Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: line radio
RADIO > Source > Online.
Opening podcasts using the MMI
The following functions are available:
Search RADIO > Source > Online > Podcasts.
You only can search for online radio stations in The following functions are available:
this search. You can search for station names and
categories.
Listening to a podcast
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
Last stations
Search
The station that was played last will start play-
4K0012721BD
ing. > Press 2.
205
Radio
The following functions are available in the pod- Displaying all podcast favorites
cast playback view: Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
Displaying podcast episodes displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored.
> Press List.
> Press All.
Starting/stopping podcast playback
Editing podcast favorites
> PressP/II.
> Deleting podcast favorites: press W in the
Previous/next podcast playback view, or
> Press / DI. > In the podcast favorites list, select: AU > Z >
one or more podcasts, or Select All > Delete >
Changing the playback position (Done).
> You can adjust the playback position using the Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be
knob. displayed.
Displaying the online radio menu > Moving a podcast favorite: Select: All > Z.
> Touch the $ symbol and move the entry to the
> Press oa. desired position.
Switching to radio > Press Done.
> Press Source. The sources in the Radio menu

are displayed.
Options and settings
Podcast favorites
You can store podcasts in the Podcast favorites. Requirement: the playback view @) > page 202,
fig. 145 must be displayed.
Requirement: the playback view for a podcast
must be displayed. > Press More, or
> Press ¥¥ © © page 202, fig. 145. Requirement: a list with radio stations or pod-
casts* must be displayed > page 201, fig. 143.
Requirement: a list with podcasts must be dis- > Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
played. tions menu appears.
> Press and hold an entry in the list until the Op-
tions menu appears. Depending on the selected source, the following
> Press Save podcast. functions may be available.
Listening to a podcast favorite Storing a favorite
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be See > page 203.
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
Radio text
stored.
See > page 204.
> Press on the desired podcast.
Scan
Scrolling through podcast favorites
All channels in the current channel list will be
Requirement: the podcast favorites list must be played for several seconds each.
displayed. At least one podcast favorite must be
stored. Scan smart favorites
> Swipe to the left or right with your finger. All smart favorites will be played for several sec-
onds. The stored song on the smart favorite >
206
Radio
channel will be played from the beginning — Channel name: the channels are listed in alpha-
= page 204. To switch to the previous or next betical order.
smart favorite, press the On/Off knob briefly to — First category, then channel number: the chan-
the left or right. nels are sorted by their category and then by
their channel number.
Artist as SXM alert
— First category, then channel name: the chan-
The artist being currently played will be stored as nels are sorted by their category and then by
a SiriusXM alert > page 204. their channel names.
Title as SXM alert SiriusXM category filter

The title being currently played will be stored as The stations shown in the station list can be fil-
a SiriusXM alert > page 204. tered by your personal preferences and by pro-
gram type. The program categories that you can
Team 1 as game alert/Team 2 as game alert
select depend on what is offered by your provid-
The teams currently playing will be stored as a er. When the Unsubscribed channels function is
game alert > page 204. switched off, unsubscribed channels will be hid-
den.
Save podcast
See > page 206, Podcast favorites. SiriusXM subscription status
This option is available when your subscription is
Save as a shortcut
about to expire or has already expired. The expi-
See > page 23, Shortcuts. ration date for your license is displayed.
Call SiriusXM: the telephone number and radio

ID of your satellite radio provider are displayed.
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: To call your satellite radio provider using the
RADIO > ©. MMI, press Call SiriusXM.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the follow- Online additional data

ing settings may be available: Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 177.
HD Radio FM/HD Radio AM
When the function is switched on, additional in-
You can switch HD Radio reception on or off.
formation (such as station logos, cover, artist,
SiriusXM Tune Start track) will be loaded depending on the availabili-
ty from the different providers.
If you play a smart favorite when this function is
switched on, the song currently playing on the Preferred online radio data rate
channel will play from the beginning.
You can set the data rate for online radio
Managing SiriusXM alerts => page 205.
See > page 205. For optimal sound playback, press High. To re-
duce data usage, press Low.
SiriusXM channel sorting
You can set how the channels are sorted in the ©) Note
SiriusXM channel list: Read the information about Audi connect, and
— Channel number: the channels are sorted in as- be sure to note the connectivity costs section
4K0012721BD
cending order according to their channel num- => © in General information on page 177. >
ber.
207
Radio
Delays may occur when switching automati-

cally between normal frequency bands and
online radio.
Troubleshooting
ment.
A station is no longer displayed in the sta- | Store the station as a preset in advance. Access the pre-
tion list. sets using the presets list > page 203.
Online radio: no playback from online ra-_ | Check if a suitable data plan was purchased > page 182.
dio.
208
Media
Media CG) Note

General information Read the information about Audi connect, and
There may be different media sources and con- =@ in General information on page 177.
nections available depending on the vehicle
equipment. For example, you can play media files
SD card reader
using the SD card reader or connect your mobile
devices to the Audi music interface and operate The SD card reader is in the storage compartment
them through the MMI. under the front center armrest.
Media and format restrictions: the MMI (includ- Inserting the SD card
ing the SD card reader and the USB storage de-
> The angled corner of the SD card must face to-
vice connection) was tested with a variety of
ward the right front side when being inserted.
products and media on the market. However,
>» Slide the SD card into the card reader slot until
there may be cases where individual devices or
the SD card clicks into place.
media and audio/video files may not be recog-
nized, may play only with restrictions, or may not The SD card reader is accessed and operated
play at all. through the MMI = page 213.
Restricted functionality: reset the Media to the
factory default settings if functionality is restrict- @) Note
ed. — Only use one-piece SD cards. If adapter
cards (SD cards with more than one piece)
Digital Rights Management: please note that
are used, the card could fall out of the
the audio/video files are subject to copyright pro-
adapter when driving because of vibrations.
tection.
Individual pieces could then become stuck
Files that are protected by DRM and are identi- in the drive and impair the functionality.
fied with the symbol @ will not play. —To reduce the risk of damaging drives and
Data security: never store important data on SD data carriers, always keep data carriers ina
cards, CDs/DVDs, or mobile devices. Audi AG is sleeve and never expose them to direct sun-
not responsible for damaged or lost files and me- light.
dia.
DVD drive
Loading times: the more files/folders/playlists
there are on a storage medium, the longer it will General information
take to load. To reduce the amount of time it Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
takes the audio/video files to load, use a storage

The functionality of individual storage mediums
medium that only contains audio/video files, and
may be limited due to the variety of blank CDs/
create subfolders (for example, for each artist or
DVDs available and the various capacities. Audio
album).
CDs or video DVDs with copy protection, CDs/
Additional information: when playing, audio DVDs that do not conform to the standard, and
files are automatically displayed with any addi- multisession CDs may have limited playback or
tional information that is stored (such as the ar- may not play at all. AUDI AG recommends finaliz-
tist, track and album cover). If this information is ing the recording process when creating multi-
not available on the storage medium, the MMI session CDs. Multisession DVDs are not support-
will check the Gracenote metadata database. ed. >
4K0012721BD
However, in some cases, the additional informa-

tion may not be displayed.
209
G) Tips
To reduce the risk of damaging the drive and — Playback cannot be guaranteed with media
data carriers: files that have a high data rate.
— Always store data carriers in a protective — Always read the chapter > page 209, Gener-
sleeve and do not expose them to direct al information.
sunlight
— Do not use damaged, dirty, or laminated da- Bluetooth audio player
ta carriers Applies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player
— Do not use single CDs/DVDs with an 8 cm
With the Bluetooth audio player, you can play
diameter, non-circular CDs/DVDs (shaped
music wirelessly through the MMI from your
CDs), cleaning CDs, and protective rings
Bluetooth-capable mobile device (such as a cell
— Never force CDs/DVDs into the drive. Discs
phone).
are pulled in automatically.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
@ Tips the ignition must be switched on. The Bluetooth
The thermal protection switch stops playback settings will open on your mobile device during
temporarily when outside temperatures are the connection setup. The Bluetooth function and
too high. visibility of the MMI > page 224 and mobile de-
vice must be switched on.
peel) Connecting a mobile device
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
MEDIA > Source > Connect external device >
RAH-9153
New connection. The available Bluetooth devi-

ces will be displayed after several seconds.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of
displayed Bluetooth devices.
> To update the list, press OQ.
> A PIN for a secure Bluetooth connection will be
generated.
> Confirm the PIN on your mobile device, or:
Fig. 146 Glove compartment: DVD drive > Enter the PIN for the connection setup on your
mobile device. The time allowed for entering
Loading a CD/DVD the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds.
> Slide the CD/DVD straight into the DVD slot @ After connecting successfully, the mobile device
with the label facing up. The CD/DVD will be au- will be displayed in the Connected devices menu
tomatically pulled in. as a Bluetooth audio player.
Ejecting a CD/DVD Playing media > page 213.
> Press the button @).
(i) Tips
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automatically if it
— Check for any connection requests on your
is not removed from the DVD slot within approxi-
Bluetooth device.
mately ten seconds after ejecting it.
— Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
The DVD drive is accessed and operated through paired with the MMI, but only one at a time
the MMI > page 213. can be active as a Bluetooth audio player
=> page 224.
210
Media
— The supported media functions (such as

shuffle, list view, categories, search, op-
ZA WARNING
tions) depend on the Bluetooth device being —To reduce the risk of an accident, only use
used. Audi connect services and the Wi-Fi hotspot
— Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth only if the traffic situation permits it. Read
device. AUDI AG recommends setting your and follow the guidelines provided in
mobile device to the maximum volume => page 20, Traffic safety information.
when using it as a Bluetooth audio player. — It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mobile
—Aselection of supported Bluetooth devices devices and other similar devices when the
can be found in the database for tested mo- vehicle is stationary because, like all loose
bile devices at www.audi.com/bluetooth. objects, they could be thrown around the in-
side of the vehicle in a crash and cause seri-
ous injuries. Store these types of devices se-
Online media
curely while driving. Also read the warnings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment and on-
line media in the chapter > page 69.
You can play and operate various online media CG) Note
services, such as music streaming services, using
— Read the information about Audi connect,
the MMI.
and be sure to note the connectivity costs
Requirement: a supported online media service section >@ in General information on
must be available in the country where the vehi- page 177.
cle is being operated. — There generally are additional costs when
using an online media service account, espe-
Connect online media
cially when it is used internationally.
> Connect the MMI to the Internet > page 177.
> Switch on the Wi-Fi hotspot in the MMI (i) Tips
> page 181.
— Depending on the Internet connection and
>» Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
network traffic, the connection may discon-
MEDIA > Source > Connect online media.
nected when online media sources are play-
> Switch the Wi-Fi function on in your mobile de-
ing.
vice and connect it to the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot
— Online media usage depends on the service
=> page 178.
availability of the third party provider.
> Install and start the myAudi app on your mo-
— Audi AG simply makes the access to online
bile device.
media services possible through the MMI
> Log in to your myAudi account in the myAudi
and does not take any responsibility for the
app and select your vehicle.
contents of the online media services.
Your mobile device must be connected to the — Depending on the mobile device being used,
MMI and must be highlighted. When you press there may be interruptions during media
the highlighted device, it will be disconnected playback and when using the myAudi app.
from the MMI. To avoid interruptions, do not lock the
screen on your mobile device and keep the
Starting online media
myAudi app in the foreground.
MEDIA > Source. All online media services sup-
ported in your country will be displayed.
>» Press on the desired online media service and
4K0012721BD
follow the system instructions.
211
Media
Amazon Alexa C@) Note

Applies to: vehicles with Amazon Alexa Integration
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
You can play various types of content from Ama- low it to be pinched.
zon Alexa through the MMI. The voice recognition
system is used to operate it. G) Tips
Requirement: Amazon Alexa must be activated Mobile devices with an Apple Dock connector
=> page 28. can only be charged using a USB adapter de-
signed for devices with an Apple Dock connec-
> Start Amazon Alexa using the voice recognition tor. Data cannot be transmitted.
system.
Audi music interface
MEDIA > Source > Amazon Alexa.
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music in-
() Note terface in order to operate them through the
Read the information about Audi connect, and MMI and charge the batteries.
be sure to note the connectivity costs section The Audi music interface USB ports are located in
=> page 177. the storage compartment under the front and
rear* center armrest and are labeled with the «<>
Multimedia connections symbol. If multiple USB devices are connected to
the USB ports (for example, a smartphone anda
USB adapter cable
USB flash drive), all of these devices can be used
as the playback source.
[RAH-9202
Connecting or charging mobile devices using

a USB adapter
> Connect the matching USB adapter to the Audi
music interface USB port and connect it to the
mobile device, such as a smartphone.
The battery will charge automatically.
Mobile devices connected to the Audi music inter:

Fig. 147 Audi Genuine Accessories: USB adapter
face can be started and operated using the MMI
=> page 213.
You can connect your mobile devices through the
Audi music interface to the MMI using the USB Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
adapter and charge the battery at the same time. music interface
You can purchase the USB adapter cable from an > Remove the USB adapter cable from the Audi
authorized Audi dealer or at specialty stores: music interface.
@ USB adapter for devices with a mi-
cro USB connection Z\ WARNING
@ USB adapter for devices with an Ap- Driving requires your complete and undivided
ple Lightning connection attention. As the driver, you have complete re-
@ USB adapter for devices with USB sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
type C connection mobile devices while driving, because this in-
creases the risk of an accident. >
212
Media
— For more information about the Audi music

@) Note
interface and supported devices, check the
— Pull the cable out of the Audi music inter- Audi database for mobile devices at www.
face carefully so that the USB ports are not audi.com/mp3 or contact an authorized
damaged. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
— Use a USB extension cable to connect devi- cility.
ces that have an integrated USB connector
(such as a USB stick) to reduce the risk of
Playing media
damage to your USB device and the Audi
music interface.
— Extremely high or low temperatures that
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile The following sources can be selected depending
devices and/or impair their performance. on the vehicle equipment:
Never leave mobile devices in the vehicle in — Amazon Alexa > page 212.
extremely high or low temperatures. —SD card > page 209.
— USB © page 212.
@ Tips — DVD drive > page 210.
— Always follow the information found in — Connect external device: you can connect ex-
=> page 80. ternal devices via Bluetooth and use the Blue-
— When you switch the ignition off, the USB tooth audio player > page 210, or you can con-
ports are still supplied with power until the nect an external device directly to the Audi mu-
energy management intervenes. sic interface > page 212.
— Do not use an additional adapter cable or — Connect online media > page 211.
USB extension cable to connect mobile devi-
ces to the Audi music interface that already Accessing media
have a cable or that must be connected with
a USB adapter cable (> page 212, fig. 147). Playing media files using the MMI
Using an additional adapter or US extension > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
cable may impair functionality. MEDIA > Source > a source. Depending on the
— Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile connected device or online media service”, the
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0 symbol for a source may change. The device
specification. name may be displayed (for example: my-
— USB hubs are not supported. Phone).
— Video playback through the Audi music in- > Select a track from the categories in the media
terface is not supported on Apple and MTP center > page 214.
devices (such as smartphones).
Playing media files using the multifunction
— iPod or iPhone malfunctions also affect the
steering wheel
operation of the MMI. Reset your mobile de-
vice in these situations. Requirement: a media drive must contain media
— Audi recommends updating the iPod or files > page 213.
iPhone software to the latest version. Refer > Select the Radio/Media tab using the multi-
to your mobile device owner's manual for function steering wheel.
more information. > Turn the left thumbwheel to display the play-
— The USB adapter on the Audi music inter- list.
face will support iPod touch or iPhone devi- > To switch to a different source, press the [=|
ces from the 5th generation or newer with
4K0012721BD
button.
the lightning connector. > To select a media file or a source, turn and
press the left thumbwheel.
213
Media
> To switch between radio and media, select the @ Source device name
button > Switch to radio/Switch to media. The system will display the device name of the
source that is currently being searched.
@ Tips
@® Categories
— For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On- The media center will display categories depend-
ly the sound from the video plays while driving on the connected device, the selected source
ing. content, and the connection type. The search is
— Applies to: multifunction steering wheel: limited to the active source.
Depending on the selected function, opera-
Search
tion through the MMI may be required.
If a source supports the search, then the catego-
ry is displayed > page 217.
3g Last played track

5
IgBS The last played media file will be played.
Artists
All available artists are displayed.
>» Select: an artist > an album > a song.
Fig. 148 Upper display: media center view Playlists
Various categories are available in the media cen- All playlists and smart playlists in the source are
ter for selecting media files or browsing through displayed.
media sources. > Select: a playlist > a song.
You can browse through your music collection us- Smart playlists
ing the categories in the media center, such as al-
bums. You can browse through the active source Last played tracks: the tracks that were dis-
or any available source (for example, an SD card). played last are displayed.
While browsing through the media center, the Most played tracks: the tracks that are played
music from the active source will continue to most frequently are displayed.
play.
Directories
Opening the media center
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
> Applies to: MMI: Searching any source: select played.
on the home screen: MEDIA > Source > a
> Select: a folder > a song.
source > a category.
> Searching through the active source: select in Compilations
the playback view > page 215: 48 > a category.
You can control your playlists through the MMI.
@ Source symbol > Select: a playlist > a song.
The system will display the symbol for the source
Composers
that is currently being searched. Depending on
the connected device or online media service”, All available composers are displayed.
the symbol for a source may change. As an exam-
> Select: ad composer > an album > a song.
ple, > fig. 148 shows a USB stick connected to
the Audi music interface.
214
Media
Radio > Select: an album > a track.

> Press on a radio station.
@) Note
Audio books Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect Infotainment
You can control your audio books on the MMI. — Cloud services and category radio always re-
quire an Internet connection.
> Press on an audio book.
— Read the information about Audi connect,
Podcasts and be sure to note the connectivity costs
You can control your podcasts through the MMI.
section >@ in General information on
page 177.
> Select: a podcast > a podcast episode.
@) Tips
Genres
— Only the categories supported by the medi-
All available genres are displayed.
um are available.
» Select: a genre > an artist > an album > a song. —For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
Videos
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
All available video files are displayed. ing.
— When synchronizing a portable device with
>» Press on a video.
Cloud services, playlists may display incor-
Tracks rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
the device.
All available tracks are displayed.
— Applies to: iPod/iPhone: Note the informa-
> Press ona track. tion about the Audi music interface and the
supported devices > page 212.
Albums
All available albums are displayed.
ele mitra etela ry
RAX-0098
Moos ai)
Hymn
as aC)
at)
Reiter
Pd
era)
rs
@
Fig. 149 Upper display: left side: playback view, right side: playlist
Operating select a source > select a category (for exam-

4K0012721BD
> Applies to: MMI: To open the playback view @), ple, artists > Album) > select a track.
select on the home screen: MEDIA > Source >
> To open the playlist @), select List in the play-
back view @. >
215
Media
The following functions may be available depend-

ing on the selected media source and the vehicle
equipment:
The media center categories are displayed based on the active
@ Categories menu
source > page 214.
@ Source button Displays sources in the Media menu.

Applies to: playback view: Device name of the source that is current-
ly playing.
Source/device name
Applies to: media center view: Source that you are currently brows-
ing > page 214.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 218, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
©
eit Displays the current album cover.

Displaying playlists: press on the cover.
@ Settings See > page 218.
Filter Filtering the current list.
© Current track informa- | Display of Track and Artist. Highlights the track that is currently
tion playing.
List Browsing in the list: drag your finger upward or downward.
Requirement: a media source with album covers must be selected
or the covers must be available online > page 218, Online addition-
Album cover in the play-
al data.
list
©
= Displays the current album cover. For tracks belonging to one al-
bum, the album cover is displayed one time.
® More Accessing options > page 217.
O Off Switching between off/playlist/track: press @9.
® O Playlist The tracks in the current playlist will repeat continuously in a loop.
© Tracks The current track will repeat continuously in a loop.
KqY/>I Selecting the previous/next track (or station/chapter): press Kl or
@ Di.
Jumping to the beginning of a track: press on K after the first ten
seconds of play time.
® PAI Start or stop playback
@ >¢ Shuffle When this function is switched on, all files in the playlist will play in
random order.
@ List The playlist @ is displayed.
Playback position You can adjust the playback position using the knob.
© Info section Display of Track, Artist, and Album.
216
Media
DVD functions
@) Tips
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD videos
Only files in the active source will be
searched.
a DVD must be playing.
The following functions are available in the play- Options and settings
back view:
— Display the DVD main menu: press on the up-
per display. Press DVD menu.
Context-dependent functions and settings may
— Using the DVD main menu: press the desired be available depending on the selected source,
function. the connected mobile device, and the connection
— Switching to the media functions: press on the type.
upper display. Select: * > select a chapter, or
start the movie in the DVD main menu and Requirement: the playback view must be dis-
press on the upper display. played @) > page 215, fig. 149.
— Adjusting the aspect ratio: press on the upper > Press More, or
display. Select: Aspect ratio > an aspect ratio >
Requirement: a list (for example, a playlist
@)
OK = table on page 218.
= page 215, fig. 149) must be displayed.
G@) Tips > Press and hold an element until the Options
menu is displayed.
Not all functions are available in every source
and on every touch display. Play more like this
The track currently playing is quickly analyzed for
Opening the search features such as artist, genres, mood, and beat,
Applies to: vehicles with free text search and a smart playlist with similar tracks will be
You can search in all active sources, for example shown.
for tracks and video files. More from this album
Opening the search Based on the track that is currently playing, an in-
Requirement: the selected source must support telligent playlist with other tracks from this al-
the search function. The media center bum will be displayed.
=> page 214 is displayed. More from this artist
> Press Search. Based on the track that is currently playing, an in-
telligent playlist with other tracks from this ar-
Entries that contain the entered search term are
tist will be displayed. The system will search for
listed in the results list. Each result is marked
the current artist in the source that is currently
with the symbol for a category in the media cen-
playing.
ter > page 214.
You can search for the following categories: More from this genre
— Artists Based on the track that currently playing, an in-
— Albums telligent playlist with other tracks from this
— Tracks genre will be displayed.
— Genres
Save as a shortcut
— Videos
4K0012721BD
See > page 23, Shortcuts.
217
Media
Play Settings
The selected track or all tracks in the folder will
Accessing settings
be displayed.
Language!) MEDIA > ©.
You can set the language manually. The language
Online additional data
and audio format options depend on the video
DVD. Requirement: the MMI must be connected to the
Internet > page 177.
Subtitles»)
If available, various information about the track
You can manually select subtitles for playback. currently playing (such as the cover) will be load-
The languages available depend on the DVD. ed from the Internet when this function is
switched on.
Aspect ratio
The Auto aspect ratio setting is recommended. If DVD playback parental control*
you press on an aspect ratio, you will see a pre- Playback of video DVDs can be restricted based
view of the setting on the screen. Press OK to ap- on age restrictions using parental control.
ply the selected aspect ratio.
Displaying the parental control menu
The following table gives an overview of the as-
pect ratios. The possible aspect ratios depend on > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
the source or video file being played. MEDIA > © > DVD playback parental control.
> Enter the PIN for parental control. The PIN set
Aspect ra- |Description at the factory is 1234.
tio > Press OK.
Auto The MMI detects the picture for-
Switching the rating level on and off
mat of the source and displays the
image in the optimal ratio. Requirement: the parental control menu must be
4:3, The image is fixed in the corre- displayed.
16:9, sponding ratio. Select one of these > Select: Set rating level > select a rating level
Cinema options if the image is distorted or (for example, level 5) > *T, or:
a section of the image is cut off or > To remove all restrictions, select Off.
blurry when Auto is selected.
Eight different protection levels can be set for
Zoom The image is enlarged to fill the en-
parental control. If you set the parental control
tire display.
level at Level 5, all DVDs from levels 1-5 can be
Original The image is displayed in the ratio played. Video DVDs with a higher level will not
of the source format. Select this play.
option if the image is distorted or a
section of the image is cut off or Changing the PIN
blurry when Auto is selected. Requirement: the parental control menu must be
displayed.
> Select: Change PIN > enter a new PIN for pa-
rental control > OK.
> Repeat the entry and press OK.
)) Depending on the DVD, this may not be possible during

playback.
218
Media
— PIN entry for parental control will be locked

@) Tips
for approximately one minute if you enter
— Not all video DVDs have parental control. the incorrect PIN three times in a row. The
— The protection levels for the parental con- PIN can only be reset by an authorized Audi
trol are based on the US standards from the dealer.
Motion Picture Association of America
(MPAA). Note that the age levels for video
DVDs in European countries may differ.
Supported media and file formats

Cea CN]
The DVD drive*, SD card reader, and the USB stor-

age device connection support the following me-
dia file properties:
Audio files Video files

Support- SD/SDHC/SDXC/MMC memory cards: with a capacity of up to 256 GB;
ed media | DVD drive: audio CDs (up to 80 min) with CD text (artist, album, song)*, CD-ROMs with a
capacity of up to 700 MB; DVD+R/RW; DVD video; DVD audio with audio tracks that are
compatible with a DVD video player;
Audi music interface: mobile devices > page 212 (such as an iPod, MTP player, USB stor-
age device in “USB Device Subclass 1 and 6” that conforms to USB 2.0: USB sticks, USB
MP3 players (Plug-and-Play-capable), external USB flash drives and hard drives)).
File sys- Memory cards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS.
tem USB storage devices: FAT, FAT32, NTFS.
USB mass storage device partitions (primary/logical*): two per USB connection.
CD/DVD file systems: ISO9660, Joliet, UDF.
Metadata | Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max. 800x800 px.
The album cover from the medium or from Grace-
note* is displayed, depending on availability.
Format MPEG |Win- MPEG |Opus |FLAC |ALAC |MPEG MPEG4 Windows
1/2 dows [2/4 1/2 AVC Media Video
Layer 3 |Media (H.264) |9
Audio 9
and 10
File ex- -mp3 |.wma |.m4a_|.opus_ | .flac -m4a_——|.mpg; -mp4 .wmv
tension -m4b | .ogg -mpeg -m4v .asf
aac .oga -Mov
-avi
Playlists -M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Character-| up to maximum 320 kbit/s and |48kHzsampling| up to maximum 10 Mbit/s and
istics 48 kHz sampling frequencies frequency 1920x1080 px at maximum 30 fps
Number DVD drive*: max. 1,000 files per medium.
4K0012721BD
of files USB mass storage device and memory cards: max. 50,000 files per medium; max.
50,000 files per playlist/folder
219
not always display, depending on the sys-
tem language.
— The media sources do not support the Win- — The manufacturer of the storage device can
dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. provide information about its “USB Device
— For compressing MP3 files, AUDI AG recom- Subclass”.
mends a bit rate of at least 160 kbit/s. The — Some MTP player functions are not support-
display showing the remaining play time ed, such as rating music tracks and video
may differ for audio files with variable bit playback.
rate.
— Special characters (such as those in ID3 tag
information) may display differently or may
Troubleshooting
ment.
Problem Solution
Audi music interface/Bluetooth Read the instructions in the chapter > page 212, Multimedia
audio player: the mobile device is connections/> page 210, Bluetooth audio player.
not supported.
Audi music interface: the mobile For many mobile phones or mobile devices, playback is not possi-
device is not recognized as a ble when the battery level is too low (less than 5% charge level).
source. The mobile device will only be recognized as a media source in
the MMI after connecting if the battery charge level is sufficient.
Audi music interface: malfunc- The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
tions during audio playback function off > page 224 when you are not using the Bluetooth
through an iPod/iPhone. audio player.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode MTP is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possible.
Bluetooth audio player: interfer- Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
ence with track display and audio player if a music player app from a third party provider is open.
playback. AUDI AG recommends using the integrated media player on your
Bluetooth device (such as a smartphone).
Online media: connection failed To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection switch
between the MMI and the myAudi must be switched on in the myAudi app status screen.
app.
Online media: no playback of on- Check if a suitable data plan has been purchased.
line media.
Wi-Fi hotspot: your Wi-Fi device is Make sure the network optimization functions are switched off in
disconnected from the Wi-Fi hot- the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your Wi-Fi de-
spot. vice. For additional information, refer to the user guide for your
Wi-Fi device.
220
Audi smartphone interface
Audi smartphone CG) Note

interface Read the information about Audi connect, and
Setup
=> page 177.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI G@) Tips

with a cable or wirelessly* using the Audi smart- — The functions that can be used depend on
phone interface. Certain content on your smart-
the following factors, among others:
phone is adapted in the MMI while driving and
— The brand of your smartphone
can be operated through the MMI.
— The version of the operating system in
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and your smartphone
the ignition must be switched on. iPhone genera- — The software version of the app used
tion 5 or higher with Lightning connector and iOS — The USB adapter cable and correct connec-
7.1.2 operating system or higher, or smartphone tion
with Android Auto app and Android 5.0 Lollipop — Your cell phone service provider
operating system or higher. — The customized settings on your smart-
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: phone
SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart- — One of the factors above or a combination
phone interface > New connection. of any of them could cause your smart-
> Connect your smartphone to the Audi music in- phone to be incompatible with the Audi
terface > page 212 using a USB adapter smartphone interface. Compatibility cannot
=> page 212, fig. 147, or be guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
> To connect your iPhone wireless*, switch on the For more information and assistance, refer
Bluetooth function and Wi-Fi on your iPhone. to the user guide and the manufacturer of
Open the CarPlay settings in your iPhone. In the your smartphone.
MMI, press on your iPhone in the list of dis- — Please note that you can only connect your
played devices. smartphone via the front Audi music inter-
> To update the list, press OQ. face in order to use the Audi smartphone in-
> Follow the system instructions. terface.
> Pay attention to any additional system prompts — Wireless CarPlay* is not available in all
on your smartphone, if applicable. countries.
> Applies to: MMI: If you declined use of Apple — Wireless CarPlay* is only possible in vehicles
CarPlay or Android Auto the first time you con- without a navigation system if the following
nected your smartphone, then select on the requirement is met: the embedded SIM card
home screen: SETTINGS > Connected devices > for the vehicle must be logged into the mo-
Audi smartphone interface > a smartphone. bile phone network > page 177. Make sure
> Follow the system instructions. the function > page 174, Turn on car phone
or data module is switched on.
Z\ WARNING — If the connected smartphone has voice con-
trol, you can operate your smartphone using
Driving requires your complete and undivided
attention. As the driver, you have complete re- the external voice recognition system
=> page 28.
sponsibility for safety in traffic. Never operate
mobile devices while driving, because this in- — The menu language shown in the MMI is
creases the risk of an accident. based on the settings in your smartphone.
4K0012721BD
— Some MMI functions are not available when

there is an active Audi smartphone interface
connection.
221
Audi smartphone interface
— You cannot connect any mobile devices via — AUDI AG merely provides access to third
Bluetooth when an Audi smartphone inter- party services through the MMI and does
face connection is active. not assume any responsibility for the con-
— Usage of the Audi smartphone interface de- tent of these services.
pends on the availability of services through
third party providers.
Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

ment.
Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the battery charge level on your smartphone.
interface cannot be Check the USB cable and use a different one if necessary.
opened. Check if Android Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in the country where the vehi-
cle is being operated.
Android Auto: check if the Android Auto app is installed on your smartphone.
Connecting the Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
smartphone to the adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
MMI failed. => page 212.
Apple CarPlay: check if Apple CarPlay is activated on your iPhone.
Android Auto: check in the Android Auto app if Android Auto permits new
vehicles.
Wireless connection: open the settings for Bluetooth and CarPlay on your
iPhone. Remove your vehicle. Open the connection manager in the MMI
=> page 224. Delete your iPhone in the Telephone 1 and Audi smartphone inter-
face submenus. Repeat the connection process. Restart the MMI > page 20. Re-
start your iPhone.
The smartphone is Make sure that you are using the correct USB adapter and check if the USB
not automatically adapter is connected correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface
detected. => page 212.
Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.
222
Additional settings
Additional settings
System settings Keyboard
See > page 24.
Introduction
General settings are described in this chapter.

You can find specific settings in the chapters
about those settings. The available settings de- Requirement: an audio source must be active.
pend on the vehicle equipment. > Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
SETTINGS > Sound.
Date and time
Possible settings:
— Treble
SETTINGS > General > Date & time.
— Bass
Possible settings: — Balance/fader
— Speed-dependent volume control
— Set date and time automatically
— Subwoofer
— Surround Level
— Date format Focus

— Use 24h time format
You can optimize the sound distribution for vari-
— Automatic time zone
ous locations in the vehicle.
— Time zone
— Automatic daylight saving time 3D effect
— Manual daylight saving time You can adjust the intensity of the 3D effect.
With the Medium setting, you will hear an opti-
CERT
Taal lat ae ay mal 3D effect for all sources.

Announcements and tones
SETTINGS > General > Measurement units.
Possible settings:
SETTINGS > Announcements & tone.
— Speed
Possible settings:
— Distance
— Temperature — Volume of announcements
— Pressure — Welcome sound
— Consumption (engine)
— Volume ZA\ WARNING
Adjust the volume of the audio system so that
Language and keyboard signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
lice and fire sirens, can be heard easily at all
> Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen: times.
SETTINGS > Language & keyboard.
Language G@) Tips

You can change the languages for the display, The volume is automatically adjusted to a pre-
4K0012721BD
navigation announcements, and the voice recog- set level when the MMI is switched on.
nition system.
223
Additional settings
Bluetooth G) Tips
> Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: The length of the process depends on the size
SETTINGS > Connection settings > Bluetooth. of the update.
Bluetooth
Factory default settings
You can select a setting for visibility of the MMI
to other Bluetooth devices. To connect a new > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Bluetooth device, the Visible setting must be se- SETTINGS > System maintenance > Restore
lected. If Invisible is selected, a Bluetooth con- factory settings.
nection will only be possible with paired devices. > Select the desired functions individually, or
If Off is selected, no Bluetooth device can be con- > Select the option Select all.
nected. > Press Apply. The settings will be reset. The key
user will remain stored.
Bluetooth audio player > To also delete the key user, press Remove key
When this function is switched on, the profile user.
will load automatically when your Bluetooth au- > To completely delete a smartphone that is
dio player is within range. paired with the Audi smartphone interface, re-
set Audi smartphone interface and Bluetooth.
Bluetooth name
The MMI’s Bluetooth name is displayed and can G) Tips
be changed. — Make sure that not only the settings were
deleted but also the stored data, if necessa-
Tyee M olor hd ry.
— The system may restart when the settings
are reset. This may take a few minutes.
SETTINGS > System maintenance > Software
update.
> If necessary, insert a storage medium with the Connected devices
update data into the corresponding drive (eye e Ts ( Us
=> page 219.
> Press Search for updates. Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
> Press on the desired update. the ignition must be switched on.
> Press Next.
> Follow the system instructions.
SETTINGS > Connected devices.
ZA\ WARNING Possible menu items:
— Perform the installation only when the vehi- — Telephone 1

cle is stationary. Otherwise, this increases — Telephone 2
the risk of an accident
— Audio player
— If the installation fails, contact an author-
— WLAN hotspot
— Headset
Facility immediately to have the malfunction
corrected. myAudi app
This function is available if the myAudi app is in-
() Note stalled on your mobile device and started, and if
The connection costs for the software update the mobile device is connected with the vehicle’s
are included in the Audi connect pricing. Wi-Fi hotspot.
224
Additional settings
Audi smartphone interface > Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI > Press and hold an element until the Options
>page 221. menu is displayed.
Bluetooth profiles
@) Note
You can switch desired profiles on or off sepa-
rately in the MMI.
=> page 177. Favorite
To set a paired mobile device as the default

Connection options phone, activate this function in the MMI.
Requirement: the connected devices menu must When the mobile device is in range and the Blue-
be displayed > page 224. tooth function on the mobile device and in the
MMI is switched on, the default phone will be
Connecting a device
given priority over the other Bluetooth devices
Requirement: Bluetooth visibility must be acti- and will be connected directly to the MMI.
vated in the MMI & page 224 and mobile device.
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1. Legal information

> To search for and connect your mobile device,
General information
press New connection > page 164.
Information on the software licenses can be
Selecting a connected device
found online at www.audi.com/softwareinfo.
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
> Press on the desired mobile device in the list of ieee aE
displayed devices. The connection will be made.
Disconnecting a connected device SETTINGS > General.
> Press on a menu item, such as Telephone 1.
License subscription
> Press on the connected mobile device. The se-
lected device will be disconnected from the Version information
MMI.
Legal information
Deleting a device
Possible options:
> Press ona menu item, such as Telephone 1. — Software information
> Press and hold an element until the Options — About Audi connect
menu is displayed.
> Press Delete.
PNT at el M Ullal]
If a device is listed multiple times, it will be de- Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
leted from all menu items.

Requirement: a smartphone must be connected
to the MMI > page 221.
Additional options
Depending on the selected function, additional SETTINGS > Connected devices > Audi smart-
options may be available. phone interface.
> Press and hold an element until the Options
4K0012721BD
Requirement: the connected devices menu must

menu is displayed.
be displayed > page 224.
> Press Legal notes.
225
Additional settings
ida aaa
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary.
> Select in the instrument cluster: vehicle func-

tions tab > page 13.
> Press and hold the ££] button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel until the display appears.
Possible options:
— Engine code
— Software information
— Version information
Head-up display
Applies to: vehicles with head-up display

the ignition must be switched on. The head-up
display is switched on.

SETTINGS > Display & brightness > Head-up
display > Display contents > Show the license
text in the head-up display.
226
Checking and Filling
Checking and Filling @) Tips
Fuel The vehicle may be filled with fuel that has a

higher octane rating than what is required by
Types of gasoline the engine.
The correct gasoline grade is stated on the inside
of the fuel filler door. Gasoline mixture
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter Gasoline with alcohol or MTBE (Methyl-Tert-
and must only be driven with unleaded gasoline. Butyl-Ether)
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas- You can use unleaded gasoline mixed with alco-
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- hol or MTBE (generally labeled as oxygenated
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. compounds) as long as the fuel meets the follow-
ing conditions:
The individual gasoline grades are differentiated
by octane ratings. This value is given with (R Gasoline with methanol content (methyl alco-
+M)/2 equating to AKI or in RON. hol or methanol)
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
The headings below match the sticker in the fuel
—No more than 3% methanol
filler door (examples):
— More than 2% solvent
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY MIN. (R+M)/2 87
Gasoline with ethanol content (ethyl alcohol or
Regular/ MIN. RON 91 Regular
ethanol)
Use regular gasoline with minimum 87 AKI / — Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
91 RON > ©. —No more than 15% ethanol
Audi recommends using premium gasoline with Gasoline with MTBE content
minimum 91 AKI / 95 RON to achieve the rated
— Anti-Knock Index is at least 87 AKI
horsepower and torque.
—No more than 15% MTBE
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY PREMIUM MIN. (R
Gasoline adapted to the season
+M)/2 91 / SUPER MIN. RON 95
Many gasoline fuels are adapted to the seasons.
Using premium gasoline with minimum 91 AKI /
When the season changes, we recommend refu-
95 RON is recommended.
eling at high-traffic gas stations. It is more likely
If premium gasoline is not available, you can also that the gasoline will be suitable for the season
use regular gasoline 87 AKI / 91 RON. However there.
this does reduce the engine power slightly.
() Note
() Note — Gasoline with methanol content that does
— Filling the tank just one time with leaded not meet the specified conditions may cause
fuel or other metallic additives will cause corrosion damage and damage to plastic or
permanent deterioration to the catalytic rubber components in the fuel system.
converter function. — Do not use gasoline that does not meet the
— When gasoline with an octane rating that is specifications.
too low is used, high speeds or heavy engine — If you are unable to find out if a specific gas-
load can lead to engine damage. oline mixture meets the specifications, ask
the gas station operator or their fuel suppli-
4K0012721BD
er. >
227
— Do not use any gasoline mixture whose Refueling

composition cannot be identified.
— Audi does not assume any responsibility for Fueling procedure
damage to the fuel system or for perform-
ance problems caused by using gasoline
mixtures different from those specified.
This type of damage also does not fall under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty or under
the emissions control system warranty.
— If you notice a higher fuel consumption or
poor handling or performance problems due
to such gasoline mixtures, we recommend
fueling with unblended gasoline.
Fig. 150 Right rear side of the vehicle: opening the fuel
filler door
Gasoline additives
An important issue for many automobile manu-

facturers is combustion residue in the engine
that results from the use of certain fuels.
Although types of gasoline differ depending on

the manufacturer, there are similarities. Certain
substances in the gasoline may cause deposits in
the engine. Additives in the gasoline that should
keep the engine and fuel system clean do not all
Fig. 151 Fuel filler door with attached fuel cap
function equally.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas- The fuel filler door is unlocked or locked by the
oline. For additional information on TOP TIER De- central locking system.
tergent Gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com. >» Unlock the vehicle if necessary.
If you use incorrect fuels over a long period of >» Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
time, the maximum engine performance may be open it > fig. 150.
impaired by combustion residue. > Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise.
> Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
@) Note door > fig. 151.
— Damage or malfunctions caused by the use > Insert the fuel pump nozzle all the way into the
fuel filler neck.
of incorrect types of gasoline are not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. > Begin fueling. Once the fuel pump nozzle turns
off the first time, the fuel tank is full. Do not
— Only gasoline additives that have been ap-
continue fueling, or else the expansion space in
proved by Audi may be used.
the tank will be filled with fuel.
> After the fuel pump has switched off, wait five
seconds before removing the nozzle to allow
the rest of the fuel to finish dripping into the
fuel tank.
> Turn the fuel cap clockwise until it clicks into
place.
> Close the fuel filler door and then press on the
left side until it latches.
228
The correct fuel type for your vehicle can be flying sparks. Sparks can start a fire when
found ona label located on the inside of the fuel refueling.
filler door. For additional information on fuel, see
=> page 227. A WARNING
For the tank capacity in your vehicle, refer to the Transporting fuel containers inside the vehicle
Technical Data > page 299. is not recommended. Fuel could leak out of
the container and ignite, especially during an
To reduce the risk of fuel leaking out or vapors
accident. This can cause explosions, fires, and
escaping, make sure that the fuel tank is closed
injuries.
correctly. Otherwise the Ey indicator light will
— Ifyou must transport fuel in a fuel contain-
turn on.
er, note the following:
If the central locking system malfunctions, there — Always place the fuel container on the
is a fuel filler door emergency release ground before filling. Never fill the fuel
=> page 230. container with fuel while it is inside or on
Messages the vehicle. Electrostatic discharge can oc-
cur while refueling and the fuel vapors
FAY Tank system: malfunction! Please contact could ignite.
Service — When using fuel containers made of met-
There is a malfunction in the fuel tank system. al, the fuel pump nozzle must always re-
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized main in contact with the container to re-
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the duce the risk of static charge.
malfunction corrected. — Insert the fuel pump nozzle as far as pos-
sible into the filler opening while refuel-
Z\ WARNING ing.
Improper fueling procedures and improper — Follow the applicable legal regulations in
handling of fuel can lead to explosions, fires, the country where you are driving when
severe burns, and other injuries. using, storing and transporting fuel con-
— Do not smoke. Keep away from open flames. tainers.
— The ignition must be switched off when re- — Make sure that the fuel container meets
fueling. the industry standards, for example ANSI
— Mobile devices, radio devices, and other ra- or ASTM F852-86.
dio equipment should always be switched
off when refueling. Electromagnetic rays @) Note
could cause sparks and start a fire. — Remove fuel that has overflowed onto any
— If you do not insert the fuel pump nozzle all vehicle components immediately to reduce
the way into the filler tube, then fuel can the risk of damage to the vehicle.
leak out. Spilled fuel can ignite and start a — Never drive until the fuel tank is completely
fire. empty. The irregular supply of fuel that re-
— Never get into the vehicle when refueling. If sults from that can cause engine misfires.
there is an exceptional situation where you Uncombusted fuel may enter the exhaust
must enter the vehicle, close the door and system and increase the risk of damage to
touch a metal surface before touching the the catalytic converter.
fuel pump nozzle again. This will reduce the
risk of electrostatic discharge that can cause
4K0012721BD
) Depending on the engine and country
229
@) For the sake of the environment

— Do not overfill the fuel tank, or fuel could
leak out when the vehicle is warming up.
— Fuel should never enter the sewer system or
come into contact with the ground.
@ Tips
The fuel filler door on your vehicle does not
lock if you lock the vehicle from the inside us- Fig. 153 Luggage compartment: fuel filler door emergency
ing the central locking switch. release
The emergency opening mechanism is located

Fuel filler door emergency release
behind the right cover in the luggage compart-
Applies to: vehicles with manual fuel filler door release
ment.
If the central locking system malfunctions, the
> Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
fuel filler door can be unlocked manually.
kit > page 272.
> Insert the flat side of the screwdriver carefully
into the slot between the side trim panel and
the cover > fig. 152 (arrows) and pry out the
cover. Keep in mind that a power cable for the
socket is located on the rear side.
> To unlock the fuel filler door, loosen the red
loop from the retainer and then pull on the
loop carefully > fig. 153 >@.
> Press on the left side of the fuel filler door to
open it > page 228, fig. 150.
® Note
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance.
You will not hear it release. If you continue to
pull, you could damage the emergency re-
lease mechanism.
Fig. 152 Version @/ version @) Right cover in the luggage

l Emissions
system
control
compartment: removing the cover

General information
ZA WARNING
The temperature of the exhaust system is
high, both when driving and after stopping
the engine.
— Never touch the exhaust tail pipes once they
have become hot. This could result in burns.
— Do not park your vehicle over flammable
materials such as grass or leaves because >
230
the high temperature of the emissions sys- ZA WARNING

tem could start a fire.
— Turn the engine off.
— Do not apply underbody protectant in the
— Switch the ignition off.
exhaust system area, because this increases
— Set the parking brake.
the risk of fire.
— Select the “P” (Park) selector lever position.
— Allow the engine to cool.
Catalytic converter
— Keep children away from the engine com-
Follow the safety precautions > page 230, Gener- partment.
al information. — Never spill fluids on a hot engine. These flu-
ids (such as the freeze protection contain ed
The vehicle may only be driven with unleaded in the coolant) can catch fire.
gasoline, or the catalytic converter will be de-
— Avoid short circuits in the electrical system.
stroyed.
— Never reach into the radiator fan. The fan is
Never drive until the tank is completely empty. temperature-controlled and can turn on
The irregular supply of fuel that results from that suddenly, even when the ignition is switched
can cause engine misfires. Uncombusted fuel off.
could enter the exhaust system, which could — Never open the hood when there is steam or
cause overheating and damage to the catalytic coolant escaping from the engine compart-
converter. ment, because there is a risk that you could
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolan tis
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) escaping.
— The cap on the coolant expansion tank must
If the S indicator light blinks or turns on, there never be opened when the coolant is hot.
is a malfunction that is causing poor emissions The cooling system is under pressure. There
quality and that could damage the catalytic con- is a risk of burns
verter. Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer —To protect your face, hands, and arms fro m
or authorized Audi Service Facility to have the hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
malfunction corrected. thick cloth when opening.
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill- — Do not remove the engine cover under an y
er cap is not closed correctly > page 228). circumstances. This increases the risk of
burns.
Engine compartment — Due to the risk of electric shock, never touch

the ignition cable or other components in
(er eel lacela) the electronic high-voltage ignition syste m
when the engine is running or is starting.
Special care is required if you are working in the
— Ifa gear is engaged while the vehicle is sta-
engine compartment
tionary and the engine is running, do not
When performing work in the engine compart- press the accelerator pedal inadvertently.
ment, such as checking and filling fluids, there Pressing the accelerator pedal will cause the
is a risk of injury, scalding, accidents, and vehicle to move, and this could result in an
burns. For this reason, follow all the warnings accident.
and general safety precautions provided in the — If inspections or repairs must be performed
following information. The engine compart- while the engine is running, moving compo-
ment is a dangerous area in the vehicle. > A\. nents (such as the ribbed belt, generator,
and radiator fan) pose an additional risk.
4K0012721BD
) Depending on the engine and country
231
— Set the parking brake first and select the @) Note

“P” (Park) selector lever position.
When filling fluids, be sure not to add any flu-
— Always make sure that no parts of the
ids to the wrong reservoirs. Otherwise severe
body, jewelry, ties, loose clothing, and
malfunctions and engine damage will occur.
long hair can be caught in moving engine
components. Before any work, always re-
move any jewelry and/or ties, tie back long
hair, and make sure all clothing fits close You should regularly check the ground under
to the body to reduce the risk of anything your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly. If
becoming caught in engine components. there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
— Pay attention to the following warnings list- bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
ed when work on the fuel system or on the er or authorized Audi Service Facility to be
electrical equipment is required. checked.
— Do not smoke.
— Never work near open flames. Opening and closing the hood
— Always have a working fire extinguisher The hood is released from inside the vehicle.
nearby.
— All work on the battery or electrical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
— Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
cals to as short a time as possible.
Z\ WARNING Fig. 154 Footwell: release lever
California Proposition 65 Warning:
RAZ-0016|
— Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm. In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other Fig. 155 Unlocked hood: lever
reproductive harm.
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces- Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from
sories contain lead and lead compounds, the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be
chemicals known to the State of California damaged.
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
Wash hands after handling.
232
Opening the hood

ZX WARNING
> With the door open, pull the lever &>)) below — Never open the hood when there is steam or
the instrument panel in the direction of the ar-
coolant escaping from the engine compart-
row > fig. 154.
ment, because there is a risk that you could
>» Raise the hood slightly > page 231.
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
> Press the lever > fig. 155 in the direction of the
escaping.
arrow. This releases the hooks.
— For safety reasons, the hood must always be
> Open the hood.
latched securely while driving. Because of
Closing the hood this, always check the hood after closing it
to make sure it is latched correctly. The hood
> Push the hood down until you override the
is latched if the front corners cannot be lift-
force of the strut.
ed.
> Let the hood fall lightly into the latch. Do not
— If you notice that the hood is not latched
press it in. > J\.
while you are driving, stop immediately and
Message close it, because driving when the hood is
not latched increases the risk of an accident.
EB warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicle
and check the lock
The hood latch is not locked correctly. Stop im-
mediately and close the hood.
4K0012721BD
)) The &> symbol is not available in all countries.
233
Engine compartment overview
The most important check points.
Fig. 156 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler opening (example)
Follow the safety precautions > page 231. Engine oil

@ Washer fluid reservoir (>) > page 243 If the engine oil level is too low
@ Jump start point (+) under a cover, (-) with
hex head screw > page 243, Charging the 12 If you need to add engine oil, use an oil that is
Volt vehicle battery, > page 279, Jump start- listed on the sticker. The sticker is located at the
ing front of the engine compartment > page 234,
Coolant expansion tank (=) under a cover fig. 156.
©®©
=> page 239 If the recommended engine oil is not available, in

Engine oil filler opening (827) > page 236 an emergency you may add a maximum of 1
Brake fluid reservoir (OC) under a cover quart (1 liter) of ACEA C3 or API SN engine oil
=> page 240 one time until the next oil change.
Sticker* for engine oil specifications For more information on the correct engine oil
©
=> page 234 for your vehicle, contact an authorized Audi deal-
The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil er or authorized Audi Service Facility. Have the oil
filling opening may be located in different places changed by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
within the engine compartment, depending on ized Service Facility.
the engine version.
234
Audi recommends oil quality to decrease. Do not extract engine oil

Sbastrol | ZIDIGE Prarzssional to reduce the level, because this will increase the
risk of engine damage. Drive to an authorized
Audi recommends using the LongLife high-per-
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
formance engine oil from Audi Genuine Parts.
mediately to have engine oil extracted.
I Tet & Oil level system: malfunction! Please con-

tact Service
Engine oil pressure
The sensor that checks the engine oil level has
i Turn off engine. Oil pressure too low malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an author-
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
engine oil level > page 235. ty to have the malfunction repaired.
— If the engine oil level is too low, add engine oil & Oil pressure sensor: malfunction! Please
=> page 236. Only continue driving once the in- contact Service
dicator light turns off. The sensor that checks the engine oil pressure
— If the engine oil level is correct and the indica- has malfunctioned. Drive immediately to an au-
tor light still turns on, turn the engine off and thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
do not continue driving. See an authorized Audi Facility to have the malfunction repaired.
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
sistance. Engine warm-up request
i Please drive to warm up engine
Engine oil level
& Please add oil immediately Fuel has entered the engine oil, either due to low
outside temperatures or frequent short drives.
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the Drive until the engine is warm so that the fuel in
engine oil level > page 235 and add engine oil the engine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
immediately > page 236. speeds, full accelerating, and heavy engine loads
2 Please add max. x qt (x l) oil. You can con- when doing this.
tinue driving
G@) Tips
Add the amount of oil shown immediately
The oil pressure warning =} is not an oil level
=> page 236.
indicator. Always check the oil level regularly.
Reducing the oil level
A Please reduce oil level Checking the engine oil level
There is too much oil in the engine and there is a The engine oil level can be checked in the MMI.
risk of damaging the catalytic converter or en-
Follow the safety precautions > A\ in General in-
gine. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
formation on page 231.
thorized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
engine oil extracted if necessary. Avoid high en- >» Park the vehicle on a level surface.
gine speeds, full acceleration, and heavy engine > Shut the engine off when it is warm.
loads. > Switch only the ignition back on.
> Wait approximately two minutes.
Engine oil sensor > Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
Bs Oil level sensor: oil change necessary. Please VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Oil level.
contact Service > Read the oil level in the display. Add engine oil
4K0012721BD
if the bar in the oil level indicator is just below

Fuel has entered the engine oil. This will cause
“min” > page 236. >
the engine oil level to rise slowly and the engine
235
Please note that an exact oil consumption

@) Note
measurement must be done with the neces-
If the engine oil level is too low or too high, sary care and accuracy and may take time.
there is a risk of engine damage. An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility is trained in accurately
@) Tips measuring the oil consumption.
The oil level indicator in the display is only an — You can find information on engine oil and
informational display. If the oil level is too engine oil capacities for the USA at www.
low, a minimum oil warning appears in the in- audiusa.com/help/maintenance, or for Can-
strument cluster. Add oil and close the hood. ada at www.audi.ca/ca/web/en/
The current oil level will be displayed on the customer-area/care-and-maintenance/
MMI the next time the ignition is switched on. audi-service-schedules.html, or call
800-822-2834.
@) Tips
The engine oil consumption may be up to
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km), de-
pending on driving style and operating condi-
tions. Consumption may be higher during the
first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). The engine oil
level must be checked regularly. It is best to
check each time you refuel your vehicle and
before long drives.
— Because of the Lubrication and cooling of
the engine, combustion engines consume
oil. The oil consumption varies depending
on the engine and may change during the Fig. 157 Engine compartment: engine oil filling opening
cover (example)
service life of the engine. Engines generally
consume more oil at the beginning during
Follow the safety precautions > page 231, Gener-
the break-in period. Then oil consumption
al information.
stabilizes after the break-in period.
— Under normal conditions, oil consumption > Turn the engine off.
depends on the quality and viscosity of the > Open the hood > page 232.
oil, the engine RPM, the climate conditions, > Unscrew the cap 7 for the engine oil filler
and the road conditions. The dilution of oil opening > fig. 157.
from condensation or fuel residue as well as > Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
the age of the oil also play a role. Because oil > page 234.
engine wear increases with mileage, oil con- > Close the engine oil filler opening cap.
sumption will increase again over time until > Close the hood = page 232.
it may be necessary to replace worn compo- > Restart the ignition after two minutes and read
nents. the current oil level in the MMI > page 235,
— Because all these variables play a role, it is Checking the engine oil level.
not possible to define an oil consumption > Add more oil if necessary.
standard. Therefore, the oil level must be
checked regularly. ZA, WARNING
— If you believe that your engine has in- — When adding oil, do not let oil drip onto hot
creased its oil consumption, contact an au- engine components. This increases the risk
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi of a fire. >
Service Facility to determine the cause.
236
— You must close the cap on the oil filler open- The engine oil should be changed more frequent-
ing correctly so that oil does not leak out only under certain circumstances. Have the oil
to the hot engine and exhaust system when changed more frequently if you often drive short
the engine is running, because this is a fire distances, your vehicle is predominantly in stop-
hazard. and-go traffic situations, is in very dusty environ-
— Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into ments, or is operated for long periods of time in
contact with engine oil. temperatures below zero.
— Engine oil is poisonous and must be kept out Cleansing additives in the oil make fresh oil ap-
of reach of children. pear darker after the engine has run briefly. This
— Store the engine oil securely in the original is normal and no reason to change the engine oil
container. more frequently than recommended.
©) Note Because correctly disposing of engine oil is diffi-

cult and special tools and technical knowledge
— The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not are needed for an oil change, having your engine
cover damage or malfunctions if the recom- oil changed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
mended intended use of the vehicle and thorized Audi Service Facility is recommended.
maintenance measures listed in the Audi
Owner's Manual and the Warranty & Main- If you change the engine oil yourself, please note
tenance Booklet were not followed. the following important information:
— Only use high-grade engine oil that explicit-
ly meets the Audi oil quality standard for
ZA\ WARNING
your vehicle. Using another oil may cause If you change the engine oil on the vehicle
severe vehicle damage. yourself, the following precautions must be
— Do not mix any additives with the engine oil. followed:
Additives may cause engine damage that is — Wear protective eyewear.
not covered by your New Vehicle Limited — Due to the risk of scalding, allow the engine
Warranty. to cool down sufficiently.
— Maintain enough distance when you are re-
@ For the sake of the environment moving the oil drain plug. While doing this,
— Oil should never enter the sewer system or keep your forearm parallel to the ground to
come into contact with the ground. reduce the risk of hot oil dripping down your
arm.
— Follow the legal regulations in the country
where you are located when disposing of — Drain the oil into a container designed for
empty oil containers. this purpose that is large enough to hold the
full amount of oil in your engine.
— Engine oil is poisonous. Always store out of
Changing engine oil
reach of children.
We recommend having the oil changed at an au- — Prolonged contact of used engine oil with
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service the skin may cause skin damage. Always
Facility. wash oil off immediately with soap and wa-
ter to protect your skin.
al information.
@) Note
The engine oil must be changed at the intervals
Do not mix any additives with the engine oil.
specified in the Warranty & Maintenance Book-
Additives may cause engine damage that is
4K0012721BD
let. This is very important because the lubrication

not covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
function of the oil gradually declines during regu- ranty. >
lar vehicle operation.
237
— See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized

Audi Service Facility for assistance.
— Before changing the engine oil, make sure
you can dispose of the used engine oil cor- Coolant additive
rectly. The coolant additive is made of anti-freezing and
— Engine oil must always be disposed of cor- corrosion protection agents. Only use the follow-
rectly. Do not dump it in the yard, in the for- ing coolant additives. These additives may be
est, or in open water, river channels, or sew- mixed with each other.
ers.
— Have your used engine oil recycled by bring- Coolant additive Specification
ing it to a used oil collection site or contact Gl12evo TL774L
a gas station. G12++ TL774G
G13 TL774J
Cooling system
The amount of coolant additive that needs to be
mixed with water depends on the climate where
the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi-
The engine cooling system is filled with a mixture
tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze
of purified water and coolant additive at the fac-
and damage the engine.
tory. This coolant must not be not changed.
The coolant level is monitored using the B indi- Coolant Freeze protec-
additive tion
cator light. However, occasionally checking the
coolant level manually is recommended. Warm min. 40% min. -13 °F
regions max. 45% (-25°O
Messages
Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
& Turn off engine and check coolant level. See regions max. 55% (-40 °C)
owner's manual
@) Note
The coolant level is too low.
— Before winter weather begins, have an au-
Stop driving and switch the engine off. Check the
coolant level > page 239.
Service Facility check if the coolant additive
— If the coolant level is too low, add coolant in your vehicle matches the percentage ap-
=> page 239. Only continue driving once the in- propriate for the climate. This is especially
dicator light turns off. important when driving in colder climates.
— If the appropriate coolant additive is not
Ba Coolant temperature: too high. Please let
available in an emergency, do not add any
engine run while vehicle is stationary
other additive. You could damage the en-
Let the engine run at idle for a few minutes to gine. If this happens, only use water and re-
cool off, until the indicator light turns off. store the correct mixture ratio with the
specified coolant additive as soon as possi-
— If the indicator light does not turn off, do not
ble.
continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility — Only refill with new coolant.
for assistance. — Radiator sealant must not be mixed with
the coolant.
| Coolant system: malfunction! Please turn — Due to the risk of engine damage, the cool-
off engine ing system should only be refilled by an au-
Do not continue driving, shut the engine off, and thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
switch the ignition off. Service Facility. An authorized Audi dealer or >
238
authorized Audi Service Facility can also pro- > Push the release button @ © fig. 158 on the
vide you with important information about cap and carefully turn it to the left until you
the recommended coolant additive. feel resistance > /\.
> Push the release button again and remove the
ecking coolant cap completely.
> Add coolant mixed in the correct ratio
=> page 238 up to the MAX marking.
RAZ-0540
> Make sure that the fluid level remains stable.
z
x
Add more coolant if necessary.
> Turn the cap to the right to tighten it until you
feel resistance a second time.
Coolant loss usually indicates that there is a leak.

Immediately drive your vehicle to an authorized
MIN
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility
Fig. 158 Engine compartment - Coolant expansion tank:
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
@ cover with release button; @) markings cooling system is not leaking, coolant loss can re-
sult from the coolant boiling due overheating
Follow the safety precautions > page 231, Gener- and then being forced out of the cooling system.
al information.
ZA\ WARNING
Checking the coolant level
— The engine compartment in any vehicle can
> Park the vehicle on a level surface. be a dangerous area. Stop the engine and al-
> Switch the ignition off. low it to cool before working in the engine
> Open the hood > page 232. compartment. Always follow the informa-
The coolant expansion tank for some engines is tion found in > page 231, General informa-
located in the water drip tray under a cover. Slide tion.
the cover that is located below the windshield — Never open the hood if you can see or hear
wiper on the front passenger's side toward the steam or coolant escaping from the engine
windshield and remove the cover. compartment. This increases the risk of
> Check the coolant level in the coolant expan- burns. The cooling system is under pressure.
sion tank > page 234, fig. 156 using the outer When you no longer see or hear steam or
markings @) > fig. 158. The coolant level must coolant escaping, you may open the engine
be between the markings @) when the engine is compartment with caution.
cold. When the engine is warm it can be slight- — When working in the engine compartment,
ly above the upper marking. remember that the radiator fan can switch
> When you add coolant to the expansion tank, on even if the ignition is switched off, which
please refer to > page 238, Cooling system. increases the risk of injury.
— Coolant additive and coolant can be danger-
Adding coolant ous to your health. For this reason, store the
Requirement: there must be a residual amount of coolant in the original container and away
coolant in the expansion tank >@. from children. There is a risk of poisoning.
If you must add coolant, use a mixture of water

() Note
and coolant additive. Mixing the coolant additive
with distilled water is recommended. Do not continue driving if the coolant expan-
sion tank is empty. Do not add any coolant,
4K0012721BD
> Allow the engine to cool. because air could enter the cooling system
> Place a large, thick towel on the coolant expan- and damage the engine. See an authorized >
sion tank cap.
239
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility driving safety, which increase the risk of an
for assistance. accident. Do not continue driving. See an au-
Brake fluid Service Facility for assistance.
— If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form in
BFV-0229|
the brake system during heavy braking. This
could impair braking performance and driv-
ing safety, which increases the risk of an ac-
cident.
— The brake fluid in your vehicle must meet
the standard VW 501 14 and is available at
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility. If this brake fluid is not
available, another high-grade brake fluid of
Fig. 159 Engine compartment: cap on brake fluid reservoir
equivalent quality may be used, and it must
meet the U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Stand-
ard (FMVSS) 116 DOT 4, Class 6.
al information.
Checking the brake fluid level () Note

> Slide the cover that is located below the wind- — If the brake fluid level is above the MAX
shield wipers on the driver's side toward the marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
windshield and remove the cover. edge of the reservoir and result in damage
> Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid res- to the vehicle.
ervoir > page 234, fig. 156. The brake fluid lev- — Do not allow any brake fluid to come into
el must be between the MIN and MAX markings contact with the vehicle paint, because it
>A. will corrode the paint.
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically.

Electrical system
Message
If the = A B or fm] indicator light turns on,
Ga / @ Brakes: stop vehicle and check brake there is a malfunction in the power supply, the
fluid level battery, or the vehicle electrical system.
Stop the vehicle and check the brake fluid level. / BB Electrical system: malfunction! Safely
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi stop vehicle
Service Facility for assistance.
Do not continue driving and switch the ignition
Changing the brake fluid off > A\. See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
Brake fluid should be changed at regular inter- ized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
vals. Have the brake fluid changed by an author- = Electrical system: malfunction! Restart not
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- possible. Please contact Service
ty. The authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
If you switch the ignition off, you will not be able
Service Facility will inform you of the replace-
to restart the vehicle. Vehicle functions/driving
ment intervals.
stability may be limited. Drive to an authorized
Z\ WARNING Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
mediately.
— If the brake fluid level is below the MIN
marking, it can impair the braking effect and = Electrical system: malfunction! Please con-
tact Service
240
Switch off all electrical equipment that is not convenience functions, such as interior lighting
needed. Vehicle functions/driving stability may or power seat adjustment, may not be available
be limited. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or under certain circumstances. The convenience
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately. functions will be available again when you start
the engine.
= Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
tery will be charged while driving Even when electrical equipment is switched off,
the equipment can still drain the battery if the
The starting ability may be impaired.
vehicle is not driven for long periods of time.
If this message turns off after a little while, the Deep draining results in a chemical reaction that
vehicle battery has charged enough while driving. destroys the inside of the battery. The battery
must be charged every month to prevent this
If this message does not turn off, drive immedi-
= page 243. Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
ately to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
authorized Audi Service Facility for more infor-
Audi Service Facility.
mation.
ZA WARNING Winter operation
When there is an electrical system malfunc-
Cold weather places an especially high load on
tion, vehicle functions may not work and driv-
the 12 Volt vehicle battery. Have the battery
ing stability may be limited, which increases
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or author-
the risk of an accident. Do not continue driv-
ized Audi Service Facility before cold weather be-
ing and switch the ignition off. See an author-
gins.
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility for assistance. Z\ WARNING
— All work on the battery or electrical system
Battery in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents, or burns. Because of
Praia Ueeece(el)
this, all work must be performed only by an
Because of the complex power supply, all work on authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
batteries such as disconnecting, replacing, etc., Service Facility.
should only be performed by an authorized Audi — Never connect a charging cable or jump
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility > A\. start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle
battery. Only use the connections in the en-
Multiple batteries with different technologies
gine compartment > page 243.
may be installed in your vehicle:
— Vehicle battery (for example, for starting the ZA WARNING

engine, basic power supply) > page 242, 12
California Proposition 65 Warning:
Volt vehicle battery or > page 242, Other bat-
— Battery posts, terminals and related acces-
tery types
sories contain lead and lead compounds,
— Auxiliary battery (for example, for recuperation
chemicals known to the State of California
or optional equipment) > page 242, Other bat-
to cause cancer and reproductive harms.
tery types
Wash hands after handling.
Not running the vehicle for long periods of
time CG) Note
The battery will gradually drain if the vehicle — If the vehicle will be parked for long periods
does not run for long periods of time. To ensure of time, protect the battery against the cold
4K0012721BD
that the vehicle can still be started, the electrical so that it will not be destroyed by “freezing” >
equipment will be limited or switched off. Some
241
= page 243, Charging the 12 Volt vehicle Other battery types

battery.
— There are electrical components under the Explanation of warnings:
cargo floor behind a trim panel that warm Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
up during operation. To reduce the risk of ) forbidden.
the components overheating, do not store
Always keep children away from battery
objects such as blankets under the cargo
@) acid and the battery.
floor. If the components overheat, they will
switch off temporarily. This will be indicated @/ | Always follow the instructions in the oper-
by a message that will be displayed in the fQ) | ating manual.
instrument cluster until the temperature re-
turns to normal. ZA\ WARNING
All work on the batteries must only be per-
12 Volt vehicle battery formed by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility.
Explanation of warnings: — Gases that escape from these different bat-
tery types can be poisonous or flammable.
Always wear eye protection.
— The contents of these battery types can be
corrosive. If any battery contents come into
Battery acid is highly corrosive. Always
contact with the skin, flush the affected
wear protective gloves and eye protection.
area for at least 15 minutes with clean wa-
Fire, sparks, open flame, and smoking are
&
ter. Then wash the affected area with soap.
forbidden. Have the affected area examined by a medi-
A
A highly explosive mixture of gases can cal professional.
form when charging batteries.
@) Note
®
Always keep children away from battery
acid and the battery. Components must not be connected to the
@/ Always follow the instructions in the oper- battery terminals and wires on these battery
oo ating manual. types because this increases the risk of dam-
age, for example due to overvoltage.
© For the sake of the environment
~ ¥ Lead-acid batteries must be disposed of
using methods that will not harm the environ- 2 Hf These types of batteries must be dis-
ment. Do not dispose of them in household posed of using methods that will not harm
trash. They contain harmful substances, such the environment. Do not dispose of them in
as sulfuric acid and lead, and also recyclable household trash. They contain harmful sub-
raw materials. Contact an authorized Audi stances and recyclable raw materials. Contact
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
more information. Service Facility for more information.
242
ing the 12 Volt vehicle battery —A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
tures around 32 °F (0 °C). Do not charge or
use a frozen or thawed battery. If ice forms,
the battery housing can crack and battery
electrolyte can leak out, which increases the
risk of an explosion and chemical burns.
Contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for more informa-
tion.
— Do not connect or disconnect the charging
cable while charging because this increases
Fig. 160 Engine compartment: connectors for a charger or
the risk of an explosion.
jump start cables
Note the safety precautions > page 231, General G) Tips

information, > A\ in Battery general informa- Read all of the manufacturer's instructions
tion on page 241 and > /\. for the charger before charging the battery.
Requirement: only use chargers with a maximum

charging current of 14.8 volts. The battery ca- Windshield washer
bles remain connected. system
> Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
B4M-0135)
ment.
> Open the hood > page 232.
> Press the release lever on the positive terminal
and fold the cover upward > fig. 160.
> Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
start pins according to the instructions. (Hex
head bolt under a cover ©, hex head bolt on
the vehicle body ©).
> Insert the power cable for the charging device Fig. 161 Engine compartment: washer fluid reservoir cap
into the socket and switch the device on.
> At the end of the charging process, switch the Follow the safety precautions > page 231, Gener-
charger off and pull the power cable out of the al information.
socket.
The windshield washer reservoir © contains the
> Remove the charging device terminal clamps.
cleaning solution for the windshield and the
> Close the cover on the positive terminal.
headlight washer system > fig. 161, > page 234.
> Close the hood > page 232.
The reservoir capacity can be found in
=> page 299.
Z\ WARNING
— Never connect a charging cable or jump To reduce the risk of lime scale deposits on the
start cable directly to the 12 Volt vehicle spray nozzles, use clean water with low amounts
battery. Only use the connections in the en- of calcium. Always add window cleaner to the wa-
gine compartment > page 243. ter. When the outside temperatures are cold, an
— Ahighly explosive mixture of gases can form anti-freezing agent should be added to the water
so that it does not freeze.
when charging batteries. Only charge the
4K0012721BD
battery in well-ventilated areas. Message

& Please add washer fluid
243
Fill the washer fluid for the windshield washer Applies to: MMI: To reset the display, select on
system and the headlight washer system* when the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings & Service
the ignition is switched off. > Service intervals.
@) Note C) Note
— The concentration of anti-freezing agent — Only reset the oil change indicator if the oil
must be adjusted to the vehicle operating was changed.
conditions and the climate. A concentration — Following the service intervals is critical to
that is too high can lead to vehicle damage. maintaining the service life and value of
— Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi- your vehicle, especially the engine. Even if
tives to the washer fluid. the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex-
— Do not use a glass cleaner that contains ceed the time for the next service.
paint solvents, because this could damage
the paint.
Service interval display

The service interval display detects when your ve-
hicle is due for service.
The service interval display works in two stages:
— Inspection or oil change reminder: after driv-

ing a certain distance, a message appears in the
instrument cluster display each time the igni-
tion is switched on or off. The remaining dis-
tance or time is displayed briefly.
— Inspection or oil change due: if your vehicle
has reached an inspection or oil change interval
or both intervals at the same time, the mes-
sage Inspection due! or Oil change due! or Oil
change and inspection due! appears briefly af-
ter switching the ignition on or off.
Checking service intervals

You can check the remaining distance or time un-
til the next oil change or next inspection in the
Infotainment system.
Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen: VE-

HICLE > Settings & Service > Service intervals.
Resetting the indicator

An authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility will reset the service interval dis-
play after performing service.
If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interval.
244
Wheels
Wheels —Always adapt your driving to

Wheels and Tires the road and traffic condi-
General information tions. Drive carefully and re-
duce your speed on icy or slip-
> Check your tires regularly for pery roads. Even winter tires
damage, such as punctures,
can lose traction on black ice.
cuts, cracks, and bulges. Remove
foreign objects from the tire () Note
tread.
—Please note that summer and
>If driving over curbs or similar winter tires are designed for
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
the conditions that are typical
proach the curb at an angle. in those seasons. Audi recom-
>Have faulty tires or rims re-
mends using winter tires dur-
placed immediately. ing the winter months. Low
>Protect your tires from oil,
temperatures significantly de-
grease, and fuel.
crease the elasticity of summ-
>Mark tires before removing er tires, which affects traction
them so that the same running
and braking ability. If summer
direction can be maintained if
tires are used in very cold tem-
they are reinstalled. peratures, cracks can form on
>Lay tires flat when storing and the tread bars, resulting in
store them ina cool, dry location
permanent tire damage that
with as little exposure to light as can cause loud driving noise
possible.
and unbalanced tires.
—Burnished, polished or
A WARNING
chromed rims must not be
—Never drive faster than the used in winter driving condi-
maximum permitted speed for tions. The surface of the rims
your tires. This could cause the does not have sufficient corro-
tires to heat up too much. This sion protection for this and
increases the risk of an acci- could be permanently dam-
dent because it can cause the aged by road salt or similar
4K0012721BD
tire to burst. substances.
245
Wheels
Tire designations @) Tire construction

©
2
“R” indicates a radial tire.
2
x
©
oO
©) Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
© Load index and speed rating

The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed. Also
see > A in General information on
page 245.
“EXTRA LOAD”, “xl” or “RF” indi-

cates that the tire is reinforced or
Fig. 162 Tire designations on the side-
wall is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- /Maximum permitted speed
@ Tires for passenger vehicles ing
(if applicable) P up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
“P” indicates a tire for a passen-
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
ger vehicle. “T” indicates a tire
s up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
designated for temporary use. T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
U up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
@ Nominal width
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Nominal width of the tire be- Vv up to 149 mph (240 km/h)?
tween the sidewalls in millime- Zz above 149 mph (240 km/h)?)
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h)?
ters. In general: the larger the
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
number, the wider the tire.
@) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
@) Aspect ratio tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code “ZR”.
Height/width ratio expressed as a
percentage.
246
Wheels
@) US DOT number (TIN) and must also specify the materials

manufacture date used in the tire. These include
The manufacture date is listed on steel, nylon, polyester and other
the tire sidewall (it may only ap- materials.
pear on the inner side of the tire): @ Maximum permitted load
DOT... 2219... This number indicates the maxi-
means, for example, that the tire mum load in kilograms and
was produced in the 22nd week of pounds that the tire can carry.
the year 2019. @ Uniform tire quality grade
Audi Original Tires standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
Audi Original equipment tires resistance
with the designation “AO” have
Treadwear, traction, and tempera-
been specially matched to your
ture ranges > page 262.
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards @ Running direction
for safety and handling. An au- The arrows indicate the running
thorized Audi dealer or author- direction of unidirectional tires.
ized Audi Service Facility will be You must always follow the speci-
able to provide you with more in- fied running direction
formation. => page 277.
(Q) Mud and snow capability Maximum permitted
“M/S” or “M+S” indicates the tire inflation pressure
is suitable for driving on mud and This number indicates the maxi-
snow. /\ indicates a winter tire. mum pressure to which a tire can
Composition of the tire cord be inflated under normal operat-
and materials ing conditions.
The number of plies indicates the

number of rubberized fabric lay-
ers in the tire. In general: the
4K0012721BD
more layers, the more weight a

tire can carry. Tire manufacturers
247
Wheels
Glossary of tire and loading Cord

terminology means the strands forming the
Accessory weight plies in the tire.
means the combined weight (in Cold tire inflation pressure
excess of those standard items means the tire pressure recom-
which may be replaced) of auto- mended by the vehicle manufac-
matic transmission, power steer- turer for a tire of a designated
ing, power brakes, power win- size that has not been driven for
dows, power seats, radio, and more than a couple of miles (kilo-
heater, to the extent that these meters) at low speeds in the three
items are available as factory-in- hour period before the tire pres-
stalled equipment (whether in- sure is measured or adjusted.
stalled or not).
Curb weight
Aspect ratio
means the weight of a motor ve-
means the ratio of the height to hicle with standard equipment in-
the width of the tire in percent. cluding the maximum capacity of
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
low sidewall for improved steer- tioning and additional weight of
ing response and better overall optional equipment.
handling on dry pavement.
Extra load tire
Bead
means a tire designed to operate
means the part of the tire that is at higher loads and at higher in-
made of steel wires, wrapped or flation pressures than the corre-
reinforced by ply cords and that is sponding standard tire. Extra load
shaped to fit the rim. tires may be identified as “XL”,
Bead separation “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF” on
the sidewall.
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
248
Wheels
Gross Axle Weight Rating Maximum (permissible)

inflation pressure
(“GAWR”)
means the load-carrying capacity means the maximum cold infla-

of a single axle system, measured tion pressure to which a tire may
at the tire-ground interfaces. be inflated. Also called “maxi-
mum inflation pressure.”
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(“GVWR”)
Normal occupant weight
means the maximum total loaded means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
weight of the vehicle. times the number of occupants
Groove seated in the vehicle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi-
means the space between two ad-
cle.
jacent tread ribs.
Occupant distribution
Load rating (code)
means distribution of occupants
means the maximum load that a
in a vehicle.
tire is rated to carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find Outer diameter
this information on all tires be- means the overall diameter of an
cause it is not required by law. inflated new tire.
Maximum load rating Overall width
means the load rating fora tire at means the linear distance be-
the maximum permissible infla- tween the exteriors of the side-
tion pressure for that tire. walls of an inflated tire, including
Maximum loaded vehicle elevations due to labeling, deco-
weight rations, or protective bands or
ribs.
means the sum of:
Ply
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weight, and parallel cords.
4K0012721BD
(d) Production options weight
249
Wheels
Production options weight Rim

means the combined weight of means a metal support for a tire
those installed regular production ora tire and tube assembly upon
options weighing over 5 lbs. which the tire beads are seated.
(2.3 kg) in excess of those stand-
Rim diameter
ard items which they replace, not
means nominal diameter of the
previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, in-
bead seat. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
cluding heavy duty brakes, ride
chase new tires to match the new
levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
rim diameter.
battery, and special trim.
Radial ply tire Rim size designation

means rim diameter and width.
means a pneumatic tire in which
the ply cords that extend to the Rim width
beads are laid at substantially means nominal distance between
90 degrees to the centerline of rim flanges.
the tread.
Sidewall
Recommended inflation
means that portion of a tire be-
pressure
tween the tread and bead.
see > page 248, Cold tire infla-
tion pressure. Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
Reinforced tire
designed to be driven for extend-
means a tire designed to operate
ed periods of time. The ratings
at higher loads and at higher in-
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
flation pressures than the corre-
to 186 mph (298 km/h) > table
sponding standard tire. Rein-
on page 246. You may not find
forced tires may be identified as
this information on all tires be-
“XL”, “xl”, “EXTRA LOAD”, or “RF”
cause it is not required by law.
on the sidewall.
The speed rating letter code,
where applicable, is molded on
the tire sidewall and indicates the >
250
Wheels
maximum permissible road parisons among tires. The UTQG is

speeds. See also > A in General not a safety rating and not a guar-
information on page 245. antee that a tire will last for a
prescribed number of miles (kilo-
Tire pressure monitoring
system meters) or perform in a certain
way. It simply gives tire buyers
means a system that detects
additional information to com-
when one or more of a vehicle's
bine with other considerations,
tires are underinflated and illumi-
such as price, brand loyalty and
nates a low tire pressure warning
dealer recommendations. Under
telltale.
UTQG, tires are graded by the tire
Tread manufacturers in three areas:
means that portion of a tire that treadwear, traction, and tempera-
comes into contact with the road. ture resistance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
Tread separation
the sidewalls.
means pulling away of the tread
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
from the tire carcass.
Number (TIN)
Treadwear indicators (TWI) This is the tire’s “serial number”.
means the projections within the It begins with the letters “DOT”
principal grooves designed to give and indicates that the tire meets
a visual indication of the degrees all federal standards. The next
of wear of the tread. See two numbers or letters indicate
= page 254, Treadwear indicator the plant where it was manufac-
for more information on measur- tured, and the last four numbers
ing tire wear. represent the week and year of
manufacture. For example,
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel- DOT... 2219...
oped by the United States Nation- means that the tire was produced
al Highway Traffic Safety Adminis- in the 22nd week of 2019. The
tration (NHTSA) that is designed other numbers are marketing co-
4K0012721BD
to help buyers make relative com- des that may or may not be used >
251
Wheels
by the tire manufacturer. This in- number of seating positions. Re-

formation is used to contact con- fer to the table > table on
sumers if a tire defect requires a page 257 for the number of peo-
recall. ple that correspond to the vehicle
normal load.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo and lug- New tires or wheels
gage load plus 150 lbs. (68 kilo-
Audi recommends having all work
grams) times the vehicle's desig-
on tires or wheels performed by
nated seating capacity.
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle maximum load on the thorized Audi Service Facility.
tire These facilities have the proper
means that load on an individual knowledge and are equipped with
tire that is determined by distrib- the required tools and replace-
uting to each axle its share of the ment parts.
maximum loaded vehicle weight
>New tires do not yet have the
and dividing by two.
optimal gripping properties.
Vehicle normal load on the tire Drive carefully and at moderate
means that load on an individual speeds for the first 350 miles
tire that is determined by distrib- (500 km) with new tires.
uting to each axle its share of the > Only use tires with the same de-
curb weight, accessory weight, sign, size (rolling circumfer-
and normal occupant weight (dis- ence), and as close to the same
tributed in accordance with > ta- tread pattern as possible on all
ble on page 257) and dividing by four wheels.
two. >Do not replace tires individually.
At least replace both tires on the
Occupant loading and distri- same axle at the same time.
bution for vehicle normal load
> Audi recommends that you use
for various designated seating
capacities Audi Original Tires. If you would
like to use different tires, please
Refer to the tire inflation pressure
note that the tires may perform >
label > page 255, fig. 165 for the
252
Wheels
differently even if they are the

same size > (\.
Z\ WARNING
—Do not use steel rims that are
>If you would like to equip your
17 inches or larger. Otherwise,
vehicle with a tire and rim com-
damage to the vehicle and an
bination that is different from
accident could result.
what was installed at the facto-
—Only use tire/rim combina-
ry, consult with an authorized
tions and suitable wheel bolts
Audi dealer or authorized Audi
that have been approved by
Service Facility before making a
Audi. Otherwise, damage to
purchase > A.
the vehicle and an accident
Because the spare tire® is differ- could result.
ent from the regular tires instal- —For technical reasons, it is not
led on the vehicle (such as winter possible to use tires from oth-
tires or wide tires), only use the er vehicles. In some cases, you
spare tire* temporarily in case of cannot even use tires from the
emergency and drive carefully same vehicle model.
while it is in use. It should be re- —Make sure that the tires you
placed with a regular tire as soon select have enough clearance
as possible. to the vehicle. Replacement
Applies to: vehicles with all wheel tires should not be chosen
drive: All four wheels must be simply based on the nominal
equipped with tires that are the size, because tires with a dif-
same brand and have the same ferent construction can differ
construction and tread pattern so greatly even if they are the
that the drive system is not dam- same size. If there is not
aged by different wheel speeds. enough clearance, the tires or
For this reason, in case of emer- the vehicle can be damaged
gency, only use a spare tire* that and this can reduce driving
is the same circumference as the safety and increase the risk of
regular tires. an accident.
4K0012721BD
253
Wheels
—Only use tires that are more —Inflation pressure that is too low
than six years old when abso- or high can increase tire wear
lutely necessary and drive considerably.
carefully when doing so. —Driving quickly through curves,
—Do not use run-flat tires on rapid acceleration, and heavy
your vehicle. Using them when braking increase tire wear.
not permitted can lead to ve- —Have an authorized Audi dealer
hicle damage or accidents. or authorized Audi Service Facili-
—If you install wheel covers on ty check the wheel alignment if
the vehicle, make sure they al- there is unusual wear.
low enough air circulation to —Have the wheels rebalanced if an
cool the brake system. If they imbalance is causing noticeable
do not, this could increase the vibration in the steering wheel.
risk of an accident. If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear
Tire wear and damage more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain
N treadwear indicators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are
LA
1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are

spaced evenly around the tire per-
Fig. 163 Tire profile: treadwear indica- pendicular to the running direc-
tor tion > fig. 163. The letters “TWI”
Tire wear
or triangles on the tire sidewall
indicate the location of the tread-
Check the tires regularly for wear.
wear indicators.
The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth !) when they >
) Obey any applicable regulations in the

country where the vehicle is being oper-
ated.
254
Wheels
have worn down to the treadwear

indicators. Replace the tires with
Z\ WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or
new ones > A.
uneven tread depths on the
Tire rotation tires can reduce driving safety.
Rotating the tires regularly is rec- This can increase the risk of an
ommended to ensure the tires accident because it has a nega-
wear evenly. To rotate the tires, tive effect on handling, driving
install the tires from the rear axle through curves, and braking,
on the front axle and vice versa. and because it increases the
This will allow the tires to have risk of hydroplaning when driv-
approximately the same length of ing through deep puddles.
service life.
Tire pressure
For unidirectional tires, make sure
the tires are installed according to
B4H-0664
the running direction indicated on
the tire sidewall > page 277.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
ten occur in locations that are hid-
den. Unusual vibrations in the ve-
hicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that there is tire damage.
B8K-1151
Reduce your speed immediately.

Check the tires for damage. If no
DIMENSIONS | _ PRESSION DES PNEUS A FROID
damage is visible from the out- AVANT a KPA, Ml PSI
REAR
side, drive slowly and carefully to ARRIERE
‘SPARE
DE SECOURS
Wa KPA,
a KPA,
Ml PSI
I PSI
the nearest authorized Audi deal-

er or authorized Audi Service Fa- Fig. 165 Tire pressure label
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
The correct tire pressure for tires
ed.
installed at the factory is listed on>
4K0012721BD
255
Wheels
a label. The label is located on the

B-pillar > fig. 164, > fig. 165.
Z\ WARNING
Always adapt the tire pressure
Use the tire pressure specified for to your driving style and the ve-
a normal vehicle load when the hicle load.
vehicle is partially loaded > table —Overloading can lead to loss of
on page 257. If driving the vehi- vehicle control and increase
cle when fully loaded, you must
the risk of an accident. Read
increase the tire pressure to the and follow the important safe-
maximum specified pressure > A.
ty precautions in > page 258.
Checking and correcting tire —The tire must flex more if the
pressure tire pressure is too low or if
>Check the tire pressure at least the vehicle speed or load are
once per month and also check it too high. This heats the tire up
before every long drive. too much. This increases the
> Always check the tire pressure risk of an accident because it
when the tires are cold. Do not can cause the tire to burst and
reduce the pressure if it increas- result in loss of vehicle con-
es when the tires are warm. trol.
>Refer to the sticker > fig. 165 —Incorrect tire pressure increas-
for the correct tire pressure. es tire wear and has a negative
>Correct the tire pressure if nec- effect on driving and braking
essary. behavior, which increases the
> Store the new tire pressure in risk of an accident.
the MMI & page 264.
> Check the pressure in the spare @) Note
tire*. Always maintain the maxi- Replace lost valve caps to re-
mum temperature that is speci- duce the risk of damage to the
fied for the tire. tire valves.
(*) For the sake of the envi-

ronment
Tire pressure that is too low in-
creases fuel consumption.
256
Wheels
Uw elec m-] oc
Please note that the information Make sure that the tire designa-
contained in the following table tion on your tire matches the des-
was correct at the time of print- ignation on the tire pressure label
ing, and the information is sub- and the tire pressure table.
ject to change. If there are any The following table lists recom-
differences, you should always mended tire pressures in cold
follow the tire pressure sticker tires according to the load and
> i ‘ . 4
page 255, fig. 164. the size of the tires installed.
Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure
Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 3 people)?
Front Rear Front Rear
PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA | PSI | kPA

AG sedan: 245/45R19102H| 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220) 35 | 240
2.0L 255/40 R20101Y | 32 220 | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240
4cylinders /555/40R20101H| 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 33 | 230 | 36 | 250
255/35 R21 98Y 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 33 | 230 | 36 | 250
AG sedan: 245/45R19102H| 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 36 | 250
3.0L 255/40 R20101Y | 32 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 | 36 | 250
Seylinders — [555740R20101H | 33 | 230 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 38 | 260
255/35 R21 98Y 33 | 230 | 32 | 220 | 36 | 250 | 38 | 260
S6 sedan: 255/40R20101Y | 35 | 240 | 32 | 220 | 39 | 270 41 | 280
255/35 R21 98Y 39 | 270 | 36 | 250 | 44 | 300 | 45 | 310
2.9L
6-cylinder
AGallroad: |245/45R20103Y | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220) 35 | 240
235/50R19103H| 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 38 | 260
3-0 245/45R20103H| 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 35 | 240 | 38 | 260
6-cylinder 245/40R21100Y | 32 | 220 | 32 | 220 | 35 | 240 38 | 260
a) Two people in the front, one person in the rear
AN WARNING pressure >> page 255 and load

. limits > page 258.
Please note the important safe- pag
4K0012721BD
ty precautions regarding tire
257
Wheels
Tires and vehicle load limits ger at a designated seating posi-

tion and the total weight of any
There are limits to the amount of
luggage in the vehicle. If you tow
load or weight that any vehicle
a trailer, the weight of the trailer
and any tire can carry. A vehicle
hitch and the tongue weight of
that is overloaded will not handle
the loaded trailer must be includ-
well and is more difficult to stop.
ed as part of the vehicle load.
Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al- The Gross Axle Weight Rating
so damage important parts of the (“GAWR”) is the maximum load
vehicle and can lead to sudden that can be applied at each of the
tire failure, including a blowout vehicle’s two axles.
and sudden deflation that can The fact that there is an upper
cause the vehicle to crash. limit to your vehicle’s Gross Vehi-
Your safety and that of your pas- cle Weight Rating means that the
sengers also depends on making total weight of whatever is being
sure that load limits are not ex- carried in the vehicle (including
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev- the weight of a trailer hitch and
erybody and everything in and on the tongue weight of the loaded
the vehicle. These load limits are trailer) is limited. The more pas-
technically referred to as the vehi- sengers in the vehicle or passen-
cle’s Gross Vehicle Weight Rating gers who are heavier than the
(“GVWR”). standard weights assumed mean
that less weight can be carried as
The “GVWR” includes the weight
luggage.
of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
stalled accessories, a full tank of The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
plus maximum load. The maxi- are listed on the safety compli-
mum load includes the number of ance sticker label located on the
passengers that the vehicle is in- driver’s side B-pillar.
tended to carry (“seating capaci-
ty”) with an assumed weight of
150 lbs. (68 kg) for each passen-
258
Wheels
Z\ WARNING Determining correct load

Talis
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash Use the example below to calcu-
or other accident, serious per- late the total weight of the pas-
sonal injury, and even death. sengers and luggage or other
—Carrying more weight than things that you plan to transport
your vehicle was designed to so that you can make sure that
carry will prevent the vehicle your vehicle will not be overload-
from handling properly and in- ed.
crease the risk of the loss of Steps for Determining Correct
vehicle control. Load Limit
—The brakes on a vehicle that 1. Locate the statement “THE
has been overloaded may not COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCU-
be able to stop the vehicle PANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
within a safe distance. NEVER EXCEED XXX KG OR XXX
—Tires on a vehicle that has LBS” on your vehicle’s placard
been overloaded can fail sud- (tire inflation pressure label)
denly, including a blowout and => page 255, fig. 165.
sudden deflation, causing loss 2. Determine the combined
of control and a crash. weight of the driver and pas-
—Always make sure that the to- sengers that will be riding in
tal load being transported - your vehicle.
including the weight of a trail- 3. Subtract the combined weight
er hitch and the tongue of the driver and passengers
weight of a loaded trailer - from “XXX” kilograms or “XXX”
does not make the vehicle pounds shown on the sticker
heavier than the vehicle’s => page 255, fig. 165.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. 4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the “XXX” amount
4K0012721BD
equals 1400 lbs. and there will >
259
Wheels
be five 150 lbs. passengers in Z\ WARNING

your vehicle, the amount of Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
correctly can become loose and result in loss
available cargo and luggage
of vehicle control, which increases the risk of
load capacity is 650 lbs. an accident. For the correct tightening specifi-
cation, see > page 277, Finishing.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
— Always keep the wheel bolts and the threads
lbs.) in the wheel hub clean and free of grease.
5. Determine the combined — Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim.
— Always have damaged rims repaired by an
weight of luggage and cargo authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
being loaded on the vehicle. Service Facility. Never repair or disassemble
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
That weight may not safely ex-
of an accident.
ceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculat- Loose wheel warning
Applies to: vehicles with loose wheel warning
ed in Step 4.
Within the limits of the system, the loose wheel
6. If your vehicle will be towing a warning in the instrument cluster warns you if
trailer, load from your trailer one or more wheels are loose.
will be transferred to your vehi- Using the ABS sensors, the loose wheel warning
cle. Consult this manual to de- system compares the vibration characteristics of
the individual tires. If one or more wheels are
termine how this reduces the loose, it will be indicated in the instrument clus-
available cargo and luggage ter display with the fi indicator light and a mes-
sage. If only one wheel is affected, the location
load capacity of your vehicle. of that wheel will be indicated.
>Check the tire sidewall
Messages
(=> page 246, fig. 162) to deter- fi Wheel bolts loose. Please safely stop the ve-
mine the designated load rating hicle and check all wheel bolts!
for a specific tire. Loose wheel warning for at least one wheel > A\.
Check the wheel bolts on all wheels with the
wheel wrench (vehicle tool kit). Have the tighten-
Wheel bolts and rims
ing specification checked as soon as possible with
Wheel bolts a torque wrench. Drive carefully until then. For
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tighten the correct tightening specification, see
=> page 277, Finishing.
easily.
fl Wheel assessment active. Please continue
Rims
driving carefully
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted wheel
After this message appears and you have checked
covers* consist of multiple pieces. These compo-
the wheel bolts, the assessment phase begins
nents were bolted together using special bolts
when the vehicle is in motion. This may take sev-
and a special procedure. You must not repair or
eral minutes.
disassemble them > A\.
260
Wheels
& Loose wheel warning: malfunction! See > Check the tire pressure after installing wheels
owner's manual => page 255.
There is a system malfunction. Drive immediately The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great-
to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of
Service Facility to have the malfunction repaired. 0.16 in (4 mm). The characteristics of winter tires
also decrease greatly as the tire ages, regardless
ZA WARNING of the remaining tread.
Wheel bolts that are tightened incorrectly can
become loose and result in loss of vehicle con- @) For the sake of the environment
trol, which increases the risk of an accident. Reinstall summer tires at the appropriate
— If a message appears, reduce your speed im- time, because they provide better handling
mediately and avoid any hard steering or when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
braking maneuvers. Stop as soon as possible tires cause less road noise, tire wear, and fuel
and check the wheel bolts. consumption.
— Check your wheels for damage. Have the
damaged wheels checked and/or replaced (i) Tips
immediately by an authorized Audi dealer or You can also use all season tires instead of
authorized Audi Service Facility. winter tires. Please note that in some coun-
— Under certain conditions (such as a sporty tries where winter tires are required, only win-
driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved ter tires with the 4 symbol may be permit-
roads), the message may be delayed. ted.
— The driver is responsible for ensuring that
the wheels are attached correctly.
G) Tips Snow chains improve both driving and braking in

— The loose wheel warning system can also winter road conditions.
stop working when there is an ESC malfunc- > Only install snow chains on the front wheels.
tion. > Check and correct the seating of the snow
— Using snow chains may result in a system chains after driving a few feet, if necessary. Fol-
malfunction. low the instructions from the manufacturer.
> Note the maximum speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h). Observe the local regulations.
Winter tires significantly improve the vehicle's Use of snow chains is only permitted with certain
handling when driving in winter conditions. Be- rim/tire combinations due to technical reasons.
cause of their construction (width, compound, Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
tread pattern), summer tires provide less traction ized Audi Service Facility to see if you may use
on ice and snow. snow chains.
> Use winter tires on all four wheels. Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
> Only use winter tires that are approved for your more than 0.40 inch (10.5 mm) in height, includ-
vehicle. ing the chain lock.
> Please note that the maximum permitted
You must remove the snow chains on roads with-
speed may be lower with winter tires > A\ in
out snow. Otherwise, you could impair driving
General information on page 245. An author-
ability and damage the tires.
4K0012721BD
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-

cility can inform you about the maximum per-
mitted speed for your tires.
261
Wheels
ZA WARNING an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility.
Using incorrect snow chains or installing snow
chains incorrectly can result in loss of vehicle Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand-
control, which increases the risk of an acci- ard tires.
dent.
Uniform tire quality grading
() Note — Tread wear
— Snow chains can damage the rims and — Traction AAABC
wheel covers* if the chains come into direct
— Temperature ABC
contact with them. Remove the wheel cov-
ers* first. Use coated snow chains. Quality grades can be found where applicable on
— Do not install and use snow chains if there is the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
a malfunction in the air suspension*, be- maximum section width > page 246, fig. 162.
cause the vehicle height will be very low. If For example: Tread wear 200, Traction AA, Tem-
you drive with snow chains anyway, the perature A.
wheel housings and other vehicle compo-
nents can be severely damaged. All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
@ Tips
Tread wear
When using snow chains, it may be advisable
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
to limit the ESC > page 113.
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
Low-profile tires ernment test course.
Applies to: vehicles with low-profile tires
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
Compared to other tire/rim combinations, low- and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern-
profile tires offer a wider tread surface anda ment course as a tire graded 100.
larger rim diameter with shorter tire sidewalls.
This results in an agile driving style. However, it The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may reduce the level of comfort and increase
road noise when driving on roads in poor condi- may depart significantly from the norm due to
tion. variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Low-profile tires can become damaged more
quickly than standard tires when driving over Traction
large bumps, potholes, manhole covers, and The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
curbs. Therefore, it is particularly important to AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the tire's
maintain the correct tire pressure > page 255. ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and der controlled conditions on specified govern-
rims, drive very carefully on poor roads. ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance
Check your wheels regularly every 2,000 mi SA.
(3,000 km) for damage. For example, check for
bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/cracks Temperature
on the rims. The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by generation of heat and its ability to dissipate >
262
Wheels
heat when tested under controlled conditions on As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure tell-
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
tale when one or more of your tires is significant-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life,
ly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
tire failure > A\.
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform- them to the proper pressure. Driving ona signifi-
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un- cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than and may affect the vehicle's handling and stop-
the minimum required by law. ping ability.
ZA WARNING Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for

proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is sponsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
based on straight-ahead braking traction even if under-inflation has not reached the level
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac- sure telltale.
teristics.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
ZA WARNING malfunction indicator to indicate when the sys-
tem is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
mately one minute and then remain continuously
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
possible tire failure.
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists.
ZA WARNING
Temperature grades apply to tires that are
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
properly inflated and not over or underinflat- the system may not be able to detect or signal
ed. low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions
may occur for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
Tire pressure monitoring wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
system from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
(1) General notes
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), that the replacement or alternate tires and
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat- wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the properly.
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
4K0012721BD
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel, you should determine the proper tire infla-
tion pressure for those tires).
263
Wheels
If the tire pressure monitoring indicator minute and then stays on, there is system mal-
appears function. Try to store the correct tire pressures
Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in- = page 264. In some cases, you must drive for
dicator
several minutes after storing the pressures until
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument the indicator light turns off. If the indicator light
cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low does turn off or turns on again after a short peri-
or if there is a system malfunction. od of time, drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
Using the ABS sensors, the tire pressure monitor- have the malfunction corrected.
ing system compares the tire tread circumference
and vibration characteristics of the individual ZA\ WARNING
tires. If the pressure changes in one or more
— If the tire pressure indicator appears in the
tires, this is indicated in the instrument cluster
display, reduce your speed immediately and
display with an indicator light (J and a message.
avoid any hard steering or braking maneu-
If only one tire is affected, the location of that
vers. Stop as soon as possible and check the
tire will be indicated.
tires and their pressure.
The tire pressures must be stored again each — The driver is responsible for maintaining the
time you change the pressures (switching be- correct tire pressure. You must check the
tween partial and full load pressure) or after tire pressure regularly.
changing or replacing a tire on your vehicle — Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
= page 264. The tire pressure monitoring system driving style, winter conditions, or unpaved
only monitors the tire pressure you have stored. roads), the tire pressure monitoring system
Refer to the tire pressure label for the recom- indicator may be delayed.
mended tire pressure for your vehicle
=> page 255, fig. 165. G) Tips
Tire tread circumference and vibration character- —The tire pressure monitoring system can al-
istics can change and cause a tire pressure warn- so stop working when there is an ESC mal-
ing if: function.
— Using snow chains may result in a system
— The tire pressure in one or more tires is too low
malfunction.
— The tires have structural damage
—The tire pressure monitoring system in your
— The tire was replaced or the tire pressure was
Audi was calibrated with “Audi Original
changed and it was not stored > page 264
Tires” > page 252. Using these tires is rec-
— Tires that are only partially used are replaced
ommended.
with new tires
Indicator lights Storing tire pressures

Applies to: vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring System in-
If the @ indicator light turns on, there is a loss dicator
of pressure in at least one tire .> A\ Check the
tires and replace or repair if necessary. Check and If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced,
correct the pressures of all four tires and store it must be confirmed in the MMI.
the pressure again > page 264.
> Before storing the tire pressures, make sure the
ia Tire pressure: malfunction! See owner's tire pressures in all four tires meet the speci-
manual fied values and are adapted to the load
=>page 255.
if io appears after switching the ignition on or
> Switch the ignition on.
while driving and the @ indicator light in the in-
strument cluster blinks for approximately one
VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Tire pressure >
264
Wheels
monitoring > Store tire pressure > Yes, store

now.
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains

are installed.
4K0012721BD
265
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning seals on the side windows, doors, hood, luggage
compartment lid, or sunroof*, or at tires, rubber
General information hoses, insulating material, sensors*, camera
lenses*, or the laser scanner*. Keep a distance of
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
at least 16 in (40 cm).
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
and paint defects on the body. washer.
The required cleaning and care products can be Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
(60 °C).
structions for use on the packaging.
Automatic car wash
ZA\ WARNING Spray off the vehicle before washing.
— Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed
can be dangerous to your health.
and the windshield wipers are off. Follow instruc-
— Always store cleaning and care products out
tions from the car wash operator, especially if
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi-
there are accessories attached to your vehicle.
soning.
If possible, use car washes that do not have
@ For the sake of the environment brushes.
— Purchase environmentally-friendly cleaning Washing by hand
products if possible.
— Do not dispose of cleaning and care prod- Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work-
ucts with household trash. ing downward using a soft sponge or cleaning
brush. Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Car washes Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by

hand
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve- To reduce the risk of damaging the paint when
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High washing, first remove dust and large particles
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight from your vehicle. Insects, grease spots, and fin-
increase the damaging effect. gerprints are best removed with a special cleaner
for matte finish paint.
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with
plenty of water. Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To re-
duce the risk of damaging the paint surface, do
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree not use too much pressure.
sap are best removed with plenty of water and a
microfiber cloth. Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with water. Then
clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once fiber cloth.
road salt stops being used for the season.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
Pressure washers dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois. >
When washing your vehicle with a pressure wash-
er, always follow the operating instructions pro-
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially
important in regard to the pressure and spraying
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the
266
Care and cleaning
ZA\ WARNING height and width of the inside of the car

wash.
—To reduce the risk of accidents, only wash —To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
the vehicle when the ignition is off and fol- wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
low the instructions from the car wash
—To reduce the risk of damage, do not wash
operator.
decorative decals* with a pressure washer.
—To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself —To reduce the risk of damage to the surface,
from sharp metal components when wash- do not use insect removing sponges, kitchen
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel
sponges, or similar items.
housings.
— When washing matte finish painted vehicle
— After washing the vehicle, the braking effect components:
may be delayed due to moisture on the
— To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
brake rotors or ice in the winter. This in-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard
creases the risk of an accident. The brakes
wax.
must be dried with a few careful brake appli-
— Never use protective wax. It can destroy
cations.
the matte finish effect.
() Note — Do not place any stickers or magnetic

signs on vehicle components painted with
— If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car matte finish paint. The paint could be
wash, you must fold the exterior mirrors in damaged when the stickers or magnets
to reduce the risk of damage to the mirrors. are removed.
Power folding exterior mirrors* must only
be folded in and out using the power folding (@) For the sake of the environment
function.
Only wash the vehicle in facilities specially de-
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rims
signed for that purpose. This will reduce the
and tires, compare the width between the
risk of dirty water contaminated with oil from
wheels on your vehicle with the distance be-
entering the sewer system.
tween the guide rails in the car wash.
—To reduce the risk of damage, compare the
height and width of your vehicle with the
Cleaning and care information

When cleaning and caring for individual vehicle are not listed, consult an authorized Audi dealer
components, refer to the following tables. The or authorized Audi Service Facility. Also follow
information contained there is simply recommen- the information found in > A.
dations. For questions or for components that
Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solution
Windshield wiper | Deposits Soft cloth with glass cleaner > page 57
blades
Headlights/ Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
Tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft cloth with solvent-free cleaning solution
4K0012721BD
Camera lenses Camera lenses: soft cloth with alcohol-free cleaning solu-
tion
Snow/ice Hand brush/solvent-free de-icing spray >
267
Care and cleaning

Laser scanner Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
Wheels Road salt Water
Brake dust Acid-free special cleaning solution
Exhaust tail Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitable for stainless steel, if nec-
pipes essary
Decorative parts/ | Deposits Mild soap solution ®, a cleaning solution suitable for stain-
trim less steel, if necessary
Paint Paint damage Repair with touch-up paint
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then treat with hard wax; for questions, con-
sult an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility.
Corrosion Have it removed by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility.
Water no longer Treat with hard wax (at least twice per year)
beads on the surface
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat with suitable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not contain any protectant
tected/paint looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen with water immediately and remove with a micro-
sects, bird droppings, fiber cloth
tree sap, and road
salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap solution ® and a soft
taminants such as cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon compo-___| Deposits Clean the same way as painted components > page 266
nents
Decorative decals | Deposits Soft sponge with a mild soap solution®
a) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Interior cleaning
Window glass Deposits Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorative parts/ | Deposits Mild soap solution®
trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution ®), detergent-free plastic cleaning solu-
tion, if necessary
Displays/instru- Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluster instrument cluster can be removed using a soft brush.
268
Care and cleaning

Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a mild soap solution®)
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap solution ®), allow to dry before letting them re-
tract
Textiles Deposits adhering to | Vacuum cleaner
artificial leather, | the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits Absorbent cloth and mild soap solution®
such as coffee, tea,
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Apply a mild soap solution ®), blot away the dissolved oil or
such as oil, make-up, dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
etc.
Specific types of de- Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
posits such as ink, afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary ®
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc;
Natural leather Fresh stains Cotton cloth with a mild soap solution®
Water-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth
such as coffee, tea, Dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
blood, etc.
Oil-based deposits Fresh stains: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
such as oil, make-up, for leather
etc. Dried stains: grease dissolving spray
Specific types of de- Spot remover suitable for leather
posits such as ink,
nail polish, latex
paint, shoe polish,
etc.
Care Regularly apply conditioning cream that protects from
light and penetrates into the material. Use special colored
conditioning cream, if necessary.
Carbon compo- __| Deposits Clean the same way as plastic components
nents
2) Mild soap solution: maximum two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
ZA WARNING @) Note
The windshield must not be treated with wa- — Headlights and tail lights
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un- — Never clean headlights or tail lights with a
der unfavorable conditions, such as wetness, dry cloth or sponge.
darkness, and when the sun is low, these coat- — Do not use any cleaning products that con-
ings can cause increased glare, which increas- tain alcohol, because they could cause
es the risk of an accident. They can also cause cracks to form.
4K0012721BD
wiper blade chatter. — Wheels
269
Care and cleaning
— Never use any paint polish or other abra- — To reduce the risk of damage, do not pol-
sive materials. ish decorative decals that have a matte or
— Damage to the protective layer on the printed finish.
rims, such as stone chips or scratches, — Due to the risk of damage, do not use an
must be repaired immediately. ice scraper to remove snow and ice on win-
— Camera lenses dows with decorative decals on them.
— Never use warm or hot water to remove — Displays and instrument cluster
snow or ice from the camera lens. This — Make sure that the display and instrument
could cause the lens to crack. cluster are switched off and have cooled
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials or down before cleaning. To switch off the
alcohol to clean the camera lens. This upper and lower display, select on the
could cause scratches and cracks. MMI home screen: SETTINGS > Display &
— Laser scanner brightness > MMI > Screen cleaning.
— Never use abrasive cleaning materials to — Displays, the instrument cluster, and the
clean the laser scanner. This could cause trim surrounding it must not be cleaned
scratches and cracks. with dry cleaning methods because they
— Door windows could become scratched.
— Remove snow and ice on windows and ex- — Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
terior mirrors with a plastic scraper. To re- tween the instrument cluster and the
duce the risk of scratches, move the scra- trim, because that could cause damage.
per only in one direction and not back and — Controls
forth. — Make sure that no fluids enter the con-
— Never remove snow or ice from door win- trols, because this could cause damage.
dows and mirrors using warm or hot water — Safety belts
because this could cause cracks to form. — Do not remove the safety belts to clean
—To reduce the risk of damage to the rear them.
window defogger, do not apply any stick- — Never clean safety belts or their compo-
ers on the heating wires on the inside of nents with chemicals or with corrosive flu-
the window. ids or solvents and never allow sharp ob-
— Decorative parts and trim jects to come into contact with the safety
— Never use chrome care or cleaning prod- belts. This could cause damage to the belt
ucts. webbing.
— Paint —If there is damage to the webbing, the
connections, the retractors, or the buck-
—To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
must be free of dirt and dust before pol- les, have them replaced by an authorized
ishing or waxing. Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility.
—To prevent paint damage, do not polish or
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight. — Textiles, artificial leather, and Alcantara
—To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not — Never treat artificial leather or Alcantara
polish away rust spots. with leather care products, solvents, floor
— Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi- polish, shoe polish, spot remover, or simi-
ately because they could damage the lar products.

paint. — Have a cleaning specialist remove stub-
— Decorative decals born stains to reduce the risk of damage.
—To reduce the risk of damage, do not use
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
any rough powder or abrasive cleaning
products.
270
Care and cleaning
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry

the seat.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seat covers.
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
— Natural leather
— Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
— Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
— Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
— Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry
the seat.
—To help prevent the leather from fading,
do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
@) Tips
— Insects are easier to remove from paint that
has been freshly waxed.
— Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming.
— Decorative decals can age due to environ-
mental conditions, which can result in dam-
age such as brittleness. The color may fade
if exposed to excessive sunlight.
Taking your vehicle out

of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-
ice for a Long period of time, contact an author-
ty. They will advise you of important measures,
such as corrosion protection, service, and storage
4K0012721BD
procedures. Also follow the information about

the vehicle battery > page 241.
271
Emergency assistance
Emergency assistance > Applies to: sedan: Unhook the cargo floor cover
again before closing the luggage compartment
General information lid.
> Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving

@ Tips
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event
of a flat tire, park the vehicle ona level surface. The vehicle jack* does not require any mainte-
If you are ona steep hill, be especially careful. nance.
> Set the parking brake.
> Switch the emergency flashers on. Tire mobility kit
> Have the passengers exit the vehicle. They
should move to a safe place, for example be-
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
hind a guard rail.
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
Z\ WARNING tions > page 272.
Follow the steps given above. This is for your > Set the parking brake.
protection and the for the safety of others on > Select the “P” position.
the road. > Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible > page 272.
Equipment
Using the tire mobility kit
e tool kit, tire mobility kit, a Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
vehicle jack
Applies to: vehicles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit,
B8U-0100
and vehicle jack
Fig. 167 Tire: tire damage that cannot be repaired
The tire repair is only meant for temporary use.

Fig. 166 Luggage compartment: cargo floor cover
Change the damaged tire as soon as possible
oA.
The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack*, tire mobility
kit*, and compressor* are stored in the luggage If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,
compartment under the cargo floor cover do not remove the object from the tire.
> fig. 166.
The tire mobility kit can be used at temperatures
> Lift the cargo floor by the plastic handle as low as -4 °F (-20 °C).
> fig. 166.
The tire mobility kit must not be used:
> Applies to: sedan: Hook the handle into the lug-
gage compartment seal. —If the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
> Applies to: vehicles with spare tire: Turn the than 0.16 in (4 mm) @ © fig. 167
handle counter-clockwise and remove the spare — If the rim is damaged @)
tire. — If you have driven with very low tire pressure or
without air in the tire @)
272
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Repairing tires

Service Facility for assistance in these situations. Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
ZA\ WARNING
[RAZ-0213
— Please note that the tire mobility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
ly be used temporarily.
— The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothing.
- If tire sealant comes into contact with your
eyes or your skin, thoroughly rinse the af-
fected area immediately with clean water.
— Do not inhale the fumes.
Ma
— If you swallow any of the tire sealant, thor- 5
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and igq
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention immediately.
— Change your clothing immediately if it
comes into contact with tire sealant.
— If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
— Keep the tire sealant away from children.
Fig. 169 Tire mobility kit connection
@ Tips
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
— If sealant leaks, allow it to dry in place. You out and ready for use > page 272.
can then peel it off like a sticker.
— Note the expiration date on the sealant bot- Setting up the tire mobility kit
tle. Replace the tire sealant at an authorized >» Remove the connector (8) and pressure hose (4)
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa- from the bottom of the housing.
cility. > Connect the compressor pressure hose @ Dto
— Radio reception can be interrupted when the flange ©) on the tire sealant bottle @.
operating the compressor. > Insert the sealant bottle with the flange at the
— Follow the legal regulations that are appli- bottom into the opening @) on the top of the
cable in the country where you are operating compressor housing.
the vehicle. > Remove the valve cap from the faulty tire.
> Connect the filler hose (8) to the valve ©)
> fig. 169.
> Connect the plug @) © fig. 168 to an outlet in
the vehicle.
> Switch the ignition on.
Inflating a tire
> Move the switch (7) > fig. 169 on the compres-
sor into position I.
4K0012721BD
D_ The compressor may look different. However, the way it is

operated is generally the same.
273.
> Inflate the tire to between 29 psi (200 kPA) — If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
and 36 psi (250 kPA) and read the pressure on authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
the gauge. Service Facility for assistance.
> If this tire pressure is not reached, remove the
filler hose. Drive slowly approximately 33 feet (@) For the sake of the environment
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sealant
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
can be distributed in the tire. Inflate the tire
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
again > A\.
Service Facility for disposal.
Z\ WARNING G) Tips
— Read and follow the manufacturer's safety Remember to obtain a new bottle of sealant
precautions on the compressor and in the in- from an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
structions on the bottle of sealant. Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
— Ifa tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
Replacing wheels
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not con-
tinue driving.
— If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
You must complete the preparation before
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
changing a tire.
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
> Read and follow the important safety precau-
@ Tips tions > page 272.
Do not operate the compressor for more than > Set the parking brake.
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat. > Select the “P” position.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con- > When towing a trailer: disconnect the trailer
tinue to use it. from your vehicle.
> Lay out the vehicle tool kit > page 272 and the
spare tire > page 278.
Completing
Applies to: vehicles with tire mobility kit
> Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: Select
on the home screen: VEHICLE > Settings &
> Affix the sticker that says "max. 50 mph (max. Service > Air suspension: wheel change.
80 km/h)" that is provided with the tire mobili- > Switch the ignition off.
ty kit within the driver's field of vision.
> Stop the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi- ZA\ WARNING
nutes and check the tire pressure.
The vehicle must also be secured to prevent it
> If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130
from rolling when using the vehicle jack*. Use
kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do
suitable objects to block the front and back of
not continue driving.
the wheel that is diagonal from the wheel
with the flat tire.
ZX WARNING
Pay attention to the following after repairing
the tire:
— Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
— Avoid hard acceleration or braking and driv-
ing fast around curves.
— The vehicle may become more difficult to
control.
274
Removing the caps authorized Audi Service Facility and give them
the code number.
N3
6
30
‘ o
a
+ Loosening the wheel bolts
a
B4S-0221
SS)
a Ao
Fig. 170 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps
> Slide the plastic clip from the vehicle tool kit
onto the cap until it engages > fig. 170. Fig. 172 Wheel: loosening the wheel bolts
>» Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
> Slide the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit
OTe LL At ee) all the way onto the wheel bolt).
Applies to: vehicles with anti-theft wheel bolts > Turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn to
the left. To achieve the required torque, hold
the end of the wheel wrench. If the wheel bolt
B4H-0470
will not loosen, press carefully on the wheel
ue
wrench with your foot. Hold onto the vehicle se-
i curely while doing this and make sure your foot-

ing is stable.
ZA WARNING
To reduce the risk of an accident, only loosen
the wheel bolts gently one turn before raising
Fig. 171 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap and adapter
the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
You need a special adapter in the vehicle tool kit
to remove the anti-theft wheel bolts.
> Remove the cap (2).

> Slide the adapter (@) all the way onto the anti-
theft wheel bolt @.
> Slide the wheel wrench from the vehicle tool kit
all the way onto the adapter (3).
> Loosen the wheel bolt > page 275.
G) Tips
Note the code number for the wheel bolt
adapter and store it in a safe place separate
from the vehicle. If you need a replacement
adapter, contact an authorized Audi dealer or
4K0012721BD
D_ You need the matching adapter in order to loosen and

tighten anti-theft wheel bolts* > page 275.
275
Raising the vehicle Z\ WARNING

Applies to: vehicles with vehicle jack
—To reduce the risk of injury, make sure no
one is in the vehicle before raising it.
— Make sure the vehicle jack is stable. The risk
of injury is increased when the ground is
slippery or soft, because the vehicle jack
could slide or sink.
— Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack
provided by the factory. If you use a vehicle
jack designed for another vehicle, your vehi-
cle could slip and cause injury.
— Position the vehicle jack only at the desig-
nated mounting points on the side sill and
align the jack. Otherwise, the vehicle jack
could slip and cause an injury if it does not
have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
—To reduce the risk of injury, do not raise any
other vehicles or other loads using the vehi-
cle jack provided by the factory.
— Applies to: vehicles with air suspension:
Changes in temperature or load can affect
Fig. 174 Sill: positioning the vehicle jack the height of the stopped vehicle.
—To reduce the risk of an accident, never start
> Place the vehicle jack from the vehicle tool kit the engine when the vehicle is raised.
ona firm surface. Use a flat, stable support if —To reduce the risk of injury, no work should
necessary. On a slippery surface such as tile, be performed under the vehicle while it is
you should use a non-slip pad such as a rubber raised.
mat > /\.
> Find the marking on the sill that is closest to () Note
the tire that will be changed > fig. 173. Behind Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the
the marking, there is a lifting point on the side vehicle jack only at the designated mounting
sill for the vehicle jack. points on the side sill. Otherwise, your vehicle
> Raise the vehicle jack under the lifting point on could be damaged.
the side sill until the bracket on the jack @)
completely covers the notch on your vehicle.
> Align the vehicle jack so the bracket @) covers
the notch and the base (2) is flat on the ground.
The base @) must be directly under the mount-
ing point @.
> Mount the crank on the vehicle jack: insert the
crank into the opening on the handwheel. Turn
the crank to the left or right to secure it.
> Continue raising the vehicle jack with the crank
until the wheel lifts off the ground slightly.
276
Removing and installing a wheel > Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*.
@Rg
Tt > Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagonal pattern
“ using the wheel wrench.
0
oO
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen and

tighten easily. Check the contact surfaces for the
wheel and hub. Contaminants on these surfaces
must be removed before installing the wheel.
Z\ WARNING
— Read and follow the important information
and notes under > page 252.
B8K-1477
— Never use the hex socket in the screwdriver
handle to tighten the wheel bolts. Using the
hex socket will not achieve the required
tightening torque, which increases the risk
of an accident.
(!) Note
When removing or installing the wheel, the
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the
rotor. Work carefully and have a second per-
Removing a wheel son help you.
> Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle from Unidirectional tires
the vehicle tool kit > fig. 175 and place it ona
A unidirectional tire profile is identified by arrows
clean surface.
on the tire sidewall that point in the running di-
> Then install the alignment pin from the vehicle
rection. You must always maintain the specified
tool kit by hand in the empty wheel bolt hole
running direction. This is necessary to ensure the
> fig. 176”.
tire's optimal performance in regard to adhesion,
> Remove the rest of the wheel bolts.
running noise, and friction, and to reduce the risk
> Remove the wheel >(). The alignment pin re-
of hydroplaning.
mains in the hole while doing this.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
Installing a wheel directional tire design, you should replace faulty
Read the directions on > page 277 when instal- tires as soon as possible and restore the correct
ling unidirectional tires. running direction on all of the tires.
> Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin >@.

> Install the wheel bolts and tighten them gently
using the hex socket. > Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if necessa-
> Remove the alignment pin and tighten the re- ry.
maining wheel bolt.
4K0012721BD
D Applies to: vehicles with ceramic brake rotors*: Use a sec-

ond alignment pin* from the vehicle tool kit for the lowest
hole according to the steps described for the first align-
ment pin.
277
> Store the vehicle tool kit in its designated

AN WARNING
place.
> If the removed wheel does not fit in the spare — After installing a spare tire, the tire pressure
wheel well, store it securely in the luggage must be checked as soon as possible.
compartment > page 81. — Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h)
> Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel with a compact spare tire. Driving faster
as soon as possible. than that increases the risk of an accident.
> Correct the tire pressure and store it in the MMI —To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard
=> page 264. acceleration or braking and driving fast
> The wheel bolt tightening specification must be around curves with the compact spare tire.
90 ft lbs (120 Nm). Have it checked as soon as —To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive
possible with a torque wrench. Drive carefully with more than one compact spare tire.
until then. — Normal summer or winter tires must not be
> Have the faulty wheel replaced as quickly as mounted on the compact spare wheel rim.
possible.
Collapsible spare tire
Space-saving spare tire Applies to: vehicles with collapsible spare tire
Applies to: vehicles with space-saving spare tire (compact
spare tire) The collapsible spare tire is intended for short-
term use only. Have the damaged tire checked
The spare tire is intended for short-term use only. and replaced if necessary by an authorized Audi
Have the damaged tire checked and replaced if dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
necessary by an authorized Audi dealer or author- as possible.
ized Audi Service Facility as soon as possible.
There are some restrictions on the use of the col-
There are some restrictions on the use of the lapsible spare tire. The collapsible spare tire has
compact spare tire. The compact spare tire has been designed specifically for your type of vehi-
been designed specifically for your type of vehicle. Do not replace it with the collapsible spare
cle. Do not replace it with the spare tire from an- tire from another type of vehicle.
other type of vehicle.
The collapsible spare tire is located in the lug-
The compact spare tire is located in the luggage gage compartment under the cargo floor cover.
compartment under the cargo floor cover
=> page 272. Requirement: the vehicle tool kit > page 272 and
the compressor must be laid out.
The tire pressure must be adjusted to a specified
value listed on the tire pressure sticker Removing
=> page 255, fig. 165. > Lift the cargo floor using the handle.
Snow chains > Turn the handwheel counter-clockwise and re-
move it.
For technical reasons, the use of snow chains on >» Remove the collapsible spare tire.
the compact spare tire is not permitted.
You must inflate the collapsible spare tire before-
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front hand in order to use it.
tire fails, mount the spare tire in place of a rear
tire. Install the snow chains on the rear tire that Inflating
you removed, and install that in place of the > Remove the valve cap from the collapsible
front tire that failed. spare tire.
» Tighten the compressor hose on the collapsible
spare tire valve.
278
> Connect the compressor hose to a vehicle sock- — Never drive using more than one collapsible
et and switch it on. spare tire, because this increases the risk of
> Let the compressor run until the specified value an accident.
on the tire pressure sticker is reached — Normal tires or winter tires must not be
> page 255, fig. 165>@. mounted on the collapsible spare tire rim.
> Screw the valve cap back onto the valve.
Returning to storage
C) Note
The compressor must be switched off after six
> To release air, turn the valve insert. See an au-
minutes at the most to reduce the risk of
overheating. Let the compressor cool down
Facility.
for several minutes before using it again.
> Turn the valve insert back once the air has been
released.
> Wait several hours before placing the collapsi- Jump starting
ble spare tire in the spare wheel well. Only then
will it fold down completely so that you can
store it securely. You should only perform the steps that follow if
> Then screw the valve cap back onto the valve. you have the necessary tools and technical ex-
> Secure the collapsible spare tire with the hand- pertise.
wheel.
If the engine does not start because the vehicle
> Fold the cargo floor cover back into place.
battery is drained, you can jump start your vehi-
Snow chains cle using another vehicle. Jump start cables are
needed to do this.
Using snow chains on the collapsible spare tire is
not permitted for technical reasons. Both vehicle batteries must have 12 V nominal
voltage. The voltage capacity (Ah) of the vehicle
If you have to drive with snow chains and a front
battery that is giving power must not be less
tire fails, mount the collapsible spare tire in place
than the capacity of the drained vehicle battery.
of a rear tire. Install the snow chains on the rear
tire that you removed, and install that in place of Jump start cable
the front tire that failed.
Only use a jump start cable with a large enough
ZA\ WARNING diameter. Note the manufacturer's specifica-
tions.
— Only use the collapsible spare tire in emer-
gencies and drive very carefully, especially if Only use a jump start cable with insulated termi-
it is more than six years old. nal clamps.
— The compressor and the hose can become Positive cable - usually red.
very hot during operation which increases
the risk of burn injuries. Negative cable - usually black.
— After installing a collapsible spare tire, the
tire pressure must be checked as quickly as
Z\ WARNING
possible to reduce the risk of an accident. — A drained battery can freeze at tempera-
— Do not drive faster than SO mph (80 km/h) tures around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle bat-
with the collapsible spare tire. Driving faster tery is frozen, it must be thawed before con-
than that increases the risk of an accident. necting the jump start cables. If it is not,
— To reduce the risk of an accident, avoid hard the risk of an explosion and chemical burns
4K0012721BD
acceleration or braking and driving fast increases. After jump starting the vehicle, >
around curves with the collapsible spare
tire.
279
drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-

ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the vehicle battery checked.
— Read the warnings when working in the en-
gine compartment > page 231.
— Handling the jump start cables incorrectly
may cause the vehicle battery to explode
and lead to serious injuries.
©) Note Fig. 178 Connecting the jump start cables
Jump start cables can cause considerable

The jump start cable connections are located in
damage to the vehicle electrical system if
the engine compartment.
they are connected incorrectly.
Follow the information about the vehicle battery
@ Tips => page 241.
— There must be no contact between the Connecting the positive cable (red) to the
vehicles, or else voltage could flow when positive terminal
connecting the positive terminal and drain
> Open the red cover on the positive terminal
the vehicle battery of the vehicle providing
> fig. 177.
the jump start.
1. Attach one end of the positive cable (red) to
— The drained vehicle battery must be con-
the jump-start pin @ © fig. 178 on your vehi-
nected correctly to the electrical system.
cle.
— Switch off electrical equipment that is not
2. Attach the other end of the positive cable
needed.
(red) to the positive terminal @) on the pow-
er source.
aT eile tle)
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the
Both jump start cables must be connected in the negative terminal
correct order.
3. Attach one end of the negative cable (black)
to the negative terminal @) on the power
source.
4. Attach the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump-start pin @ on the vehi-
cle.
Starting the engine

> Start the engine in the vehicle giving the charge
and let it run at idle.
Fig. 177 Engine compartment: connectors for jump start > Now start the engine in your vehicle, which has
cables or a charger the drained battery.
> If the engine does not start, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
after approximately 30 seconds.
> Turn on the rear window defogger in your vehi-
cle in order to reduce any voltage peaks that
may occur when disconnecting the jump start
cables. The headlights must be switched off. >
280
> With the engines running, remove the cables in cumstances. Inexperienced drivers should not
reverse order of the way they were installed. tow.
> Close the red cover on the positive terminal.
Notes on towing
ZA WARNING When the engine is stopped, the transmission

will not be sufficiently lubricated if traveling at
— Never connect the jump start cable directly
high speeds and long distances:
to your vehicle battery. Only use the connec-
tions in the engine compartment. — The maximum permitted towing speed is 30
— Do not touch the non-insulated parts of the mph (50 km/h).
terminal clamps. The cable must also not —The maximum permitted towing distance is 30
come into contact with vehicle components miles (50 km).
that conduct electricity when it is connected
to the positive vehicle battery terminal. This Additional information on towing with a tow
truck
can cause a short circuit.
— The plugs on the battery cells must not be The vehicle may only be towed with the front axle
opened. raised. Do not wrap any chains or cables around
— Keep ignition sources (such as open flames, the brake lines.
burning cigarettes, etc.) away from the vehi-
Tow bar and towing cable
cle batteries to reduce the risk of an explo-
sion. The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar or tow-
— Route the jump start cables so they cannot ing cable. Both drivers should be familiar with
get caught in the moving parts in the other the special considerations when towing, especial-
vehicle's engine compartment. ly when using a towing cable.
Always make sure the traction force does not ex-

@) Note ceed the permitted level and there are no shock
Please note that the connecting process previ- loading conditions. There is always the risk of the
ously described for the jump start cables is in- coupling becoming overloaded when driving off-
tended for when your vehicle is being jump road.
started.
For the most safety and security, drive with a tow
bar. You should use a towing cable only ifa tow
@) Tips bar is not available. Use a towing cable made of
Make sure that the connected jump start ca- synthetic elastic cable similar elastic material.
bles have sufficient contact with metal.
ZA WARNING
Towing — Towing highly increases the risk of an acci-
dent, for example from colliding with the
General information
towing vehicle.
You should only perform the steps that follow if — To reduce the risk of an accident, do not al-
you have the necessary tools and technical ex- low anyone to remain inside the vehicle
pertise. when it is being transported by a tow truck
or a special transporter.
Towing requires a certain amount of practice.
Audi recommends contacting a towing company
to have the vehicle transported.
C) Note
—If normal towing is not possible, for exam-
4K0012721BD
You should only have your vehicle towed by an- ple if the transmission is faulty or if the
other vehicle when disabled in exceptional cir- towing distance is greater than 30 miles
281
(50 km), then transport the vehicle on a Vehicle being towed (rear)
special carrier. > Make sure the ignition is switched on so that
— If the vehicle is towed by a tow truck at the the steering wheel is not locked and so that you
axle that is not permitted, this can cause se- can use the turn signals, the horn, and the
vere damage to the transmission. windshield wipers if needed > A\.
— The vehicle must not be tow started for > Switching it off before the vehicle has stopped
technical reasons. may impair the function of the brake booster
and power steering. You would then need to
@) Tips use more force to steer and brake the vehicle.
— If the power supply is interrupted, then it > Release the parking brake > page 104.
will not be possible to move the selector > Select the “N” selector lever position.
lever out of the "P" position. The parking > Make sure the towing cable is always taut.
lock must be released using the emergency
release before towing the vehicle ZA WARNING
> page 98.
Never tow a vehicle using a tow bar or towing
— Switch Audi pre sense* off > page 149 when
cable if the vehicle does not have electrical
loading the vehicle onto a vehicle carrier,
power.
train, ship, or other type of transportation,
or when towing the vehicle. This can prevent
an undesired intervention from the pre Front towing loop
sense* system.
— Follow the local legal regulations for tow-
ing.
Read and follow the important information under

=> page 281.
Preparations
Fig. 179 Front bumper: installing the towing loop
> Only secure the towing cable or tow bar at the
designated towing loops > page 282,
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
> page 283.
cated on the right side of the front bumper.
> Make sure the towing cable is not twisted. Oth-
erwise it could disconnect from the towing loop > Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
while towing. kit > page 272.
> Switch the emergency flashers on in both > Press the cap inward with brief, strong pressure
vehicles > page 51. However, do not do this if it => fig. 179. The cap will loosen from the bump-
prohibited by law. er.
> Tighten the towing loop in the threaded open-
Towing vehicle (front) ing until it stops and then tighten it with a
> Only start to drive when the towing cable is wheel wrench.
taut. >» After using, place the towing loop back in the
> Press the brake pedal very carefully. vehicle tool kit.
> Avoid sudden braking or driving maneuvers.
ZA WARNING
If the towing loop is not tightened until it
stops when installing, the threads may be >
282
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result

in an accident.
If the towing loop is not tightened until it
stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and result
Depending on the model, the shape of the in an accident.
cover can vary.
Rear towing loop Depending on the model, the shape of the

cover can vary.
Fig. 181 Rear bumper: installing the towing loop (version

2)
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-

cated on the right rear of the bumper.
> Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool

kit > page 272.
> Press the cap or reflector inward with brief,
firm pressure > fig. 180 or > fig. 181. The cap
or reflector will release from the bumper.
> Tighten the towing loop in the threaded open-
ing until it stops and then tighten it with a
wheel wrench.
>» After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
4K0012721BD
283
Fuses and bulbs
A fuse that has blown will have metal strips that

have burned through.
The fuses are located in the left footwell under

the footrest (4) or a cover
> Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment

off.
» Check the table that follows to see which fuse
belongs to the equipment.
> Remove the screwdriver from the vehicle tool
kit > page 272.
> Remove the appropriate cover.
> Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
panel, if necessary.
> Remove the clamps from the fuse panel cover
in the footwell @) or @).
> Remove the fuse using the clip.
>» Replace the blown fuse only with a fuse that
has the same amp rating.
> Reinstall the plastic bracket.
> Install the cover.
Fuse color identification

Fig. 182 Driver’s side footwell (left-hand drive vehicles):
footrest @, front passenger’s side footwell (right-hand Color Current rating
drive vehicles): cover @)
in amps
Black 1
Gray 2
Purple 3
Pink 4
Light brown 5
Brown LS
Red 10
Light blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent [25
Light green 30
Teal 35
Orange 40
ZA\ WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
Fig. 183 Left side of cockpit: cover @), luggage compart- fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
ment floor: fuse panel cover (@)
284
Fuses and bulbs
This can cause damage to the electrical sys- Fuse panel (@) (black)
tem and increases the risk of fire. 4 |Engine components
Brake light sensor
C) Note
Aun
Engine valves
If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you
Engine components
WOl/OINI
have installed it, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Engine components
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- Engine components
ty: 10 | Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sensor
11 | Engine components
G@) Tips
12 | Engine components
— The following table does not list fuse loca-
13 | Engine cooling
tions that are not used.
— Some of the equipment listed in the follow- 14 | Engine control module, fuel injectors
ing tables applies only to certain model ver- 15 | Engine sensors
sions or certain optional equipment. 16 | Fuel pump
Fuse panel @ (red)

Fuse assignment - left footwell
. | Equipment
z
°
Anti-theft alarm system

RAZ-0195
kr NI
Engine control module

DI M)WIN|
Left front lumbar support

ay
WOlLOI
Horn
Parking brake
Gateway control module (diagnosis)
i Roof electronics control module
Toren
BARRIER P ala Driver assistance systems control module
Airbag control module
BR
o
Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC), An-

i
ti-Lock Braking System (ABS)
12 | Diagnostic connector, light/rain sensor
13 | Climate control system
14 | Right front door control module
Climate control system compressor, body
15 .
electronics
Fig. 184 Left footwell: fuse panel with plastic clip Auxiliary battery control module, brake
16 .
system pressure reservoir
The fuse assignment @) and @) is in the opposite
order on right-hand drive vehicles. Fuse panel
(8) (red)
Fuse panel
(@) (black) No. | Equipment
No. | Equipment Engine ignition coils

wir
Catalytic converter heating High-voltage heating, compressor

4K0012721BD
m\/
2 |Engine components
Engine mount
A)
Automatic transmission
Engine components
285
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel @) (red) Fuse assignm ide of cockpit

7 |Instrument panel
8 | Climate control system fresh air blower
9 | Windshield wiper control module
10 | Dynamic steering
11 | Engine start
12 | Automatic transmission
Fuse panel @) (black)

No. | Equipment
1 |Front seat heating
2 |Windshield wipers
3 | Left headlight electronics
4 | Panoramic glass roof
5 |Left front door control module
6 |Sockets
7 |Right rear door control module
8 |AWD control module
Fig. 185 Left side of the cockpit: fuse panel with plastic
9 | Right headlight electronics
clip
10 Windshield washer system/headlight
washer system Fuse panel (@) (black)
11 | Left rear door control module No. | Equipment
12 | Parking heater 2 | Steering column adjustment
3 | CD/DVD player
Fuse panel G) (brown)
No. | Equipment 4 | Steering column electronics
Seat ventilation, seat electronics, rearview 5S | Light switch, switch panels

1 | mirror, rear climate control panel, diag- 6 |Volume control
nostic connector 7 |Instrument cluster
2 Vehicle electrical system control module, 8 |Upper/lower display
gateway control module 9 |Steering wheel heating
3 | Sound actuator/exhaust sound tuning
Fuse panel
(2) (brown)
4 |Transmission heating valve
No. | Equipment
5 |Engine start
2 |MMI Infotainment system control module
8 | Night vision assist, active roll stabilization
Audi music interface
9 |Adaptive cruise assist, front radar
4 |Head-up display
11 Intersection assistant, driver assist sys-
tems 5 Climate control system, fragrance system,
lonizer
12 | Exterior sound
9 |Steering column lock
286
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse assign uggage compa Fuse panel @) (red)

7 Hybrid remote-controlled interior climate
[RAZ-0196
control
8 | Hybrid A/C compressor
9 |Auxiliary battery control module
10 | Hybrid high-voltage battery
11 | Hybrid charger
14 | Thermomanagement, water pump
15 | Thermomanagement control module
16 | Gateway
Fuse panel @) (brown)

No. | Equipment
1 | Driver assist systems control module
2 |Audi phone box, roof antenna
3 Front seat electronics, right lumbar sup-
port
4 |Side assist
Fig. 186 Luggage compartment floor: fuse panel with 5 |Rear climate control system control panel
plastic clip
6 |Tire pressure monitoring system
7 |Emergency call system
Fuse panel
( (black)
8 Parking heater radio receiver, fuel tank
No. | Equipment
monitoring
3 | Passenger’s side rear safety belt tensioner
9 |Automatic transmission selector lever
4 |Driver’s side rear safety belt tensioner
TV tuner, data exchange and telematics
5 | Air suspension 10
control module
6 |Automatic transmission
11 | Vehicle opening/start (NFC)
7 |Rear sliding sunroof, rear spoiler
12 | Garage door opener
8 | Rear seat heating
13 | Rearview camera, peripheral cameras
9 | Left tail light
14 | Central locking, right tail light
10 | Front belt tensioner on driver's side
16 Front belt tensioner on front passenger's
Luggage compartment lid central locking, side
11 | fuel filler door, luggage compartment cov-
er Fuse panel @) (black)
12 |Luggage compartment lid control module No. | Equipment
Not assigned
Fuse panel
(2) (red)
No. | Equipment Fuse panel 6) (red)
1 | Suspension stabilization control module No. | Equipment
2 |Service disconnect switch 3 Exhaust treatment, sound actuator, AC

4 | Electric motor socket
4K0012721BD
5 | Brake system 4 |Rear climate control system control panel
6 |High-voltage battery water pump 5 |Right trailer hitch light
287
Fuses and bulbs
Fuse panel () (red)

7 |Trailer hitch release
8 | Left trailer hitch light
9 |Trailer hitch socket
10 |All wheel drive sport differential
11 | Exhaust treatment
12 |48 V generator
Bulbs
Your vehicle is equipped with maintenance-free

headlights and tail lights. However, if a light bulb
needs to be replaced, please contact an author-
ty.
288
Data privacy
Data privacy system event. No noises, conversations, or im-

ages will be recorded in the vehicle.
Image recording
The data may include information such as the ve-
Surrounding area monitoring hicle speed, the direction of travel, and informa-
Applies to: vehicles with surrounding area monitoring tion about the brake system, or also the behavior
of the restraint system in the event of an acci-
Some vehicle functions require the vehicle’s path
dent. The stored data can be exported and down-
to be detected and evaluated. This is done by
loaded with special devices, which must be con-
cameras installed permanently on the vehicle
nected directly to the vehicle.
that detect objects in the vehicle's surroundings
(such as obstacles or guard rails). The live images On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
from the cameras are transmitted to the applica-
There is a diagnostic connector socket in the driv-
ble control module.
er's side footwell to read out the various control
The camera images are transferred to the respon- modules and the event data recorder. Data re-
sible control module for processing and may be garding the function and condition of the elec-
stored, depending on vehicle equipment. The tronic control modules is stored in the event
control module analyzes the current camera im- memory. Only have an authorized Audi dealer or
age using image evaluation software. This image authorized Audi Service Facility read out and de-
evaluation software detects anonymized techni- lete the event memory.
cal measurements, such as distances to objects.
The control module evaluates these technical Z\ WARNING
measurements and makes it possible for the as- — Incorrect use of the connection port for the
sist systems to control the vehicle, if necessary. On Board Diagnostic System can cause mal-
functions, which can then result in accidents
Data memories and serious injuries.
— Only allow an authorized Audi dealer or au-
Vehicle control modules
thorized Audi Service Facility to read out the
~ engine data.
oeir
gz
=
+
a
Crash data recorder
Event Data Recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
Fig. 187 Driver's side footwell: connection port for the On road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
Board Diagnostic System (OBD) ing how a vehicle's system performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle dynam-
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic control
ics and safety systems for a short period of time,
modules for various vehicle systems such as the typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehi-
airbags. These vehicle control modules store data
cle is designed to record such data as:
while driving normally that is required by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service — How various systems in your vehicle were oper-
Facility for diagnosis and repair purposes. Only ating;
4K0012721BD
certain types of data are recorded for a very short — Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
period of time if a control module has detected a belts were buckled/fastened;
289
Data privacy
— How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the Data usage
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, Audi can read out the information stored in the
— How fast the vehicle was traveling. data memories or similar data, or give this infor-
These data can help provide a better understand- mation to third parties, especially in the follow-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and in- ing situations:
juries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your — If the vehicle owner or lessee agrees
vehicle only ifa non-trivial crash situation occurs; — If there is an official request from the police
no data are recorded by the EDR under normal
— Ifa court or authorities request it
driving conditions and no personal data (e.g.
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re- If legally permitted, Audi can also use the data
corded. However, other parties, such as law en- for analysis of vehicle operation and safety per-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the formance or provide this data to third parties for
type of personally identifying data routinely ac- research purposes.
quired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-

Transmitted information
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the Sela eset) Nea)
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, Statistical information may be recorded and
that have the special equipment, can read the in- transmitted to Audi in order to develop and opti-
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the mize the Start/Stop system. Additional informa-
EDR. tion can be found in the data privacy policy.
Assist system monitor

Privacy settings
This vehicle is equipped with an Assist System Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect
Monitor (ASM). The ASM collects data that is not
>» Applies to MMI: Select on the home screen:
stored by the EDR in the event of an accident. The
SETTINGS > Privacy settings.
main task of the ASM is to make it possible to un-
derstand the role and the behavior of the assist Data is transmitted from the vehicle when using
systems in these accident situations. In addition Audi connect services.
to the data that the EDR stores, the ASM records > To display additional information about the pri-
data related to the assist systems starting sever- vacy settings and the associated symbols in the
al seconds before the accident or near-accident. status bar, press @ in the MMI.
The data collected by ASM depends on the equip-
ment and may include the following information: Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
status information of the assist systems (for ex- Setting the maximum privacy settings
ample, if they are switched on or off, system
events, etc.), control interventions (for example, When the Activate privacy mode function is
switched on, the data connection is deactivated
by ESC, ABS, Audi pre sense”, etc.), and assist
systems settings (such as speed settings). or sending of data is restricted, but all safety-re-
lated, legal, or contractually required Audi con-
Special devices and access to the vehicle or to the nect services remain activated. The majority of
ASM are necessary in order to read the data from the Audi connect services are deactivated.
the ASM memory. In addition to the vehicle man-
When the function is switched off, the data con-
ufacturer, third parties such as law enforcement
nection will be available in order to use Audi con-
authorities can also read and analyze the stored
nect services.
data if they have access to the vehicle or to the
ASM.
290
Data privacy
Adjusting individual privacy settings main available without restrictions and

In the MMI, you can adjust individually which da- continue to transmit data.
ta should be transmitted from the vehicle. If you — Stored destinations (favorites, last desti-
switch on a data category, the data will be trans- nations) are only stored in the vehicle. If
mitted. you allow transmission of data again,
these destinations will be synchronized via
() Note the myAudi account. To prevent synchroni-
zation of destinations, delete the destina-
You are responsible for all precautions taken
tions before you allow data to be trans-
for data protection, anti-virus protection, and
mitted again.
protection against loss of data on mobile de-
vices that are used to access the Internet
through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
@) Tips AUDI AG collects, uses, stores and shares your

— The following interfaces are not affected by personal information, such as contact data, vehi-
changes to the privacy settings: Bluetooth, cle data, usage data, driving data and precise ge-
Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE), Wi-Fi, Audi olocation, in order to provide you with the prod-
smartphone interface (ASI), Near Field ucts and services you have purchased or request-
Communication (NFC), charging communi- ed, and for a number of other purposes, for ex-
cation (high-voltage system), Electronic Toll ample, to track quality issues, to performance
Collect (ETC), On-Board Diagnostic System and safety, to meet our internal compliance or le-
(OBD) if equipped. gal requirements and to market to customers
— If the maximum privacy settings are switch- and potential customers. For a more complete
ed on, your vehicle may not receive security list of the data we collect, how we use it and with
updates and certificates for establishing an whom we share it, please visit your Audi nation-
encrypted connection, depending on vehicle al/sales region website at www.audi.com.
equipment. In order to receive security up-
The collection, use and sharing may vary depend-
dates and certificates, switch the maximum
ing on your model and model year, your subscrip-
privacy settings off for at least ten minutes
tion status, or the service offering. For example,
every six months. Make sure that your vehi-
collection, use and sharing may vary between
cle is connected to the Internet. A symbol in
Audi connect services, if you have designated a
the MMI status bar indicates if the required
key user, or if you are driving a model equipped
data connection is available > page 22.
with persistent data logging. Please review the
— If the transmission of data is limited, it will
complete Privacy Statement to understand our
have the following effects on the exchange
data handling practices with respect to a particu-
of data for Audi connect services and emer-
lar service.
gency calls, if equipped:
— The emergency call function will remain You can find additional information about our da-
ta privacy practices in your MMI.
available without restrictions and will con-
tinue to transmit data. > Applies to: MMI: On the home screen, select:
—If an online roadside assistance call is ini- SETTINGS > General > Legal notes > About
tiated, no data will be transmitted, but a Audi connect.
call will be made.
Information about our privacy practices in con-
— If the Geofencing Alert, Speed Alert,
junction with the mobile Audi connect applica-
and/or Valet Alert services have been acti-
4K0012721BD
tion can be found in the Application’s Privacy

vated by the key user, then they will re-
Statement.
291
Data privacy
For additional information about the privacy

practices relating to Audi connect, myAudi, or
other websites, applications or online services as
well as your obligations with respect to using
these services, and for additional information re-
garding Audi connect terms and conditions,
please visit your Audi national/sales region web-
site at www.audi.com.
292
Accessories and technical changes
Accessories and — Replacement parts may not always be availa-

ble.
technical changes
— Navigation systems for vehicles built for the
Warranty U.S.A. and Canada will not necessarily work in
Europe, and may not work in other countries.
Your vehicle is covered by various warranties:
— New Vehicle Limited Warranty () Note

— Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perforation Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle re-
— Emissions Control System Warranties: Federal sulting from these country-specific differen-
Emissions Control System Defect Warranty, ces.
Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
— Applies to: USA models: Kansas Safety Belt Maintenance, repairs,
Limited Warranty and technical modifi-
— Applies to: USA models: California Emissions
cations
Control Warranties: Short-term Emissions De-
fects Warranty, Long-term Emissions Defects Note the safety precautions > page 231, General
Warranty, TZEV models Emissions Defects information and > page 276, Raising the vehicle.
Warranty, California Emissions Performance
Warranty General information
You can find detailed information in your Warran- Due to the increasing complexity of technology in
these vehicles, as well as the safety and environ-
ty & Maintenance Booklet and in the California
Emissions Booklet*. mental standards that apply, you can only per-
form a very limited amount of repairs and modifi-
cations to the vehicle yourself.
Audi Literature Shop
Proof of maintenance work may be required to
Service information is made available as soon as submit a claim within the warranty period.
possible after a model is introduced and can be
ordered in the Audi Literature Shop: http:// We recommend that you have your vehicle serv-
literature.audiusa.com iced by an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility and that Audi Genuine Parts
and Audi Genuine Accessories are used. This
Driving in other
helps to ensure that your vehicle's functionality,
countries performance, and safety are not impaired.
Government regulations in the United States and Maintenance and repairs
Canada require motor vehicles to comply with
Your vehicle was designed to help keep mainte-
emissions regulations and safety standards.
nance requirements to a minimum. Some regular
Therefore, vehicles that were produced for the
U.S. and Canadian markets are different from maintenance is required to help ensure that your
vehicle runs in a safe, economical, and reliable
vehicles produced for other countries.
manner. Please refer to your Warranty & Mainte-
If you plan to use your vehicle outside of the nance Booklet for more detailed information
United States or Canada, it is possible that: about vehicle maintenance.
— Fuel may have a significantly lower octane rat- When operating the vehicle under more extreme
ing. Unsuitable fuels can cause engine damage. operating conditions, for example when outside
— Proper maintenance and repair work may not temperatures are very low or in very dusty envi-
4K0012721BD
be possible because special service equipment, ronments, certain maintenance should be per-
tools, or measuring devices needed for your ve- formed between the specified intervals.
hicle may not be available.
293
Usually maintenance and repair work requires carry out the job and have the correct tech-
special tools, measuring devices, and other nical information and the correct tools.
equipment that is available to trained vehicle — If you are uncertain about what to do, have
technicians in order to help ensure that your vehi- the work performed by an authorized Audi
cle and all of its systems operate correctly, relia- dealer, an authorized Audi Service Facility,
bly, and safely. Performing work on the vehicle or another qualified workshop. Serious per-
incorrectly can impair the operation and reliabili- sonal injury may result from improperly per-
ty of your vehicle and may void one or more of formed work.
your vehicle's warranties.
Technical Modifications C) Note

— Maintenance procedures, repairs or techni-
Interference with electronic components, their
cal modifications that are performed incor-
software, the wiring, and data transfer may cause
rectly can cause damage to the vehicle, such
malfunctions. Because of the way electronic com-
as corrosion.
ponents are interconnected, such malfunctions
— If emergency repairs must be performed,
can also impair systems that are not directly in-
take your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
volved. This means that you risk both a substan-
er or authorized Audi Service Facility as soon
tial reduction in the operational safety of your ve-
as possible.
hicle and increased wear of vehicle components.
— Audi is not liable for damage to the vehicle
Some convenience functions, such as the conven- resulting from failure to comply with these
ience turn signal function, individual door open- guidelines.
ing function, and displays, can be reprogrammed
using special workshop equipment. If functions @) For the sake of the environment
are reprogrammed, the information and descrip-
— Regular maintenance can help protect the
tions about these functions in this Owner's Man-
environment.
ual may no longer apply to the changed func-
— Technical modifications to the vehicle can
tions. Audi recommends that an authorized Audi
have a negative impact on fuel consumption
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility perform
and vehicle emissions.
and verify any reprogramming procedures.
ZA WARNING
Certain components in your vehicle such as
Maintenance procedures, repairs, or technical
undeployed airbag modules, pretensioners
modifications that are performed incorrectly
and remote control batteries may contain Per-
increase the risk of an accident and can lead
chlorate Material - special handling may ap-
to serious injuries.
ply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate. When the vehicle or parts of the
ZA WARNING restraint system including airbag modules
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle and safety belts with pretensioners are scrap-
is a potentially dangerous area and can cause ped, all applicable laws and regulations must
serious personal injury. be observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is
— Always use extreme caution when doing any familiar with these requirements and we rec-
work in the engine compartment. Always ommend that you have your dealer perform
follow commonly accepted safety practices this service for you.
and use common sense. Never risk personal
injury. (i) Tips
— Never perform any work in the engine com- Because of your vehicle's aluminum body de-
partment unless you know exactly how to sign, all service and repair procedures
294
affecting the body should be performed by an vehicle. Otherwise, the increased electromag-
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi netic waves can cause malfunctions in the ve-
Service Facility, who will perform the work ac- hicle. Observe the regulations in the country
cording to Audi factory specifications. Only where the vehicle is being operated and the
Audi Genuine Parts are used when Audi ex- instructions from the radio equipment manu-
perts perform repair or service procedures. facturer.
Failure to use Audi Genuine Parts or Audi Gen-
uine Accessories or performing repairs incor- Reporting Safety Defects
rectly may result in severe vehicle damage,
such as corrosion. Applicable to U.S.A.
Accessories and parts If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
Consult with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility before purchasing ac- crash or could cause injury or
cessories or replacement parts. We recommend
death, you should immediately in-
that you have your vehicle serviced by an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili- form the National Highway Traffic
ty and that Audi Genuine Parts and Audi Genuine Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
Accessories are used.
addition to notifying
Audi does not endorse the use of products and
accessories that it has not evaluated, even if the Audi of America, Inc.
product is approved by a certified testing agency
or government agency.
2200 Ferdinand Porsche Drive
Herndon, VA 20171
ZA WARNING
— Installing unapproved accessories or incor- If NHTSA receives similar com-
rect replacement parts can cause vehicle plaints, it may open an investiga-
damage and can increase the risk of an acci-
dent. tion, and if it finds that a safety
— Never attach accessories, such as telephone defect exists in a group of
holders or cup holders, to the airbag covers
or within the airbag deployment zone, be-
vehicles, it may order a recall and
cause this increases the risk of injury if the remedy campaign. However,
airbag deploys.
NHTSA cannot become involved in
— On vehicles that have factory-installed li-
cense plate brackets on the front of the ve- individual problems between you,
hicle, the brackets may only be replaced your dealer, or Audi of America,
with ones that are the same size and made
of the same material. Do not install any li- Inc.
cense plate brackets on the front of vehicles
that do not have factory-installed brackets. To contact NHTSA, you may call
Otherwise, the function of the system could the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-
be impaired.
free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-
() Note 800-424-9153); go to http://
4K0012721BD
A correctly-installed exterior antenna is re- www.safercar.gov;

quired for operating radio equipment in the
295
or write to: Transport Canada

Administrator NHTSA Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
1200 New Jersey Ave., tions Laboratory
S.E. West Building 80 Noel Street
Washington, DC Gatineau, QC
20590. J8Z OA1
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from http://www.safercar.gov. Safety website at:
English:
Applicable to Canada
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
If you live in Canada and you be- motorvehiclesafety/menu.htm
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
French:
fect that could cause a crash, in- http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/
jury or death, you should immedi- securiteautomobile/menu.htm
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls. Declaration of
You should also notify Audi Cana- compliance for telecom-
munications equipment
da.
and electronic systems
Canadian customers who wish to The manufacturer is not liable for radio malfunc-
report a safety-related defect to tions that are caused by unauthorized changes to
the equipment.
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls, may either Equipment
The following equipment complies with FCC sec-
call Transport Canada toll-free at:
tion 15 and RSS-Gen:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or — Adaptive cruise assist*
Tel.: 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re- — Remote control key
— Cell phone package*
gion and from other countries) — Garage door opener (HomeLink)*
TTY for hearing impaired: — Intersection assistant*
— Side assist*
1-888-675-6863
— Exit warning*
or contact Transport Canada by — Rear cross traffic assist*
— WLAN hotspot*
mail at:
296
FCC Part 15.19

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
FCC Part 15.21

Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
RSS-Gen
This device complies with Industry Canada’s Li-
cence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference; and
(2) This device must accept any interference, in-

cluding interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Long Range Radar* - Additional declarations

of compliance
Radiofrequency radiation exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC and IC radia-
tion exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
environment. This equipment should be installed
and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm
between the radiator and your body. This trans-
mitter must not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmit-
ter.
4K0012721BD
297
Technical data
Technical data The sticker contains the following vehicle data:
Identification data @® Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, engine output, transmission
Vehicle data label ® Engine and transmission codes
—S>SSESESES>S>S>E>E>>—s FA @ Paint and interior codes
WOOK X-XOK KKK) © Optional equipment numbers
(Hae osccn XX x XXKKKNKK
Fim = YXX XXX Vehicle identification number (VIN)
27] XX XXXXXXX XX. X.X XX The VIN is located in the following areas:
XXX KW x XX
(3)—-Wwoee / GER. 1B
ENG. CODE / TRANS. CODE XXXX XXX XXX — Applies to: MMI: Select on the home screen:
@ i XK XKNK XK XX VEHICLE > Settings & Service > Vehicle infor-
mation.
EOA 7D5 4UB 6XM 5SG SRW — On the vehicle identification label
2EH JOZ 1LB 1AS 1BA
3FC SMU 7X1 — At the front behind the windshield
FOA 9G3 0G7 OYH OJF
6) TL6 3KA 8EH U1A X9B QZ7 — inthe engine compartment on the right side
1xXw 8Q3 9Q8 824 D2D
716 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2
34 AKC 3Y0 413 5D2 Notes about technical data
1SA 7GB QIA 4GQ
The values may vary based on special equipment

et as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
uring methods.
Fig. 188 Vehicle identification label Please note that the specifications listed in the
vehicle documentation always take precedence.
The vehicle identification label > fig. 188 is locat-
ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo @ Tips
floor cover. Any technical data that is missing was not
available at the time of printing.
The vehicle identification label information can
also be found in the Warranty & Maintenance
booklet.
Vehicle data
Length (in (mm)) | Width (in (mm)) | Width across the | Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) | weight (in (mm))
A6 allroad 194.9 (4,951) 74.9 (1,902) 83.1 (2,110) 58.9 (1,497)
A6 sedan 194.4 (4,939) 74.3 (1,886) 83.1 (2,110) 57.4 (1,457)
S6 Sedan 195.0 (4,954) 74.3 (1,886) 83.1 (2,110) 56.9 (1,446)
298
Technical data
ler} lahat)
Fuel tank 19.3 gal (73 L)

Windshield and headlight washer system* 6.6 qt (6.2 L)
Weights Roof load

The maximum permitted roof load is:
— 198 lbs (90 kg) (sedan)

[=
fs
[= — 220 lbs (100 kg) (allroad)
Applies to: sedan:

Fig. 189 Safety certificate
B8U-0380
Applies to: allroad:

Fig. 190 Safety certificate
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The maximum permitted total weight @ of the
vehicle is listed on the safety certificate on the
side area of the door or on the driver's door pillar.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The maximum permitted load on the front axle
@ or the rear axle @) is listed on the safety cer-
tificate on the side area of the door or on the
driver's door pillar.
Load
The maximum permitted load is listed on the tire
4K0012721BD
pressure label on the driver's door pillar.
299
Index
A Apple CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 221
A/C cooling mode..........-.
0. eee eee ee
Aspect ratio (video) .............00. 215, 217
Accelerator pedal.............-.00000005
ASR
also refer to Accelerator pedal...........
refer to Anti-Slip Regulation............ 112
AccessorieS .. 0.2... . cece ee eee
Audi adaptive light..................005. 49
Active lane assist
Audi connect
refer to Lane departure warning.........
FEfEFTO CONNEC. < s cccs cs Seek ae Hewes Fe 177
refer to Lane guidance................
Audi connect Remote & Control
Adaptive cruise assist..............-.00.
refer to Vehicle control services......... 179
Cleaning the sensors............ee eee
Audidrive Seletews zs wewe < 2 sme ¢ ¢ eee 2 108
Predictive control....................
Audi music interface...............25-- 212
Adaptive dampers..............000-00-
Audio files............200
00 cece eee eee 273
Adaptive speed assist
refer to Adaptive cruise assist........... Audi phone box...........0
0: eee ee eae 166
Audi presense..........
00 eee eee eee ee 146
Adjusting the air distribution.............
Messages .........
0.0.0 cece eee eee 149
Adjusting the brightness.................
Audi pre sense front.............--.00-- 147
Adjusting the sound.................00-
Audi side assist
Adjusting the temperature...............
refer to Side assist. ..........-.0
eee eee 150
Adjusting the vents ..........00
eee eee eee
Audi smartphone interface.............. 221
Adjusting the volume..............000005
Legal information..........0eeseeeees 225
Adjusting the volume (announcements) .. . .
Audi virtual cockpit
Adjusting the welcome sound............
refer to Instrument cluster.............. 12
AirbagisySteni’s « wom ss womy ¢ 7 wee x eee Fe
AUTO
Air quality display................0.-000. Automatic headlights.................. 49
Air suspension...............0.0020005 Climate control system.............0005 89
Alarm system Auto Lock (central locking) ............... 32
refer to Anti-theft alarm system.......... Automatic climate control system
Alignment pin (changing the wheel)....... refer to Climate control system.......... 88
All-weather lights...............-.00000. Automatic luggage compartment lid.... 40,41
Allseason tires... 0.0.0.0...
eee eee Automatic transmission ............-.0005 95
All wheel drive Parking lock emergency release.......... 98
refer to quattro.... 2... eee eee ee eee Automatic wipe/wash system............. 55
Amazon Alexa integration Average consumption................... 16
Media playback............0
eee e eee Average speed .... 2.0...
0. ee eee eee ee 16
Operations « ssa a 2 saws oo ean « x oem © 8 one
AMI
refer to Audi music interface...........
B
Android Auto Bag hooks... ..... ccc eee eee eee eee 81
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... Battery
Anti-freeze Charging (12 Volt vehicle battery)....... 243
Windshield washer system............. Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 241
Anti-lock braking system. ........-..00-. Winter operation (12 Volt vehicle battery) . 241
Anti-Slip Regulation.................0.. Blinds

refer to Panoramic glass roof............
Anti-theft alarm system ..........--.000--
Block route... 2.0.6...
2. cece eee eee
Anti-theft wheel bolts..................
300
BlOWers scicies wo cures oo ceevte a x sousnne ow cumaee oo 3 89 Catalytic converter’. seca es ence oo mevee ov oe 231
Bluetooth Cell phone
Audio player...........-.0 00.20 e ee eee 210 refer to Telephone...............2000. 164
Connecting acell phone............... 164 Cell phone compartment
Deleting adevice................0000- 225 refer to Audi phone box............... 166
Deviceoverview wi... enn eenie ee eee 224 Central locking.................0- esse ee 32
Disconnecting a device................ 225 AUTO! LOCK: sees: 2 = yee 5 s een 5 ¢ owes + BES 32
Displayitig( Profiles « sass 2 2 ews s x eenos ¢ os 225 Convenience key sussex saws x amma oo mere « 37
Searching foradevice...............-. 225 Convenience opening and closing......... 44
Selecting adevice.............0.-000. 225 Luggage compartment lid............... 39
Specifying a favorite..............000. 225 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35
BOOStiy + sewn 3 = wom 2 2 woe & E lomme + d ewe ge 16 Messages .........
00... eee eee eee 34
Boost pressure indicator................. 16 Remote control key........-eseeceeveee 37
Brake fluid SOTUING's ecco o wou 3 x asm 2 soemres oo cme 33
Checking the brake fluid level........... 240 WERICLS Key, sseseiss « or ssemeie » excitons i = meats wo stoutens 37
BrakeSicx « sawy « 5 see: & 2 Semis = fates 6 2 ee 102 Central locking switch................50. 34
Braketassist wes so saws os ence vv ome as L112 Geramic brakes «0 sescaes + + ensues + 2 emcee a 6 om 103
Brake fluid... 2... 66... eee eee eee eee 240 Certifications 2 swoon 2a cass «eames wo neon 296
Emergency braking function............ 105 Changing light bulbs................... 288
HOtiin oe asco a x masa a & asses aw aamunes 4 & amerens 105 Charging
New brake pads..............2-000004 103 refer to Power sourceS...... 0.0.00 ee eee 80
Break-in security feature..............0.- 35 Charging the battery (mobile devices). 166, 212
Breaking in Child safety lock
New brake pads.........- 0.0 eee eee 103 Climate control system controls in the rear. 43
N@WtIRGS:: « ean ss nee oo RomH ob eR a ge 252 Power windows...........00000 eee eens 43
Browser Rear dOOrsi: « ¢ sews 9 a aman a 2 mame a a mewe & 43
refer to Media center.................. 214 Child safety seats ..... 0.0... cee cece eee ee 73
Bulb replacement............--0000-00- 288 Securing to the top tether anchor........ 78
Business address...........
0000 cee eene 194 Securing with a safety belt.............. 76
Securing with LATCH..............20065 76
Cc Cleaning ...... 0... cee eee eee eee eee 266
Cleaning Alcantara...............00000) 269
California Proposition 65 Warning........ 232
Battery ’specific:. = 2 cssvs se sewn eo wewe 2 os 241 Cleaning artificial leather............0.. 269
GalLLUSt cess. = » season 2 & cease © 3 ewe © oe 168, 170 Cleaning carbon components........ 268, 269
CamenaSiccg + een a + eeu ok RONe ao eR og 119 Cleaning controls . csces cs sews ae eee ve ess 269
LOCATIONS an 6s sees ¥ sraaem se meee 39 amu 6 y 120 Cleaning decorative parts/trim........... 268
Capacities Cleaning exhaust tail pipes.............. 268
Fuclitambe, scansise + + axnsons 0 « snnuece 0 ctemem 0 0 on 299 Cleaning plastic parts.................. 268
Washer fluid reservoir................. 299 Cleaning textiles................0.000. 269
Cargo floor.........
ee eee eee ee 86 Climate control system..............0005 88
Cargo net... .. cece
eee eee 85 Climate control system controls in the rear
Car key... cece
eee eee 36 Child safety lO¢K eenex ¢ 2 seus : » ewes ce ees 43
Car phone Closing
Serial number (IMEI) .................. 174 Automatic luggage compartment lid...... 40
4K0012721BD
SWItCHING OM sis & & suies x @ ees ¥ 2 eis + ¥ os 174 Convenience closing................0-5 44
Carwash y « wesc «2 eee & eae 2 3 Heme eK Rene 266 Hood. ..... ee ee eee eee 232
301
Index
Luggage compartment lid............... 39 Convenience opening and closing

Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 41 Windows or panoramic glass roof........ 44
Panoramic glass roof.............000005 45 Coolant temperature display.............. 14
Sunshade (roof): « = sss + «swiss + 2 enews ao wre 45 Cooling mode..... 2.6... cee ee eee eee 89
Windows........ 0. cece eee cece eee 43 Cooling system
Closing aid (power closing doors).......... 32 Adding coolant.............00- eee ee 239
Cockpit MMM? «5 awsess so somes a 6 sumane a vee 53) Checking the coolant level............. 239
Cockpit (overview). « iss a ewes oe eee os eee 6 GOOLANE « scscoss = & saacs «wwe + 0 eaters ¥ wan 238
Collapsible spare'tir@se:. sisson occu ev were 278 GOPM|NPING igh sce: os meses ow sxcmne v cna a 2 wees 49
Collapsible tire Cross traffic assist (intersection assistant) .. 153
refer to Collapsible spare tire........... 278 Cruise control system..........-..20005 130
Colored ise: 5 + ssi so ese 6 vee 6H ee ee 298 Cup holders.........
0... 2c cece eee eee 80
Combustion engine « oss ss sees se caws see 100 Current consumption...............0.005 16
Coming home/Leaving home
refer to Entry/exit lighting.............. 51
D
COMpact’Sparetires, & wc ao www xv owen & oe 278
Data plans
Compartment as « o sss x & sass @ & saws 2 2 Bas 81
Data Privacy
Compass:in' the Mirror: « cww sx ces se nore o 58
Dake os ccerevs © scenes © eyaetses © sieitean wo sinters © = eee
GOrmiplianice’s x s ems: 5 2 wemau sx seen 2 e PERG 296
Setting
Configuration wizard.................04. 20
Daytime running lights.............0000. 49
connect ........ 0... cee eee eee eee 177
Declaration of compliance............... 296
Data plaris’s s neon ss weoen = o aceem = x eanee & 3 182
DEF (instrument cluster) « « sec s «scene
so see 12
Data Privatyices ws excise ss eines 3 v cmseae so csmue 291
Emergency call............0--.00 ee ee 183
Demo mode
Infotainment x: « : eens se ees ae ewe gees 177
refer to Presentation mode............. 198
Infotainment services...........000005 178 Destination onthe map.............-.+- 190
Online roadside assistance............. 184 Details, x x sssasws > x cass » x axcowms + 0 eesenms 4 1 oxen 189
Vehicle control services................ 179 Determining correct load limit........... 259
Connected devices Digital COMPASS « vex » 2 ween 2 wewws ¥ weeH & sg 58
Device overvieW... 5. . ccc ce eee e eens 224 Dimensions: « 2 ces + = eee & x satis & o ews 298
Connections Dimming the exterior mirrors............. 54
refer'to Mediaie:. «2 eciace ss ences vs one 209, 213 Dimming the rearview mirror............. 54
Consumer information................0- 293 Directory
Consumption S@UttiNgS sane: ¢ x nome + 7 ees & 2 Rem 5 8 Ee 175
Reducing..........
0. eee eee eee eee 100 also refer to ContactS..............00. 169
Consumption (Fuel) |. cscs wx sears wo ower ov oe 16 Display
Contacts Cleaning.........
0... e ee eee eee 268
Add destination...............000000. 194 Disposal..... 0.0... . cee ee eee ee eee ee 293
Importing and exporting.............. 175 DIStaNGe esisccs cs cswvie we aoecwne vw serene ww cee os 16
Memory capacity... 6 ccs. s sees se rows 175 Distance warning « vse se wen s wae a 3 earn 143
Opening (business card)............... 169 Doors
Updating inthe MMI.................. 175 Child safety lock « sencue «ss snimse = serene © sunaeie 0 43
Convenience key..........0 2.0.00 eee eee 32 Door contact switch. ...............005. 52
Convenience closing.........:seeeeeees 44 Mechanically unlocking and locking....... 35
also refer to Vehicle key..............-. 36 Power closing/closing aid............... 32
Driver information system................ 13
302
Drives Luggage compartment lid............... 42
referto Media.............00
eee 209, 213 Panoramic glass roof................005 AS
Drive select Emissions control system..............- 230
refer to Audi drive select............... 108 EMergy CONSUMERS. « «nares ao enon «os swe © He 17
Drive systeM..... cece eee eee eee 100, 102 Energy management...............00055 100
Audi drive Select ecw. « 2 eeay 2 ¢ severe & 2 es 108 Engine
Driving down hills...............-0000- 105 Breakingin.......... cece eee eee eee 100
DYIVINGBIOGRaW« « sass « ¢ eases ¢ s ace a 96, 142 COGLANE saxo x ¢ agen & 4 SatR 7s EGR EC Rew 238
Driving through water...............005 106 Emergency'stop’s « «ces 6 oem se een ve 93
Driving time... ... ccc eee eee eee 16 Jump starting. .........0... eee eee ee 279
Driving tips Start/Stop system..........2--0000005 101
Driving through water...............-- 106 Starting/Stopping:. « «sae.
se sae eres a 93
Efficient driving eoss «wees
ae cows se an 100 Engine compartment
Offroad driving............. cee eee eee 106 Opening and closing the hood.......... 232
Uphill and downhill................0.. 105 Overview... . 2... eee eee 234
Drivinguphills.................2..000. 105 Safety precautions..................-. 231
Dust filter Engine oil
refer to Pollutant filter................. 91 INGOING wc ce seve ae meee va ewe ee ere 234
DVD drive (media drives)................ 210
Changing.......... cee cece eee eee ee 237
Checking oil level.............00--.04. 234
Dynamic all-wheel steering.............. 110
COMSUMPUOMs + ¢ eens 5 & eeuws & 2 Have x 2 ERE 234
Indicator light...............0022000. 235
E Replacement interval................. 244
E-mail Temperature display................... 16
Message Options: « : ssws st oe es st wes ee 173 Engine sound
SOttiSion ss suse so meson 3 ween ona Bo 173 Audi drive select’. cwcica . 2 cases oo enue vv oe 109
EDL Engine startsyst@M secs ss sen o 9 eam o ween 94
refer to Electronic Differential Lock...... 112 Engine stop
EDR refer to Start/Stop system............. 101
Event Data Recorder............000005 289 Entry/exit ightingie: + scsi as wscom & © sow a ws 51
Efficiency assist... 0.0... eee eee ee 131 Entry:assistanee:: 2 eocs 2s acca ot eee ov eee 62
Electrical systeM......
cee eee eee eee 240 also refer to Exit assistance............. 62
Electromechanical parking brake......... 104 Environment
Electronic Differential Lock.............. 113 Unleaded gasoline.................04. 227
Electronicimmiobilizeris: . cose ss euee « sees 37 eSIM
Electronic Stabilization Control........... 112 refer to Embedded SIM card............ 178
Embedded SIM card............000ee00 178 Event Data Recorder (EDR).............. 289
Emergency assist.............00.00000- 154 Exit assistance... 0.0...
0. eee eee eee
Emergency assistance ..........
0000 eee 272 Exit warning.................0.0000005
Emergency braking function............. 105 Exterior lighting.................022000
Emergency calli. « + scsese a + scesene a 6 sxecene 170, 183 Exteriormmirrorsisccss 2s sescice ve scene v 6 aserane ¥ oo
Emergency flashersi« « sos vs snow ss waveire 8 a a 51 Folding settings
Emergency! Modine: so even 2 e eees seems eo 99 External voice operation................. 28
Emergency operation
4K0012721BD
DOORS cisiscise » x enscane & @ sunnane © @ summa woo nee © 8 35

Fuel filler door............0.00000005- 230
303
Index
F Fueling
Fuel filler door. .... 2.0...
cece eee eee 228
Factory default settings
Fuel filler door emergency release....... 230
Multi Media Interface................. 224
Fueltankccapacitys. « s seccn es esc ve ence « 299
Fast forwarding and rewinding (media file). 213
Fast forwarding (media files)............ 213
Fast route. .......
eee eee eee 186
G
Garage door opener..............00e
eee 46
Favorites
BIGGtOOths = acces ¢ ¢ qn Gs Sees sb eee se 225 GarMeNntshOOks « saswea x © ieee 2 x camw ¥ Capen a oY 81
NavigattOtitin = 3 cescm ss mcwsn 6 was oo mS 188 GASOLINE seems ¢ eee: 3 2 eee Ye eee 8 8 Re 227
Radio... eee cece eee eee eee 203 BOGHIVOS. 5 esses 3 x mama ve omen ow oma Oxo 228
Telephone...........
2-000 eee eee eee 169 Gasoline mixture... 2... 0... e cece aee 227
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) . 296 GAWR
File formats (media drives).............. 219 refer to Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . 299
Fixture set... 0... eee 85 Gears... eet eee 95
Fog (WINK OWS) weccic 6s eosece «wrens & coavene oe anave 90 Glossary of tire and loading terminology... 248
Folding the rearseats.............-.0005 83 Glove compartment...........
0. eee eee 81
Footwell temperature.................4. 91
Valet parking.............
eee eee ee eee 46
For the sake of the environment

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)........ 299
Disposing of engine oil................ 237 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)...... 299
Fueling...... 2... 0c cece eee ee 228 GVWR
LeakSivn s < sews 2 2 poem 2 2 poe xe HeORS Be 232 refer to Gross Vehicle Weight
RraQranc@ sas ¢ < sees ¢ 5 Souk ¢ a ees Fee 90, 91 Rating (GVWR) « « sae « 2 sawe ys ames 2 8 ae 299
Free text search
Medias = = sees ys aoe se soee ss Seen ae ree 217 H
Radio... eee cece eee eee ee 203 Handsfree: « = gees = y sews sv Sees oe Hees yes 165
also refer to Intelligent search.......... 186
Hahids Free Profile’s:: « « smu zs eens is oaee : 165
Freeze protection
Head-up display
COOLANt wesc x 2 wows se seme to eee ev Bee 238
AGJUSING seis « s mews ¢ owen a 9 word 8 3 ees 26
Front center armrest...................0- 63 Adjusting the brightness................ 53
Front collision warning Operating.............. 06.0 c eee eee 26
refer to Audi pre sense front............ 146 Headlight range control.................. 49
Front passenger’s seat adjustment Headlights
FRONES « «were 2 v memes = wane a x em oo aoe w 63 GlGSMING: << ¢ 5 wees + 5 Haas + Boe ce See Gos 267
Rear... eee eee 62 Headlight range control................ 49
Front wiper blades Washer system... 0.2.0.0.
e eee eee eae 55
Changing............ cece cece eee 56 Head restraints
Cleaning’: « = ees = « sews to tee as cae pee 56 Adjusting... 0... .... 00. e eee e eee eee 64
FUGls s semw 2 s gee 2 y eee eee ye Bem eo re 227 Removing and installing..............-. 64
AGiRIVES 5 5 mows 6 wane 4 o cieren 3 8 were 3 6 os 228 Heated rear window.............--00000- 90
Current consumption..................- 16
Heated steering wheel...............---. 91
Fuel display’: wesc ss oeas se eee cv een eae 12
Heating...........
0.000. 88
Fuel tank capacity... 6.0... 0. cece renee 299
HFP
Gasoline... 2... eee eee eeeeee 227
refer to Hands Free Profile............. 164
Reducing fuel consumption............ 100
High beams
High beam assistant................04. 50
304
Index
Highway lights © esc x 2 semis < = wwwee ¥ aeenee © 49 Internet

Hill descent:assist 2.006...
ec eewe ss oe 107 refertoconnect..........
eee eee eee 177
Hill descent control. ...........ee
eee eee 105 Internet radio
Hill Hold ASSISt caxis s < exw x eras se wee ee 95 referto Online radio............---
eee 205
Home Intersection assistant...............05- 153
refer to Home address................ 194 Tonizer. 2... eee eee 90
Homevaddress: « saws ss geen sy caw yee 194 iPhone
HomeLink refer to Audi music interface........... 212
refer to Garage door opener............. 46
HOME'SCrEEN & & sevevss vs seas o 6 omen + 8 wea Dos
HOM 2 wwe 5 ¢ suse + & sees & & ews Ey eee Es es
19
6
J
Jump starting. ............
0. eee 279
Hotspot
MOFER CONNIE Lc & cecaonorx v sxewce a a wrens i x swaese 181
K
Key. eee eee eee eee 32, 36
I Convenience opening and closing......... 44
Ignition Key replacement...............-0e eee 36
Switching on and off................00. 93 Mechanical key......... 0.00.0 cee eevee 36
Imbalance (wheels)............. 0000005 254 Not recognized = sews « ¢ sews: ¢ pews s bees 94
Immobilizer PANIC: Keytins « ciccsass 2 x sven © w emouews <6 scours ¥ ¥ 8 36
refer to Electronic immobilizer........... 36 Replacing the battery...............0-. 38
Inclinometer.........
0.00. cece 106 Unlocking and locking............-...0- 37
Undicatorlights « wicsse « vanavese © enauese wv sneaen 6 5 8 7 Vehicle code sri «5 escves « 3 wane 2 0 weve oes 36
Inspectionsinterval:. « sows s cccawecs xs wessne a 4 oo 244 Key USEP': «2 sau ¥ «saws oo sees 3 o Hew oo Ses 31
Instrument cluster: . weve 2s cee 2 a wee see 12 Kick-COWIN's = werey = » sews = ¢ eum * 9 tes te oe 97
Adjusting the layout................0-. 14
Cleaning........ 0. e eee eee eee eee 268 L
ENGINGCOdes: « new 2 wee » 5 weed & 5 saree 226
Lane assist
Failure... eee 12
refer to Lane departure warning......... 144
On-board computer.................020. 16
refer to Lane guidance................ 144
Operating « = eee ss mews se ees s Bee sg He 13
Lane departure warning................. 144
Persomal.progile wwvone« « csarsns ic axnsine «0 oxstins 13
Cleaning the camera area.............. 267
Service interval display...............- 244
Software information................. 226
Lane guidance............0.000000005- 138
Switchingtabsss « sic i + sarin es sac oo acesese 13 Laptimer................0..0 0000008. 126
Switching the view...............-000005 14 Evaluating ; « saas ss seee sv wees so ees ss 127
Vehicle TURCLIONS vais sx woos s x oss a eee 16 SPAREN sic: 5s cosas oo enaoes 6 > eeu 5 w aewOEEE eo 126
Version information................-. 226 LaSer Scanner’: s + ww » ¢ sees & ¢ sews 2 8 ee 119
Instrument illumination................. 53 Cleanings. 5 + sussasi «a seins + 6 scenes «8 maui © i 268
Integrated assistance...............0005 20 LATCH (securing child safety seats)......... 76
Intelligent search Launch: GontrObens «ose oo eee vs exons oo cen 98
Navigationis « 2 savers x « snes oo aasan © 3 seaweus © 186 Leather care and cleaning............... 269
Interior lighting < svi. «sos = & ema oo ve 52,53 Legal information
INterior MONitoring « « wece ss wows te wees s Be 35 License:subscriptionss « « <0 @ esse
+ wes 225
Software information................. 225
4K0012721BD
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers) ..... 55

SOfEWANE LICENSES). 5 s wenn ay tem s eee es 225
International travel...............0000- 182
Version information...............05- 225
305
Index
License plate bracket................... 295

Lifting points (vehicle jack).............. 276 Online
Light/rain sensor
Headlights...............00 02.2 e ee eee 49
Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 55 FROMtii 2s ceo + moms oo mers a 2 oe oo eR
Lighting Mechanical key
Exterior’: 2 20s + ses ¢ 2 seuu ¢ » Nee e Fes 49 Media : swe 2 s sees 2 2 eee se eee ce
EMCOVION sszows 2 2 soso a 2 serves oon Maes aH HERE 52 DrVCSiiwic 2 mace: a 2 comes a 2 en a HO wa 209
LIQHES s sons vo somems wo eames oo come eo ame OB 49 Supported formats..............00005 219
Listening to music Media cemter inn «6 wissen 0 osname « oxeeas « sees a 214
refer to Media.......
ccc eee e eee 209, 213 Memory card
Loa & sss 3 wesw @ oman oe emo ae ee ew 299 SD card reader (MMI)...........--.... 209
Locking and unlocking Supported types and formats........... 219
By remote control..............-00 eee 37 MEMONy fUACHION wea ss nee s yates a x geoee 6 8 68
Using the lock cylinder..............00. 35 Menu language
With the convenience key............... 37 refer to Setting the language........... 223
Low beam headlights.................04. 49 Message Access Profile...............0- 171
Luggage compartment................5. 81 MESSAGESizs 5 & sews & § ees Fe SG FE Se ee 171
Cargo floor’. sis ¢ « asain + 3 mwen 3 0 veewin oo ae 86 Mild hybrid drive system.............00- 100
Cover (power) .... 00... cece eee eee eee 83 Mirror COMPASS... . 1... ee eee eee ee 58
Increasing the size..............-00 0 eee 83 Mirrors
Valet parkinGis « aces « 2 ewes 2 x ane © 2 gems ¥ 46 Adjusting exterior mirrors............... 53
also refer to Luggage compartment...... 81 DIMMs 2 sco oo sess & o ees © oy me © oe 54
Luggage compartment lid................ 43 VENIEYAMKOR. « cancace & eoneon 9 91 testes & 0! eEtenens 55
Closing button. ................000000. 40 MMI
General information ............e00e005 38 refer to Multi Media Interface........... 20
Mechanically unlocking...............-. 42
Mobile device
Opening and closing.................-. 39
referto Telephone.................005 164
Opening and closing with foot motion..... 41
Mobile phone network
Opening from the inside in an emergency... 43
Connection settings...............04. 175
Power opening and closing.............. 40
Mountain passes’: = sews s = seus << ees se oe 105
Lumbar support...........
0.0 0c eee eae 61
MOUTEaINTOSdSins « ¢ wens ¢ e rere x tees Bee 105
Multifunction steering wheel
M BUttONS's = « san + & saws + women a = ween a = 13, 29
Maintenance’. « ssciais 2 6 avcaie + 6 sess © 4 aneve © 293 OPenrabtings, « = sess «a wince. & meena « # emer WH 6 13
Maintenance intervals.................. 244 Programming buttons.................- 29
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)........ 231 Voice recognition system............... 27
Manual shifting’. « « sexs +e sees ye aes ee ee 97 Multi Media Interface................055 20
Map MenustandisymDolls « wicca x ewes so wae « © 21
Changing the scale wis. so caw se ewes ov ove 190 Operating...............02.00.000. 18, 21
Display. ...... eee eee eee 192 Switching the displays on or off.......... 20
Operating’: « ses = s goam & & wows & i eee oye 191 Muting (mute) ................0..00000. 29
Setting the destination................ 190 myAudi... 2... eee eee 30
MAP Automatic logitts: « « sews + ¢ sees ye eee ees 30
refer to Message Access Profile......... 171 myAudi navigation................. 185, 189
MapiprevieWesscrs s+ csmuens 2 0 eases a a somes v 6 oseee 189
306
N OPEN jies = 0 ences eecaes ws exes oo tesa ov eo
Automatic luggage compartment lid......
32
40
Narrow areaS.............0..0 0.00000. 142
Convenience Opening . . vias. ewes ss eens 44
Natural leather care and cleaning......... 269 Fuel fillersdoor icc os ssn v wecusns ss ayassos a wo 228
NaWViQation sss «2 meni s 2 aetna © & sammie # sane 185 HOOd ... 1... eee eee 232
Better route... 2.0.2... cee eee eee 197 Luggage compartment lid............... 39
Callinig:s: ss saws + + gece ss gee tops soe 189 Luggage compartment lid with foot motion . 41
Changing the scale.............0.0005 189 Panoramic glass roof.................0. 4S
also refertoMap..........0.-cee
eevee 191 Sunstiade ((OOf)'s s = cows = ¢ eeres ee ewe x eee 45
Navigation database WINGOWSE. » sore x 2 serous 2 soni wx eames on ote 43
Version information................-- 225 Opening and closing
Navigation (instrument cluster) .......... 192 refer to Unlocking and locking........ 32,37
NHTSA... 02... eee eee eee 295 Operating
Night vision assist... 0.0.2. ...00.000
eee 127 Head-up display...............000e
eee 26
Cleaning the camera..............00.. 267 THStFUMENE CLUSTER saves ¢ 2 coe 2s meme 2 oe 13
Notification center...............2.-000- 22 Multifunction steering wheel............ 13
Multi Media Interface............... 18,21
O TEXt inputs: ss sees s ¢ ees se eee se eee eee

Touch display iii «2 wins s owen e 5 cen es eee
24
18
Octane rating (gasoline)................ 227 Voice recognition system............... 27
Odometer... .. 06... cece cee eee ee 15 Optional equipment number............. 298
RES@ttiNGicx « s wawe © 2 wee cy eee & 2 ees 15
Options
Office address Media... .. ccc cece
eee eee eee ee 217
refer to Business address.............. 194 NaVigattofie: s = sms : » seen se meee Feee E 198
Offroad RadiOiscsns so ounces ov sun «2 ose a 2 see oo 206
refer to Offroad driving................ 106 Overview (Cockpit) « «secs 6 sais ve cases os we 6
Offroad drivingss = esc 2 2 weve so ems oo were 106
OFF (climate control system) .............. 89 P
Oil
PaintGod@':.: : sce: 2 : sceee & 2 seems = ¢ mere & es 298
refer to Engine oil. . cic. se eee ee wees es 234
Paint damage we: : seve: ss ewes is pera te oes 268
On-board computer............0.
eee eee 16
Panic BUTEOR sass x 3 savas ¢ 3 Seam 7 SEE 2 6 Be 36
On Board Diagnostic System (OBD)... 231, 289
PANIC button. .............
000 eee eee eee 36
Online destination
refer to Online Points of Interest........ 188 Panic function... 2.6... ce eee eee eee 36
Online map Panoramic glass roof..........-......05- 45
refer to Satellite map...............-. 195 Convenience opening and closing......... 44
Eniiergenicy Closing’. « « sere « x saree x 2 aaa a i 4S
Online media.........
cece 211
Quick opening and closing.............. 45
Online Points of Interest................ 188
Parental control
Online radio = ssw = sms a 2 meee eo eee 3 a eve 205
DVD... 0. eee ee 218
also refer to Online radio.............. 205
Parking aid... 0.2... eee eee eee eee 156
Online roadside assistance.............. 184
Cleaning the sensors and camera........ 267
Online services
Peripheral cameras............--200-5 158
refer toconnect..........
eee eee eee 177
Rearview camera..............00-0005 158
Online system update.................. 224
Parking and maneuvering.............-- 156
4K0012721BD
Online traffic information............... 198

Parking brake
refer to Electromechanical parking brake. 104
307
Index
Parking lightsis: = 2 sccwe = x cscuee ov ewerae oo orescence 49 Pressure

Parking lock emergency release........... 98 Tire pressure monitoring system........ 264
Parking system Tit@Sies ¢ x sae Haves ¢ i deme Fe Rem aE eee 255
Adjusting the volume...............-. 157 Progressive steering... 62.05. ceeds eieees 110
Automatic activation Protecting... 0... ccc e cece ee eee eee eee 268
Deactivating rear cross-traffic assist... .. 163 Pyrotechnic elements................4. 293
Parking systems
Parkingisystem plusts so seis © v sewn w @ sense
Partition Net ses 2s ismie seman os eee ee eee
156
84
Q
quattro... 2... eee eee eee iy
Pass-through sess s = eeey se eee ss eee Eb Bee 84
Selective wheel torque control.......... 113
Password
myAudi automatic login................ 30
PAthiSes & wae & 2 wea 3 2 news s wey ¢ HERE Ge 19 R
Pause (media files) .............00000005 213 Radio... cee eee eee eee 201
PédalSiss « see « : seme © ¥ Geme ¢ ¢ Rewe 2 eee 97 Radio texte « < says a 2 geen 2 2 cee & 2 ee 204
Pedestrian detection.................4. 127
SEALIOMIISE cowie x + cxctene © 2 sunsnwe wom aaennie w os 201
Radio communications equipment........ 295
Perchlorate .........
2.0.0 eee eee eee eee 293
Peripheral cameras.............--000-5 158 Radio equipment ................+-00ee 295
Personal route assistance............... 193

Radio Standards Specification (RSS) ....... 296
Phone
Raileartier': + wows « 2 some x ¢ yea xo eee 8 a 109
Answering/ending acall............... 170 Rain/light sensor
Connecting a second mobile device...... 165 Headlights: aces © swine es wuss oo eens 2 2 eee 49
Disconnecting a mobile device.......... 166 Intermittent mode (windshield wipers).... 55
SettingS .. 0.6... cece eee eee 174 RANGES. a ctimene ao ominaae so omeneite Heian oH ounRON 4 16
Phonebook Reading lightstex: cs ssc: «x wnscame © w cxntene wo cman 52
refer to CONtACtS) «3s «cca gv Hoek ss Hees 169 Rear cross-traffic assist............0008. 162
Playback (media) ............. 00000000 213 Rear lid
Podcast refer to Luggage compartment lid........ 39
refer to Online radio.................. 205 Rear shelf
5) 188 refer to Storage area behind the rear head
Point of interest FESthAINIES same 2 y was ¢ 2 eee x Eee go eee 81
refer to Online Points of Interest........ 188 Rearview camera..........--.0
eee seen 158
PoliShitiGuscs ¢ = seme : evens : sees st newe soe 268 Rear window defogger............-..00-- 90
Pollen filter Rear wiper blades
refer to Pollutant filter..............0.. 91 CHANGING ss « 2 eaaws g x memes 5 ¥ cere s Ee EE 5/
Pollutant Titer’: = caws = = mews = eoven gs pee ss 91 Cleaning isa = 2 wccon =o ween seen aw ro eB HH 57
Power closing (doors).......-..
eee eee e eee 32 REAR (climate control system)............ 89
Power SourceS... 2.2.0.0
0 2c eee eee 80, 212 Reception range’: « « scovs ss ews 9 e rere bg oe 201
Power windows...........--.0
00sec eee ee 43 Recirculation Mode : sins si sees is awa ve 90
MalfUnCtOfin: + asm se mein 3 x aoe a 2 43,44 Recuperation.......... 000 cece eee eee 16
Power windows malfunction.............. 43 Refueling...........
0.0 c cece eee eee ee 228
Predictive control..........
eee eee eee eee 133 Remote control
Predictive messages................ 97,132 Garage door opener............--eeeeee 46
pre sense Remote control key... . 0.0...
cece cece 36
refer to Audi presense.............008 146 Convenience opening and closing......... 44
Key replacement...............000000- 36
Presentation mode.............005-008 200
308
LED cscs oa comune we mae 6 w eemae W sean we x 38 Front passenger’s seat adjustment....... 63
Replacing the battery...............0-. 38 Head restraints. ........ 0.0.0 c cece eee 64
Unlocking and locking...............005 37 Massage function............ eee eens 61
also refer to Vehicle key................ 36 Memory function « «cee < ccc ee owren os ooeve 68
Removing the caps (wheel bolts)......... 275 Resetting the position.................. 62
REPSINS mews = 4 wees = awe 5 2 dee © & eee Soo 293 Storing aseat profile................... 68
Repeat's « sven ¢ 5 eam gs eee oe eee s Hee 215 Seat ventilation 90
Replacement key............
eee e ee eee 36 Selecting a source (media).............. 213
Replacement parts...............000005 295 Selector lever... . 0... ccc eee eee ee eee eee 95
Replacing fuses.............0..0e
eee 284 Self-learning navigation
Reporting Safety Defects................ 295 refer to Personal route assistance....... 193
Rewinding (media files)................. 213 Sensors
COVEraGe ALES cecsecs 5 ¢ says 5 = Haws & & eae 5 119
RimS es seas © 2 seneus ¥ seasons ¥ amsesne go eee oo 260
LOGAGIONS bess. = sseses a ween wo seeenes © w oxeeEES « 120
Cleaning. .... 2... cece eee eee eee 268
Service interval display...............0. 244
Road CARIOn wnnzese + a xesne « o ssnone © svettonnie « ste 109
Setting measurement units.............. 223
Roof
refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 45 S@ttiniGS:: « : seas 2 = eueee 7 ¢ eee ¢ e oem te oe 223
Announcements and tones............. 223
Roof load. ...... 2.2.0...
e eee eee eee eee 299
Bluetooth .... 2... cece eee eee 224
ROO FRAG cise «: sneuens oo mises ow cance © atten 8 oe 86
Date and times. ; » sees ss eee ev owes ees 223
also refer to Roof rack..........-...0-4. 86
LANGUAGE sevens 6s ssswn 6 @ senses aw sxaNee @ & sta 223
Route guidance
Measurement units...............2... 223
StOPPING swe = seis ¢ = reese & ¥ Hers a See 190
Média’: « s aeus 5 2 eee sv eee oe eee sp ee 218
also refer to Navigation............... 185
Navigationtves + & sisse + 2 mean s nase 3 wane 198
Running direction (tires)..............-. 277 Radio... 2... ee eee eee 207
SOUNG sss < = seavay 3 Saiwe 7 5 HORE TS BEE EF: 223
S GYSTCINS: = s sxc wan @ 2 aime 8 o mee oo ee 223
Safety beltSias x » cavers ae save 2 2 mewn 4» Rouen 2 ¢ 65 TIME ZONE... eee eee 223
Cleaning.......... 0. eee eee eee 269 Wi-Fi hotspot..............02--00
eee 181
Locking... 2.66... cece eee eee eee eee 77 Setting the language................... 223
Securing child safety seats.............. 76 Setting thetime........
2.0... ee eee eee 223
Satellite map wave « ¢ wees 2 ¢ eee 7 o ewe oe 195 Shade
Saving fuel Rear window/rear doors...........-.... 55
Energy'CONnsSUMersevice ss sone + waar @ 2 wees & 17 Shift paddles............
2... cee eee eee 97
Recuperation..... 02... eee ee eee eee 16 Ship carrier... 2.0... ee eee eeeeee 109
Screen Shortcut
refer to Touch display...............--. 18 refer to Shortcuts........-..
eee eee eee 23
Screwdriver ..........
0.0 cece eee eee 272 Shortcuts. ... 02... eee eee eee eee 23
SDicard reader'(MMI), cess.»
ecarene ao ravage a 0 wie 209 Shuffle... 0.0... eee eee eee 215
Searchiarea (POD isis ss isvcweue wi anwesue so 0 saesiwe « 188 also refer to Shuffle............00
eee 215
Search function Side assist... 2.0.2...
eee eee eee 150
refer to Free text search............... 217 Cleaning the sensors...............--. 267
Seat heating. ...... 0... cece eee eee 90 SIM/Card exes ¢ ¢ seem ¢ § eres & ¥ pews se ce 178
Seats SiriusXM alert notifications.............. 204
4K0012721BD
Adjusting the front seats................ 61 Sliding/tilting sunroof

GlOANING « & ecews « © sets & e eeees ce ewe Ge re 269 refer to Panoramic glass roof............ 4S
Folding: « « aesise < v ccm ie wo axeweve x ¥ oecnave wo omer 83 SiMart favorites: = ccc. zs sen 5 se een os sees 204
Index
Smartphone Sunshade
Wireless charging.............0e0eeee 166 Rear window/rear doors...........-.05 55
also refer to Telephone..............0. 164 ROOF s = = ea s ¥ meme 2 wee = Hee SE eeN e s 45
SNOW ChainSk : 2 nen ss wage & 5 wee.e s aakeR G8 261 also refer to Panoramic glass roof........ 45
Socket... 2... 6c cece cece eee eee eee eee 80 SUN'VISOMS © wins oe wosmn 2s awe ot eee oo eee 55
Software SUSPENSION « wercx = x vesws & 2 ee § o ete oo oe 109
Update. 2 20 ¢ = scm ¢ y nose e x cee 2 Pees 224 Audi drivesselects, 6 ecccaise os ccesia 6 6 ese © oe 108
Software information Swap allie sooner ov senso w o sevens oo snes wo one 171
Legalinformation’s « ss ows
so cameo 225 SWENNE'ASSISE:: cscoes + waren ov een ee mee 2 148
Software version (MMI) Symbols
Version information..............0005 225 Navigationsics « cerca + save we snare we arnnere 191
Sound Traffic... 2... eee 197
refer to Adjusting the sound............ 223 also refer to Indicator lights..............- Z
Space-saving spare tire (compact spare tire) . 278 SYNC (climate control system)............ 89
SPANevEine la ws: ccswiws a w suswowe a wanes 6 v suawean ww ae 278 System settings ........ 0.00 cece eee eee 223
Speed limit information
T
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 123
Speed limits
Tachometer.............0
cc eee eeaee 12,15
refer to Traffic sign recognition......... 123
Tail lights
Speedometer..........
cece eee eee 12
Cle @NIG tax s 2 wees ¢ 3 meee 2 Roem et eee ee
Speed warning system..........-..20005 123
Technical data. .
Sport differential...................0.. 112
Technical modifications................. 293
Start/Stop!sySteM ier «ese ev ean ee ever a 101
Telephone..........
0... eee ee eee eee 164
MessageS ... 0... eee eee eee 102
Audi phone box..3 52 .s.%. esses se reus ss 166
Switching offandon...............0-- 101
Connecting acell phone............... 164
Startitig to drives < s exes + < sews 2 v eee 2 x aa 94 Dialinganumber.............. 000000 170
Starting (engine)..................50-5 101 Options during aphonecall............ 171
Steering... eee eee eee eee 110 Playing Musi¢ « scm «ose v2 ewes oe pee v 210
Audi GriVESELECE’s see 2 s came ye een ss 108 Temperature display (outside temperature) .. 15
als@refertoa Steering: « «cis
+ 6 ween oy ox 110 Temperature gauge
Steering locke. esse ¢ s aeea se wows a es 93,110 COOLANE » ssscens « & snamess + a iar +o ames ¥ wae & 12
Steering wheel Textinput » ssw 5 semen 5 «eee 2 2 pew 2 oe eees 24
AGUSTINGeis: & & esenme oo scares 2 wiemeem « sree a 63 Text messages
Shift paddles...........0...000 22.0 97 SOECIGS swseeun ws x asin aw owenaus 6 v renin 6 ¥ osrosies L/1
Steering wheel heating................. 91. Text messaging settings............... 17d
also refer to Multifunction steering wheel. . 13 also refer to Text messages............ LA,
Steps for determining correct load limit... 259 Tie2dOWINS's « « seas ¢ s omen 3 awe 5 i HaeR & 2 Bee 85
Stopover (navigation) .................. 190 Tightening specification
Stopping (ENGINE) rw. « ¢ caw 4 s aren ao gees & 101 Wheel boltstays + san v s nome s ¢ goes 8 2 new 277
Stolag@iss ¢ « haus & o HOGA FF RGB.E ¢ LER Ee BH 81 Tightening specification (wheel bolts) ..... 277
Storage area behind the rear head restraints. 81 Titi@’s ¢ : sews 2 < sean sb OES 2 OS 2 Bee a Be 16
Storage compartment...............00-5 81 tiptronic
SUOPAGEMEE. « « awexece sx sounene + vi eneuene «91 anetonn aw 81 refer to Manual shifting................ 97
Streaming Tire Mobility System (tire repair set)....... 272
refer to Online media................. 211
Subtitles (DVD) ..........
0. cece cece eens 217
310
TAROS csscors 3 ceesens «wma ¥ aoe ¥ ROME wo eee 245 With the central locking switch.......... 34
Loose wheel warning...............008 260 With the convenience key............... 37
Low-profile tires ..... 06.0.0
cece ee eee 262 Update (software) ..............22-000. 224
REpaitiSetbi. s wean vs eseweue © mamas sv memes ay oe 272 Updating stations (radio)................ 201
Replacing. ......... 00. c eee eee eee 274 USB
Service lif@iin « s wemy ¢ » sees 2 eae & Meee & 254 Adapter... 0.2... 0 cece cee 166
THEPreSSUFGtins 6 a ese ¥ 6 sees 6 wea © wee 255
USB charging port.........
0. eee 80
Tire pressure monitoring system .... 263, 264
USB stick
Tite pressure table: ¢.cs% : veces reams ee 257
refer to Audi music interface........... 212
Tire pressure (trailer mode)............ 115
Using residual heat... ..... 2... e cece eee 90
Treadwear indicators...............00- 254
Unidirectional................004 247,277
Uniform tire quality grading............ 262 V
Tires and wheels Valet parking..........
0. cece eee eee 46
Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 248 Vanity iP ccs 2 samen © esaneas a 2 mere © 8 vennaes © 55
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 258 Vehicle
Tool... eee 272 Angle... .. cece cece cece eee 106
Tooltips. ...... 0... eee eee eee eee 20 Care/cleaning = wes: sv see = vee ¢ = wees es 266
Top tether anchor (securing the child safety DIMENSIONS ese 2 2 sae 2 omen 3s eee 2 8 298
Seat)... eee 78 Identification data................00. 298
Touch display QUEGRSENVICE was 2 x ueme x x cee 5 ewe 8 2 271
Adjusting feedback...............00005 20 Raising). « essen 5 % ese ¥ 2 emuas 6 6 amenens a & sure 276
OPerating « & ssi so seve 3 0 meee + BOI nv RE 18 Starting. ..... 0.2... eee 93
TOWING’: » ¢ ews sy eewe © 6 pew gs eee 5 eae 281 TANSPONE sass = 5 woee 5 Bae8 Bs HU Ek 109
TOWING LOOP wsses + ¢ exes 2 o eeaw ce ews 282, 283 Vehicle care... 2. eee eee eee eee 266
Towing protection monitoring............. 35 Vehicle control services.............0-5- 179

TPMS Vehicle data label..... 0... 2. eee eee eee 298
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 264 Vehicle identification number............ 298
Traffic (Nforination = cess = x aes « sees 4 2 nox 197 Vehicle jack. « vccscie a x anecnce a o areata xu axon @ as 272
Traffic light information................ 125 Lifting points... ......... 2... eee eee 276
Traffic sign recognition................. 123 Tire change mode...........-..-+-05- 274
Traffic SIGNS... ee eee ee 126 Vehicle key... 2.0.0...
cece eee eee 32, 36
Trailer mode Vehicle start system ........0...000

000s 102
Airsuspension...............2..0-00- 115 Vehicle tool kit..........
00... eee eee eee 272
Trailer mode (navigation) .............. 199 Ventilation. . . crc a 0 senoe eu neon» 6 sonmpes a8 88
Trall@C HOWiNG iss + © seme = & wees 2 o eee 2 nae 115 VIEW DUE OM ies « « sxccns © 2 omens « 6 ise = em 13
Tongue Weights. « sissies o ese ao aenvne © # arene L115 Voicemail. «5 css 2 2 wae so mern «2 ewe a 2 170
Trailer load... 2... eee eee eee eee ee 115 Voice recognition system..........-....-5 27
Turn assist... 2.0...
e eee eee eee 148 Extterimall sisson so ssnmce « oxenens oo seein oo someone 28
Turn signals ........
0.0.00 eee eee eee 50 Operating................0.00.00.0000. 27
U Ww
Uniform tire quality grading............. 262 Warning lights
Unlocking and locking. ...............005 32 refer to Indicator lights.................. 7
4K0012721BD
By remote control..............-..00-- 37 Washing matte finish paint.............. 266

Using the lock cylinder..............-.. 35 Weights ............
0c eee eee eee eee 299
Index
Whee bolt « ssccus +s ssneine va svanie eo naan 9 0 0 260

anti-theft... 0... 2... e eee eee eee 275
Tightening specification............... 277
Wheels « sais 9 & naras ¢ o sane 2s eR EY Ree a 245
Gleaning's « « sea 2 s sews © o meme ¥ coms ew me 268
Glossary of tire and loading terminology.. 248
Loose wheel warning.............-.... 260
REplACING 2 nsw s wien o 5 seas ae oeR se HOR 274
Tire pressure monitoring system........ 264
Tires and vehicle load limits............ 258
Wheelwrench....................0005 272
Wi-Fi
HOtSPOt Settings cx < 5 sce ¢ s cous es cease 181
Onlitie Media « & cose es omnis so secoane oo coca 2A,
Using ahotspot.............002
eee 178
Wild animal recognition................ 127
Windows
Child safety lock........... 0.00. ee eee 43
Cleaning and removing ice............. 268
Convenience opening and closing......... 44
Defrosting.......... 0... c eee eee eee ee 90
Opening and closing.............0ee00e 43
Power WindowSivs = 2 sve vs ase © s omwew oe 43
Windshield
Clea. «nce 0 come 9 u eneonn w enema 8 55
also refer to Windshield................ 55
Windshield washer system........... 55, 243
Reservoir Capacity: « « sea: 5 = wees 5 x ween: 299
Windshield wipers.............---00000- 55
Winter operation
Gar washes « suas + 2 xan + & mews ¢ aes < Be 266
CoOlingisysteM 3 «ccs ao esses oo ssnwan «© aoe 238
Defrosting the windows.............+-. 90
Rear window defogger..............0005 90
Removing ice from windows............ 268
Seat heating......... 0.0 eee eee eee eee 90
SHOW CHAINS ose « : gous & 5 ame yt wee 2 oe 261
Steering wheel heating..............005 91
TirOS 2 eee 261
Vehicle battery (12 Volt)............... 241
Windshield washer system............. 243
Winter tires secs « ¢ aawa ¢ ¢ aes 3 3 ean ¢ 2 261
Wireless CarPlay
refer to Audi smartphone interface...... 221
Wireless charging
Audi phone box..............0.00
200 166
312
It has always been Audi's policy to continuously These instructions may not be reproduced or
improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right translated in whole or in part without written
to make changes in design and specifications, consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI
and to make additions or improvements in its AG.
products without incurring any obligation to in-
stall them on products previously manufactured. (@) For the sake of the environment
This owner's manual is based on the current data Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
available when it was printed. Text, illustrations, out chlorine, recyclable).
and specifications in this owner's manual are
based on the most current information available
at the time of printing, and shall not constitute a
basis for liability claims.
Owner's Manual
Englisch Nordamerika 11.2019
4K0012721BD
4K0012721BD www.audi.com

2020 Audi A6 24

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2020 Audi A6 24

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Owner's Manual

Audi Vorsprung durch Technik

Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us.

About this Owner's Manual...... Valetiparking «= s ss-ec «x ences ov cusee a 2 oe 46

Troubleshooting............-..000005 176 Troubleshooting............0-seee eee 220

Audi smartphone interface...... Z21, Customer information........... 289

Care and cleaning................ 266

Do It Yourself .................... 272

Fuses and bulbs.................. 284

This Owner's Manual applies to all versions of

KEEP THIS GUIDE @) Tips

This owner's manual describes the equipment

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

The illustrations in this manual are a guide.

All directions, such as “Left”, “right”, “front” and

* — Optional equipment or vehicle-specific equip-

=> A\ Cross reference to a “WARNING” within a

Door handle @ Lockable glove compartment with:

Central locking switch ........... 34 —CD/DVD drive ................ 209

— Horn he —Emergency flashers ...........

Head-up display ............... for:

Windshield washer system lever .. — Parking aid, s : sean sy aca 3 2 coe

@) Tips => page 101,

Indicator lights overview Electromechanical parking brake

while driving. Steering

Steering lock Transmission

Engine oil level (MIN) Adaptive cruise assist

Windshield wipers Emergency call function

Rear cross-traffic assist

Efficiency assist Air suspension

Adaptive cruise assist Speed warning system

Adaptive cruise assist Camera-based traffic sign recog-

High beam assistant Intersection assistant

Rear safety belt Side assist

Rear safety belt Distance warning

Transmission Rear cross-traffic assist

Convenience key Adaptive cruise assist

Lane departure warning

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)

If there is a severe malfunction in the instru-

Requirement: the driver's door must have been

— Applies to: vehicles with analog instrument

ply customized vehicle settings, such as the seat

Returning to functions at higher levels Adjusting the layout

instrument cluster display turns on, the coolant

Resetting the trip odometer

If the engine speed limitation was activated by Z\ WARNING

and that ice can increase the risk of accidents.

Engine oil temperature — Lap statistics > page 127

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the engine Resetting values to zero

> Press the £] button on the multifunction steer- Average consumption

Touch displa Accessing options

The touch display is controlled through the

All touch displays in the vehicle can be operated

Pinching fingers together and pulling apar

Fig. 8 Touch display: pressing

Selecting a function or button

Pressing and holding

Fig. 11 Touch display: pinching fingers together and pull-

Zooming in and out on an item

Fig. 9 Touch display: pressing and holding

tating Dragging away from/toward the edge of

Fig. 12 Touch display: rotating